Home

2711-6.0, PanelBuilder Software User Manual

1. Ga Controller Lal Le G Gd all JG aoa Pee 6 On r ro Cou Cre Coa Con Cee Ce OO 8B BB Controller 3 Counter gt 20 CD gt 20 Value Ey Scaled Data Displays Scaled data and bar graph displays take raw numeric values and mathematically manipulate them so that values are shown in standard units such as gallons feet per second and pounds per square inch Values from the logic controller are scaled using the formula y mx b y scaled displayed value m scale multiplier x controller value b offset The scale and offset values are entered in the Tag Editor The following example shows the use of a scaled data display in 4 Allen Bradley PanelView 900 Sen L 4 GPs EA mzer 13 GFS rune Pacers 12 Ges commo C Mirer 11 GPS 10 GPS 13 ES Scaling Ca x 0 0059 10 a Valve 1 GJ a lg Be GG G O O t fim 8 385 Flow Rate S Flow Rate Transducer S gt Transducer gt 510 gt 510 oom Value 8 Controller Publication 2711 6 0 Error States Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 3 Multistate Indicators Multistate indicators have an error state to notify an o
2. 7 a Allen Bradley PanelView 900 ee TANK 1 LEVEL 20 Gallons TANK 1 LEVEL 20 Gallons LJ Ls Le TANK 1 Pe IN C _5 L 50 F Si mme INFLOW OUTFLOW 9 L JLo E OPEN ICLOSED Ri fas e 1 OUT eE paa A m Cee Les Lea Les Les Lez Lrs K F ro Leo Cen Lee Les Lea Les Les Le i Message displays can contain time and date information based on the terminal s real time clock For details on how to insert a time date variable in a message display see Chapter 17 i QD FlenBrad PanelView 900 Automatic Shutdown at 12 30 AM ime Automatic Shutdown at 12 30 PM Ls Le Lee OOG 50 _ La Ls INFLOW OUTFLOW p L JLo CJ OPEN CLOSED pram OUT a C Ce Ce Lea Le Ce Le Ce mE o ro Fo Cen Lez Lee Lee Les ee at LJ Publication 2711 6 0 13 4 Creating Message Displays Triggering Messages The 3 types of data that can trigger a message to display are e Single Bit e Least Significant Bit e Value Single Bit Single Bit is valid only for 2 state message displays The display is controlled by the status of a single bit Turning the tag address bit on or off toggles the display between message 0 and message 1
3. PLC lt PanelView Terminal Block Transfer Read Publication 2711 6 0 4 12 Communications Overview Publication 2711 6 0 Setting Up a Block Transfer Configure Panel View block transfers using the Block Transfer dialog which is accessed from the Communication Setup dialog For each block transfer 1 10 specify the parameters below Parameters Description Enabled Enables or disables the block transfer Address Specifies starting address for the block transfer read or write Mode Specifies R fora Read operator or W for a Write operation Specifies the number of words 1 to 64 to transfer The length 63 is reserved for Pass Through Length Each block transfer read must be a unique length and each block transfer write must be a unique length However a read and write block transfer can be the same length The PanelView uses the length to identify data blocks Pass Through Enables or disables Pass Through for application transfers between a computer on the DH network and a PanelView terminal on the Remote 1 0 network Pass Through is a dedicated block transfer fixed at 63 words in length Block Transfer Timeout Specifies a timeout value for block transfers A value of 0 disables the timeout Each block transfer requires a corresponding Block Transfer Write BTW or Block Transfer Read BTR instruction in the ladder program for the controller The Address an
4. DH 485 Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_BaudRate Unsigned Integer 1to4 1 1200 2 2400 3 9600 4 19200 Read_MaxNodeAddress Unsigned Integer 1to 31 Read_MemCardStatus Unsigned Integer 0 to 3 0 Valid memory card format 1 Incorrect memory card format 2 No memory card installed 3 No applications on memory card Read_NodeAddress Unsigned Integer 0 to 31 Read_SerCommS tatus Unsigned Integer 0 to5 0 Communication link is ok 1 PanelView terminal is off the link 2 Scanned node not found 4 1 0 error Invalid 1 0 form controller 5 Duplicate node address Remote I O Tags Remote I O Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description SRIO_RackNumber Unsigned Integer 0 to 62 SRIO_RackSize Unsigned Integer 0 to 3 0 1 4 1 12 2 3 4 3 Full SRIO_DataRate Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 57 6K 1 115 2K 2 230 4K SRIO_Module Unsigned Integer 0 to 3 0 Module Group 0 1 1 Module Group 2 3 2 Module Group 4 5 3 Module Group 6 7 SRIO_LastRack Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 False 1 True SRIO_BlockTransferReadEnable Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Disable 1 Enable SRIO_BlockTransferWriteEnable Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Disable 1 Enable SRIO_BlockTransferTimeout Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 0 No Timeout 1 to 65535 in milliseconds SRIO_PassThruEnabled Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Disable 1 Enable Read_SerCommS tatus Unsigned Integer 1 to 128 1 Communications active 2 Timeout in block transfer write from PL
5. System monitoring screen displayed Publication 2711 6 0 20 26 Terminal and Communication Setup Defining Status Tags The controller uses status tags to read the status of the current screen number and date time The time and date are updated every minute To edit or create terminal status tags 1 Select the Status Tags tab in the Terminal Setup dialog Sete Povey Saeed Tine ude Conde Tage Sopen amie Tag sl ad Shades Tiga Edi Ten 2 Enter or select tag names for each status option The table below defines each option To clear a tag name field highlight the text and press DELETE 3 Click the Edit Tag button to edit the definition of a tag name or edit the definition later using the Tag Editor 4 If desired change Time Date Output Interval Min Values range from 1 to 60 minutes The default is 1 minute Setting the interval to 60 minutes reduces traffic on the network but also reduces the accuracy of the displayed time If you detect a problem with screen changes on a busy network increase the output interval 5 Click OK to save the settings and exit the dialog Terminal Status Tags Screen Number Description Name of the tag address to which the PanelView writes the current screen number Valid Data Types Unsigned Integer Date Names of tag addresses where the PanelView writes the current year month and day The value at the
6. Enter the name of this element POP UP Tag 15 of 15 RN 3Y 4 K Ss S 6 5 Ao RS o o amp Sg O amp amp Se g NY N s vse SS wo E Aor ra 0 EE Publication 2711 6 0 View Tool bar v Status bar Form 1 BCDj integer Certain fields appear or disappear based on the data type of the tag you are creating in the form view For example if the data type is Bit the Scaling and Data Entry Limits fields are not displayed If you enter data in the form view it does not appear in the table view until you choose Refresh from the Window menu Project Print Page Setup Exit Working with Tags 19 3 To open the form view e From the table view choose Form from the View menu e From a PanelBuilder dialog enter or select a tag name and select the Edit Tag button Form View Data Tepe mo g i P E Tag laia Yale i P P a Tag Addrena Ulplahs Frape Aap iga Scaling Dala Entry Limits Eram Uijicet Hin Mag Navigating through the Tag Editor To move between fields in form view or table view e Move the mouse pointer to the field and click the left button e Or press TAB to move forward through fields and SHIFT TAB to move backward To change from table view to form view e Click the Form tool on the tool bar e Or choose Form from the View menu e Or choose Form Editor from the Tools menu To change from form view to table view e Cli
7. 0eeeeee Creating an ASCII Entry Objet cen sceaaedesclewdwaed ons Setting Properties of an ASCII Entry Object Chapter 11 Chapter OU CWVES cocci dcpaservinseevetubtovedubewees Pel shu i405 ad eima a wane a ee eee Baha Goto Screen BURON i seia aiaiai aiiin a ag aii tm are the ware Goto Config Screen Button aoaaa Return Screen BURON 2 2 a 6 ca e da oon eale do wobie a dle Suda a deca e dave Screen ListSelectOr cece cece eee eee eens Creating Screen Buttons 01 cece e cece eee e eee Setting Properties of Screen Buttons cece cece eee Creating a Screen ListSelector 1 cece eee eee tees Setting Properties of a Screen List Selector ecu eee Configuring Entries ina Screen ListSelector cee Creating List Keys cnassscsatacsnesaciaaeesdeedense eens PLC SLC Controlled Screen Changes oaaae Chapter 12 Chapter Objectives naaa Helpful Hints noaa SCOUNG Data saa sade Gocein ha Sawa Go 9 8 deoen dad ware vaae Error States vite etnedte dea bean daa tdirt tinei akei Bar Gaps visdiccsicdceeadeaneed eee aa we bendeeaa ewan Types of Bar GraphS cece cece cece teens Creating a Bar Graph isccaseveaieavvs sd detaewedade bad Setting Properties of a Bar Graph cece eee eee Creatng a Bar Graph Scale ic tvusscdsetentous eadedes Creating Message Displays Using Global Objects Creating Alarms Table of Contents v Creating Tick Mark Labels aaa 12 8 Numeric
8. Publication 2711 6 0 Discrete I O Communications Overview 4 9 Discrete I O addresses communicate directly with the controller and provide faster updates than block transfers Discrete I O is recommended for e Push buttons for rapid response times e Any critical values that you want updated immediately A PLC rack has 128 discrete I O points 8 input words 8 output words If additional rack space is needed for an application use block transfers You must assign a read or display tag to an output address If you assign a read tag to an input address a validation error occurs The read and write tags must have different tag names and reference different addresses Discrete I O Addressing for 1771 SN Scanners The I O addressing syntax for the 1771 SN Scanner Series A is I YYW BB O YYW BB where YY Rack number Ww Word or group address BB Bitaddress 0 7 10 17 octal For example I 024 10 addresses input bit 10 Rack 2 Module 4 Discrete Addressing for 1747 SN Scanner Series A and B The addressing syntax for the 1747 SN Scanner Series A and B is I X WW BB O X WW BB where X Slotwhere 1747 SN is installed in rack WW Word address 0 31 decimal BB Bitaddress 0 15 decimal For example Tel 7 13 addresses input bit 13 of Word 7 Slot 1 where 1747 SN Scanner resides Publication 2711 6 0 4 10 Communications Overview
9. DF1 Device DF1 Parameter Options Default Node Address 0 254 decimal 64 Baud Rate Dk 9600 Odd 1 None 1 P arity Stop Bits Even 1 PanelView Terminal ee None 2 Errror Detection BCC orCRC CRC On CTS RTS Off Handshaking St TERS disabled Node Name User supplied None Network Node Node Address 0 254 decimal Node Type See above figure None Publication 2711 6 0 DH 485 DH DF1 Communication Considerations Communications Overview 4 5 The Panel View terminal writes information write tags to the processor only when a change of state occurs The terminal reads information read tags from the processor continually The read and write tags can use the same address Scan Group A scan group consists of 40 consecutive words within the same data file and processor The group starts at the lowest address in the data file The scan group must have the same update frequency For an application with tag addresses N7 0 N7 39 N7 40 N11 0 N12 5 and N12 40 the scan groups are e N7 0 N7 39 e N7 40 e N11 0 e N12 5 N12 40 Minimize the number scan groups per screen Maintain the same update frequency for each 40 word block Publication 2711 6 0 4 6 Remote I O Communications Overview Communications Eight Input Output Module Groups Publication 2711 6 0 On a Remote I O network the Panel View Remote I O terminals appear like a Remote I O rack The PanelView terminal can occupy all of or part of a sing
10. Handshake Tag PanelView Controller Name of address where the terminal toggles This field is used in conjunction with the Trig for Trigger a bit to indicate that it received new Alarm ger Tag Trigger data from the controller Remote Ack Tag Controller gt PanelView Name of address where the controller If the controller is acknowledging alarms it acknowledges one or all alarms for a trigger is the responsibility of the controller For Value Triggers the controller writes the program to reset clear the value at the alarm s trigger value to the Remote Ack Remote Ack address If the value is not address to acknowledge a single alarm reset cleared the operator will not be able The controller writes the Acknowledge All to acknowledge alarms locally at the value to the Remote Ack address to terminal acknowledge all alarms for a trigger The Remote Ack tag must be in the same For Bit LSBit triggers scan group as the alarm trigger Remote Ack tag uses the same bit pattern as the trigger tag To acknowledge all alarms for a trigger the controller writes a 1 to the bit position that is one greater than the last trigger bit used in the Value Bit field If the Ack tag is not used the controller can acknowledge more than one alarm ata time If the Ack tag is used the controller can only acknowledge one alarm and must reset the bit before acknowledging the next alarm Remote Ack PanelView Controller Name of address where
11. Test Pval Browse save the uploaded application or click Browse to search for a file Terminal Protocol Select the type of terminal from which you are uploading application Presets Original Current Settings Under Presets select For DH 485 or RS 232 DH485 protocol e Original to upload presets initial values terminals click Setup to verify node defined for inputs address of terminal e Current States to upload current input values in terminal PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of upload FILE TRANSFER STATUS 50x co ma Piire isa AE Pre ey a ey en ee RIEL FH Mh da LS ERT tee Coogi POT mie me epee eps eee SY He ee eh F He Tarain amas Percent Complete In Progress When the upload is complete the application opens in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 21 Uploading ona This section shows how to upload an application from a DH Local DH Link terminal on the DH link to your computer The computer and terminal are each a separate station on the DH link Before uploading application e check cable connections See Publication 2711 6 1 e configure the DH driver using RSLinx or INTERCHANGE Note The computer runs at 57 6K baud forcing the DH link and terminal to use the same rate Set the terminal s DH network to this baud rate before uploading an application Choose Upl
12. ccc cece cece eee 14 1 Whatis a Global Object ices cescedebeserededoede se eyes 14 1 Defining a GlobalObject cece cece eee ees 14 4 Using a Global Object 2ccsc2ssyaneessuvarsewneeaa ena 14 5 Moving and Resizing a Global Object 0000005 14 6 Chapter 15 Chapter OJECHVES arias dace taateae md mia imid akada aiaa 15 1 Overview of Alarms ccc ete eee teens 15 1 Creating the Alarm Banner cece ete eee es 15 6 Creating an Alarm List ccc cece eect eee eee eens 15 9 Configuring Global Parameters for Alarms cc eee ueees 15 12 Defining Alarm Triggers 0 cece ccc eee eens 15 14 Creating Alarms iciccee vind sawn dee auddand ee edateeaes 15 16 Defining Optional Trigger Tags 0 cece ce eee eee eens 15 22 Defining Remote Tags used by Controller 04 15 26 Alarm EXaMPIES ssi taninar dd on eta a a ES 15 28 Publication 2711 6 0 vi Table of Contents Adding Graphics Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter 16 Chapter Objectives cc cece eee eee 16 1 FSIS ginags cea hides eke ene ea ba Reaves wea 16 1 Graphic ODJECIS S fusien daie a beakers 16 2 Graphic TOOS s areant nona eee spuddedsge tbeGserksens 16 2 Drawinga Line iicsvevidapdivdedupduchs sew a u 16 3 Drawing Connected Lin S naaa aaa 16 4 Drawing SHAPES 2 ix on 2 Ge warwaesl dads aa a maaka na RA 16 5 Freeform Drawings oaa aaa 16 6 Adding ISA Symbols oaa 16 7 Adding Ba
13. i gt Use foreground colors when applying color to lines Publication 2711 6 0 16 4 Adding Graphics Drawing Connected Lines Use the Connected Line command or tool to draw open connected Objects lines or shapes such as triangles and other simple polygons Push Buttons r Screen Selectors g a To draw connected lines Numeric Eritry ASCII Entry L 1 Click the Connected Line tool in the toolbox Indicators Or choose Connected Line from the Objects Graphics submenu Numeric Data Display e 2 Position the pointer where you want to anchor one end of the Message Display first line and click the left mouse button Graphics gt TET List Keys Connected Line 3 Move the pointer where you want to end the line and start the Alarm List i next line and click the left mouse button Alarm Buttons Circle i ies ae Global Object Fada You can adjust the position of the line before clicking a 4 Repeat step 3 for each line you want to draw Graphic Image 5 After drawing the last line double click 6 Click the right mouse button to exit connected line mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 Drawing Shapes Objects Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display L
14. Lea s Genter Ripi Align Tes Underline AA Wrap Leteriied Wealable Or click the appropriate align tool on the Format bar The entire text string is realigned 5 To resize underline set colors or activate blinking for the text click the appropriate tools on the Format bar 6 To exit inner text mode choose the Inner Text command or tool For multistate and list objects you can change text alignment from the State tab of the object s dialog State Formatting Objects and Text 17 27 Underlining Text You can toggle underlining on or off for screen text or inner text of an object For multistate or list objects you can toggle underlining on or off for each state The underline option applies to an entire text string not individual letters or words in the string The entire test string is underlined To underline text 1 2 6 Select the object with text you want to underline Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu If the object is multistate select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu Click the Underline tool on the Format bar Or choose Underline from the Format menu The entire text string is underlined To resize align set colors or activate blinking for the text click the appropriate tools on the Format bar To exit inner text m
15. The PanelView notifies the controller by writing the alarm s trigger value 15 to the Ack address PumpAck defined for the trigger ALLEN BRADLEY Pamalifiaw 900 Alarm Msg B is placed in the Alarm List Msg B Alarm List Ack Pump Msg B eae li Alarm Banner displays alarm text i Panaw 900 ALLEN BRADLEY Msg B Ack Publication 2711 6 0 15 30 Creating Alarms Controller Acknowledges a Single Alarm for a Specific Trigger The controller acknowledges a single alarm activated twice by the same trigger The controller writes the alarm s trigger value to the Remote Ack address defined for the trigger The terminal notifies the controller that it acknowledged the alarm by writing the alarm s trigger value to the Ack address Optional Fields are enabled and defined for the alarm triggers Alarm Configuration 4 alarms are assigned to the Extruderl trigger each with a different trigger value 6 alarms are assigned to the Extruder2 trigger each with a different trigger value All alarms messages are configured to display and must be acknowledged A Remote Ack tag and Ack tag are defined for each trigger Saup Alme Teen dares T iar Tag Trigger Typa Yack Tag Remote Ack Taa meji gt x fe Eevcudect Valwe Inikok EniPmeorehok mip lati oR Eeteudert Value fx
16. Click OK to start Memonicalg download Setup Select RS Linx or ee INTERCHANGE Driver s RSLinx z DH is active driver f Active drivers DH Eile Name TEST Pval Browse Enter name of PVA file in which to Pes save the translated P BA file or click Browse to search for a file Click Setup to verify node address of the PanelView The address must match the address in the Communication Setup dialog Application is validated and translated to a PVA file If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens You must correct errors before download can proceed Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of download Drivers are mapped to ports in the RS Linx S oftware a r a FILE TRANSFER STATUS Te ass Ge 50 Percent Complete a In Progress EJ m LIN brin eel OT Terminal resets verifies and starts application Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 13 Downloading toa This section shows how to download an application from a computer Terminal using Pass Through on the DH link to a terminal on a Remote I O or DH 485 link Before downloading an application e check cable connections e enable Pass Through in the Block Transfer dialog page 20 11 e configure the DH driver using RSLinx or INTERCHANGE ATTENTION If downloading with the processor in r
17. Failure reading file during decompress Failure writing file during decompress Failure opening file during decompress Failure closing file during decompress Errors occur during an upload Cause could be internal errors or bad floppy disk Exit the application and restart Check for bad floppy disk If the error reoccurs contact A B technical support File close failed Upload operation couldn t close file Cause Exit application and restart windows If the file name could be a full disk or write protection error reoccurs contact A B technical support File decompress fail Compressed application file is corrupt Try again If the error reoccurs contact file name A B technical support File Error Cannot find ISPCORE DLL PanelBuilder would not start because the default path C AB BIN is missing from AUTOEXEC BAT file Make sure your AUTOEXEC BAT file contains the default path C AB BIN File rename error file name A file exists with the same file name Check for duplicate file names and try again Filename Specified for Download Cannot be same as Application Filename Downloaded application using the same file name and type as the opened file The file name or type must be different to prevent the download file from overwriting application file Specify a different file name or file type Normally the file type for a downloaded application is PVA ncompatible AB Utilitie
18. r Control Object Presets IV Write to Controller on Startup C Use Terminal Presets Use Last Terminal States IV Display last user screen on restart r Memory Card Always Load from Card Never Load from Card Load from Card if Invalid Application Detected IV Use downloaded configuration settings 2 From the Startup Screen list box select the first screen to display when the application starts in the terminal 3 Select the Write to Controller on Startup check box if you want to write preset values for objects to the controller on startup The default is to not write values to the controller Note Remote I O and DeviceNet terminals always write preset values to the controller on startup The Write to Controller on Startup check box is always selected for these terminals 4 If you select Write to Controller on Startup you can choose either Use Terminal Presets or Use Last Terminal States Select To Use Terminal P resets Write initial values set by application Use Last Terminal States Write values present prior to power up This is the default Publication 2711 6 0 20 18 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2711 6 0 Note Terminal presets for control objects are set in the object s dialog These values override initial values entered in the Tag Editor except for numeric entry objects Initial values for numeric entry objects are set in the Tag Editor Specify
19. Indicators Numeric Data Display Ear Graph Scale Message Display Graphics Move Down Home End Global Object Fage Up Page Down Backspace Enter Alarm List Alarm Buttons Publication 2711 6 0 OO oe Touch screen only terminals require List keys on the screen enabling the operator to move the cursor in a Control List and select a list item List keys are also supported on keypad terminals The available List Keys and functions are listed below Type Description oves the cursor to the previous item in the list MOVED Required Move Down oves the cursor to the next item in the list Required Home oves the cursor to the first item in the list Optional End oves the cursor to the last item in the list Optional Page Up oves the cursor up a page in a scrolling list Optional Page Down oves the cursor down a page in a scrolling list Optional Returns the cursor to the currently highlighted selection Backspace Optional Confirms a selection and sends the item value to the Enter controller Required if Write on Enter was configured as a control list attribute LEADER Eaa aea To create a list key 1 Click a List Key tool in the toolbox Or choose a List Key from the Objects gt List Keys submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button 3 Click the right mouse button to exit List Key mode Or click the sel
20. Select the Projects tab The Project tab shows the project that is currently used by the application and a list of existing projects If an application is not opened the Current Project field is blank Perform an operation as defined in the table on the next page Click Done Managing Projects 21 3 Project Operations To Do this Change the An application must be opened to view or change the current current project project associated with the application 1 From the Current Project box select the project you want to associate with the opened application 2 Click Done You are asked to confirm the change PanelBuilder validates the project for a valid terminal type and controller device Create a new project 1 Click the New button 2 In the dialog that opens enter a unique 1 to 32 character name for the new project The name cannot start with a number or contain spaces 3 Click the OK button The project appears in the Existing Projects list under the new name Rename a project 1 From the Existing Devices list select the project you want to rename 2 Click the Rename button 3 In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the project The name cannot start with a number or contain spaces 4 Click the OK button The project appears in the Existing Devices list under the new name not the old Copy a project 1 From the Existing Devices list select the project you w
21. Sesen tmt OOOO EsTa 2 Enter or select tag names for one or more control options The table below defines each option To clear a tag name field highlight the text and press DELETE 3 Click the Edit Tag button to edit the definition of a tag name or edit the definition later using the Tag Editor 4 Click OK to save the settings and exit the dialog Terminal Description Valid Control Tags P Data Types Screen Name of tag address where the controller writes a screen Unsigned Integer Number number to control a screen change For operator controlled screen changes the Screen Number tag address must contain a 0 Date Names of tag addresses where the controller writes the current Unsigned Integer year month and day for date displays The value at the Year tag address must be 2 digits 90 99 for 1990 1999 or 00 89 for 2000 2089 To maintain Y2 compliance the ladder logic must perform the following conversions before sending the value to the terminal If the year is lt 1999 subtract 1900 If the year is gt 1999 subtract 2000 Time Names of tag addresses where the controller writes the current Unsigned Integer hour minutes and seconds for time displays Publication 2711 6 0 Terminal and Communication Setup 20 25 Control Tags Example In the following example a screen control tag is used to display caution and operator information screens The controller writes a screen number to the Pane
22. Tag not of type Value or Bit An inappropriate tag was selected Select an appropriate tag Tag Object data type mismatch Data type of an object entered in the tag editor must be compatible with the data format of the value entered in the object s dialog Correct the discrepancy by opening the object s dialog or accessing the object s tag information Tag references device name This is not the Logic Controller selected in Terminal Setup Comms Setup The node name field in the Tag Editor references a controller that is invalid or does not match the controller name in Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog Change the node name to match the controller name in the Communication Setup dialog or select the correct controller name in the Communication Setup dialog Target terminal can only handle number list devices on one screen Screen contains more list objects than the terminal can handle Remove one or more of the list objects from the screen Terminal name has no RIO Block Transfer Channel Information in the Project Database Block transfers have not been defined for the Remote I O terminal From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button Then press the Block Transfer button to define block transfer assignments for the terminal Terminal name has no RIO Rack Module Group Information in the Project Database The terminal is not assigned t
23. Select a single byte size font Trigger and Remote Ack Tag have different tag types The data type for these tags are not identical Change the tag data types so they are the same Trigger cannot be same as the acknowledge or handshake tags The trigger tag is the same as the acknowledge or handshake tag for this trigger Specify a unique tag for trigger acknowledge and handshake tags Trigger Name not Unique Two triggers are using the same trigger tag name Change trigger tag names so they are not the same Trigger Tag duplication Two triggers are using the same trigger tag name Change trigger tag names so they are not the same Trigger Tag same as LC Clear All Tag The Trigger Tag is the same as the Clear All tag specified on the Alarm Setup screen Change tags so they are not identical Trigger s Ack Tag same as LC Ack All Tag The Trigger Alarm Ack Tag is the same as the Ack All tag specified on the Alarm Setup screen Change tags so they are not identical Trigger s Remote Ack Tag same as LC Ack All Tag The alarm trigger s remote acknowledgment tag is the same as the controller Ack All tag Change tags so they are not identical Unable to initialize Protocol Translation Server Invalid address for Block Transfer Channel Num number The address of the block transfer is invalid You may have entered a PLC address where an SLC address
24. The Existing Text dialog opens in Read Only mode 3 Select the row number of the text you want to copy 4 Click the Apply button 5 Click Close Both the Text and Text ID number are copied to the row of the selected alarm gt You can also enter the number of an existing text string in the Text ID field and the text will be copied Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Alarms 15 21 Adding Variables to Alarm Text In the Text field you enter alarm text including a time date or numeric variable Embedded variables must be within the same scan group 40 words of the alarm tags To insert a time date numeric variable in a text string 1 Double click the Text field in which you want to insert a variable 2 Position the cursor where you want to insert the variable 3 From the popup menu choose Embedded Variable gt Time Date Variable or ASCII For the Time and Date variable a placeholder is inserted in the text T for time D for date The format of the time and date is set in the Terminal Setup dialog A dialog opens when Variable p 17 14 or ASCII p 17 17 is selected The dialog defines the format of the variable in the text string When you exit the dialog a placeholder is inserted within the text with embedded formatting details To edit a numeric or ASCII variable 1 Double click the Text field of the alarm containing the variable 2 Click on the numeric V 12 NOFILL FIX 0 or ASCII A 12
25. Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup Window Menu Window Cascade Tile Horizontally Ctrl H Tile Vertically Ctrl4 T Arrange Icons Close All 1 Sample 21 Main Menu v 3 2 Feed Pump Command Summary A 5 Choose To Open the text editor which stores all text strings in an Text Editor application From the Text Editor you can create edit filter sort and print messages Open the tag editor to view add or edit tag information for an Tag Editor application Tag information is specific to the communication network on which the application will run Open the Project Management dialog to manipulate display Project Management create copy rename delete projects and to manipulate create copy rename delete devices in projects Controls whether tags devices in the application are validated Preferences BAUNEI against the project database when an application is opened Description Enter an application description and change the application name Also shows when the application was last saved Validate Changes Validate only changes to the application since the last validate Changes are validated on a screen by screen basis Check the entire application for errors or warnings This Validate All command is useful for verifying the accuracy of an application
26. e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list e For touch screen terminals touch cell is automatically enabled The Panel View 550 600 Keypad amp Touch screen terminal supports function key and touch cell input The selected function key displays a graphic of the object and an asterisk next to the key number Publication 2711 6 0 10 18 Creating Data Entry Controls Publication 2711 6 0 Write Tag Specifies the name of the tag address where the terminal writes the ASCII string The data type of the write tag must be Character Array You can write the tag data to any data file that supports the Character Array data type The Array Size must be the same size as the String Width field Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Reserve word block addresses for each ASCII Entry object Notification and Handshake Tags Optional tags that ensure data is written to the write tag address before the scratchpad closes When the operator presses the Enter key to send the ASCII string to the write tag address the notification tag is set to 1 The scratchpad remains open until the controller checks for notification that the value was written to the write tag address and then sets the handshake tag address to 1 The terminal clears the notification bit when the handshake bit is set by the controller String Width The maximum number of characters that can be entered in the ASCII scratchpad Yo
27. ew fi Comey atest Dorey in Thea Aachen deveere HARES Be Sie ites Enter name of PVA file in which to Die wame save the translated PBA file or click gt bomm Browse to search for file Click the Setup button to open this dialog M Card DOS C ds EAA eee Cancel Enter or select a memory card command and then click OK See next page for format Application is validated and translated to a PVA file then downloaded to the Memory Card The memory card command executes a command or batch file After the command is executed you return to Windows Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 17 The format of the command entered in the Memory Card DOS Command Setup dialog is specific to the card drive installed in your computer e For ATA card drives use the DOS COPY command for example COPY C AB PBWIN CONTROL PVA M where M is the ATA card drive on your computer Memory cards compatible with the ATA card drives include Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM24 NM26 e For DataBook TMB240 or TMB250 card drives the command string has three parameters as shown below Memory cards compatible with the DataBook card drives include Catalog No 2711 NM11 NM12 NM13 NM14 space space CMD s DriveLetter _ user defined parameter required parameter user defined parameter Memory Card DOS Command Setup x Memory Card DOS Commands s applic
28. A Notification Tag 0 Operator enters Merny oe Handshake Tag 0 value in scratchpad y i gt Enter Value 150 j a O G 0 200 Sigi 2 G l aG Notification Tag 0 Handshake Tag 0 aicieteietcioesa Notification Tag 0 Handshake Tag 0 Operator presses Enter key Controller ladder logic program Verifies notification address set to 1 Sets handshake tag to 1 when new value present Notification Tag B3 B3 x 0 4 Terminal sends value to Controller Handshake Tag Terminal sets Notification Tag 1 Notification Tag 1 Handshake Tag 0 Controller Sets Handshake Tag 1 Select tags from the appropriate list boxes If the tags don t exist enter tag names Edit definitions of the tags using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Publication 2711 6 0 10 12 Creating Data Entry Controls ASCII Entry Controls Publication 2711 6 0 The ASCII Entry object allows the operator to send an alphanumeric string up to 128 characters to a controller Like numeric entry objects the ASCII Entry object can appear on an application screen as a keypad enabled button or a cursor point Keypad Enable Button The keypad enable button is a momentary push button which displays an ASCII character string at a controller address The button s initial value is sent to the controller when the a
29. Bit or value written next state to Write Tag address to Write Tag address Button changes to Bitor value written next state based on value to Indicator Tag address read from Write Tag address Button changes to next state based on value read from Indicator Tag address Important If the indicator tag and write tag are different the indicator state is controlled by the controller program regardless of the push button state For example the indicator tag address may specify that push button state 1 is displayed while the write tag address is at state 0 Creating Push Buttons 8 7 Handshake Tag Required for Latched Push Button Specifies the name of a tag address that unlatches a latched push button The button is unlatched when the value at the handshake tag address is set to a non zero value by your controller program Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Controller Program Sets Button Initial State Button Pressed Button Released Handshake Bit to 1 OFF ON ON OFF Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 0 Handshake Bit 1 Data Bit 0 Data Bit 1 Data Bit 1 Data Bit 0 ee Controller Program Sets eee Handshake Bit to 0 The handshake tag applies only to latched push buttons not other push buttons Input Specifies whether the operator presses a function key or a touch cell to operate the push button e Fora keypad terminal s
30. Checks only changes to the application since the last validate Changes are validated screen by screen e Validate All Validates the entire application Applications must validate successfully before you can download them to a terminal See Appendix E for validation error messages To validate an application Choose Validate All or Validate Changes from the Application menu e If the application passes validation the following dialog opens PanelBuilder Validation Passed No Errors Found e Ifthe application does not pass validation the Exceptions dialog opens listing errors must be corrected before downloading the application warnings do not have to be corrected before downloading the application Warnings are optional changes E Lacephens EJ men A p a 7 eee caen J Valeloterey E asan K Valder Fisen T V CELLET af lai Banned Volidaiing Port ig Ta Son Dore HAN O pran aijai aleia He me H pman ape eT emt Ser Dee 1 propm ober bocegi j memp lat Sor Dar H41 Dpr obec sbaod Pentes Bonua mmg lat Sor Dar MHAI Upra opci shoud Appirahian Toni Yalidaing aire Ta 1 TI Ta thei haa a ua cauri of ne mde Ta 1 17 eet h hee a n Ge l eaa E lena Tiei DW Boan 5 Valisin lato As a convenience you can open the Exceptions dialog from the Windows menu while correcting application errors Press To Close the dialog Opens the dia
31. Creating Alarms 15 3 Alarm Buttons You can place alarm buttons in the Alarm Banner which allow the operator to act on the alarm Some of the buttons appear only in the Alarm Banner while others can also appear on other screens This button Does This Alarm Any Banner Screen Ack Acknowledges receipt of the alarm currently displayed in the Alarm Banner Pressing the Ack button removes the Alarm Banner from the terminal display but does not clear the alarm condition The alarm is marked acknowledged in the y Alarm List Note The highlighted alarm in the Alarm List is not the acknowledged alarm but the most recent alarm The acknowledged alarm may not be visible Cigar Clears the Alarm Banner from the terminal display without acknowledging the alarm Pressing the Clear button does not clear the alarm condition J If no alarms are configured for acknowledgement then the Alarm Banner must contain a Clear button Prints the current message in the Alarm Banner This Print F i button operates ona single alarm With each message you can print e alarm date and time e acknowledge date and time e trigger value Only terminals equipped with an RS 232 printer port support the Print Alarm button You can also configure an alarm message to automatically print when triggered Acknowledges all alarms in the Alarm List that have not Ack All been ac
32. Creating Data Entry Controls 10 11 Notification and Handshake Tags Notification and handshake tags are options to ensure that data is written to the write tag address before the scratchpad is closed Notification Tag The notification tag address is set to 1 when an operator presses the B enter key The scratchpad remains open until the controller program Handshake Tag checks for notification that the value was written to the tag address 2l and then sets the handshake tag address to 1 The terminal automatically clears the notification bit when the handshake bit is set by the controller The controller s ladder logic must set the handshake bit before a timeout occurs The default handshake timeout is 4 seconds valid range is 1 60 seconds See page 20 21 to adjust the handshake timeout Operator initiates data entry ia Oo Terminal removes scratchpad Terminal then clears Notification Tag nee Controller program should set Handshake Tag to 0
33. Goto Screen Button Attributes 11 4 Creating 11 3 Description 1 6 11 2 Dialog 11 4 Graphic Tools 16 2 Background Text Tool B 4 Circle Tool 16 5 Connected Lines Tool B 4 Ellipse Tool 16 5 B 4 Freeform Tool 16 6 B 4 Graphic Image Tool B 4 Import Export Graphics Tool B 4 Line Tool B 4 Rectangle Tool B 4 Scale Tool B 4 Selection Arrow B 4 Text Tool 16 8 Graphics 1 7 Background 16 16 Helpful Hints 16 1 Inner 17 20 ISA Symbols B 7 Objects 16 2 Setting Foreground background Colors 17 21 Grids Screen Grid 7 6 Touch Grid 7 5 Grouped Objects 7 10 H Handshake Timeout 20 22 Help Buttons 5 14 Commands A 6 Index 5 Getting 5 14 Menu A 6 Home ListKey 11 9 Icons Application File 6 13 Application Screens 6 13 Opening 6 13 Importing Graphics 16 11 Deleting 16 15 Editing 16 11 17 23 Froma Disk File 16 12 From the Clipboard 16 13 Viewing Imported Graphics 16 14 Initial Values for Control List Selectors 9 6 for Numeric Entry Controls 10 5 for Push Buttons 8 5 Tag Editor Field 19 6 Terminal Presets 20 17 Inner Graphics 17 10 17 19 Adding 17 20 Editing Bitmap or ISA Symbol 17 23 Moving 17 20 Removing 17 23 Selecting a State 17 20 Using BitMap 17 20 Using ISA Symbol 17 20 Inner Text 17 10 17 19 Accessing Extended ASCII Characters H 1 Editing 17 11 17 12 for Multistate or List Objects 17 12 For Objects Without States 17 11 Push Buttons 8 3 S
34. RNA illegal option lt option gt RNA invalid option RNA invalid option option must begin with RNA option requires an argument lt option gt The number of packet buffers lt num gt requested on the command line cannot be created If your buffers were loaded into upper DOS memory the default your upper DOS memory may be full Specify e0 on the RNA EXE command line to force the buffers to use low DOS memory RNA ERROR cannot create lt num gt packet buffers The number of unsolicited buffers lt num gt requested on the command line cannot be created If your buffers were loaded into upper DOS memory by no additional command line options it may be full Specify e0 on the RNA EXE command line to force the buffers to use low DOS memory RNA ERROR cannot create lt num gt unsolicited data items The RNATSR was loaded from DOS It cannot be uninstalled with Windows running Exit to DOS to uninstall the RNATSR RNA RNATSR loaded before Windows cannot uninstall from Windows Other TSRs have been installed after the RNATSR They must be removed from memory before the RNATSR can be uninstalled RNA Cannot uninstall RNATSR not at end of INT 2F chain The RNATSR must be installed before running RNA EXE RNA RNATSR is not installed Troubleshooting F 11 You must run and install the card driver DTL_KT EXE and CFG_KT EXE before running the RNATSR and RNA RNA ERROR no card drivers inst
35. WARNING a State 1 Displayed 24 1 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 0 o0 ojo jojojojojo o ofo Tag Address N7 2 0 O 0 0 O0 O O O 0 0 0 oO 0 0 0 0 A Controller Program Clears Bit 1 Pi 24 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 0 000 100 0 00 0 0 0 Tag Address N7 2 0 0 00 0 0100 00000 000 m State 24 Displayed Value The controller triggers a state when the tag address contains a specific value The specified state is displayed until the value at the tag address is changed Publication 2711 6 0 12 14 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays be Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Global Object Publication 2711 6 0 Creating a Multistate Indicator This section shows how to create a multistate indicator and edit its properties To create a multistate indicator 1 Click the Multistate Indicator tool in the toolbox Or choose Multistate from the Objects gt Indicators submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to
36. lt Graphics List of available graphics a El Format Bar in Graphics View Toolbox ISA Symbols Hel rele a SDN Fea Kea KS Es ed tHe be fei fel EES eoalealoldal ly ON Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation helps its customers receive a superior return on theirinvestmentby bringing together leading brands in industrial automation creating a broad spectrum of easy to integrate products including control logic sensors man machine interface motors power devices and software These are supported by local technical resources available worlwide a global network of system solutions providers and the advanced technology resources of Rockwell International 7 r n ji Worldwide representa tion smmm 7 m Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgiume Bolivia e Brazil e Bulgaria e Canada e Chile e China People s Republic of e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus Czech Republic e Denmark e Dominican Republic e Ecuador e Egypt El Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Ghana e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Iran e Ireland Eire e Israel e Italy e Jamaica e Japan e J ordan e Korea Kuwait e Lebanon e Macau e Malaysia e Maltae Mexico Morocco e The Netherlands e New Zealand e Nigeria e Norway e O man eP akistan e Panama eP eru eP hilippines eP oland eP ortugal e P uerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e R ussia Saudi Arabia e Singapor
37. 88 8888 SELECT HENT Li SCREEN 4 REM CONVEYOR EH CONTROL AFE oH J G JODE O g Paclage Count 20 OFF GQooa wam Terminal writes item value to controller JAGOGOGOGG H ji Operator selects control list item 0 On touch screen only terminals you must place list keys on the screen enabling the operator to move the selection cursor through the list The Move Up and Move Down list keys look similar to the up and down arrow keys on keypad terminals Piloted control lists can be controlled by the logic controller To select a control list item the logic controller sets the control tag value to 1 and writes the value of the item to a search tag address The Panel View terminal reads the search tag data and then highlights the corresponding item on the control list The terminal then writes the same value to the control list write tag s dy Panelian 900 CORVET OR COHTROL on 7 SELECT HERT Ir SCREEM 4 fi 6 2 o Package Count 20
38. F Allen Bradley PanelBuilder Software Cat No 2711 ND3 Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or in part without written permission of Allen Bradley Company Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you a
39. Important The application will not run properly unless the memory card containing the font file is inserted in the Panel View terminal Troubleshooting Multilingual Support 22 15 Detecting Problems with FontTool This section covers problems you may encounter when using FontTool If the font file is generated but the sample text does not appear consider the following causes Specified code page not available When a font file is generated the code page for that font must be available on the computer FontTool uses this code page to generate the characters for the font file The code page may not be available for the following reasons e English version of the Windows operating system is running but an appropriate Input Method Editor IME is not active e IME is active but the wrong language is selected some Input Method Editors support multiple languages e International version of the Windows is running but is not the correct version For example Windows 3 1 has separate distributions for Simplified Chinese code page 936 and Traditional Chinese code page 950 Selected font does not contain specified characters If the font style selected in the Font dialog does not contain the correct characters either e characters will not appear or e each double byte character appears as 2 single byte characters Detecting Problems with External Fonts in PanelBuilder This section covers problems you may encounter when
40. Meaning The minimum value for a bar graph is set to a value that s greater than the maximum value What to do Open the object s dialog and re enter valid min max range values in value value is greater than the max alue value lt The min setting is greater than the max setting for data entry limits of a tag From the form view of the tag editor make sure the min data entry limit is less than the max data entry limit for the tag gt x lt issing acknowledge tag Acknowledge handshake tag is defined without an acknowledge tag Define an acknowledge tag for the trigger issing or invalid screen assignment A screen selector object has a missing or invalid screen assignment Open the object s dialog and reassign screen issing notification or handshake tag Notification and handshake tags are used together One of the tags is missing Enter the missing tag issing remote acknowledge tag Remote acknowledge handshaking tag is defined without a remote acknowledge tag Define a remote acknowledge handshake tag in the Alarm Setup dialog issing remote clear tag A remote clear handshake tag was defined but the remote clear tag was not defined Specify a remote clear tag in the Alarm Setup dialog sg text variable at Position text number Indicates an error with an inner text string Open the Use Existing Text dialog and locate the message Correct the
41. Publication 2711 6 0 Overview of PanelBuilder 1 5 Typical Application Screens Application screens can contain a variety of control display or graphic objects The following screens show examples of Control list selector Numeric entry cursor points Bar graphs Goto screen button Bar Graphs Allen Bradley PanelView 900 Numeric Entry Cursor Points a ldd i EE LEL ini Goto Screen Button a R Control List Selector On touch screen terminals the operator activates input functions by touching a screen object For example to view the main menu screen the operator touches the MENU button Bar Graphs f Allen Bradley PanelView 900 Numeric Entry Cursor Points 3 DAL EID HEAT LEOR oe E C5 Bei k WI Ls LILI dia Goto Screen Button a a 2 Gs r4 ss re e e J B v0 Fo Cen Fe Ler Gu Fs Fe Control List Selector On keypad terminals the operator activates input functions by pressing the function key assigned to the object For example to view the main menu screen the operator presses the F8 or MENU function key To activate the cursor point objects the operator presses the function keys labeled F6 or F7 SP or CV Publication 2
42. and click the left mouse button to place the symbol The symbol is automatically selected 3 Click the right mouse button to exit ISA Symbol mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox You can also place ISA symbols inside a button or multistate object See Chapter 17 for details You can apply foreground and background colors to an ISA symbol Publication 2711 6 0 16 8 Adding Graphics Adding Backg round Text The text tool lets you add text to a screen that s unattached or not Objects linked to an object This is called background text Examples of ee a background text are tick mark labels for bar graph scales outer text Numero Enty 3 for push buttons or control lists time and date stamps variable read ASCII Enty g outs screen titles and so on Control List Selectors Indicators Background Text Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display EE gt i List Keys Connected Line Alarm List a m Olbs Alarm Buttons Circle ae TANK LEVEL CONTROL Global Object an F9 Off at 9 45 AM Empty Tank 20 lbs A Text I Se ON MOTOR gt 1 4 Fill Level Graphic Image s ON 1 2 Fill Level M 40 Ibs Fill Tank 50 Ibs Background text is handled as a separate object unless you group it with other objects Background text can contain up to 255 characters using the default text size and can appear anywhere on the screen You can resi
43. axF iles 64 SwapSize 256 AB Utilities failed to initialize PanelBuilder could not initialize the AB Utilities during startup because SHARE EXE is not running Add SHARE EXE to your AUTOEXEC BAT file or execute SHARE manually See the README TXT file in C AB for more details Problem Application file length does not match the header record Cause When verifying the CRC of the PVA file the file length did not match the length stored in the file This typically occurs when you download a file that was truncated by an aborted upload General Download Errors Recommended Action Specify a valid PVA file Application file CRC is incorrect The CRC of the PVA file does not match the CRC stored in the file Specify a valid PVA file In Windows NT 4 0 the following error occurs during a download Abnormal termination The operating system needs to be upgraded to Service Pack 2 or later Install Service Pack 2 or later on your computer Publication 2711 6 0 Problem When downloading an application to a DOS file in PanelBuilder you get this message Unable to load WPFTDLL DLL or one of its Troubleshooting F 3 Downloading to a DOS File Cause Recommended Action INTERCHANGE is notinstalled on Exit Windows and reinstall PanelBuilder to install computer INTERCHANGE must INTERCHANGE on your computer be installed however you are not
44. e Click the Import Graphics tool in the toolbox e Or choose Import Export Graphics from the File menu Import Export Graphics Currently Imported Graphics Copy Done Distillation tower Dc _ eae ISA Exchanger Paste Import Delete Export ISA Furnace Sample ISA Horiz valve with actuator ISA Horiz valve with manual actuator ISA Horiz valve with throttling actuator ISA Inline mixer ISA Liquid Pressure storage vessel ISA Pump ISA Reactor ISA Relief valve ISA Rotary Feeder ISA Rotary kiln ISA Screw conveyor ISA Storage bin ISA Transformer Turbine To Import a bitmap graphic BMP from a file See Appendix B for a list of bitmaps that PanelBuilder provides in the C AB PBWIN PBLIB folder 16 11 Paste a bitmap graphic from the clipboard Export an imported graphic to a file Copy an imported graphic to the clipboard Delete an imported graphic ISA symbols can t be deleted from the graphic list Publication 2711 6 0 16 12 Publication 2711 6 0 Adding Graphics The Color Format area is dimmed if you are importing a monochrome bitmap _ fei fwaz The option on Grayscale gt PE Gate terminals is 4 Colors To import a bitmap graphic from a file 1 Click the Import button from the Import Export Graphics dialog The Open dialog appears Open
45. 00 ccc cece a 1 1 Whatis an Applicaton sg ciactck wp disty Ak noted sieaa Seth ashi ey 1 1 Whatis a PTOJECU intel teetesiacdevaseadtatarkcwat aan se 1 1 PanelBuilder Features icctiteparga dase ndysdvdedyaougas 1 2 Typical Application Screens 00 cee eee eee 1 5 Screen OD CC lt lt sare ntareae waaie a ad aka aw we owe eared 1 6 Chapter 2 Chapter Objectives sciuvaresencotetaudwateesdas wae de 2 1 System Requirements ivdyitacieeddapuweeadudedgeounns 2 1 Installing PanelBuilder naaa 2 2 RSLinx Lite SoftWare siccare neren ie oR ndaia deuda aats 2 7 INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility 000 2 10 INTERCHANGE Notes aaa 2 16 Chapter 3 Chapter Objectives nauuna 3 1 Desig Checklist sisa anit die uated ale uaind nika doe daia Kaui 3 1 Applications and Projects oaoa 3 2 Steps for Creating an Application aa 3 3 Safety Considerations oa 0c cee eee eee ees 3 4 Screen Worksheets y sce ie he bende Weer de awe pe ee ate st 3 4 Linking Screen Objects to Controller Data 0004 3 6 ContollerDataFileS cscisseseveeeeaaeeawneweward baa des 3 7 Data Types saiak aeania sanski ested dawn an A 3 8 Data POM sierisrrecin pira eter eda tae earn aa eee eds 3 9 Review ACCESSING Saitucdidupatvedueaaned wteakenw has 3 12 Defining Tags sachs op osheanah besataud career eine eee ee 3 13 Memory Requirements TipS 1 0 cece cee ee eee ees 3 14 ii Table of Contents Communications Overview P
46. 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 4 BCD 0 to 9999 Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Octal 0 to 177777 Formats provided for data entry The terminal does not display transfer these formats Publication 2711 6 0 13 10 Creating Message Displays Creating an Object You can create an object to send all triggered messages to a printer to Print Messages rather than displaying them in a Message Display Any variables embedded within the message also print A print object has the same properties as a message display However when configuring the message you enter only the text that will print no formatting options Print objects are not linked to specific screens like display objects Therefore messages can be triggered any time an application is running The print object is only supported on terminals equipped with an RS 232 serial printer port To create an object that will only print messages Text Editor Tag Editor 1 Choose Print Only Object Setup from the Application menu Project Management Preferences Description Validate Changes Emsi Dieiis Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup 2 Click the New button ae pic Print_Meseages OK 3 In the Create text box enter a unique name 1 to 32 characters for the print object
47. AUEVBRADLEY Penaliow 800 Msg B Alarm Msg B is placed in the List Alarm List Pump Msg B Alarm Banner displays alarm text i ALLEN BRADLEY Pamelfiew 980 Msg B Publication 2711 6 0 Operator Acknowledges Alarm and Notifies Controller Creating Alarms 15 29 The operator presses the Ack button to acknowledge an alarm The terminal notifies the controller by writing the alarm s trigger value to the Ack address defined for the trigger Optional Fields are enabled for the alarm triggers Alarm Configuration Four alarms are assigned to the P ump trigger tag each with a different trigger value All alarm messages are configured to display in the Alarm Banner and must be acknowledged Fecha Eel The PanelView reads the value 15 from the Trigger Pump address in the controller This value triggers alarm Msg B Setup Alarm Triggers x Alarms Lf text vainen iefTe tper Act Ps inc pseziey Operator presses Ack button Alarm Msg B is flagged acknowledged in the Alarm List Alarm Banner is cleared from display
48. Align Text Underline Word Wrap Embedded ariable Foreground Color Background Color Toggle ForeBackground Elink Fill Patter Shape Line Type Object Formatting Formatting Objects and Text 17 3 Objects have visual characteristics that you can change such as e shape e line type e fill pattern blinking setting foreground background colors toggling foreground background NY NAAN VALVE 1 N VALVE I 18 pete VALVE 1 OPEN N OPEN N NLN No Fill Fill Pattern No Border T Shape When an object is selected the Format bar changes to show this view L lt lt S S yY cou Ne X 4 NI S lt L K SS OPT Y To change an object s appearance select the object and then choose a command from the Format menu or click a tool on the Format bar Some of the options toggle on and off others open a menu To toggle a setting from the Format bar click the tool once to turn it on click it again to turn it off The new setting remains active until you change it A check mark appears next to the active settings on the menu Publication 2711 6 0 17 4 Formatting Objects and Text Changing Object Shape You can change the shape of a button or the shape of a graphic using the shape tools For example you can change the shape of a push button to a circle or the shape of a rectangle to an ellipse Circles require less memory and process more efficiently than ellipse
49. Both appear inside the push button and can change with each state The inner text or graphic is attached to the button When you move or delete the button the inner text or graphic is also moved or deleted Push buttons are created with ST 0 as the default inner text For example the default inner text for on off push buttons is ST 0 and ST 1 For multistate push buttons the default inner text increments from ST 0 to ST 15 ST 0 lt Default Inner Text ON Inner Text lt Inner Graphic Inner text can also include a date time or numeric variable Push buttons can have a variety of visual appearances In addition to text and graphics you can format the button using options such as e Fill pattern e Border type e Toggle foreground background colors e Blinking e Shape You can format each push button state directly from the States tab of the object s dialog or using the formatting procedures in Chapter 17 Possible combinations are shown below Y lt Inner Graphic lt Inner Text Fill Pattern Fill Pattern Inner Text D4 Inner Graphic RESET No Border Toggle Foreground Background White Fill Pattern lt Inner Text lt A R Circular Button Toggle Foreground Background Publication 2711 6 0 8 4 Creating Push Buttons Creating Push Buttons HMomemary Piiri iiis Latched Multiztese e w a Momentary Maintained Latched Multistate Setting P
50. Click the Paste tool on the tool bar or choose Paste Screen from the Edit menu 7 PanelBuilder pastes the screen into the application file window of the target application with the same name and number If the screen number exists in the target application the screen is assigned the next available number In the example below the Feed Pump screen is moved from the Sample to the Test application using the lowest available number 2MTEDMI PIH Erypmi FRN 10 1 Tomen Publication 2711 6 0 6 18 Working with Applications and Screens Publication 2711 6 0 Converting Copied Screens Converting from Touch Screen to Keypad If copying or moving a screen from a touch screen to a keypad application you must assign function key input to screen objects Converting to another Terminal Type If copying or moving a screen to an application created for a different terminal type for example 900 to 550 you may need to resize or adjust the location of objects on the pasted screen Converting to another Communication Protocol If copying or moving a screen to an application that uses a different communication protocol for example Remote I O to DH 485 you must update the terminal setup and tags appropriately Converting Monochrome to Color or Grayscale If copying or moving a screen from a monochrome application to a color or grayscale application the following dialog opens Color Conversion Es Converting monochrome to co
51. DH485 CFG_KT INI and SYSTEM INI comm port inconsistency This error indicates that the driver did not exit cleanly CFG_485 0026 DH485 Fatal Error during Link Layer Cleanup Errors and Informational Messages Specific to CFG_DF1 EXE This error indicates the Virtual Driver for DF1 isn t running CFG_DF1 0020 DF1 Fatal Error VDF1 Driver not installed These errors indicate problems setting up the COM port CFG_DF1 0021 DF1 Serial Communication P ort not found CFG_DF1 0022 DF1 Link Layer attach error CFG_DF1 0023 DF1 Link Layer initialization error CFG_DF1 0024 DF1 Link Layer configuration error This error indicates a conflict over which COM port is to be used CFG_DF1 0025 DF1 CFG_KT INI and SYSTEM INI comm port inconsistency This error indicates that the driver did not exit cleanly CFG_DF1 0026 DF1 Fatal Error during Link Layer Cleanup Publication 2711 6 0 F 10 Troubleshooting Publication 2711 6 0 Errors and Informational Messages from RNA EXE This message occurs normally at shutdown RNA removed from memory This parameter for the b argument indicating number of solicited message buffers to use given on the command line for RNA EXE was out of allowed message range of 1 to 40 A default of 20 solicited buffers will be used RNA b must be 1 40 using default of 20 The format of the options given on the command line for RNA EXE were invalid Correct the option s and start RNA EXE again
52. From the Location box select the orientation of the scale relative to the bar graph Z a ii BE liz i E TERRA Right Left Top Bottom In the Number box enter the number of tick marks for the scale The number of tick marks allowed depends on the size of the scale Tick marks are spaced evenly along the scale When done click OK Publication 2711 6 0 12 8 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Tick Mark Labels Use the graphics text tool to add tick mark labels to the bar graph scale The labels aren t attached to the scale but are handled as separate objects Tick mark Labels m Olbs M 10 lbs 0 10 20 30 40 50 LETT N TTT Ett tt 20 lbs Mm 30 lbs Mm 40 lbs 50 Ibs You can group the bar graph scale and tick mark labels so that they re handled as a single unit To create a tick mark label 1 Click the Text tool in the toolbox Or choose Text from the Objects Graphics submenu 2 Position the pointer and drag the text block to the size you want The text block is selected and you are placed in inner text mode 3 Enter the label in the Text box As you enter the label it s also entered in the text block An asterisk appears if the text exceeds the size of the block 4 To create another label repeat steps 2 and 3 5 Click the right mouse button to exit background text mode Or click the selection tool in t
53. If the object is multistate select the state containing the graphic Click the Toggle Foreground Background tool on the Format bar Or choose Toggle Fore Background from the Format menu The color of the graphic and the area containing the graphic are reversed To exit inner graphic mode click the Inner Graphic tool State ya Formatting Objects and Text 17 23 Removing an Inner Graphic To remove an inner graphic or ISA symbol from an object 1 Select the object 2 For a multistate object select the state containing the graphic e From the tool bar select a state from the State box Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Inner Graphic tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Graphic from the Format menu The Format bar appears Graphics ME 4 Select None from the Graphics list box The graphic is removed 5 Click the Inner Graphic tool to exit inner graphic mode Editing Graphics The size and content of an inner graphic bitmap or ISA symbol cannot be changed in PanelBuilder You must export the graphic revise it with another program such as Paintbrush and then re import it You can export the graphic directly from the Format bar Bitmaps are handled like global objects A bitmap image is stored once regardless of the number of links to it When an image is updated PanelBuilder updates all instances of the image To edit a bitmap graphic or an ISA symbo
54. Numeric Data Display Bar Graph the default size Or drag the pointer to size the display Scale Message Display _ _ MSG Graphics La A List Keys La Alarm List Adim inan 3 To place another message display move the pointer to a new aes eee location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit message display mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Setting Properties To set properties of a message display ofa Message Display 1 Double click the message display object jenny Dirada Properties Sises Ooae Read amr aie teen 0 Ginge B En Dimmed if terminal M Lemi Giga Ba oH Bret e does not have an E Minur RS 232 port Daia Foa Hasi T eee Tag Dialog 2 On the Properties tab set the operating parameters of the message display Publication 2711 6 0 Read Creating Message Displays 13 7 Specifies the type of data that triggers a message to display Select To Single Bit Trigger a 2 message display by setting or clearing a bit at the read tag address The number of states must be set to 2 before the single bit option is available Least Significant Bit Trigger multiple messages Messages display in a sequence corresponding to bits set at word address es starting with the read tag address The tag data type for least significant bit is unsigned integer Value Trigger a message based on a value at the read tag address Each message is
55. Optional Fields 2 In the tag fields enter the tag names you want to use for each optional function To edit the definition for each tag select the tag name and click the Edit Tag button The Tag Form dialog opens Edit the tag definition and close the dialog 3 In the Acknowledge All Value field enter a value that will be used when acknowledging multiple alarms for a trigger or when the controller acknowledges all active alarms 4 Click another Setup tab or OK to exit Alarm Setup dialog Optional Fields Ack Tag Tag Direction PanelView gt Controller value to notify the controller when an alarm has been acknowledged The terminal writes the trigger value or bit position value Value Bit field of the trigger to the Ack tag address when e operator presses Ack button e operator presses Enter key to acknowledge alarm in Alarm List e controller writes a value or triggers a bit at the Remote Ack tag address The terminal writes the Acknowledge All value to this address when e Ack All button is pressed e Controller acknowledges all active alarms using the Ack All Alarm tag Setup tab Creating Alarms 15 23 Notes Description Name of address where the terminal writes a This tag is ignored if the Ack option is disabled on the Alarms tab The terminal clears the value at the Ack tag address when the Ack or Ack All button is released or the Acknowledge Hold time has expired whichever is longer
56. Print Only Message Object Similar to a message display but messages print out on the connected Dynamic printer when triggered rather than display on the terminal screen Time Inserts a time variable within a text string Static i Date Inserts a date variable within a text string Static Variables ASCII Variable Inserts an ASCII variable within a text string Dynamic Numeric Variable Inserts a numeric variable within a text string Dynamic Goto Screen Button Moves to a specific application screen Static Goto Config Screen Button Displays the PanelView terminal s Configuration Mode menu Static Screen Selectors Return Screen Button Returns to previous screen Static Screen List Selector Displays a screen selected from a list of screens The terminal s up and Static Publication 2711 6 0 down arrow keys are used to move through the list Overview of PanelBuilder 1 7 Screen Objects Description Type Move Up oves cursor up one item in a control list or screen list selector Static Move Down oves cursor down one item in a control list or screen list selector Static Home oves cursor to the first item in a control list or screen list selector Static End oves cursor to the last item in a control list or screen list selector Static List Keys Page Up oves cursor up one page ina Scrolling control list or screen list Static Page Down oves cursor down one page in a scrolling control list or screen list Static Backspace Returns
57. The length of a bit array exceeds 16 bits Change the starting bit number for the bit array or change the array size in Tag Editor Loading external font file Status message displayed when loading external font Wait until operation is complete Logic controller is not configured for Block Transfers Terminal s RIO Port setup requires Block Transfer support The terminal is configured to use Block Transfers but the controller is not From the Setup tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button Verify that the selected controller supports block transfers If the controller supports block transfers press the Block Transfer button and verify that block transfers are defined Max entry limit of value for tag name may result in out of range data value The max data entry limit value entered in the Tag Editor lets you enter a number resulting in an out of range value on the logic controller Enter a valid maximum data entry limit in the form view of the tag editor Min entry limit of value for tag name may result in out of range data value The min data entry limit value entered in the tag editor lets you enter a number resulting in an out of range value on the logic controller Enter a valid minimum data entry limit in the form view of the tag editor Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Messages Validation Message in range value is greater than max range value
58. The scratchpad opens in the center of the screen The operator enters a new value using the terminal keypad Enter Value lt Entered Value 6 to 166 Keypad Enable Example The operator selects the Enter Temp or Enter Deg keypad enable button using a function key or touch cell Enter Tenp lt oe i Enable Buttons efh The scratchpad opens in the center of the screen The operator enters a new value using the terminal keypad Enter Value EE Entered Value 6 to 100 Publication 2711 6 0 10 4 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Data Entry Controls Data Entry Scaling Data entered by an operator can be scaled from engineering units such as gallons or pounds per square inch to machine control values Terminal values are scaled using the formula y mx b y scaled value entered by operator m scale multiplier x controller value b offset To calculate value x stored at the controller address use TE _ Entered Value Offset m Scale The scale and offset values are entered in the Tag Editor Scaled values affect the controller value as follows e Scale m value gt 1 generates an x value smaller than y b e Scale m value lt 1 generates an x value larger than y b Example Scaling a Data Entry Variable The operator enters 30 pounds for y The offset b value is 2 The scale m value is 01 lt 1 o yb _ 30 2 _ m p 2800 The terminal provides a contro
59. To set up the page 1 Click the Page Setup button from the Print dialog or choose Page Setup from the Project menu RS ae cones EEE hoe as I Shere Gnin Vt Mee Wwa For Eaeh Coden Vee eich O A J 2 Under Margins specify page margins Top Bottom Left Right Enter a number for each margin The measurements are in inches Publication 2711 6 0 19 14 Working with Tags Printing Tags 3 6 Select the Show Gridlines box to show gridlines in the printed copy Select the Use Maximum Width for Each Column box to use the maximum width for each field Clear the box if you want the printed output based on the size of the columns on the screen The number of characters that fit in a column on the screen may be different from the printed output depending on the fonts available Enter Line 1 and Line 2 of the Header Each line supports up to 255 characters Use the information below to enter text Click OK to return to the Print dialog Entering Header Information To enter header text For example type text this textis printed as is i you want to print this This is the header type This is the header type one of the following character i sequences O f you want to print this 2 2 95 Project 1 amp D current date amp N page number type amp D amp P amp T currenttime If you want to print a blank line type lt x amp V vi
60. Use the Upload command to upload an application from a terminal Application File Transfer Utility Use the Application File Transfer Utility WINPFT EXE or WINPFT32 EXE to transfer applications in the Windows environment outside of PanelBuilder This utility is available as an icon in the PanelBuilder group The dialogs are identical to the Download Upload dialogs on the PanelBuilder Application menu Use tools or File menu commands to e download a PVA application to a PanelView terminal Create a PVA file by downloading a PBA application to a DOS file from the PanelBuilder Application menu e upload a PVA application from a Panel View terminal e verify the application you want to download against the application loaded in the terminal PanelView DOS File Transfer Utility Refer to Publication 2711 805 for details on using the Panel View File Transfer PFT Utility to transfer applications between a computer and a Panel View terminal in the DOS environment Internal DF1 Driver Validating and Transferring Applications 23 9 PanelBuilder has an Internal DF1 driver for transferring applications over a serial link to e PanelView terminals with an RS 232 DF1 protocol port for example DH DF1 or Remote I O terminal Remote I O terminal with RS 232 DF1 protocol port configured for Pass Through communications with a PLC using DFI1 The PLC 5 must be configured with the DF1 settings shown below to activate communicat
61. Vacuum Motor Transformer Vessel Reactor Storage Bin Distillation Tower Pressure Storage Vessel Weigh Hopper Pump Turbine Tool and Bitmap Summary B 7 Cancels an ISA Symbol selection Draws a horizontal valve with an actuator Draws a horizontal valve with a throttling actuator Draws a horizontal valve with a manual actuator Draws a vertical valve with an actuator Draws a vertical valve with a throttling actuator Draws a vertical valve with a manual actuator Draws a butterfly valve Draws a check valve Draws a relief valve Draws a liquid filter Draws a vacuum filter Draws an electrical motor Draws an electrical transformer Draws a vessel Draws a reactor Draws a storage bin Draws a distillation tower Draws a pressure storage vessel Draws a weigh hopper Draws a pump Draws a turbine Publication 2711 6 0 B 8 Tool and Bitmap Summary Publication 2711 6 0 Neme L T yyy CHW e eB eee Blower Compressor Agitator Conveyor Screw Conveyor Inline Mixer Rotary Feeder Exchanger Furnace Rotary Kiln Cyclone Separator Arrow Left Arrow Up Arrow Right Arrow Down Draws a blower Draws a compressor Draws an agitator Draws a conveyor Draws a screw conveyor Draws an inline mixer Draws a rotary feeder Draws an exchanger Draws a furnace Draws a rotary kiln Draws a cy
62. Valid data types for the read tag are unsigned signed integer 4BCD and floating point Publication 2711 6 0 12 12 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Multistate Indicators Multistate indicators can show up to 2 000 states including error state Each state can have unique inner text and or a graphic with different fill patterns Types of Multistate Indicators Use multistate indicators for a variety of effects including limited animation of displays MIXER OUTPUT State 0 OFF State 0 oa Low State1 10 RPM State 1 e NNNN State 2 State 2 RUNNING y 20RPM Gm Mat State 3 CAUTION State 3 Cc Standard Indicators Multistate Indicator Using Different Multistate Indicator Using Different Fill Patterns and Text for Each State Inner Graphics for Each State Assembly Final Inspection W gt gt A gt Packaging Conveyor 1 aie 0000000000 Assembly Final Inspection W Paint a a Packaging Conveyor 1 HM oo 00000001 Multistate Indicator Graphics and Text used to Create an Animated P roduction Sequence Inner text and or graphics for multistate indicators are entered the same as for multistate push buttons For details on how to do this and use other formatting options see Chapter 17 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Num
63. ab Ctrl Shiftt a or A FE Ctrl Shift amp a or A ce CE Ctrl Shift amp 0 or O cc Ctri Shift comma c or C 6D Ctrl Shift apostrophe d or D Ctrl Shift o or O Alt Ctrl hift i Alt4Ctrl S hift B Ctrl Shift amp s For more details on entering international characters refer to International Characters in the online Index of Windows Help Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Chapter 23 Validating and Transferring Applications This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Helpful Hints 23 1 Validating Applications 23 2 Transfer Options 23 6 Transfer Utilities 23 8 nternal DF 1 Driver 23 9 Downloading Directly to a Terminal 23 10 Downloading on a Local DH Link 23 12 Downloading to a Terminal using Pass Through 23 13 Downloading to a DOS Memory Card 23 16 Downloading to a DOS File 23 18 Uploading Directly from a Terminal 23 19 Uploading on a Local DH Link 23 21 Uploading from a Terminal Using Pass Through 23 22 Using the Application File Transfer Utility 23 23 Decreasing Size of Application for Downloads 23 28 Exceeding RAM Memory in Terminal 23 28 PanelBuilder applications are saved to PBA files When downloading to a Panel View terminal or a DOS file the PBA file is automatically translated and saved to a PVA file Panel View terminal must be physically connected to the computer through a direct or network connecti
64. can group a bar graph scale and tick mark labels and then define the group as a global object by double clicking the group This opens the Options dialog which lets you create a global object To group a set of objects 1 Select the objects you want to group Handles appear on all objects that are selected 2 Click the Group tool on the tool bar Or choose Group from the Edit menu An outline appears around the objects that are grouped Selecting any one of the objects selects the entire group When a group is selected you can move cut copy paste or delete objects in a single operation You can also size a selected object while maintaining its group status To ungroup a set of grouped objects 1 Select the group 2 Click the Ungroup tool on the tool bar Or choose Ungroup from the Edit menu The objects are now separate again Deselect the group before selecting an individual object PanelBuilder remembers the last assembled group To reassemble a former group of objects choose Regroup from the Edit menu Stacking Objects Unde Color Change Chr Cut Ctrl Copy Ctrl C Faste Chri Delete Del Select All Bring To Front Send To Back Bring Dynamic Objects To Front Group Ungroup Regroup Use Existing Test Object Attributes Set Object Color Defaults Zooming In and Out v Tool Bar v Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette v Alarm Banner Pos
65. controller may have to complete several scans Variables appear in the alarm message as until the data is read If the data is not read before the timeout occurs the variable appears as The timeout is entered in seconds The initial default is 2 seconds 7 Click OK to exit Publication 2711 6 0 15 14 Creating Alarms Defining Alarm Triggers Cell or Field Most operations are performed by click ing a row number and then choosing a command from this menu Cut Chiles Copy Ctrl C Faste Ctr Inzert and Paste Ctrl Append Trigger Chrl 4 Insert Trigger Ins Delete Trigger Del EditT ag Move Trigger Up Chrl U Move Trigger Down Ctrl D Use Optional Fields Publication 2711 6 0 This section shows how to define triggers for alarms For each trigger you must define a trigger tag Controller address the terminal monitors for an alarm trigger value Most application use only one alarm trigger tag trigger type Bit LSBit or Value Triggers are assigned to alarms in the Alarm Setup tab To create or edit alarm triggers 1 Choose Alarm Setup from the Application menu Or double click the Alarm Message Display in the Alarm Banner 2 Select the Alarm Triggers tab Each alarm trigger is entered as a separate row in a spreadsheet The cells in each row define specific information for each trigger e to select a row click the row number to select a cell cli
66. e 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen Worksheet e 900 1000 Keypad Screen Worksheet e 1400 Keypad Screen Worksheet e Address Worksheet Publication 2711 6 0 C 2 PanelBuilder Worksheets Publication 2711 6 0 PanelBuilder Worksheets C 3 PanelView 550 600 Operator Terminal Project Name Touch Screen Worksheet Application Name Screen Name Number Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Project Name Application Name Screen Name Number Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Publication 2711 6 0 C 4 PanelBuilder Worksheets PanelView 550 600 Operator Terminal Keypad Screen Worksheet Project Name Application Name Screen Name Number F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Project Name Application Name Screen Name Number Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Publication 2711 6 0 Project Name Screen Name Number Application Name PanelView 900 1000 1400 Terminal
67. e valid range depends on data type of the trigger tag e 0 is reserved Trigger Select the name of the trigger tag to associate with The trigger tag and its attributes are defined on the the alarm text Alarm Triggers tab Ack Specifies whether the alarm text displayed in the Select the box to enable or disable the Ack option An Alarm Banner must be acknowledged by an operator X in the box enables acknowledgement The Display or the controller box must also be checked to acknowledge an alarm The initial default is Ack disabled Print Specifies whether the alarm text prints when the alarm Select the box to enable or disable the Print option is triggered The alarm text is printed with the print An X in the box enables the Print option options selected on the Alarms Setup tab The initial default is Print disabled Display Specifies whether the alarm text displays in the Alarm Select the box to enable or disable the Display option Banner when the alarm is triggered An X in the box enables the display option To acknowledge an alarm you must enable this option The initial default is Display enabled Foreground Defines the foreground color of the alarm message e black is the default for monochrome terminals e white is the default for color grayscale terminals Background Defines the background color of the message e white is the default for monochrome terminals e red is the default for color terminals e black is the default for grayscale
68. position the cursor where you want to insert text and then type the new text Press ENTER to start a new line The characters R are inserted to indicate a new line 4 Resize the object if necessary to fit all the text 5 When done click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode Publication 2711 6 0 17 12 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State To edit inner text for a multistate or list object 1 2 4 5 6 Select the object Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu The Format bar shows the current text with the insertion point following the text Text string number A number is automatically assigned to each text string in an application This number appears to the left of the Text box Select the state or entry you want to edit e From the tool bar select a state from the State box Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu Edit the text As you edit the text it s also entered in the object If word wrap is on text wraps at the beginning of a word not than the middle Word Wrap is set from the Format menu An appears if the text exceeds the object size To delete text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE To replace text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then type the new text To add text position the cursor where you wa
69. response to a command Probable causes are disconnected node device high network activity low baud rate Verify that the PanelView terminal has a valid Remote 1 0 network connection and that its application matches the controller s block transfer ladder logic Retry the operation RNA Error CO0A placing device n online INTERCHANGE could not start the driver associated with port of your computer Use the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility to check the driver configuration The driver may be set for a different baud rate than the physical network The currently installed INTERCHANGE driver cannot download to the selected terminal The type of network transfer you are attempting requires a different driver than the one currently loaded on your computer Configure the appropriate driver using the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility and then reboot computer When downloading an application on a network using a KA5 bridge DH lt gt DH485 the download does not exit properly The download completes but does not exit properly When the download is complete select the CANCEL button on the Download dialog Gateway device node is not active A Gateway device was not found at the specified node address on the local network Verify that a Gateway device is at the specified address or change the node address in the File Transfer Setup dialog to match the terminal s network address Loc
70. shows the size of the font file You must save the font file to PBWIN FONT folder to access the file when creating an application with the PanelBuilder software memory card which will be inserted in the card slot of the Panel View where the application will run See the section on Saving Font files Publication 2711 6 0 22 8 Publication 2711 6 0 Multilingual Support Viewing Sample Text You can view and or change the sample text of a font definition before saving the font file 1 Choose Change Sample Text from the View menu Change Sample Text Eq Chinese DE Cancel 2 Enter new sample text 3 Click OK The sample text is changed for the font definition Opening Font Files Font OTF files are located in PBWIN FONT You can open a font file to view edit the sample text To open a font OTF file 1 Click the Open tool on the tool bar or choose Open from the File menu File Open File name japanese otf china_s otf china_t otf cineese otf courier otf greek otf japanese otf roman otf times otf Folders c ab pbwin font Cancel Network tf List files of type PanelView Fonts _otf x Drives amp c mcintyre_c 7 2 Select a file from the PBWIN FONT folder and click OK Or double click on the file name you want to open The sample text appears for the file you open If you don t see any text choose Sample
71. variable placeholder The embedded data within the placeholder will vary depending on the options you selected in the Variable dialog 3 From the popup menu choose Embedded Variable gt Edit Variable 4 Edit the settings in the Variable dialog 5 When done click OK to exit dialog The placeholder is updated with the new formatting details Important The tag which updates the numeric or ASCII variable should be scanned with the alarm trigger To delete a variable Click on the placeholder and choose Cut from the popup menu or press BACKSPACE or DELETE Publication 2711 6 0 15 22 Creating Alarms Defining Optional Tags for Triggers Publication 2711 6 0 The Alarm Triggers tab has optional tag fields that you can enable for each trigger e acknowledge Ack tag e handshake tag used with trigger tag e remote acknowledge Ack tag e remote Ack handshake tag e acknowledge all value To define optional tags 1 Enable the optional fields On the Setup tab select the Use Optional Fields check box X in box e Or on the Alarm Triggers tab hold down the right mouse button and choose Use Optional Fields from the popup menu Both the Remote tags on the Setup tab and the optional tag fields on the Alarm Triggers tab are enabled If the Use Optional Fields check box is cleared all of the optional fields and the Remote Tags on the Setup dialog are disabled PanelBuilder ignores any data in these fields
72. 0 until the text string is used by the application Publication 2711 6 0 18 4 Using the Text Editor Editing Text Publication 2711 6 0 If you edit text in the Text Editor PanelBuilder will update all occurrences of the text in the application To edit a text string 1 Locate the text you want to edit 2 Click in the Text field and edit the text e To delete text click once to highlight all the text and press BACKSPACE or DELETE e To add text position the cursor and type new text To insert a carriage return R press ENTER 3 When done click anywhere outside of the cell The text is updated wherever it is used in the application To cut copy and paste text 1 Click the Text field containing the text you want to copy 2 Choose Copy or Cut from the popup menu All text in the cell is placed on the clipboard 3 Click the Text field where you want to paste the text 4 Choose Paste from the popup menu The text is pasted from the clipboard 5 When done click anywhere outside of the cell The text is updated wherever it is used in the application Inserting Variables in Text Using the Text Editor 18 5 You can insert a time date or numeric variable within a text string The variables are downloaded to the terminal with the application To insert a time date numeric ASCII variable in a text string 1 Locate the text in which you want to insert a variable 2 Double click the Text field 3 Posit
73. 122 un Ji 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 lo 1 020 PB2 PB1 1 021 eee Word Address Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 ui 10 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 Tag Name Decimal 15 14 13 12 un Ja 9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1 Jo N 027 PRESSBG2 N 028 eee Publication 2711 6 0 Planning an Application 3 13 Defining Tags Read write tags that define controller addresses for objects are entered in the Tag Editor A tag has the following attributes gt Tag Attributes Description Tag Name Unique name identifying tag address Data Type Bit 4BCD Unsigned Signed Integer Bit Array Character Array Float Array Size Number of bits in a bit array Description General description of tag Node Name Name of controller associated with tag Tag Address Specifies data table word or bit nitial Value Value stored at tag address on powerup Update Frequency Rate at which tag address value is updated Scaling Scale and offset scale values Data Entry Limits High and low limits of data stored at tag address The tag name appears in the object s dialog and in the Tag Editor Usage dependent on object The Tag Editor supports two different ways for entering tags e table view to enter and edit multiple tags e form view to enter a single tag Tags are stored in a database that is referenced by a project name The project name is entered when creating a new application file The tag name entered in an object s dialog links the object to the tag na
74. 22 4 USMOFOMMO trvvceghianiztstupdnahedundwt hau i 22 5 Creating Font Files w4cadga biaety ks eawen wee eee DER 22 6 Viewing Sample Text gid cpt cpdiwertdueeridun cas 22 8 Opening Font Files c stceaceiawaerees aed dane nediwes s 22 8 Saving FONGFIES eaae aae Bee aria wach donde ae a ak TESA alive 22 9 Pining Files swits owe dee sinnene eiae stew anes e Gee 22 10 Creating an Application Using a Font File anaana aaa 22 11 Troubleshooting aaa aaa 22 15 Translating Application Textin Excel oo cece eee eee eee 22 16 Validating and Transferring Applications Creating Reports Table of Contents ix Chapter 23 Chapter Objectives cicsataceieivdaeeeeeentdedaeeid ead 23 1 Helpful FA MNES cy Snes sp dy sec de teh Db dace Ma ec aa de Sa a A 23 1 Validating ACDICAUONS eisa kinds edd weak wnes 23 2 Correcting Validation Errors scis Sisscsadendeeedaesane es 23 3 Printing Validation Messages ccc cece eee eee eens 23 4 Sending Validation Messages to File 0000005 23 5 Transter DUONG pon dirama seirian naikin aa a aa a Savard 23 6 PanelView Terminal 0a 23 6 Memory Cafi taco ccd ceyeasoases ass gasueeseudas kegs 23 7 DOS Filiau ar ae een a oie ae aka Bs rae oe wre 23 7 Transfer Utilities 2cioste sche tage aa 23 8 PanelBuilder Application Menu ccc cece eee eee 23 8 Application File Transfer Utility 0 ccc cece ee eee 23 8 PanelView DOS File Transfer Utility 0 0 cece eee eee 23 8 intemal DEL DIVE oxsitcdiss
75. A peer to peer protocol that combines features of ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategories D1 data transparency and F1 two way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses DH485 Allen Bradley network protocol for RS 485 communications Glossary 3 DH link Data Highway Plus link An Allen Bradley token passing baseband link for a local area network dialog A window that opens temporarily to request information Dialogs have options you must choose before PanelBuilder can carry out a command dimmed Unavailable or disabled A dimmed button or command is displayed in light gray instead of black and it cannot be chosen double click To rapidly press and release a mouse button twice without moving the mouse Double clicking carries out an action like opening a dialog box download The process of transferring an application from the computer running PanelBuilder to a Panel View terminal PC memory card or DOS file drag To move an item on the screen by selecting the item and then pressing and holding down the mouse button while moving the mouse dynamic object An object that interacts with a controller address format bar A horizontal bar that appears below the tool bar The format bar contains tools for formatting objects and text Commands on the format menu carry out the same action as the tools on the format bar function keys A set of keys labeled F1 F10 F1 F16 or F1
76. Buttons 1 Parm p Oper Conan Object Paimta E iaire io Cemides in Slater r iis Tasma Prieta O ijas Lait Tanaina feats E Dingle baii m cian cn paiia Mome Cud VF Arga Laai Pom Cad I Hoye Lasd hem Cart D leard Frc Cd H rreak Apte ehk Diet ected Exits dialog without saving changes Saves all changes and exits dialog To move around a dialog box e Move mouse pointer to field and click the left mouse button e Or press TAB to move forward through fields and SHIFT TAB to move backward through fields e Or press the ALT key and the underlined letter of a field name For example to move to the Terminal Name field press ALT T Publication 2711 6 0 5 10 PanelBuilder Basics Spreadsheet Editor Each spreadsheet has a popup menu to perform operations Cut Cray Copy Ctrl C Faste Chey Insert and Paste Cth Append State Cre Inzert State Ing Delete State Del Move State Up Ctrl U Move State Down Ctrl D Embedded Variable Use Existing Text New Text ID Publication 2711 6 0 Column Row Drag to shrink row height or column width Cell or Field Cursor PanelBuilder uses a spreadsheet editor to e edit states of multistate and list objects e view and edit all text in the application e edit alarms and triggers The conventions of using the spreadsheet are the same regardless of what PanelBuilder operation you are performing Each row defines data for one state of a multistate or lis
77. Buttons 8 9 Editing Number of States for a Multistate Push Button A multistate push button supports a maximum of 16 states Use only the number of states required To add states to a multistate push button 1 Hold down the right mouse button and choose Append State from the popup menu A new row is added after the last row with the next available state number 2 Repeat step 1 for each state you want to add Each state you add is created with the defaults from State 0 and default text ST 0 ST 1 ST 15 To delete states from a multistate push button select a row number and choose Delete State from the popup menu Editing State Text The Text field contains the text that will appear for each state The default text is the state number ST 0 Double click in the cell and edit the text On Off Type Multistate Push Button Push Button State 0 Text _ ON LOW lt State 0 Text State 1 Text gt OFF NORMAL State 1 Text HIGH lt State 2 Text Other text fields control how the text is formatted for each state Publication 2711 6 0 8 10 Creating Push Buttons Publication 2711 6 0 Entering State Values If Value was selected in the Write area of the Properties tab the Value field appears for each state The Value field specifies a numeric value to send to the write tag address for each push button state The default value for each
78. Character Array Data in a character array are assigned to ASCII variables The length of the character array is protocol dependent Publication 2711 6 0 3 12 Planning an Application Review Addressing Before entering tags in the Tag Editor you may want to record tag addresses using the Address Worksheet in Appendix C For proper address formats refer to your controller s user manual The illustration below shows an example of recording addresses p J ALLENBRADLEY PUMP PRESSURE Z m 200 C4 C3 Co 150 Lae 100 OG P CONTROL 50 C Z Tag Name PRESSBG2 4 F ELE Tie ag Name Ho A MENU TagName PB2 TagName Pai Ga aeoaea A0 Ce Ce Ce Cel Ge Ge Ge Ge POH L j Function Keys PUMP CONTROL on __F1 Address 1 020 01 menu __F5 OFF F2 Address 1 020 00 Controller Address jo oe OO QO O BS Address Worksheet Word Address Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 ui 10 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 Tag Name Decimal 15 14 13
79. Check the Print Setup settings and reboot computer If the error reoccurs try another print driver or reinstall the original driver Cannot create error logfile PB550ERR LOG Error log file couldn t be created because of a full disk or write protect condition Check available disk space or write protection Cannot create new TAGMAN Internal error indicates a possible low memory condition Exit the application and try again If the error reoccurs contact A B support Cannot delete device context Printer driver couldn t be closed Cause could be an unstable Windows environment Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again Cannot find desired terminal in Terminal catalog The CATALOG DAT file which stores the terminal type is missing or corrupted Contact A B technical support Cannot delete error logfile PB550ERR LOG New logfile will not be created On startup PanelBuilder couldn t delete the log file Cause could be a write protect error ora SHARE violation Check access attributes of the file Otherwise exit Windows and reboot computer This should clear SHARE violation If the error reoccurs delete PB9OOERR LOG in c ab pbwin directory and try again Cannot find or cannot load the Application File Transfer Utility The WINPFT EXE executable failed to load Verify that WINPFT EXE is in the same di
80. Discrete I O Example The Panel View terminal occupies rack 3 in which its starting module group is 0 An On Off push button object is addressed as 1 032 03 and a corresponding indicator as O 032 00 The PanelView monitors the status of the 8 input words in its rack assignment Rack 3 PanelView I O The PLC ladder program monitors address 1 032 03 8 Input Words 8 Output Words 1032 oe i 03 00 _ The operator presses the object push button the PanelView terminal sets the corresponding address bit li Allen Bradley PeneiView 900 Pump TH CONTROL ON The ladder program determines input bit 03 is On i as 17 16 15 14 131211107 65 43 210 1 032 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Input Word The controller ladder program moves the input bit to the The PanelView terminal reads the indicator address and output bit displays the new state 17 16 15 14 131211 107 65 43210 4 Fientradey Faction 0 0 032 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0j0 1 Output Word Pump CONTROL ON PUMP OFF OFF PUMP ON Publication 2711 6 0 Block Transfers Rack 03 PanelView I O Communications Overview 4 11 Remote I O links
81. Element Sub Element Bit Number Output Read 0 0 0 0 4 0 15 Input Read l 1 0 0 7 0 15 Status Read Write S 2 0 32 NA 0 15 Bit Binary Read Write B 3 0 31 NA 0 511 Timer Read Write T 4 0 39 PRE ACG T35 EN TT 1 2 DN j PRE ACC 11 15 CU CD Counter Read Write C 5 0 31 12 DN OV UN 8 15 EN EU Control Read Write R 6 0 15 ha DN EM ER i UL IN FD Integer Read Write N 7 0 104 NA 0 15 The PanelView terminal can read or write a single bit or value Bit Data Bit data occupies a single bit and represents an On closed or Off open condition DH 485 or DH Address B3 10 1 On 0 Off Remote I O Address B20 0 0 1 On 0 Off Bit addresses greater than 15 B3 24 are not valid when a DH Panel View terminal is communicating with a PLC 5 Least Significant Bit Least Significant Bit LSB triggering is available for multistate indicators list indicators message displays and alarms If priority is important in triggering a series of states or messages use Least Significant Bit triggering e Triggering for messages or states are assigned a word of memory or more than one word if more than 16 messages or states are to be prioritized Each message or state trigger corresponds to a specific bit starting from the right least significant bit e When the word or sequence of words is read right to left by the terminal it ignores bits that are not set 0 an
82. F21 on the Panel View terminals that are used to initiate a function import To bring a bitmap graphic into PanelBuilder from another package inner text Text that appears inside an object that s linked to the object When an object is moved or deleted so is the inner text ISA Refers to Instrumentation Society of America keypad 18 keys on the Panel View terminal used to enter data memory card A storage medium similar to a PC memory card which can store a PanelBuilder application menu A list of available commands in the PanelBuilder application Menu names appear in the menu bar at the top of the window menu bar The horizontal bar containing the names of PanelBuilder menus It appears below the title bar Publication 2711 6 0 Glossary 4 Publication 2711 6 0 node A device on a DH485 network which has a unique address 0 to 31 node address A unique value 0 to 31 assigned to each device on a DH485 network Addressing allows communications between devices All data transfers are assigned a destination address object In the context of PanelBuilder an individual component of an application screen Each object replaces the function of a button switch or indicator on a control panel Objects include controls displays and graphics object attributes See attributes PanelBuilder Software A Microsoft Windows based program used to develop an application to run in a Pane
83. Fill Direction 12 6 Read Tag 12 6 Scale 12 7 Scaling 12 2 Tick Mark Labels 12 8 BitArray 3 11 Bitmaps Color 16 10 Editing 16 10 17 23 Exporting 16 10 16 14 Importing 16 10 16 12 Maximum Size 16 10 Blinking for Objects 17 7 for Text 17 28 Block Transfers Control List Block Write Tag 9 3 Controllers Supporting 4 7 Defining 4 12 20 11 Enabling or Disabling 4 12 Example 4 11 for Communicating Data 20 11 for Pass Through 20 11 Helpful Hints 4 13 Publication 2711 6 0 Length 4 12 Multiple Block Transfers 4 15 Piloted Control List Block Write Tag 9 8 Read 4 12 4 13 20 11 Setting Up 4 12 Starting Address 4 12 Write 4 12 4 14 20 11 Bring Dynamic Objects to Front 7 11 C Character Array 3 11 Color Adding to Background Text 16 9 Background 5 8 Bitmaps 16 10 Converting Color to Grayscale 6 19 20 15 Converting Color to Monochrome 6 19 Converting Monochrome to Color 20 15 Foreground 5 8 Palette 1 3 Setting Defaults 7 13 Setting Foreground Background 17 8 Setting Graphic Foreground Background 17 21 Text 17 29 Using Palette 5 8 Command Conventions 5 4 Check Mark 5 4 Choosing 5 4 Dimmed Command 5 4 Ellipsis 5 4 Triangle 5 4 Using Key Combination 5 4 Communications Adding a Card 2 17 Block Transfers 4 11 DF1 4 4 DH 4 3 DH 485 4 2 Discrete I O 4 9 Remote I O 4 6 Terminal Ports 4 1 Transferring Multiple Blocks 4 15 ContactTypes 8 2 C
84. Highlight a field or fields in the Column box 4 Select Add to append them to the end of the Sort Order list Or select Cancel and start over Publication 2711 6 0 19 12 Working with Tags Printing Tags FEE Table View only Project Print Page Setup Name of current printer that will be used Tags may be printed if the computer is connected to a printer and the correct drivers are installed See the manual for the printer and the Windows manual Make sure your printer is connected and online Important The Print command is not active if a row is being edited indicated by a pencil in the Status column Select a different row which stores the edited row before choosing the Print command To print tags 1 Click the Print tool on the tool bar or choose Print from the Project menu r Print What All Rows Cancel Selected Rows I Print The Cover Page l Opens Print Setup dialog Current Printer Page Setup se Opens Page Setup dialog See the next section to selecta different gt Help printer This field is reset to the default printer each time you print Publication 2711 6 0 Note The name of the current printer is displayed To change to a different printer see the next section 2 Under Print What specify whether you want to print All Rows in the current tag view or only selected rows If selecting specific rows see page 19 8 for details
85. Least Significant Bit When Least Significant Bit is selected the terminal displays the message corresponding to the Least Significant Bit LSB at the tag address data words 0 to 1 999 bits More than one bit may be set at the tag address allowing messages to display in a priority sequence message 0 displays when bit 0 is ON message 1 displays when bit 1 is ON message 1 999 displays when bit 1 999 is ON An error state occurs when all bits are OFF low The message defined for the error state State E displays if defined The default message is Error The controller must clear the last bit displayed The next time the terminal reads the tag address the message corresponding to the next least significant bit is displayed The following example shows what happens if bits 1 and 24 are set at tag address N7 2 24 1 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 0 0j 0 0j 1 0 0 0 0j 0 0 0 0 Tag Address N7 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Automatic Shutdown at 13 33 a Message 1 Displayed 24 1 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Tag Address N7 2 0 O 0 O0 O O0 0 O0 0 0 0 0l 0 0 Jojo Controller P rogram Clears Bit e 24 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 10 0 01010 0 11 0107010101 1010 10 Tag Address N7 2 0
86. Max Range Values must be between 0 and value in Max Range Values must be between 32768 and 32767 in Max Range Values must be between 99 999 997 952 and 999 999 995 904 in Max Range Values must be binary a combination of 0 and 1 Software Error and Warning Messages Meaning Value entered that s not within the valid range What to do Enter a new value within valid range Write access denied for the specified translation file or current directory File or directory could not be accessed Check write access You must assign an input F Key Object must be assigned a function key Assign available function key to object You must assign an input F Key or turn the view on Object must be assigned a function key or the object view must be turned on Assign available function key to object or turn the object view on You must select a valid terminal and firmware combination Publication 2711 6 0 The terminal you selected is not compatible with the firmware specified Make sure terminal and firmware are compatible Validation Message Ack Tag must have BCD signed int or unsigned int data type Appendix E Validation Messages This appendix lists error messages that appear during a validation or download operation Messages are listed alphabetically Meaning An invalid data type was selected for the alarm acknowledge tag What to do Change tag
87. Name check box to specify whether or not to distinguish names of duplicated tags by adding a number to the name The default is to add a number 3 Select a separator from the Separator list box to use between the name and number of duplicated tags 4 Select a number 1 to 4 from the Number of Digits list box to specify the number of characters to the right of the separator Publication 2711 6 0 19 10 Working with Tags Finding Tags FEE Table View only a Copy Pastis Fiore Inser Dephicatc re Deaphicuic Several Publication 2711 6 0 Highlight the value in the Number of Duplicates text box and type a number The number of duplicates is also displayed in the Duplications text box on the tool bar You can highlight and change this value without entering the Duplication dialog Duplications 3 Use this tool or command to locate any tag or tags in the Tag Editor by name Other attributes cannot be used in the Find dialog Important If the active View is BCD Integer the Find command cannot locate tags with bit addresses To find a tag 1 4 Click the Find tool on the tool bar or choose Find from the Edit menu Find First Previous Last Help In the Tag Name box type the name of the tag to find and press ENTER The Find command locates all tag names containing the characters that you type it is not case sensitive For example if you enter switch the Find command loca
88. OFF IAGAAAOAG Oo Co amp Ge Ge R Oe OR Controller writes value of list item to search tag address Terminal reads the search tag data and highlights the corresponding item on the control list ey Terminal writes item value to control list write tag s Creating Control List Selectors Piloted control lists have additional options e Block Write e Inactive States Block Write Tag 9 3 If a block write tag is assigned the terminal writes the values of all items displayed in the control list to a block of addresses starting with the block write start tag address The maximum number of items supported by the block write tag varies for each terminal e 15 values for Panel View 550 terminals e 25 values for Panel View 600 terminals e 24 values for Panel View 900 monochrome and 1000 grayscale terminals e 29 values for Panel View 900 1000 1400 color terminals O mdy Panalo 900 aoa 5 ia BUO E e oa m 00O ma e BESEACH Displayed Portion CONTROL LIST of Control List Stage
89. On to turn the backlight on select Off to turn the backlight off For other PanelView Terminals To Enable disables blinking using the background color of the screen By default background blinking is disabled Reverse Video monochrome amp grayscale Enable disable reverse video dark text graphics on light background The default is normal video light text graphics on dark background Display Intensity For PV900 monochrome terminals sets the intensity of the display Options are 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 The default is 100 highest intensity For color terminals sets the intensity of the display PV900 settings 50 60 70 80 90 100 default highest setting PV600 1000 settings 10 to 100 in 10 step increments PV1400 settings 25 50 75 100 Indicator Bar Blink Enables disables blinking of the indicator bar on the terminal By default the indicator bar does not blink Screen Saver On or Off Turn the screen saver on or off The defaultis off The On setting reduces the screen intensity if user input or controller changes are not received within the specified timeout Timeout Set the period of time before an inactive screen enters screen saver mode Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 minutes Display Intensity For PV900 monochrome terminals sets the display intensity in screen saver mode Settings 0 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 For color and grayscale
90. PLC SLC Data Tables ALLENBRADLEY Peale 960 Level Publication 2711 6 0 Hia GPS EA Full 13 GPS PUMP 3 4 12 GPS CONTROL 12 10 GPS Empty Input Table C Bo G amp amp Cal ile Cal Ge Gs Ged Ge Ce POZ ii Output Table Integer Table Counters Timers Status Controls PanelBuilder uses read and write tags to link objects with specific controller addresses Each tag has a unique name and specifies attributes such as the location and size of an address the type of data to read from or write to the address and scaling parameters Controller Data Files Remote I O allows the Pan elView to write its own output words ControlNet terminals do not support the reading writing of input output tags SLC File Types Planning an Application 3 7 A tag can be assigned to any file type that the PLC SLC or MicroLogix 1000 supports PLC 5 File Types File Type Read Write Identifier File Number Element S Integer Bit Number ub Element Output Read 0 0 0 2770 NA 0 170 Input Read 1 0 2770 NA 0 170 Status Read Write S 2 0 127 NA 0 15 Bit Binary Read Write B 3 999 0 999 NA 0 15999 Timer Read Write T 3 999 0 999 PRE ACC EN TT DN Counter Read
91. Page Down List Key 9 12 11 9 Page Up List Key 9 12 11 9 Palette Using Color 5 8 PanelBuilder Defaults 5 13 Description 1 1 Exiting 6 21 Installing 2 4 Preferences 1 2 Starting 6 2 System Requirements 2 1 PanelBuilder Windows 5 2 Application File Window 5 3 Application Screen Window 5 3 PanelView Advanced Terminal Setup 20 21 Converting Applications 6 18 Features 1 2 Screen Worksheets C 1 Terminal Display Settings 20 22 Terminal Setup 20 2 Publication 2711 6 0 Index 8 Pass Through Communication Drivers 23 14 23 22 DH 485 Setup 23 15 Enabling 4 12 20 11 Remote I O setup 23 14 Timeout 4 12 20 11 Uploading From Terminal 23 22 Pasting Objects 7 20 Screens 6 15 6 16 6 17 Piloted Control List 9 2 Block Write Start Tag 9 3 Inactive States 9 3 Power Up Options Memory Card Load Conditions 20 17 Preset Values 20 17 Restart Screen 20 17 Startup Screen 20 17 Use Downloaded Settings 20 17 Precision of Scaled Values 10 6 Preferences 1 2 When Opening an Application 6 7 21 10 Preset Values for Control Objects 20 18 On Power Up 20 2 Write Initial Values 20 17 Print Only Objects Configuring Print Messages 13 10 Copying a Print Object 13 12 Deleting a Print Object 13 12 Editing a PrintObject 13 12 Renaming a Print Object 13 12 Printing Configuring Printer Port 20 13 Initialization String 20 14 Print Only Message 13 10 Reports 24 5 Tags 19 12 Text
92. PanelView screen objects are updated using the new data The PanelView carries a copy of the logic controller data tables N90 10 to N90 69 N90 8 N90 9 N90 10 A N90 11 Block 2 Transfer N90 12 N90 67 N90 68 N90 69 y N90 70 90 71 Publication 2711 6 0 4 16 Communications Overview Publication 2711 6 0 Remote I O Communication Loss When communication fails on a Remote I O network e Object states are maintained and the message No PLC Communication is displayed on the terminal screen e If Block Transfers are defined for the application but no BTR or BTW instructions are received another message is displayed when the Block Transfer Timeout occurs These messages continue to display until communications is established If a write operation is attempted to the logic program controlling the Panel View objects the terminal will display the message Error Write to Logic Controller failed If a Panel View object is activated during a communication loss the object retains its new state and sends this state value to the controller when communications is established Chapter Objectives Windows Environment Chapter 5 PanelBuilder Basics This chapter covers basics on using PanelBuilder Software Section Page Windows Environment 5 1 PanelBuilder Windows 5 2 Menus 5 4 Tool Bar 5 5 Status Bar 5 5 Format Bar 5 6 Too
93. Screen E tag N7 10 Screen number 10 is displayed The PanelView reads the value 11 at the Screen dy Parlor 80 tag N7 10 Screen number 11 is displayed Lz La Lo Verify Label Content OCaCe iray Paneiow 900 e Label GE Value 10 to N7 10 Approved New JOG Package Screen OUO Conveyor Overload OOO Removed 1 L2 C Conveyor ATEN EF AAGEGGGaG Op Stopped Restart E Fo C C C G E Les ee me 7 E 5 0A ofe a gie Screen 10 displayed re eo Ca Ge G e G G x Screen 11 displayed The controller writes a value of 0 to the control tag N7 10 to return control of the displayed screen back to the operator If the control tag contains any address other than 0 the operator can not change the screen The Controller continues to monitor the process A jam ona conveyor requires immediate attention by the operator The controller writes a value of E 11 to address N7 10 8 7 MN 3 The operator responds and selects another screen The PanelView continues to monitor the process z Value 0 to N7 10 Allen Bradley PanelView 900 S S Value 11 to N7 10 ae 500 Processed ggo JJe New 10 Rejected Screen HOWELL a E G Gd eo Ye ra C Gy Gd G amp G G 6
94. Screen menu Open Close Attributes Create Alarm Banner Name a Lo Cancel Number Background fi Hi Black M Appears only for Color and Grayscale Terminals PanelBuilder assigns a default number starting with 1 and a default name to each screen Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 The maximum number of screens in a file is 255 The actual number allowed depends on available memory in the terminal 2 Accept the name or enter a unique name up to 32 characters in the Name box Use descriptive names to identify screens 3 Accept the number representing the screen s position in the application file window or enter a number in the Number box 4 In the Background box select the screen background color The default is black This field applies only to color and grayscale terminals 5 Click the OK button A blank PanelView screen opens showing the screen number and name in the title bar p An after the application file name in the title bar means the application has been modified but not saved Project Name Application File Name after Save Bei La E l Screen Number and Name You are ready to create screen objects The next chapter provides an overview on working with screen objects Publication 2711 6 0 Working with Applications and Screens 6 11 Opening an To open an existing screen in the application Existing Screen e Double click a screen name in the application file window e O
95. Section Page Helpful Hints 16 1 Graphic Objects 16 2 Graphic Tools 16 2 Drawing a Line 16 3 Drawing Connected Lines 16 4 Drawing Shapes 16 5 Freeform Drawings 16 6 Adding ISA Symbols 16 7 Adding Background Text 16 8 Importing Exporting Bitmap Graphics 16 10 Using Background Graphics 16 16 When creating graphics consider the following Freehand drawings are memory intensive For complicated drawings create a bitmap graphic of the drawing with another source program and then import the graphic Circles process more efficiently in the terminal than ellipses Use circles whenever possible Imported bitmaps are handled like global objects The terminal stores only one copy of a bitmap image regardless of the number of links to it in an application Imported bitmaps cannot exceed the number of pixels supported by the terminal display Larger bitmaps are cropped You can import export monochrome or color bitmaps On color terminals full color bitmaps are imported as standard 16 EGA color images If the bitmap contains more colors each color is mapped to one of the 16 standard colors On grayscale terminals full color bitmaps are imported as 4 color shades of gray images Color bitmaps are exported as they are stored in PanelBuilder If a full color bitmap was reduced to 16 or 6 colors when imported it is exported in the same format When using graphics with control objects use the Move Dynamic Objects Front command af
96. Setup Print Only Object Setup Remote tags are used by the Controller to acknowledge and clear all alarms The Remote Tags are enabled when the Use Optional Fields box is checked Publication 2711 6 0 Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup e acknowledge hold time and snapshot timeout To configure global parameters for alarms 2 Select the Setup tab 1 Choose Alarm Setup from the Application menu e data to print with alarm text when an alarm is printed Alarm Setup Setup Alarm Triggers Alarms r Banner Pop Up Covered Objects Disabled Remote lags j Ack All Tag Ack All Handshake Tag Clear All Alarms Tag Clear All Alarms Handshake Tag This check box enables the Remote tags and optional tag fields on the Alarm Triggers tab See page 15 22 IT Use Optional Fields Alarm Lists Size zo Lyi I Clear Lists On Power Up I Alarm Date I Alarm Time M Acknowledge Date lV Acknowledge Time I Alarm Trigger Value Print Items Ack Hold Time 500 ms x Snapshot Timeout 2 seconds Time YValues 3 Under Banner Popup specify whether Edit Tag covered objects or partially covered objects are disabled when the Alarm Banner is displayed all screen objects are disabled when the Alarm Banner is displayed This i
97. Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_DCBO01 Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Hold in Reset 1 Reset and Continue Comms 0 No connection 1 Connection timed out 3 Cannot obtain E xplicit Client tag Read_DCCommS tatus Unsigned Integer 0 to 13 Peco ent Message TEORIEN 5 Message overrun 11 No network power 12 Dup MAC failure 13 Bus Off interrupt occurred Read_DCinputSize Unsigned Integer 0 to 64 Number of words sent to scanner from PanelView with each I O scan Read DCOutputsize Unsigned Integer 0 to 64 Number of words sent to PanelView from scanner with each I O scan Read_DCScanDelay Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Delay scan of the Explicit Client tags Read_DCAddress Unsigned Integer 0 to 63 Address of PanelView on DeviceNet link Read_DCBaudRate Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 125 Kbps 1 255 Kbps 2 500 Kbps DF1 Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_DFX_ErrorDetectOption Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 BCC 1 CRC Read_DFX_HandshakeOption Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Off 1 On Read_DFX_Parity Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Read_DFX_PortMode Unsigned Integer 0 3 0 N 8 1 1 E 8 1 2 0 8 1 3 N 8 2 Read_DFX_StopBits Unsigned Integer 0 2 0 1 Stop Bit 2 2 Stop Bits 2 1200 3 2400 4 4800 Read_BaudRate Unsigned Integer 2 to 6 5 9600 6 19200 Read_SerCommS tatus Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 Connected 1 Offline 2 Hardware Failure Read_DFX_NodeAddress Unsigned Integer 0 to 253 0 to 253 P
98. The background color changes to the selected color 6 Click the Inner Text tool to exit Inner Text mode If you want the text background to blend in with the object background set the background colors for the object and text to the same color Background Color for Text Background Colors for Text and Object are different and Object are the same ON a ON For multistate objects you set the text foreground and background colors for each state from the State tab of the object s dialog or from the color palette when the state is visible Publication 2711 6 0 17 30 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State Reversing Foreground Background Colors You can reverse the background foreground colors of screen text or the inner text of an object For multistate objects you can toggle the foreground background colors of the inner text for each state This option is not valid for list objects The Toggle Foreground Background option applies to an entire text string not individual letters or words in the string The foreground background colors of text toggle independently of the foreground background colors set for the object or object state Foreground and Background Colors of Text are Reversed on 0 To reverse the foreground and background colors of text 1 Select the object 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format m
99. The following errors and messages are generated by CFG_KT EXE CFG_485 EXE and CFG_DF1 EXE XXX represents the strings KT 485 and DF1 If an error information message is only applicable to one of CFG_KT EXE CFG_485 EXE or CFG_DF1 EXE the applicable program will appear as the first string of the error information message These messages occur normally at startup They indicate the location where the INTERCHANGE Software was installed CFG_XXX 0000 TSR configured no errors detected CFG_XXX 001A Reading device configuration from C RSI IC BIN CFG_KT INI CFG_XXX 001B Reading diagnostic and protocol files from C RSI IC BIN This message occurs normally at shutdown CFG_XXX 0001 TSR terminated no longer resident in memory This message indicates an invalid version of DOS is loaded Consult the INTERCHANGE User Manual for valid and compatible versions of DOS CFG_XXX 0002 TSR not ready invalid version of DOS Binary files downloaded to your communication card are incompatible with the INTERCHANGE Software installed on your system Re install the INTERCHANGE Software CFG_XXX 0003 TSR not configured invalid version of KT protocol file The indicated file could not be found Check to ensure that the path and or file exist CFG_XXX 0004 TSR not configured error opening file lt filename gt The indicated file was found but could not be read Check the permissions on the file CFG_XXX 0005
100. To Single Bit Trigger a 2 entry list indicator by setting or clearing a bit at the read tag address The number of states must be set to 2 before the single bit option is available Least Significant Bit Trigger multiple entries Entries display in a sequence corresponding to bits set at word address es starting with the read tag address The tag data type for least significant bit is unsigned integer Value Trigger a list entry based on a value at the read tag address Each entry is linked to a different value Note If using more than 16 entries for the Least Significant Bit LSB trigger reserve up to 15 consecutive word addresses after the tag address Every 16 entries 1 word address with up to 255 total entries The LSB will only use up to the word of the last entry For the Value option you must select the format of the data from the Data Format list box The data type of the read tag must be compatible with the selected format for the application to validate Use this Format With this Tag Data Type Signed Integer Signed Integer 4 BCD 4BCD IEEE Float IEEE Float Binary Hexadecimal l Octal Unsigned Integer or Bit Array Unsigned Integer Trigger State 0 When If Single Bit was selected in the Read area you must specify whether entry 0 triggers on Bit 0 or Bit 1 Select To Bito Trigger entry 0 when bit is setto 0 and trigger entry 1 when bi
101. Touch Screen Worksheet Note 900 and 1400 terminals have same number of touch cells but cell size is different Project Name Screen Name Number Application Name PanelView 900 1000 Terminal Keypad Worksheet F16 F14 F15 F13 F11 F12 eo i Project Name Screen Name Number Application Name PanelView 1400 Operator Terminal Keypad Worksheet N ez j y _ A A e F15 Pe ee F11 F12 e i PanelView Operator Terminal Address Worksheet Word Address Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Tag Name Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 Word Address Decimal 15 14 3 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 2 Tag Name Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 2 Word Address Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Tag Name Octal 17 6 15 4 123 12 1 0 7 6 5 4 Word Address Decimal 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Tag Name Octal 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 Message AB Utilities error creating project Appendix D Software Error and Warning Messages This appendix lists messages that may appear durin
102. Transferring Applications Remote I O Pass Through Setup When you click the Setup button from the Download or Upload Application dialog for a Remote I O terminal this dialog opens RIO Pass Through Setup Ea Ge Single DH Network OT Cancel C Multiple DH Networks Evan Single DFT Network Local Bridge PLC SLC Node Address fa z Link 10 Remote Bridge PLC SL0 Node Address Enkin m Operator Terminal IV Specify SLC Scanner Slot Rack Address fo z Starting Module O10 23C 45 C 67 Note If more than one COM port is configured with a DH driver the dialog will display available ports Select the appropriate port To configure Remote I O Pass Through parameters 1 Define Remote I O Pass Through parameters as described below 2 Click OK to return to the Application Download dialog Use To Path Single DH Network Transfer an application directly between a computer on the DH network and a PanelView terminal through a single controller Multiple DH Networks Transfer an application between a computer on the local DH network and a PanelView terminal through a PLC controller on a remote DH network Single DF1 Network Transfer an application directly between a computer and a PanelView terminal through the DF 1 port on a PLC controller Local Bridge PLC SLC Node Address Specify the address 0 77 octal of the PLC on the local DH network to which yo
103. Triggered gt V 06 18 96 15 00 Oven Temp High List keys are accessed from the Objects gt List Keys submenu Creating Alarms 15 5 Cursor Alarm List Examples ACK Indicator WI Acknowledged Alarm Unacknowledged Alarm No Acknowledgement Required E gt V A 06 19 96 16 295 Oven T 06 19 96 16 OG LE 2G Ss 06 18 96 15 30 LS101 00 06 18 96 15 03 Oven T 00 06 18 96 15 03 Tank O i a A ACK Indicator Trigger Time and Date ACK Time and Date Alarm Message 16 55 123456789 1 Oven Temp High M 16 30 2001 LS101 Triggered mW 15 00 400 00 Oven Temp High Vi 15 00 600000 Tank Overflow Trigger Value Trigger Time Alarm Message 123456789 1 Oven Temp High 16 50 Time Variable in Alarm Text 2001 LS101 Triggered gt V 400 00 Oven Temp High A 600000 Tank Overflow Trigger Value Alarm Message 2 Line Alarm List 06 19 96 16 55 Oven lt Alarm Text Temp too High wraps to second line M 06 19 96 16 30 LS101 Event Triggered due to Blockage PV 06 18 96 15 00 06 18 96 15 03 Oven Temp too High VJ 06 18 96 15 00 06 18 96 15 03 Tank Ae at Station 1 Trigger Time and Date ACK Time and Date Publication 2711 6 0 15 6 Creating Alarms Creating the Alarm Banner This section shows how to create the Alarm Banner for an Screen Ne
104. Width 5 11 Changing Row Height 5 11 Cut Copy Paste 5 12 Using 5 10 Stacking Objects Bring to Front 7 11 Move Dynamic Objects to Front 7 11 Move to Back 7 11 Standard Control List 9 2 States Control List 9 10 List Indicator 12 22 Multistate Indicator 12 16 Operations Performed On 7 17 Push Button 8 8 Screen List Selector 11 7 Static Objects 1 6 Status Bar 5 2 Status Tags Screen Number Status 20 26 20 30 Time or Date Status 20 26 20 30 Support Technical P 4 Symbols ISA B 7 System Requirements 2 1 T Table View Tag Editor 19 1 Tag Editor 1 3 Changing Between Views 19 3 Description 19 2 Form View 19 3 Import Export Utility 19 15 Navigating 19 3 Table View 19 1 Tool Bar 19 1 19 3 Using Tools 19 15 Validating Tags 19 4 Tags Address 19 5 Array Size 19 5 Control 20 25 Copying 19 8 Data Entry Limits 19 5 Data Types 19 5 Defining 3 13 Duplicating 19 9 Exporting 19 18 Finding 19 10 Publication 2711 6 0 Index 10 Tags Having the Same Name 19 17 Import Export Errors 19 20 Importing 19 16 Initial Value 19 5 Inserting and Deleting 19 7 Internal Read Only G 1 Node Name 19 5 Printing 19 12 Replacing 21 8 Saving Form View 19 7 Saving Table View 19 7 Scaling 19 5 Sorting 19 11 Status 20 26 Tag Description 19 5 Tag Name 19 5 Update Frequency 19 5 Validating 19 4 Viewing 19 7 Technical Support Information Required 5 14 Terminal Preset Val
105. address For information on valid addresses for a specific type of controller refer to the user manual for that controller Note If you select the IEEE Float data type for a tag and enter an incorrect address e g S2 4 the tag editor does not validate the error You may need to copy the floating point data into an integer file before downloading the application to the terminal Defining Tags Oe ses Habr mb Prot zy ee Bikes TETI alele HL SS el e Working with Tags 19 5 Table View Form View To move to a specific field on the Form View press the ALT key a type the letter that is underlined in the field name Field Description Valid Characters Notes Tag Name 2 The name of the tag Maximum characters 32 eif you type an invalid character the Tag Editor beeps and eA Z a z 0 9 does not display it ehyphen underscore _ ethe tag name must be unique within a project percent cannot begin with 0 9 hyphen or percent etag names are not case sensitive edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable characters Data Type The data format for Select one of the following ethe data type must be compatible with the data format the tag ebit selected in the object s dialog aire integer pened er esigned integer tg elEEE Float isis ees Unsigned Wf ebit array og echaracter array Unsigned Ir Alternate Methods Type the first letter of the data type For example type b for the bi
106. allow the transfer of blocks up to 64 words between a PLC and a Panel View terminal Block transfers are assigned to a single byte of input data module control byte and output data module status byte in the Panel View rack These two bytes control the operation of the block transfer and are no longer available for discrete I O The status and control byte always occupy the low byte of the lowest module group in the Panel View rack assignment For example if the starting module group is 0 xy rN Starting Module Group 0 m N w gt v a Es SNo op 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 j T II lt Status Byte gt Output Word 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 lt Module Control Byte Input Word OO So No matter how many block transfers are assigned 1 to 10 only one byte is reserved in the input rack and one in the output rack Block transfer directions are in reference to the PLC e Block Transfer Reads BTR are inputs to the PLC and transfer data from control devices such as push buttons on the Panel View e Block Transfer Writes BTW are outputs from the PLC and transfer data to indicators such as bar graphs on the Panel View Block Transfer Write ea fag lao
107. an object inside the banner To deselect the banner click anywhere outside the banner Graphics 3 On keypad terminals double click each Alarm object to open its List Keys dialog and select the function key that will activate the button Alarm List Acknowledge Global Object Clear Print Publication 2711 6 0 Clear Alarm List Print Alarm List Ack All Touch cell input is automatically selected for touch screens Creating Alarms 15 7 4 Choose Close from the Screen menu to Close the Alarm Banner screen or double click the Control menu box on the screen The Alarm Banner appears in the Application File window as a separate screen It cannot be renamed like other screens SCE bg I Mein Menu Misir Statue F Wor Speed Alarm Message Display With the Alarm Message Display selected in the Alarm Banner you can access other alarm text in the application To scroll through alarm text in the application 1 Select Alarm Message Display in the Alarm Banner 2 Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through available alarm text To select alarm text to appear in the Alarm Message Display 1 Double click the Alarm Message Display in the Alarm Banner The Alarms tab Alarm Setup dialog opens 2 Select the row number of the alarm text you want to appear in the display 3 Click OK to exit the Alarm tab The Alarm Message Display is updated with the sel
108. break The options are Form Feed or blank lines The default is Form Feed 5 Type the characters in the Printer Initialization String box that will initialize the printer after communications is established The initialization string can contain a maximum of 20 characters The default is a Null string Use these rules when entering string e to enter control characters decimal values 0 31 type before the character Upper or lowercase is accepted c or C To Enter Decimal Value Type CTRL 0 Q CTRLA CTRLZ 1 26 A Z CTRL 27 al CTRL 28 A CTRL 29 1 CTRL 30 ii CTRL_ 31 ea toenter a literal character precede the character with a backslash For example to enter type e to enter decimal values between 126 256 precede the decimal value with the backslash For example to enter the decimal equivalent of 255 type 255 e each sequence preceded with or represents a single character in the initialization string For example 255 and each represent one character in the 20 character string 6 Click the Save as Defaults button to save the settings 7 Click OK to exit and return to the Setup tab Changing the Terminal Type Terminal and Communication Setup 20 15 You can convert an application from one terminal type to another terminal However you may need to modify properties of the application to make it compatible with the terminal Converting Applicati
109. cere ramme oe Tegin 7 ibr application birg wee rer mir Tag opodhhkmiwori os ered Pejic Asme FPIMC_AR Replace Teg ie Prakrti Drabaar Harri hiie Sith Tag iom dpp aiaa Hame hadic Taa j i Perine Fiegeace Hose Carei ines The dialog displays the name of the first application tag in the project Publication 2711 6 0 6 6 Working with Applications and Screens Publication 2711 6 0 Respond as follows Click To Replace the project tag with the application tag Select Yes if Yes you know that a specific tag has been modified and you want to update the project database Ignore the application tag Do not replace the tag in the project no database with the application tag Replace All Replace all project tags with the application tags Replace None Ignore all application tags Do not replace any tags in the project Cancel Open Cancel the open After processing the tags the dialog opens again to verify a one to one correspondence between the devices in the application and the devices in the project When the application is loaded the application file window opens with a list of screens by number and name in the file EFAS PVA Keypa FRR ce re Wain biang Feed Purp J Task Level 4 Wontlar Open a screen in the application file window as described on page 6 11 or open a new screen as described on page 6 10 Working with Applications and Screens 6 7 Setting Pref
110. color 4 To change the background color e Click a color on the bottom row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format gt Background Color menu The background color changes to the selected color You can also set foreground background colors for inner text e inner graphics monochrome bitmaps only If you want the background of the object to match the text or graphic you must set the background colors separately For multistate objects you can set the foreground background colors for each state of an object from the State tab of the object s dialog For list objects the background color applies to the entire list State Formatting Objects and Text 17 9 Reversing Foreground Background Colors You can reverse the foreground background colors of objects For multistate objects you can reverse the foreground background of each state e On monochrome terminals the background and foreground colors of an object toggles between black and white ve wou gt e On color and grayscale terminals the background and foreground colors of an object toggle between the set colors You cannot reverse the foreground background colors of a list object To reverse the foreground and background colors 1 Select the object 2 If the object is a multistate object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format
111. components required to load INTERCHANGE communication drivers File s are missing or not found 1 Verify that the path statement in AUTOEXEC BAT includes C RSIIC BIN or C ABIC BIN 2 Verify that the environment variable in AUTOEXEC BAT is set to ABIC_CONFIG C RSI IC BIN or C ABIC BIN 3 Verify that WPFTDLL DLL is in C AB PBWIN 4 Verify that DTLKTW DLL is in C RSI IC BIN or C ABIC BIN Downloading with the PanelView File Transfer Utility Problem Cause Recommended Action Cannot download or upload an application using the the PFT utility setup file DEFAULT STP INTERCHANGE is running and 1 Type ABICSTOP at the DOS prompt For example using the same COM port that was C gt ABICSTOP Specified in the PFT configuration 2 Comment the following lines in the C AWINDOWS SYSTEM INI file 386E nh Device V DF 1 386 COMIIRQ 4 or COM2IRQ 3 COM1VDF1 or COM2VDF1 or 386E nh Device V 485 386 COMIIRQ 4 or COM2IRQ 3 COMI1VDF1 or COM2VDF1 Problem Unable to perform verify operation Incorrect Terminal S eries Revision Cause cannot verify the application loaded ina DH 485 or RS 232 terminal because the firmware version is earlier than V1 06 Downloading Using the WINPFT Utility Recommended Action The File Transfer Utility WINP FT Upgrade the terminal s firmware Unable to perform verify operation Download operation continuing PanelBuilder coul
112. consecutive words Reserve up to 16 consecutive words bit 0 to bit 255 after the tag address The lowest order bit that changes from 0 to 1 will trigger an alarm whose trigger value corresponds to that bit Higher order bits are ignored until the lower order bit is cleared by the controller program Cut Copy Paste Insert and Paste Append Trigger Insert Trigger Delete Trigger EditT ag Move Trigger Up Move Trigger Down Use Optional Fields Ctrl Ctrl C Ctrl Ctr Cirle re Del Ctrl L Ctr Value Trigger an alarm based on a value at the Trigger Tag address Trigger values for alarms are defined on the Alarms tab Only one alarm can be triggered ata time for each trigger 5 To add additional triggers choose Append Trigger from the popup menu for each trigger you want to add Repeat steps 3 and 4 to define each trigger 6 Select the Alarms tab to assign the triggers to alarm messages Trigger Operations Many trigger operations are accessed from a menu To open the menu hold down the right mouse button or type CTRL M Select To Cut Cut the selected trigger to the clipboard Copy Copy the selected trigger to the clipboard Paste Paste the contents of the clipboard at the current row Insert and Paste Paste the copied or cut trigger above the current row Append Trigger Add a new trigger after the last trigger Insert Trigger Insert a
113. contains the following sections Chapter 3 Section Page Design Checklist 3 1 Applications and Projects 3 2 Steps for Creating an Application 3 3 Safety Considerations 3 4 Screen Worksheets 3 4 Linking Screen Objects to Controller Data 3 6 Data Types 3 8 Data Formats 3 9 Review Addressing 3 12 Defining Tags 3 13 emory Requirements Tips 3 14 Before creating an application check the following Za VM Consider safety requirements Plan and document application IY Design screens I Review data types VY Review data formats If Review addressing of objects If Review memory requirements Publication 2711 6 0 3 2 Planning an Application Applications and Projects Publication 2711 6 0 An application is the basic unit of PanelBuilder software It is designed to be loaded in a specific type of Panel View terminal and run using a specific type of logic controller It includes screens with controls indicators graphics text and screen controls e tags which are named references to data addresses in a logic controller e alarm controls e runtime communication parameters e operating parameters of terminal A project is assigned or created when an application is created It links the application to e tag database e specific devices PanelView terminal and controller that the application will interact with PanelBuilder software can convert an
114. correct the invalid length of a block transfer Cannot use Bit Array tags with LSB triggering in FMW 1 00 1 xx A bit array has been specified as a Least Significant Bit trigger Select a different data type Cannot use Internal Tags with LSB triggering An internal tag is specified for use with Least Significant Bit triggering of an indicator Select a non internal tag Cannot write to output of discrete rack The write tag of a control object is assigned a discrete rack output address The PanelView cannot write data to a controller output Change the address of the write tag controller input or use a different write tag for the object Can t trigger off of an internal tag Internal tag specified as a trigger Select a non internal tag Copying Font File Status message displayed while saving a font file to disk or memory Wait for save operation to complete Custom text for numeric scratch pad Enter value text is limited to number characters Text is limited to 30 15 for characters when single double byte is selected Reduce text or change font size Custom text for numeric scratch pad to text is limited to number characters Text is limited to 4 2 for characters when single double byte is selected Reduce text or change font size Data bit Num number out of range The bit number assigned to an object state is out of range Open the object s dialog an
115. create a cursor point or keypad enable button Both objects activate a scratchpad and the terminal s keypad for numeric data entry ASCII Entry gt Open a submenu that lets you create a cursor point or keypad enable button Both objects activate a scratchpad for entering a character string Control List Selectors gt Open a submenu to create a standard or piloted control list Indicators gt Open a submenu to create a multistate or list indicator Numeric Data Display Create a numeric data display Bar Graph Create a horizontal or vertical bar graph without scaling Create a scale with tick marks to the right left top or bottom acae of a bar graph Message Display Create an ASCI message display for displaying status information or instructions to the operator Graphics gt Open a submenu of drawing tools for creating lines shapes freeform drawings and background text List Keys Open a submenu of list keys Move Up Move Down Home End Page Up Page Down Backspace Enter Alarm List Create an alarm list which displays triggered alarms Alarm Buttons gt Open a submenu of alarm buttons that you can place in the Alarm Banner Acknowledge Clear Print Clear Alarm List Print Alarm List Acknowledge All Global Object Open a dialog that lets you select a global object for placement on a screen Required on PanelView 900 1400 Touc
116. data did not pass the CRC check and will not be used to update the project database Use Communication Setup to recreate devices Saved tag data is missing or corrupted and cannot be used to update the tag database The tag data does not pass the CRC check and will not be used to update the tag database Use the Tag Editor to recreate the tags Scale factor value of value has too many Significant digits A scale factor was entered with more than 4 Significant digits Enter a valid scale factor Search and control tags are required for Piloted Control Lists Either a search tag and or a control tag was not defined for a pilot control list Both are required Open the object s dialog and enter the missing search tag and or control tag Slot Number of Address does not match other tags A tag has a different slot number than other tags in the application An application can only access tags from one slot of an SLC Verify that all tags in the application use the same SLC controller slot number Startup screen must be assigned to an existing screen Startup screen assigned to a nonexistent screen in the application The screen may have been deleted Select the P ower up tab from Terminal Setup dialog and reassign the startup screen State number number out of range An object has an invalid state number Select the object open the List Management dialog and delete the i
117. device An internal font size with the same height as the currently selected external font does not exist for a device having a list cursor or an acknowledge icon Make sure that an internal font size exists with the same height as the currently selected external font Initial Min Max Scale or Offset value of value not valid or not in range The value entered for the initial value min max value or scale offset value is invalid or out of range for the tag data type Enter a value thatis within the valid range for the data type nitial Value entry of value for tag name may result in out of range data value Initial value specified for the tag is not within the min max data entry limits entered in the Tag Editor Enter an initial value that is within the valid min max range for the tag nitial Value entry of value for tag name will yield controller Initial Value of value due to caling and rounding wo A warning that indicates the initial value sent to the controller will be rounded because of the precision of the scale factor Action is not required unless a rounded value is unacceptable itial Value of value for tag name yields an Initial value specified for the tag is not within the valid range for the data type Enter an initial value that is valid n Out of Range controller Initial Value of value n valid length Bit Arrays cannot cross word boundaries
118. e change text alignment left right center e toggle blinking on off e change foreground background colors toggle foreground background colors Formatting options are applied to objects and states from the e Format menu or Format bar see Chapter 17 State tab of object s dialog see page 7 15 On color and grayscale terminals you can apply color defaults to objects of the same type For example you might want all push buttons in the application to use the same colors Create one push button edit it and then use the Set Object Color Defaults command All new push buttons will be created with the default colors 1 Create the object that you want to use as the default for others 2 Edit the object Change the line or border colors and size If the object has several states configure the different states You cannot add text as the default 3 Select the object and choose Set Object Color Defaults from the Edit menu Every new object of this type that you create will appear like the one just created Or if you want to apply defaults using an object that already exists select the object and choose the Set Object Color Defaults command Color defaults are maintained across applications and across sessions of PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 7 14 Working with Objects Editing Object Attributes Each object except for graphics has attributes that define its operation Vi
119. have to click Setup Select appropriate driver gt fremra 51 E to edit verify terminal parameters cre drar D1 ieh Select terminal from which to gt upload application Enter name of PVA file in which to res TP Br save the uploaded application or click Browse to search fora file Veal Hato m Preeee BHEE E pipa F Select the type of terminal from 5 Emari Tating which you are uploading application aes a Under Presets select values to upload e Original to upload presets initial values defined for inputs e Current States to upload current input After clicking OK the following dialog opens values in terminal PTI Seon 18 miem gt e brome DE beee bepa Te bima AT Tapp S Thi FPN ler eet mpe Tah emed The application is saved to PVA file and you return to the utility workspace Open PVA application from PanelBuilder File menu The PVA file is automatically translated to a PBA file for use in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 23 28 Validating and Transferring Applications Decreasing the Size of Application for Downloads Exceeding RAM Memory in Terminal Publication 2711 6 0 If the application is too large to download the following dialog opens The dialog displays the size of the application and the amount of available space in the Panel View terminal Download PanelView application size of 336295 bytes exceeds
120. immediately others place you in a mode to complete the action touch cell One of 128 or 384 rectangular areas on the display of a Panel View terminal that can sense when touched The Panel View 550 600 has 128 touch cells the 900 1400 has 384 touch cells touch screen A screen with touch cells that respond when touched Publication 2711 6 0 Glossary 6 Publication 2711 6 0 upload The process of transferring an application from a Panel View terminal or memory card to the computer running PanelBuilder validate The process of checking an application for warnings and errors Applications that are validated successfully can be downloaded verify The process the Panel View uses to check an application for errors workspace The area of the window that displays the information contained in the PanelBuilder application zoom Enlarging or reducing the view of the screen so that objects look larger or smaller than their actual size Changing the view affects the appearance of objects not their actual size A Addressing 3 12 Alarms Clear Button 1 7 Alarms Acknowledge 1 7 15 3 Acknowledge All Alarms 15 27 Acknowledge All Handshake Tags 15 27 Acknowledge All Value 15 23 Acknowledge Tag 15 23 Adding Variable Data 15 21 Alarm List 1 7 15 4 15 9 Alarm List Examples 15 5 Banner 15 2 15 6 Banner Position 15 8 Buttons 15 3 Clear Alarm 1 7 15 3 Clear Alarm List 1 7 15 3 Clear All Al
121. indicating that it is selected To select more than one column 1 Click on the column header of the first column you want to select hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the last column you want to include in the selection 2 Release the mouse button Selected columns are highlighted To select the entire spreadsheet Click the empty box in the upper left corner of the spreadsheet Changing Column Width and Row Height The spreadsheet opens with default column and row settings While working in the spreadsheet you can shrink or stretch the width of the columns and the height of the rows To change the width of a column 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the columns The cursor changes to a double arrow lt i 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the column width You can hide a column by shrinking it until it disappears To show the column stretch it Publication 2711 6 0 5 12 PanelBuilder Basics Publication 2711 6 0 To change the height of all rows 1 Place the cursor on the line dividing the rows A The cursor changes to a double arrow 2 Hold the left mouse button down and drag the cursor to stretch or shrink the height of all rows You can hide all rows by shrinking them until they disappear To show the rows stretch them Changing Order of Columns To change the order of columns 1 Select the column you want to move 2 Hold down
122. linked to a different value Note If using more than 16 messages for the Least Significant Bit LSB trigger reserve up to 124 consecutive word addresses after the tag address Every 16 messages 1 word address maximum of 2 000 messages The LSB only uses up to the word of the last message For the Value option you must select the format of the data from the Data Format list box The data type of the read tag must be compatible with the selected format for the application to validate Use this Format With this Tag Data Type Signed Integer Signed Integer 4 BCD 4BCD Binary Hexadecimal Unsigned Integer Octal or Bit Array Unsigned Integer Trigger If Single Bit was selected in the Read area you must specify whether message 0 state 0 triggers on Bit 0 or Bit 1 Select To Trigger Bito Message 0 when bitis set to 0 and trigger message 1 when bit is setto 1 Bit1 Message 0 when bitis set to 1 and trigger message 1 when bit is setto 0 Read Tag Specifies the name of the tag address that triggers a message If the tag doesn t exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Print Select the Print check box to print messages as they are triggered When a state is triggered the text associated with the state is printed on the connected printer Publication 2711 6 0 13 8 Creating Message Displays Configuring Messages Use the S
123. maintains all other characteristics such as fill pattern line type and so on If blinking is invalid for an object the command is dimmed For multistate objects you can activate blinking for a state directly from the State tab of the object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 8 Formatting Objects and Text Selected Foreground Color View Box updates as Foreground and Background colors are selected Publication 2711 6 0 State Setting Foreground Background Colors For color and grayscale terminals you can change the foreground and background colors of objects from the Format menu or the color palette The palette has either 16 colors for color terminals or 4 colors for grayscale terminals On color terminals the initial background color of objects is blue and the foreground is white On grayscale terminals the initial background color of objects is black and the foreground white a Color Palette Selected Background Color To set the foreground and background colors of an object 1 Select the object 2 If the object is a multistate object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 To change the foreground color e Click a color on the top row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format Foreground Color menu The foreground color changes to the selected
124. maximum size of 245695 bytes You can eliminate some of the upload data and try again Note You will need to reenter any eliminated data if you try to recover the PanelBuilder application via upload Eliminating PanelBuilder Application Data will cause a non uploadable application to be created Upload Data Records i Pan pp IX Tag Data 119 bytes IX Network Data 71 bytes Cancels download Retries download without the data specified in check boxes Creates PVA file but terminates download because file is too large for PanelView terminal You can reduce the size of the application by eliminating e PanelBuilder Application Data including all screens and objects e Tag information for the application e Network Data including run time communication parameters for the Panel View terminal and controller Special Considerations e If you eliminate PanelBuilder application data you will not be able to upload the application The entire application must be re created e If you eliminate tag data you will be able to upload the application but will need to re enter the tags in the Tag Editor e If you eliminate network data you will be able to upload the application but must re enter runtime communication parameters for devices in the Terminal Setup dialogs The following dialog opens if the application you are downloading exceeds the RAM memory in the Panel View terminal Pansies FUAM sadje of PO
125. memory to install tool bar Not enough memory to load bitmap Not enough memory to load popup menu Low memory error Close other applications and other open screens If the error reoccurs exit Windows and reboot your computer Not enough resource memory to open dialog Low memory error Close other applications and retry If error reoccurs exit Windows reboot and retry Note Applications created by this demonstration version of PanelBuilder 900 will not be compatible with licensed versions Application file created using a Demo release of the configuration software will not be supported by the released version Recreate file with a released version of the PanelBuilder Configuration Software Objects in application have touch cells assigned Edit object attributes before changing application type to Non Touch When changing the terminal type from touch keypad to keypad only you must reassign touch cell objects to function keys For each object change touch cell input to function key input or delete the object Out of memory Close other applications and try again Otherwise select cancel to quit Attempt to allocate additional memory has failed Close other Window applications and retry If unsuccessful PanelBuilder exits PanelView application size of number bytes exceeds maximum size of number bytes You can eliminate some of the upload data and try again The appli
126. node right click in a node field and select Delete Node from the shortcut menu From this menu you can also sort multiple nodes by name address type or only modified nodes gt To copy rename or delete devices from a project see page 21 4 6 Click OK to exit and return to Terminal Setup dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Terminal and Communication Setup 20 5 Defining DH This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a Communications Panel View terminal and a PLC or SLC 5 04 controller that will communicate on a DH link You will define parameters for these two devices e DH PanelView Terminal e PLC 5 or SLC 5 04 Controller PLC 5 Controller eae al PanelView Terminal _ J SLC 5 04 Controller bal 32 e lmer gj z 55 i ZE 6 3 m m i A f DH Link ae j go oo ao oo oo o0 fala o0 aj ao ial Addressing for a DH application is similar to DH 485 applications except the DH link supports 64 nodes 0 77 octal the DH 485 link supports 32 nodes The DH link supports higher baud rates To configure DH communications 1 Choose the Setup tab from the Terminal Setup dialog 2 Verify the terminal name entered in the Terminal Name field 3 Click the Comms Setup button The Communication Setup dialog shows the current DH settings for th
127. oaa 9 1 Standard Control LISIS recre pirerar pranimi iaa iaaa wana 9 2 Piloted Control Lists naana 9 2 Control List Options siccivvs de eadeadeeed neawdede andere aa 9 4 Creating a Control List Selector aaa 9 5 Setting Properties of a Control List Selector 9 6 Configuring States fora Control List Selector cc eee 9 10 CreagmngiStheye sivactiad i bupateddapenderdobnay dees 9 12 Publication 2711 6 0 iv Table of Contents Creating Data Entry Controls Creating Screen Selectors Creating Bar Graphs Indicators and Numeric Displays Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter 10 Chapter Objectives c 0cc heceaenaevaaeeraweaawaee des De PMNS resserrer uere e een heaven ee eis Numeric Enty COUMOS cicupiwcedeptia cei buhay eden ustegs Keypad Enable Button 2s sencade eure kasd Rus basy tenes Enty CUTSOr POING car aiiai a ahea e aetna a aa Pana Scratchpad ocer cried eae dukew raine ie waney EE RE Numeric Entry Examples anaana Data Entry Scaling soona a Creating a Numeric Entry Object aaaea Setting Properties of a Numeric Entry Object ASCI Eny CONTOS ccactaseveredenexea badawa tas cea Keypad Enable BURON ic cote ceiien oan Enty CUrOr PON cas cbekdane ena esew een beaweeaaeede ASCII Scratchpad Keypad or Keypad Touch Screen Terminals ASCII Scratchpad 550 Touch Screen Terminals ASCII Scratchpad 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen Terminals Scratchpad in other Languages
128. object are two unique objects Changes to the original object do not affect the copied object Application Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 EE O O fe l S Object 1 Screen Screen Ba Object 2 Object2 Device Device Device Object Object Object Publication 2711 6 0 14 4 Using Global Objects Defining a Global Object Publication 2711 6 0 This section shows how to define an object for global use Defining an object for global use adds it to the Global Object dialog From this dialog you select a global object and place it on a screen Note Each control object must have a unique write tag unless the object is defined as a global object If you create separate but identical control objects on different screens with the same write tag the application will not validate To define an object for global use 1 Click the Options tab from the dialog of the selected object Pumie mies Opems F um bgect ies n D Wah for pha Selection Mite Spt kop come eben fe aia a hes Reki CIRLYEATER ior a sme bna CTAL C ton pepp CIAL ilor pasha CIAL ir oot 2 Check the Mark for Global Selection check box indicating the object is available for global selection The object is added to a list of objects available for global use The next section shows how to access global objects To disable the global setting cl
129. open requested screen Close open screens to free additional resource memory A low memory condition exists Close open screens Cannot parse address for tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical support if error continues Cannot print line Failed to send a text string This may be a printer error The printout is terminated Check the Print Setup settings P rint S pooler settings and the printer Cannot print text string Failed to send a text string This may be a Check the Print Setup settings P rint S pooler printer error The printout is terminated settings and the printer Cannot read the Terminal Catalog datafile The CATALOG DAT file is missing or Contact A B technical support corrupted This file stores the terminal type that is selected when creating a new application or changing the terminal type for an application Cannot renumber text with same text ID 5 Same number was used to renumber a message Message numbers must be unique Select a different number or cancel operation Ca 3 not shutdown print device Print session couldn t be terminated Allow printout to complete Ca Ss not translate unsaved applications Can t translate a PBA file to a P VA file until the application is saved Save the application with the default file name or save with different file name Cannot write to error logfile PB
130. screen e copy cut an object to another application An object retains all attributes during copy and cut operations unless the target application was created for a different terminal type See page 7 21 Global objects cannot be copied cut and pasted To use an object globally you must use the Global Objects command Chapter 14 To copy an object on the screen 1 Select the object you want to copy 2 Click the Copy tool or choose Copy from the Edit menu PanelBuilder copies the object to the clipboard 3 Click the Paste tool or choose Paste from the Edit menu An outline of the object appears 4 Move the outline to a new location and click the left mouse button to paste the object To change the attributes of the pasted object double click the object To copy or cut an object from one screen to another 1 Select the object you want to copy or cut 2 Click the Copy or Cut tool from the tool bar Or choose Copy or Cut from the Edit menu PanelBuilder copies cuts the object to the clipboard 3 Open the screen to receive the object If already open activate the screen by selecting the screen name from the Window menu 4 Click the Paste tool or choose Paste from the Edit menu An outline of the object appears 5 Move the outline to a new location and click the left mouse button to paste the object To change the attributes of the pasted object double click the object Working with Objects 7 21 To copy or c
131. screen to associate with each entry in the screen list Editing Text Entries The Text field specifies the text that will actually appear in the list for the assigned screen The row number indicates the position of the text in the list The default text assigned for each list entry is ST and the row number Double click in the cell and edit the text Other text fields control how the text is formatted for each entry text size changes to text size apply to entire list e underline e text blink e alignment left right center e foreground color Creating List Keys Ce Push Buttons Screen Selectors k k Numeric Entry ASCII Entry k k Control List Selectors Indicators Mumeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics r ICY oer Alarm List E Bown Alarm Buttons r te Global Object Page Up Page Down Backspace Enter PLC SLC Controlled Screen Changes Creating Screen Selectors 11 9 Touch screen only terminals require List keys on the screen enabling the operator to move the cursor in a Screen List Selector and to select a screen List keys are also supported on keypad terminals The available List Keys and functions are listed below Type Description oves the cursor to the previous screen in the list Move up Required Move Down oves the cursor to the next screen in the list R equired Require
132. select To cancel the selection release the SHIFT key and click on any screen 2 Click the Open Screen tool on the tool bar Or Choose Open from the Screen menu The selected screens open Important Too many open screens may result in a Windows resource or low memory message and slow screen updates Close the application file and any open Windows programs Open the screens one at a time Publication 2711 6 0 Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically To reopen a file or screen double click the icon Working with Applications and Screens 6 13 Activating a Screen When multiple screens are open only one screen is active and that is the screen with the highlighted title bar To activate a screen Choose a screen from the lower portion of the Windows menu e Or click anywhere inside the screen A check mark v appears next to a screen name when it is active and the title bar is highlighted Arranging Open Screens Overlap screens diagonally across the workspace with the title bar of each screen visible or line them as horizontal or vertical tiles To arrange open screens Choose Cascade Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically from the Window menu Reducing Screens to Icons You can reduce an application file and screens to icons leaving more space in the workspace but still making them available To reduce an open file or scr
133. size the indicator 3 To place another multistate indicator move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit multistate indicator mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Setting Properties of a Multistate Indicator To set properties of a multistate indicator 1 Double click the indicator object Fropesties figs Optom Plead igen Sete Uae Fim nmi Dimmed if terminal i E lt _ c Ee O a does not have an Cyn RS 232 printer port Dai fum Hasi Tag E lt Opens Tag Dialog 2 On the Properties tab set operating parameters of the indicator Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Read 12 15 Specifies the type of data that triggers the display of a state Select To Single Bit Trigger a 2 state indicator by setting or clearing a bit at the read tag address The number of states must be set to 2 before the single bit option is available Least Significant Bit Trigger multiple states Entries display in a sequence corresponding to bits set at word address es starting with the read tag address The read tag data type is unsigned integer Value Trigger a state based on a value at the read tag address Each state is linked to a different value Note If using more than 16 states for the Least Significant Bit LSB trigger reserve up to 124 consecutive word addresses after the tag address Every 16 state
134. terminals Text ID Unique number assigned to alarm text The next available number is automatically generated each time new alarm textis created Publication 2711 6 0 15 18 Creating Alarms Publication 2711 6 0 Value Triggered Alarms This section shows an alarm setup using a Value type trigger Trigger values must not exceed the range of the data type selected for the trigger tag signed unsigned integer BCD The following setup shows 3 alarms A B C assigned to the alm_tag trigger The Trigger Type is Value The Value Bit field shows a different trigger value 1 2 3 for each alarm The value 0 is reserved In the Tag Editor the tag definition for alm_tag is Tag Name Data Type Tag Address Node Name alm_tag Unsigned Integer N15 0 SLC_1 When the value 1 is entered in N15 0 Alarm C is triggered When the value 2 is entered in N15 0 Alarm B is triggered and when the value 3 is entered in N15 0 Alarm A is triggered Creating Alarms 15 19 Bit or LSBit Triggered Alarms This section shows an alarm setup using a Bit type trigger The value bit range for a bit trigger is 0 255 bit signed unsigned integer BCD data types For bit array the range is the array size If using the Ack tag the value bit range begins with 1 instead of 0 The following setup shows 3 alarms A B C assigned to the alm_tag trigger The Trigger Type is Bit In this case the Value Bit field is a bit offset from the Trigger Tag ad
135. terminals sets the display intensity in screen saver mode PV600 1000C settings 0 100 in increments of 10 PV900C settings 0 50 60 70 80 90 100 PV1000G settings 0 100 PV1400 settings 0 25 50 75 100 Graphic Lists the available screen savers The screen saver starts automatically if your terminal is inactive for a specified time 4 From the System Language box select the language in which the terminal displays error messages The options are French German Italian Spanish English The default is English 5 From the Handshake Timeout list box select a timeout value in seconds For objects with handshake tags this timeout specifies the length of time the controller has to set a handshake bit before an error message is displayed Handshake timeout values range from 1 to 60 seconds The default is 4 seconds 6 Click OK to save settings and exit dialog Setting a Display Maintenance Schedule Terminal and Communication Setup 20 23 The Display Maintenance Setup dialog allows you to set a daily schedule for e conditioning the display of a PanelView 900 monochrome terminal to prevent image burn in e degaussing or demagnetizing the display of a Panel View 1400 Default maintenance for these terminals occurs at 12 00 am every day The maintenance will not start until the terminal is inactive Conditioning of the PV900 takes approximately 30 minutes degaussing of the PV1400 takes a few sec
136. the Terminal Setup dialog Seng Pesio ibani Teaia Commitee Gamat aaee Tee Terminal Name is stored in Project gt with Catalog Number information Dinin Satan Emte MNE HEH Cappad MH 10 1 ery ANW fompi FAH IRA an Remote I O Terminal IIE Pv Espas MAH 105 1 i i WEMA PA ei Eomei FAM TE j with RS 232 Printer Port Pate gt Preece REIN Feest OFT o Beria Pt Dig Damlasi Fynin T i PLC SAS m lt _ Must match Node Name in Tag Editor The table below defines Remote I O communication parameters for the PanelView terminal Remote I O Remote 1 0 Device Parameter Description Options Type Type of PLC controller scanner that will See table on communicate with the PanelView page 4 7 Remote 1 0 terminal a Name Unique name assigned to controller User supplied This name is also used in the Node Name field in the Tag E ditor Rack Address Unique address of PanelView terminal 0 27octal on Remote 1 0 link Module Group Module groups occupied by PanelView 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 terminal in the rack The Module groups must be contiguous PanelView Terminal Baud Rate The baud rate of the Remote 1 0 link 57 6K 10 000 feet determines the maximum cable length 115 2K 5 000 feet 230 4K 2 500 feet Last Chassis Specifies whether the terminal occupies Yes No the last module group no higher module groups assigned within the rack
137. the right mouse button and choose Insert from the popup menu A new row is inserted above the selected row To delete a row 1 Click the row number you want to delete 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Delete from the menu The row is permanently deleted When you exit PanelBuilder it remembers if the window bars and toolboxes are on or off and shows them in that same condition the next time you start PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 5 14 PanelBuilder Basics Getting Help Help for PanelBuilder is available by choosing a command from the Help menu or pressing the F1 key The following help window opens Index when you choose Index from the Help menu Command Reference Reference About PanelBuilder be E bagri ees rl Help feature How to use it Contents button Choose to see a list of topics Search button Choose to search for topics by keywords Back button Choose to view the previous topic Continue to choose the button to step back through all the topics gt gt Choose to display the next topic in a series of topics lt lt Choose to display the previous topic in a series of topics When Calling for Technical Assistance When calling Rockwell International Technical Services for assistance you ll need to provide the release date and version number of the PanelBuilder software and the AB Utilities software This information is available by choosing About PanelBuilder
138. the terminal toggles This tag is used only in conjunction with Handshake Tag a bit to indicate that it received a new Remote Acknowledge value from the controller the Remote Ack tag Acknowledge All Value Value written to the Ack tag or Remote Ack tag address when all alarms are acknowledged for a trigger e operator presses the Ack All button e controller acknowledges all active alarms using the Ack All Alarm tag Setup tab e controller acknowledges all alarms for a trigger by writing the Acknowledge All Value to the Remote Ack tag address For Value triggers the value is written to the Ack tag by the PanelView or Remote tag address by the controller For Bit LSBit triggers the value is written to the Ack tag address only The Acknowledge All Value can be any value except for the trigger value assigned to alarms Do not use the value 0 since PanelBuilder uses 0 as a reset value Each trigger may have a different Acknowledge All Value The PanelView terminal sets all handshake bits to 1 on powerup regardless of whether an alarm is triggered or not Publication 2711 6 0 15 24 Creating Alarms Using the Remote Ack Tag with Value Triggered Alarms This section shows how the controller acknowledges one or all value triggered alarms using the Remote Ack tag The following setup shows 3 alarms A B C assigned to the alm_tag trigger The Trigger Type is Value The Value Bit field s
139. to clear all alarms in the terminal The Alarm Banner is removed from the terminal display and all alarms are removed from the Alarm List Clear All Alarms Handshake Tag Terminal gt Controller Name of address where the terminal toggles a bit to indicate that it received the Clear All Alarms value from the controller This tag is optional and used only in conjunc tion with the Clear All Alarms tag Publication 2711 6 0 15 28 Creating Alarms Alarm Examples This section provides examples of different alarm configurations ranging from simple to more complex Operator Acknowledges Alarm In the example below the operator presses the Ack button to acknowledge an alarm Because the Acknowledge tag is not defined for the trigger the controller is not notified Optional Fields are not enabled for the alarm triggers Alarm Configuration Four alarms are assigned to the Pump trigger tag each with a different trigger value All alarm messages are configured to display in the Alarm Banner and must be acknowledged Setup Adem Triggers Aire a o Se ea e i Ei Talus tex Yaive Bis p det prinelDispiery BE wel Operator presses Ack button Alarm Msg B is flagged acknowledged in the Alarm List The PanelView reads the value 15 from the Trigger ial Banner is eared iam display i Pump address in the controller This value trig A 7 gers alarm Msg B
140. to the Alarm List The most recent alarm is displayed at the top of the list Each alarm can be configured to occupy multiple lines in the Alarm List The following data displays for each alarm in the order shown e acknowledge indicator required VI Acknowledged Alarm Unacknowledged Alarm HM No Acknowledgement Required e alarm date and time optional e acknowledge date and time optional e alarm trigger value optional e alarm text including variables required If the Alarm List is full when an alarm is triggered the most recent alarm is added to the top of the list and e the oldest alarm not requiring acknowledgement is removed from the list this includes alarms that have been acknowledged or alarms that do not require acknowledgement e if all alarms not requiring acknowledgement have been removed then the oldest alarm is removed If a permanent Alarm List is required use the Print Alarm List button to print the Alarm List on a regular basis or configure alarms to print on occurrence The operator can acknowledge an alarm in the Alarm List by using the up or down arrow keys on the terminal to select an alarm and then pressing the Enter key Touch screen terminals require List keys to move the cursor up and down the Alarm List You can optionally use the Enter list key to enable the operator to acknowledge an alarm in the list 06 19 96 16 55 Oven Temp High W 06 19 96 16 30 15101
141. tools on the Format bar 6 To exit inner text mode choose the Inner Text command or tool Blinking remains active until you turn it off For multistate objects you can activate blinking for a specific state directly from the State tab of the object s dialog Formatting Objects and Text 17 29 Setting Foreground Background Colors On color and grayscale terminals you can set the foreground and background colors of text from the Format menu or the color palette You cannot adjust the background color for text in list objects Fai Color Palette Selected Foreground Color View Box updates as Foreground and Background colors are selected State A Color Palette Selected Background Color To set the foreground and background colors of text 1 Select the object 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu 3 If the object is a multistate object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 4 To change the foreground color e Click a color on the top row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format gt Foreground Color menu The foreground color changes to the selected color 5 To change the background color e Click a color on the bottom row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format gt Background Color menu
142. using external font files with PanelBuilder Characters may not appear correctly in PanelBuilder for the following reasons e If you enter a character not in the font file PanelBuilder displays asterisks to indicate an invalid character Ifthe code page for the font file is not available through the operating system characters will appear correctly on the application screen but not in the Text Edit box on the tool bar the Text Editor or spreadsheet editors for multistate devices The code page may not be available because international version of Windows does not match the code page of the font file language selected in the Input Method Editor does not match the code page of the font file external font was not selected or supported by the Panel View Publication 2711 6 0 22 16 Multilingual Support Translating Application Text in Excel Publication 2711 6 0 This section shows how to translate the text for an application in Excel rather than in PanelBuilder This may be helpful if the individual translating the text is not familiar with PanelBuilder software or PanelView terminals Translating the application text outside of PanelBuilder simplifies the translation process The procedures that follow assume that the application was developed in the default PanelBuilder language After following the procedures the memory card containing the font file can be inserted in the terminal and the application down
143. vs 7 30 Sample u 09 59PH I Display Seconds comet tJ ew 2 Set the options you want for the date format The Sample area displays the format as you select options Publication 2711 6 0 20 20 Terminal and Communication Setup The following table describes the options Use Order To Specify the order of the month M day D and year Y The initial default is MDY Separator Specify the character to separate the month day and year You can enter any character as the separator The default is the Slash Day Month Leading Zero Specify that the day or month appears as two digits For example February 7 appears as 02 07 By default leading zeros are not displayed 2 7 Year Specify the year as two digits or four digits For example the year 1994 can display as 94 or 1994 3 Set the options you want for the time format The Sample area displays the format as you select options The following table describes the options Use 12 Hour To Display the time in numbers representing hours between 0 and 11 00 00 11 59 The boxes to the right specify AM or PM or other notations such as CST PST or EST 24 Hour Display the time in numbers representing hours between 0 and 23 00 00 23 59 The box to right specifies a notation such as CST PST or EST Separator Specify a character to separate the hours minutes and seconds The d
144. word The value encoded is the sum of the bits that are sent 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Signed Integer 277 tcro Eaa dle oy Oe i 1 1 l Sign Bit ee 1 256 4 277 2 s Complement 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 Unsigned Integer 277 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0f 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 Data entered as 277 Publication 2711 6 0 3 10 Planning an Application Publication 2711 6 0 Floating Point The 32 bit floating point format supports IEEE single precision formatted values in the range 99 999 997 952 to 999 999 995 904 The floating point range is limited by the number of display and data entry character positions available 12 or by the processor The PLC 5 SLC 5 03 and SLC 5 04 suppport 7 digits The maximum decimal point precision is 9 places for negative values 0 000000001 and 10 places for positive values 0 0000000001 The negative sign occupies character position values without a sign are positive Decimal point values are entered or displayed with at least one digit to the left of the decimal point When large numbers are entered values to the right of the decimal may be changed because of the 32 bit floating representation For example if you enter 1 1111111801 PanelBuilder displays 1 1111111641 PanelBuild
145. 0 0 0 0101010 0 0101010101010 Pump 3 Overload e Message 24 Displayed Value When Value is selected the controller triggers a message when the tag address contains a specific value The message is displayed until the value at the tag address is changed Publication 2711 6 0 Error State Creating Message Displays 13 5 Message displays have an error state to notify an operator when data is out of range or unavailable You cannot delete the error state The only way to access the error state is to select the object and then select state E from the State box on the tool bar The inner text that appears in the object for state E is Error You can assign different inner text or display attributes to the error state State 0 TANK LEVEL HIGH State 1 TANK LEVEL LOW State E ERROR Default Inner Text for Error E State Publication 2711 6 0 13 6 Creating Message Displays Creating a Message Display This section shows how to create a message display Push Buttons gt To create a message display Screen Selectors La Humenne Eniy 1 Click the Message Display tool in the tool box ASCII Entry a Or choose Message Display from the Objects submenu Control List Selectors Indicators 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place
146. 0G PV1000C 0 to 1032128 PV1400 Read_AppByteUsed Unsigned Integer 0 to 1032128 Bytes Read_Backlight Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 Off 1 On Read_ClockDate Unsigned Integer 1 to 31 Read_ClockHours Unsigned Integer 0 to 23 Read_ClockMinutes Unsigned Integer 0 to 59 Read_ClockMonth Unsigned Integer 1 to 12 Read_ClockSeconds Unsigned Integer 0 to 59 Read_ClockYear Unsigned Integer 0 to 99 0 to 89 2000 to 2089 90 to 99 1990 to 1999 Read_CommS tatus Unsigned Integer lor2 1 Comm is connected 2 Comm is disconnected Read_CurrentLang Unsigned Integer 0 to 4 0 French 1 German 2 Italian 3 Spanish 4 English Default Read_FaultS tatus Unsigned Integer 0 1or2 0 Normal 1 Unable to run 2 Functions but unable to run application Read_KeyRepeatDelay Unsigned Integer 0to7 0 200ms 1 400ms Default 2 600ms 3 800ms 4 1000ms 5 1500ms 6 2000ms 7 2500ms Read_KeyRepeatR ate Unsigned Integer 0to5 0 No repeat default 1 Every second 2 Every 1 2 second 3 Every 1 3 second 4 Every 1 4 second 5 Every 1 5 second Read_MemCardStatus Unsigned Integer 0 to 3 0 Valid memory card format 1 Incorrect memory card format 2 No memory card installed 3 No applications on memory card PV550 Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_LCDContrast Unsigned Integer 0 to 15 Read_LCDRevVideo Unsigned Integer Qorl 0 White displays on black background 1 Black displays on white background Publication 27
147. 1 100 Stage 2 200 Stage 3 300 ages B0 Block Write Data Stage4 400 _ Sentto Controller Stage5 500 o gt 400 i Stage 600 i lt Block Write i Tag Stage7 700 600 Y 700 Up to 29 Sequential Stage8 800 J O f 300 Addresses Stage9 900 o Stage 10 1000 Inactive States Inactive states are states that appear on the control list but cannot be selected by an operator The cursor appears as a hollow head cursor when moved to an inactive state An operator cannot highlight or select an inactive item Inactive states are included as part of the data sent with a block write of the displayed list items see above State 1 State 1 State 1 Active P EAS State2 State 2 State State 3 Inactive gt gt State 3 State 3 State 4 State State 4 Active gt gt RAAS State 5 State 5 State State 5 Cursor at state 2 Operator selects inactive state 3 Operator selects active state 4 an active state Cursor becomes hollow and highlight Cursor returns to solid fill state remains in original position and highlight moves to selection Publication 2711 6 0 9 4 Creating Control List Selectors Control List Options A control list can contain up to 255 operations Control List with Value Data The following example shows a control list used to input set values into a controller address The fluid level of a tank is varied by a control list TANK LEVEL CONTROL Empty Tank iad 1 4 Fill
148. 1 in Landscape Source E 2 Under Specific Printers select Generic Text Only on FILE as shown above If Generic Text Only on FILE isn t listed as an available option you must install this printer option If your application uses large text sizes open the Options dialog and enable Wide Carriage 3 Click OK 4 Click the Print button from the Report Setup dialog The Print to File dialog opens Print To File Output File Name 5 In the Output File Name box enter the name of the file to receive the report The default location is C AB PBWIN 6 Click OK to output report to file If the file name already exists you are given the option of overwriting it or entering another file name Click Cancel at any time to abort operation File Menu Import Export Graphics Copy Font File 1 CAABSPBWINSGS SMEV2485 PBA 2 CABSPBWINSGSS SCKV2RI0 PBA 3 CAB PBWIN SM 0K CBA 4 CAB APBWINSGSS9MKY2RI0 PBA Screen Menu Screen New Open Close Attributes Create Alarm Banner Appendix A Command Summary Choose To New Create a new application file for a PanelView terminal Open an existing application file and display a list of all Open AA screens in the application Close Close the application file Save changes since the last save to the application file Save i and replaces the previous version stored on dis
149. 1 when control list is in state 1 Normally Closed Send value of 1 when control list is in state 0 and value of 0 when control list is in state 1 The Contact area is dimmed if Value was selected in the Write area Write Tag Specifies the name of the tag address to write the single bit or value If the tag doesn t exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Publication 2711 6 0 9 8 Creating Control List Selectors Publication 2711 6 0 Search Tag Piloted Control Lists only Specifies the name of the tag address to which the controller writes to select an item on a control list A control list item is selected when the value assigned to the item equals the value at the search tag address Control Tag Piloted Control Lists only Only applies to Piloted Control Lists with User and Controller or Controller Only selected in the Access box The controller uses this tag to determine whether the control list is controlled by an operator or a controller When the value at this tag address is 0 the operator has control of the control list A value other than 0 enables the controller to select items on the control list Note on User and Controller Access When the operator has control of the list the write tag is updated in the logic controller but the search tag retains the same value present when the logic controller relinquished control When the cont
150. 11 6 0 G 2 Internal Read Only Tags PV900M 1000G Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_DisplayOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal display has been running Read_LCDiIntensity Unsigned Integer 1 to 100 900M only 1 35 9 40 24 50 39 60 54 70 70 80 85 90 100 100 Read_LCDRewVideo Unsigned Integer Oorl 0 White displays on black background 1 Black displays on white background Read_ScrnCond_Hour Unsigned Integer 0 to 23 Combined with Read_ScrnCond_Min to de termine the time of day to start conditioner Read_ScrnCond_Min Unsigned Integer 0 to 59 Combined with Read_ScrnCond_Hour to determine the time of day to start conditioner Read_ScrnCond_Mode Unsigned Integer 0 tol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read_ScrnSave_Intensity Unsigned Integer 0 to 100 900M only 0 0 1 35 9 40 24 50 39 60 54 70 70 80 85 90 100 100 Read_ScrnSave Mode Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 0ff 1 On 2 Timed Read_ScrnSave Time Unsigned Integer 1 to 1800 Screen save timeout in seconds Read_TermOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal CPU has been running PV600C 900C 1000C Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_DisplayOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal display has been running Read_LCDiIntensity Unsigned Integer 10 to 100 Percent of displa
151. 13 Changing the Terminal Type ow eee eee eee 20 15 Setting Power Up Options cc cece eee eee 20 17 Setting Time Date Format cece cette ee eens 20 19 Setting Advanced Terminal Options cece eee teens 20 21 Setting a Display Maintenance Schedule 0eeceeees 20 23 Defining PLC SLC Control TAGS csc neh diedurdanddedadys 20 24 Defining Status TagS 2 eect eee 20 26 Chapter 21 Chapter ODES irer inpantri duptovedukueeens 21 1 ADOUCP TOJE iS iae aaa a a a a E N 21 1 Managing PTOJECIS cic weiiueit ogc unia he hed opie ewes 21 2 Managing Devices in Projects cece cee eee ees 21 4 Copying a Project to Another Computer cc eee eeees 21 6 Restorngia Project cc wosedeacnneds tawe seus vee ade ed Bun 21 7 Moving an Application to Another Computer 0 0 0 uee 21 7 Replacing Duplicate Tags and Devices ina Project 21 8 Adding Unknown Tags or Devices toa Project sce ceva 21 9 Setting Preferences for Replacing or Adding Tags and Devices 21 10 Restoring a Project Created with a Restricted PanelBuilder Release 21 11 Chapter 22 Chapter Objectives 0 cc ccc eee ees 22 1 What You Will Learn 2c dceoSedds be deme dees veda tedetes 22 2 System Requirements ccc cece eee tenet eens 22 2 Terminology ci 2 ieee eavdtaeeveees wavered tasdawgtaaneas 22 2 Whatis FontTool ic sedbateeides aveand ead daeeiameena 22 3 Input Method EdD vccce sca dvade wad daaaeeadaeweaaneas
152. 13 12 Creating Message Displays Managing Print Objects To Edit a print object Do this 1 From the list of Existing Objects select the print object you want to edit Click the Edit button to open the print object s dialog Edit the Properties tab if necessary Click the States tab to edit the text and variables associated with the print object Click OK to exit the print object dialog Rename a print object 4 From the Existing Objects list select the name of the print object you want to rename Click the Rename button In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the print object The name can include spaces and symbols Click the OK button The print object appears in the Existing Objects list under the new name not the old Copy a print object l 4 From the Existing Objects list select the name of the print object you want to copy Click the Copy button In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the copied print object The name can include Spaces and symbols Click the OK button Two versions of the print object now exist one under the original name and one under the new name Edit the properties of the copied print object as described above Delete a print object Publication 2711 6 0 1 3 From the list of Existing Objects select the print object you want to delete Click the Delete button You are asked to con
153. 17 ATTENTION Some combinations of format options could result in a control object not being visible object blends into screen background All touch screen controls must be visible or have a graphic which shows the location of the object Failure to do so may result in accidental or unpredictable operation Publication 2711 6 0 8 2 Creating Push Buttons Push Button Types Push buttons can function like mechanical push buttons A logic value of 0 represents open contacts and a logic value of 1 represents closed contacts Push buttons can also have a numeric value for pressed released or multiple states The terminal sends the value to the controller for each change of state Each push button state can have unique visual characteristics such as inner text or graphic fill pattern and line type Momentary Push Buttons change state close or open contacts when pressed and return to their initial 0 state when released Maintained Push Buttons change state close or open contacts when pressed and remain in this state when released Pressing and releasing the push button a second time returns the button to its selected initial state Maintained push buttons retain their state following screen changes The state of a maintained push button after a power up is determined by the powerup option selected in the Terminal Setup dialog 5 e a Latched Push Buttons change state close or open contacts when pressed and remain in this stat
154. 18 7 Validation Messages 23 2 23 4 Projects Changing 21 2 Copying a Device 21 5 Copying a Project 21 3 Copying to Another Computer 21 6 Creating a Project 21 3 Deleting a Device 21 5 Deleting a Project 21 3 Description 1 1 21 1 Loading Unknown Devices 21 9 21 10 Loading Unknown Tags 21 9 Renaming a Device 21 5 Renaming a Project 21 3 Replacing Duplicate Devices 21 8 Replacing Duplicate Tags 21 8 Publication 2711 6 0 Restoring 21 7 21 11 Verifying an Application when Opened 6 7 21 10 Viewing Devices 21 5 Publications Related P 3 Push Button Controls ContactTypes 8 2 Contacts 8 5 Data Types 8 5 Default Inner Text 8 3 Entering State Values 8 10 Handshake Tag 8 7 Hold Time 8 5 Indicator Tag 8 6 Initial State 8 5 Inner Text and Graphics 8 3 Latched 8 2 8 4 Maintained 8 2 8 4 Momentary 8 2 8 4 Multistate 8 2 8 4 Write Tag 8 6 R Regrouping Objects 7 10 Related Publications P 3 Remote I O Communications 4 6 Baud Rate 4 8 20 10 Block Transfers 4 6 4 8 20 10 Communication Loss 4 16 Controller Name 4 8 20 10 Controller Types 4 7 20 9 Discrete I O 4 6 4 9 LastChassis 4 8 20 10 Module Groups 4 6 4 8 20 10 Pass Through 23 14 Rack Sizes 4 6 4 7 Terminal Rack Address 4 8 20 10 Remote Tags Alarms 15 26 Renaming Application 6 8 Reports 24 1 Adjusting Format 24 3 Connecting to Printer 24 1 Creating 24 2 Options 24 1 Overview 1 3 Printe
155. 20 8 Controller Node Type 4 4 20 8 Error Detect 4 4 20 8 Handshaking 4 4 20 8 Parity Stop Bits 4 4 20 8 Setting Runtime Parameters 4 4 20 8 Terminal Node Address 4 4 20 8 DF1 Driver 2 7 2 11 2 12 23 9 DH Communications 20 5 Baud Rate 4 3 20 6 Controller Name 4 3 20 6 Controller Node Address 4 3 20 6 Setting Runtime Parameters 4 3 20 6 Terminal Node Address 4 3 20 6 DH 485 Communications 20 3 Baud Rate 4 2 20 4 INTERCHANGE Driver 2 13 Maximum Node Address 4 2 20 4 RSLinx Driver 2 8 Setting Runtime Parameters 4 2 20 4 SLC ControllerName 20 4 SLC Controller Node Address 4 2 20 4 Terminal Node Address 4 2 20 4 Using RS 232 Connection 20 3 Using RS 485 Connection 20 3 Dialog Boxes Conventions 5 9 Illustrated 5 9 Moving 5 9 Discrete I O 4 9 Example 4 10 Display Maintenance Schedule 20 23 Display Intensity 20 22 DOS File Application Transfer 23 7 Downloading Application Directly to Terminal 23 6 23 10 on Local DH Link 23 12 Reducing Size of File 23 28 to DOS File 23 6 23 18 to Memory Card 23 6 23 16 using DH485 Driver 23 11 using Internal DF 1 Driver 23 9 using Pass Through 23 13 Dragging Objects 7 9 Draw Pointer 7 3 Drivers INTERCHANGE Software 2 10 Internal DF 1 Driver 23 9 RSLinx Software 2 7 Duplicating Tags 19 9 Dynamic Objects 1 6 Publication 2711 6 0 Index 4 E Edit Objects Menu Commands A 2 Edit Screen Menu Commands A 2 Editor Spreads
156. 3 1 or higher Keys on the keyboard appear in small capital letters For example the Ctrl key appears as CTRL in the text the Alt key as ALT and so on When keys are to be pressed in combination you ll see them connected by a For example ALT F4 means hold down the ALT key while you press F4 Procedures begin with bold text followed by a semicolon To open an application file e A solid right cursor in the left margin indicates a tip or hint Anchor point is the handle opposite the handle you choose The anchor point doesn t move when sizing objects The following table lists publications related to the PanelBuilder Configuration Software and the Panel View Operator Terminals Publication Title Publication No PanelView Terminal User Manual 2711 6 1 PanelBuilder Getting Started Manual 2711 6 2 DeviceNet Communications for PanelView Terminals 2711 6 0 4 ControINet Communications for PanelView Terminals 2711 6 10 PanelView File Transfer Utility 2711 805 For information relating to your logic controller INTERCHANGE or RSLinx Lite Software or Microsoft Windows refer to the appropriate documentation Publication 2711 6 0 P 4 Preface Technical Support Services Software Firmware Upgrades Publication 2711 6 0 If you have any questions about PanelBuilder please consult the manuals or the online help first If you can t find the answer contact Rockwell Automation International Su
157. 550ERR LOG Error log file couldn t be created Cause could be a full disk or write protect condition Check available disk space or write protection Cannot write to INI changes to editor settings will not be saved 5 INI file is either write protected or missing Check file for possible access locks such as network access PanelBuilder will continue Can t delete project associated with current application You can t delete the project associated with the current application Reassign the current application to another project then delete the project Compressed file open failed Couldn t open compressed application file Check disk space or write protection file name because of a full disk or write protect Compressed file write failed Couldn t write compressed application file Check disk space or write protection file name Cause may be full disk or write protect error Could not open file name for output Couldn t open temporary translation file because of a full disk or write protect Check disk space or write protection Could not retrieve PLC or Scanner data The PLC Scanner is not configured From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button and configure the PLC Scanner type and name Could not retrieve terminal port data PanelBuilder couldn t find the terminal port information necessary for download From the Set
158. 6 Publication 2711 6 0 Table of Contents Publication 2711 6 0 Appendix A Command Summary Appendix B Tool Summary Appendix C PanelBuilder Worksheets Appendix D Software Error and Warning Messages Appendix E Validation Messages Appendix F Troubleshooting Appendix G Internal Read Only Tags Appendix H Using Extended ASCII Characters Glossary Index Intended Audience Software Package Preface Preface This manual is a reference guide for the PanelBuilder Configuration Software It describes features and procedures used to create control panel applications for the family of Panel View Operator Terminals Because this is a reference manual it covers all the features of the software You may not use or need to use all the features so use the manual as needed If you re just getting started you might want to read the Getting Started Manual first It takes you through all the steps of creating a sample application including how to download and run the application in the terminal This manual is for the individual responsible for designing control panel applications that will run in a Panel View terminal The PanelBuilder Configuration Software runs in Microsoft Windows You should know how to use a mouse choose commands and work with windows and dialog boxes You should also have a basic understanding of e PLC and SLC logic controllers especially the controller s program and da
159. 6 1 Starting P anelBuilder s ser cui dd anaue danan ai naia den 4 ee 6 2 Creating a New Application 6 3 Opening an Existing Application saaa 6 5 Renaming and Describing an Application aaa 6 8 Opening a New Screen ccc eee eee eee ees 6 10 Opening an Existing Screen cece eect eee ees 6 11 Opening Multiple Screens 0 0 cece eee ee ees 6 12 COSMO SCIEN siinerliustveelenteaiesuatotseuntieeds 6 14 Changing Screen Attributes oss ccactnadee ieee eeew eee aes 6 14 Deleting SIGNS tu Gacetivsierneuvsverirenaeriounwewes 6 15 Copying Screens within an Application ccc eee eee 6 15 Copying Screens to Another Application ccc eee ueeee 6 16 Moving Screens to Another Application 0000040 6 17 SAVING AN ADDICAUON ssa sueecsad dasdomeeweswer awe seean 6 20 Closing an Application cece cece eee eee ees 6 21 Exiting PanelBuilder cians over ds eueedeeerhede due eeee we x 6 21 Working with Objects Creating Push Buttons Creating Control List Selectors Table of Contents iii Chapter 7 Chapter Objectives sicsacsaeerideaweeaeentdeaaeeaeeand 7 1 Accessing Objects sues tout iicsusedieenciawieeceeeoeaed 7 2 Draw POM 5 sol 4 don tik Sate doen oe Seaweed end axed wee 7 3 Creating Objects in Display Area 20 ccc eee 7 4 Aligning O DECS oti Gueoxtcumuecidupandeeeunecieeuads 7 5 Creating Objects on Function KeyS ccc eect eee eens 7 7 Selecting ODER satentdonecageine s
160. 6 Validating and Transferring Applications Publication 2711 6 0 Downloading to a Memory Card When downloading to a memory card you can download a PVA file or an OTF font file created with FontTool to either of the following card drives e ATA card drive e DataBook TMB240 or TMB250 card drive The format of the command entered in the Memory Card DOS Command Setup dialog is specific to the card drive installed in your computer e For ATA card drives use the DOS COPY command for example COPY C AB PBWIN CONTROL PVA M or COPY C AB PBWIN FONT CHINA_S OTF M where M is the ATA card drive on your computer Memory cards compatible with the ATA card drives include Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM24 NM26 e For DataBook TMB240 or TMB250 card drives the command string has three parameters as shown on page 23 17 Memory cards compatible with the DataBook card drives include Catalog No 2711 NM11 NM12 NM13 NM14 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 27 Uploading from a PanelView Terminal This section shows how to upload an application from a Panel View terminal The application is stored as a DOS file with a PVA extension To upload an application File Upload Download Verify Click the Upload tool or choose Upload from the File menu Select Upload parameters te Click OK to start upload Cae Lte S Se pera on the Source selected you Lomrmuncakon Drea may
161. 711 6 0 1 6 Screen Objects Overview of PanelBuilder The table below lists objects you can place on a screen An object is either dynamic or static e Dynamic objects interact with a controller address e Static objects do not interact with a controller address Screen Objects Description Type Momentary Push Button Changes state when pressed and returns to original state when released Dynamic Maintained Push Button Changes state when pressed and remains in this state when released Dynamic Press and release again to return push button to its original state Push Button Controls Latched Push Button Changes state when pressed and remains in state until unlatched by Dynamic controller Multistate Push Button Supports 2 16 states Changes state each time button is pressed After Dynamic the last state the button returns to its initial state and repeats cycle Standard Control List Allows operator to select a control option from a scrolling list of up to 255 Dynamic options The terminal s up and down arrow keys are used to move through the list The selected option is sent to the controller immediately Control List Selectors or when the Enter key is pressed Pressing Enter is an option selected during application configuration Dynamic Piloted Control List Restricts control list access to the controller operator or both A piloted control list allows the controller to select a state f
162. 9 Reversing Foreground Background Colors 17 30 ATTENTION Some combinations of format options could result in a control object not being visible object blends into screen background All touch screen controls must be visible or have a graphic showing the location of the object Failure to do so may result in accidental or unpredictable operation Publication 2711 6 0 17 2 Formatting Objects and Text Format Options You can change the visual characteristics of objects and text from the Format menu or the Format bar Next State Previous State The Format bar has different views depending on what mode you re in The views are shown below Inner Text Inner Graphic Text Size gt Align Text Underline P xX Xe Ss rg Word Wrap Ss 2 Wg g S S S SS o Embedded Variable NZ i i ae 3 oe SF SC oss OS Foreground Color ee a Q D S Background Color E HF El l ach E Toggle ForeBackground Format Bar in Object Mode Blink 5 Eill Patter D S se Shape amp Ro Li Q ON Line Type X S gt X K C o ON Ss R4 l VL g E O L aaa Text Format Bar in Inner Text Mode Graphics List of available graphics Eal Format Bar in Inner Graphic Mode For multistate objects many of the formatting options can be set directly from the State tab of the object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Changing the Appearance of Objects Next State Previous State Inner Text Inner Graphic Tent Size
163. BE Folders c ab pbwin pblib List files of type Drives Bitmap Images BMP x amp c mcintyre_c 7 The File List box shows all files in the current folder of the selected type BMP You can change to another drive or folder before selecting a file See Appendix B for a list of bitmaps that PanelBuilder provides in the C AB PBWIN PBLIB folder Select the file you want to import and click the OK button Or double click on the file name The Graphic Name dialog opens showing the name of the selected file rc 8 6 Sti iS Civil 1 deserter In the Name box enter a unique name for the graphic Under Color Format specify whether you want to import the color graphic as a monochrome bitmap or 16 color bitmap e If importing a monochrome bitmap the Color Format area is dimmed e Ifimporting a color bitmap on a grayscale terminal the Color Format area is reduced to 4 colors Click OK to exit the Graphic Name dialog You return to the Import Export Graphics dialog The graphic appears in the list of Currently Imported Graphics Click Done to exit the Import Export Graphics dialog Adding Graphics 16 13 To paste a bitmap graphic from the clipboard 1 Copy or cut the graphic to the clipboard from the source program 2 Run PanelBuilder and open the Import Export Graphics dialog from the File menu 3 Click the Paste button to import the graphic from the clipboard The
164. C 4 Timeout in block transfer read 8 Timeout in both block transfer write and block transfer read 16 PLC offline 17 Pass Through occurring 32 Communication with PLC failed 64 Bad rack setup 128 PanelView RIO hardware failed startup tests failed Publication 2711 6 0 G 4 Internal Read Only Tags ControlNet Tags You can display the Network Update Time NUT UMAX Node SMAX Node and other data on a screen by assigning one of the following read only tags to a display objet You must use an ASCII display for tags with a string data type Tag Name Data Type Description Read_DCNUTime Unsigned Integer Network Update Time NUT in milliseconds Read_DCUMAX Unsigned Integer Unscheduled Maximum UMAX node address Read_DCSMAX Unsigned Integer Scheduled Maximum SMAX node address Read_curDC Address Unsigned Integer Current Node Address Read_DCASANumber String CIP ASA serial number of the PanelView Read_DCCommS tatus Unsigned Integer Communication status number Read_DCFirmwareR ev String ControlNet firmware revision number Read_DCNewAddress Unsigned Integer Terminal address to use after a reset Read_DCProtocol String Firmware build date Read_DCRedundancy Unsigned Integer LED status number Indicates status of A and B cables Read_DCScanDelay Unsigned Integer Scan delay in milliseconds time between reads DeviceNet
165. Choose Import from the Tools menu inpr Pma Source APS ade Eee a pay rnem Draama Select an Input Format APS ASCII AI or CSV When you import from APS ASCII format the Import function automatically translates special characters in address comments AC used by the APS software as follows backslash is changed to carriage return lt cr gt 6699 e double quotation marks are changed to a single tilde preceding a backslash is changed to a backslash AI software does not add the AI extension on an exported comment and symbol file PanelBuilder will not recognize an AI file without the AI extension In the File box type a source file or click Browse to search for a source file Under Destination select a project and controller used by the project Click OK The Reading Source File dialog opens followed by the Importing Tags to Project dialog as the tags are imported These dialogs display the percentage complete When the Import function is finished importing the tags the Summary Report dialog opens Summary Report ican lt Click to View the full report Tags Processed 104 Click to save the report to a file Errors 0 If you want to print the report you must save it to a file 6 Click OK to return to the table view Working with Tags 19 17 Handling Data Collisions If two or more tags have the same name this dialog opens Im
166. Creating Screen Buttons 11 3 Setting Properties of Screen Buttons 11 4 Creating a Screen List Selector 11 5 Setting Properties of a Screen List Selector 11 6 Configuring Entries in a Screen List Selector 11 7 Creating List Keys 11 9 PLC SLC Controlled Screen Changes 11 9 When creating screen selectors consider e A screen list can have a maximum of 255 entries numbered 0 to 254 Use only the number of entries required by the application e Fach entry in a screen list is limited to a single line e On keypad terminals the cursor is moved through the screen list using the terminal s up a and down Ly arrow keys The screen displays when the operator presses Enter e Touch screen only terminals require list keys on the screen enabling the operator to move cursor through a list e An application screen can have more than one screen list To activate a screen list the operator presses a function key or touch cell Another way to activate a list is to press the left right arrow keys on the terminal until the list is selected Screen list can be used on a main menu screen A screen button on each application screen returns the operator to the main menu When screen space is limited use screen buttons Place screen buttons in same position on each screen This allows an operator to quickly locate and navigate between screens Create screen buttons with inner text and or inner graphic Changing
167. DH 485 PanelView Terminal e SLC Controller or MicroLogix 1000 DH 485 RS 485 Connection 1747 AlC 1747 AlC Link Coupler Link Coupler o DH1 485 Network m SLC Controller Node 3 SLC Controller Node 1 PanelView Node 2 with DH 485 Port DH 485 Network Using RS 232 Connection A PanelView terminal with an RS 232 port is connected to the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5 03 or 5 04 controller providing a dedicated DH 485 connection for high priority data You will define DH 485 parameters for two devices e RS 232 DH 485 PanelView Terminal e SLC 5 03 or 5 04 Controller DH 485 RS 232 Connection SLC Controller 5 03 or 5 04 Node 1 SEIR Re PP 8 DH 485 Network Connection i Channel 0 RS 232 Port gt 5 wn LI oo 5 vS uv oO kej T amp oo a ee a tocol Publication 2711 6 0 20 4 Terminal and Communication Setup To configure DH 485 communications 1 Choose the Setup tab from the Terminal Setup dialog 2 Verify the terminal name entered in the Terminal Name field 3 Click the Comms Setup button The Communication Setup dialog shows the current DH 485 settings for the Panel View terminal and controller The first time you open this dialog default setting
168. Data DisplayS cece cece 12 9 Types of Numeric Data Displays 0 0 00 cee 12 9 Creating a Numeric Data Display ccc cece eee ees 12 10 Setting Properties of a Numeric Data Display 12 10 Multistate Indicators asc sis ach Ba oh eek Skat awe de hw AOR Bed 12 12 Types of Multistate Indicators occ 4d0nde cedduad vedo ae es 12 12 Triggering an Indicator State sccecvei nea eee nd aes 12 13 Creating a Multistate Indicator 6 ccc eee ees 12 14 Setting Properties of a Multistate Indicator c esas 12 14 Configuring States fora Multistate Indicator 000s 12 16 List Indicators gt ouaaa 12 18 Types of List Indicators aa 12 18 Triggering a List Enty 2 ccc cece eee eee eens 12 19 Creating aListIndicator cece eee eee ee ees 12 20 Setting Properties ofa Listindicator cece eee eee 12 20 Configuring Entries of a Listindicator cece eee eee 12 22 Chapter 13 Chapter Objectives cc cece eee eee ees 13 1 Helpful AINS a ase eg gh ha he eine an oe capri Shek we aan wos 13 1 Types of Messages ssi vedveaiaddbestadeaieeedaateneed 13 2 Triggering Messages os inti burarii terimini teini a dudes 13 4 Emor SOIE afedwwins ea nena EaR EN a ee 13 5 Creating a Message Display aaa 13 6 Setting Properties of a Message Display oaoa 13 6 Configuring Messages oaa 13 8 Creating an Object to Print Messages ccc ccc eee eee ees 13 10 Chapter 14 Chapter Objectives
169. Edit the fields as necessary 3 Click OK to exit Control List Selector dialog was selected in the Write area of the Properties tab Publication 2711 6 0 Access field appears only for a Piloted Control List l Hih fel re mrii Jue ed er n Dam ad Coad aaga anaa a le Ed ee on Editing Number of States A Control List Selector supports a maximum of 255 states 0 to 254 rows Use only the number required To add states to a control list selector 1 Hold down the right mouse button and choose Append State from the popup menu A row is added at the end with the next available state number 2 Repeat step 1 for each state you want to add Each state you add is created with the defaults from State 0 and default text ST 0 ST 1 ST 254 To delete states select a row number and choose Delete State from the popup menu Creating Control List Selectors 9 11 Editing State Text The Text field defines the text that will appear for each state in the Control List Selector Double click the cell and edit the text Other text fields control how the text is formatted for each state e text size selection applies to entire list e underline text blink e alignment left right center e foreground color Entering State Values If Value was selected on the Properties tab the Value field appears for each state This field specifies a numeric value to send to the word address for each stat
170. Function Keys Moves the cursor one character to the left in the Display Area gt gt F4 Function Keys Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area ESC F5 Function Keys Closes the scratchpad without making any changes CLR F6 Function Keys Clears the string in the Display Area Publication 2711 6 0 10 14 Controls a gt YVA Creating Data Entry Controls ASCII Scratchpad 550 Touch Screen Terminals Character Keyboard Cursor Display Area JHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE Cursor Control Keys e a or Oo y zZ m z G l t Controls To select characters from the Character Keyboard the operator presses the cursor control keys to move the cursor over a character and then presses the SEL key The character is entered in the Display Area This area scrolls so the operator can enter a character string that is longer than the Display Area All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible After entering all the characters the operator sends the string to the controller by pressing 1 The leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word of the write tag address the next character in the low byte and so on Note DeviceNet ASCII Entry allows for byte swapping Function Moves the cursor up down left or right in the Character Keyboard SEL Selects the highlighted character and places it at the cursor position in the Display Area INS T
171. G KFC LF ESNA SJE text Format Bar in Inner Text Mode Graphics List of available graphics g Eal Format Bar in Inner Graphic Mode Toolboxes x Tool Bar v Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Keypad Display Tool Bar Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out PanelBuilder Basics 5 7 PanelBuilder provides toolboxes in addition to menu commands to create screen objects The main toolbox contains controls displays list keys and graphics The ISA Symbols toolbox contains standard ISA symbols Appendix B describes each tool To choose an object click the appropriate tool in the toolbox The toolboxes can be moved like any other window E Toolbox E ISA Symbols fa Fa bo es a EER ba Gabi OCS eal Wea 029 Ee 0 Ena ALTE OYE 0 0 co g Es Fas CS hel KEES IC hd To toggle a toolbox on or off Choose Toolbox or ISA Symbols from the View menu A check mark appears next to the command when the toolbox is active To close a toolbox choose the appropriate command again You can view application screens with or without the numeric keypad To toggle the keypad on or off Choose Keypad from the View menu A check mark vV appears next to the command when the keypad is active Select the command again to tu
172. Graphic Name dialog opens Gearhart Hom TAG DEP The Color Format area is dimmed if you are pasting a gt Cat Fomai monochrome bitmap i ias The option on Grayscale gt FIE Ga terminals is 4 Colors 4 In the Name box enter a unique name for the graphic 5 Under Color Format specify whether you want to paste the color graphic as a monochrome bitmap or 16 color bitmap If you are pasting a monochrome bitmap the Color Format area is dimmed e If pasting a monochrome bitmap the Color Format area is dimmed e If pasting a color bitmap on a grayscale terminal the Color Format area is reduced to 4 colors 6 Click the OK button You return to the Import Export Graphics dialog The name appears in the list of Currently Imported Graphics 7 When finished click the Done button Publication 2711 6 0 16 14 Adding Graphics To view an imported graphic 1 From the list of Currently Imported Graphics select the graphic you want to view The graphic appears in the Sample area Import Export Graphics x Currently Imported Graphics Copy PIPE15 BMP ew Baste Import Delete Export Sample Selected graphic PIPE5 BMP PROGRAM BMP S3DPB_B BMP S3DPB_G BMP S3DPB_GY BMP S3DPB_R BMP bd ili View of selected graphic 2 Select another graphic The new view replaces the previous view You can also use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to view other graphics Each
173. If you click Yes the driver is removed from the Configured Devices list 3 Click OK to close dialog 4 Reboot your computer to unload the driver Installation 2 15 Setting Advanced INTERCHANGE Parameters To specify advanced parameters for drivers 1 Click the Advanced button from the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration dialog Specifies whether to load INTERCHANGE drivers executables into high memory Drivers are not loaded until you reboot computer Specifies whether self diagnostics are run on KT devices before loading driver configuration The default is to perform test esd cere igh F Peres cers pl iz Specifies whether to use upper MS DOS memory for packet buffer space The default is to use upper memory Ht Pad ee Fe ee menza e ec ede Specifies the oe memory manager in use on your zs system A F he af teet aten Allocates number of packet buffers 1to 200 Each buffer uses 300 bytes of memory The default is 20 j he T eked igi tee Allocates space for the number of unsolicited messages 0 to 200 The default is 0 which indicates no space Specifies Enabler to use for the 1784 PCMK on DH Device Driver Specific Enabler uses PCMKINIT or RSIPCMK This enabler requires you to enter the socket number containing the card in the driver dialog The INTERCHANGE socket numbers are 0 7 In Windows 95 the sockets are numbered 0 8 Generic Enabler uses PCENABLE This enabler r
174. Indicator With Bit Data This example shows a list indicator used to display conditions associated with on off type controls such as limit switches The list displays the status of a robot arm based on the condition of four proximity switches i 7 e On Arm Position u Sensor 3 0ff Controller Full Extend on 2 3 Extend Sensor 2 Off 1 3 Extend Sensorl On 7 E Sensor4 0n gt Arm Position g L Controller RST m Sensor 3 Off we 2 3 Extend iol 1 3 Extend Sengor2 O a Retracted Sensor 1 Off Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 19 Triggering a List Entry One of 3 data types can trigger the display of a list indicator entry e Single Bit e Least Significant Bit e Value Single Bit Single Bit is only valid for a 2 entry indicator list The highlighted entry in a list is controlled by the status of a single bit Turning the tag address bit on off toggles the highlight between the 2 list entries Least Significant Bit The terminal highlights the entry corresponding to the Least Significant Bit LSB at the tag address data words 0 to 254 bits Setting more than one bit at the tag address allows entries to display in a priority sequence state 0 is highlighted when bit 0 is ON state 1 is highlighted when bit 1 is ON state 254 is hig
175. Level 1 2 Fill Level Full Tank TANK LEVEL CONTROL Empty Tank 1 4 Fill Level gt 1 2 Fill Level Full Tank Value 1800 Address N7 2 Value 3600 Address N7 2 Control List with Bit Data SEEE 1800 1 4 Full Controller oll 3600 1 2 Full Controller The next example shows a control list used for on off type controls The list controls the opening and closing of a feed hopper Publication 2711 6 0 HOPPER CONTROL Open Hopper 1 ad Close Hopper 1 HOPPER CONTROL P Open Hopper 1 Close Hopper 1 Value 0 Address B3 2 0 Value 1 Address B3 2 0 a Hopper 1 1 0 Close Controller Hopper 1 oll 1 Open Controller Creating a Control List Selector Objects Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCH Entry Control List Selectors Standard Piloted Creating Control List Selectors 9 5 Multiple Control Lists You can assign a standard control list to a function key or touch cell to activate the list for operator input Multiple control lists can appear on the same screen Another way to select a standard control list is to use the left or right arrow keys on the terminal TANK LEVEL CONTROL HOPPER CONTROL Empty Tank Open Hopper 1 gt EEA Close Hoppe
176. Min Max boxes depends on the data type of the read tag Min to Max Value Range For this Data Type 0 to 9 999 4BCD 32768 to 32767 Signed Integer 0 to 65535 Unsigned Integer 99 999 997 952 to 999 999 995 904 Floating Point If the value exceeds the maximum the entire bar graph fills If the value is below the minimum the bar graph appears as an empty box Read Tag Specifies the name of the tag address to read for filling the bar graph If the tag doesn t exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Push Buttars Screen Selectors Numeric Eritry ASCII Enty Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Message Display Graphics List Revs Alarm List Alarm Buttons Global Object Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 7 Creating a Bar Graph Scale This section shows how to create a bar graph scale To create a bar graph scale 1 Click the Scale tool in the toolbox Or choose Scale from the Objects menu Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to size the bar scale me To place another scale move the pointer to a new location and click again Click the right mouse button to exit scale mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox To set scale properties 1 Double click the scale object
177. NGE drivers at system reboot To disable INTERCHANGE place REM before the CALL statement in the AUTOEXEC BAT file For example REM CALL ABICRUN BAT Disabling INTERCHANGE frees up base memory and also makes the computer s COM port available to other applications Installation 2 17 Other Software that Uses INTERCHANGE To run other software such as APS that uses a different INTERCHANGE driver on the same communication port as PanelBuilder software follow the steps below Note If the software packages use the same INTERCHANGE driver on a communication port except for the DF1 driver you can ignore these steps 1 Exit from Windows if necessary 2 Type ABICSTOP at the DOS prompt for example C gt ABICSTOP 3 Run the other software Before running PanelBuilder software again or other software that uses different INTERCHANGE drivers 1 Exit from Windows if necessary 2 Type ABICRUN at the DOS prompt Adding or Updating Communication Card Update the CONFIG SYS file when you add or modify a hardware configuration for a communication card such as the KT or PCMK card Refer to the INTERCHANGE README and CFG_KT TXT files for details on how to do this The memory manager you use determines the type of and syntax of the communications card entry required in CONFIG SYS Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives Design Checklist Planning an Application This chapter
178. Name can be edited Disables driver configuration temporarily without removing it from Configured Devices If you change the COM Port setting change the Interrupt to the appropriate setting Installation 2 13 This dialog opens for the 1747 PIC DH485 on COM Port driver TAPE ONS on COH Peet Dace Condi ee ist Unique number assigned Boe e z to a bed aie river Silaban Pad amama This is not the computer s COM port i P port Mars Merda Heder T z Heme PTET Default Driver Name DH 485 Station Address or Node __ Suton fee m can be edited Address of the Computer is typically 0 Cation ii F ad COM Port Parameters should be set to am re E eo z COM Port 2 typically uses Interrupt IRQ 3 tet jm E or COM Port 1 typically uses Interrupt IRQ 4 Sates Disables driver configuration temporarily without removing l from Configured Devices ist 3 Edit parameters and click OK when done The parameters are specific to the communications card installed in your computer or the type of connection you will be using to transfer files Important You must set Interrupts for all INTERCHANGE drivers The configured driver appears under the Configured Devices list Configured Devices NAME Refers to driver name DEVICE Refers to selected driver PORT Refers to unique number assigned to INTERCHANGE driver STATUS Shows whether driver is enabled disabled Important Do not configure more th
179. O link or DH 485 link Data passes through a controller which is a bridge between the two networks For connection details see Publication 2711 6 1 A DH RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver must be installed on the computer Validating and Transferring Applications 23 7 Memory Card Computers with an ATA card drive or DataBook TMB240 TMB250 card drives allow you to transfer applications using memory cards e ATA card drives use these Allen Bradley cards Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM24 NM26 PanelView terminals running firmware 3 0 or higher support ATA cards e DataBook card drives use these Allen Bradley cards Catalog No 2711 NM11 NM12 NM13 NM14 DataBook TMB240 or TMB250 card drives cannot be set up in the Windows 95 Control Panel Follow the instructions in the DataBook User s Guide for details on how to install the card drive You can also transfer applications in a terminal to a memory card using the terminal s memory card slot See the Panel View Terminal user manual for details This method doesn t require a separate card drive on your computer Use the memory card to download applications to multiple terminals without a computer DOS File You can transfer PanelBuilder applications to from DOS files The application is downloaded to a DOS file in a PVA format Use the PanelView File Transfer PFT Utility to transfer DOS application files PVA between a DH 485 Panel View terminal and a computer that does
180. OP bent satel misrnem mo al TREY bytes Fou ch chaos pit obeoots aed by agan lone Cancel Chapter Objectives Types of Reports Connecting a Printer Chapter 2 Al Creating Reports This chapter shows how to create application reports It contains the following sections Section Page Types of Reports 24 1 Connecting a Printer 24 1 Creating and Printing a Report 24 2 Changing the Report Setup 24 3 Setting up a Printer 24 5 Sending the Report to a File 24 6 PanelBuilder lets you specify the types of information to include in a report Report Options Description Description ncludes the first page of the application description as entered in the Application Description dialog Object Attributes Lists attributes of all objects in the application Objects are listed by their object ID Text Lists all text strings in the application Terminal Setup Lists setup parameters for the PanelView Terminal Tag Attributes Lists all tag definitions in the application Alarm Setup Lists all alarm information defined for the application In addition you can include screen images and a summary of objects for all screens or a range of screens in the application To print screen images you need a graphics printer that s supported by Windows Refer to the user manuals supplied with your printer and computer for instructions on connecting a printer Publication 2711 6 0 24 2 Creat
181. PBWIN FONT folder 3 Click OK Publication 2711 6 0 22 10 Multilingual Support Publication 2711 6 0 cA To save a font file to a memory card 1 Load an ATA Flash card Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM 24 NM_26 in the card drive on your computer Important To write the font file to a memory card directly from FontTool you must use an ATA Flash card 2 Click the Save to Memory Card tool on the tool bar or choose Save to Memory Card from the File menu The dialog shows a list of Memory Card Drives detected on the computer Saree be on Ivor Panamas Taa e 2ti E 3 Select the font OTF file from the PBWIN FONT folder you want to save to a memory card 4 Select the Memory Card Drive 5 Click OK to save the font file to the memory card Note You can also save a font file to an ATA card using the Save As dialog by selecting the memory card drive from the Drive s list Printing Font Files You can print the sample text associated with a font file To print the sample text for a font OTF file 1 Open the font file you want to print Choose Open command from File menu 2 Click the Print on the tool bar Or choose Print from the File menu Use the Print Setup command on the File menu to select a different printer or change printer settings Creating an Application using a Font File Multilingual Support 22 11 This section shows the steps necessary to use a font file in a PanelBuilder
182. Panel View terminal the appropriate communication driver must be configured on your system You can configure a driver using e RSLinx Lite Software Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 or e INTERCHANGE Software Windows 95 or Windows 3 x INTERCHANGE is a common set of real mode DOS TSR communication drivers that can be shared by different Windows programs INTERCHANGE may already be installed on your computer The APS and 6200 Programming Software use INTERCHANGE in DOS or Windows To check the version of INTERCHANGE running on your computer type DTLVER at the DOS prompt RSLinx Lite provides a set of communication drivers that can be shared by Windows programs To check the version of RSLinx on your computer select About RSLinx from the Help menu Installation Notes e Before installing PanelBuilder on a computer running Windows 95 check the C Windows System folder for these files VDFI1 386 V485 386 If these files exist delete them e Check that your computer has sufficient system resources and memory available e Close all Windows applications before installing PanelBuilder Press ALT TAB to check for open applications berda cere cert eed ee er es ee i i tt ee mmr is emprada ee er m Tem Installation 2 3 Installation Setup The setup options available when installing the PanelBuilder are e Typical Setup installs all components listed under the custom setup except External Font Fil
183. Publication 2711 6 0 7 6 Working with Objects Grid Snap to Grid Grid Attributes Touch Grid Publication 2711 6 0 Screen Grid Keypad terminals use a screen grid to size and position objects You can turn the grid on or off and size the grid in increments of pixels The Snap to Grid feature forces each object to the nearest intersection of the grid On touch screen terminals use the screen grid to position graphics and displays Control objects are aligned using the touch grid To show the grid Choose Grid from the Align menu The grid displays with the current grid attributes A check mark appears next to Grid when it s active Choose Grid again to hide the grid To snap objects to the grid Choose Snap to Grid from the Align menu A check mark appears next to the command when it s active Choose Snap to Grid again to turn the feature off To resize the grid 1 Choose Grid Attributes from the Align menu The Grid Spacing dialog box opens showing the current grid size in pixels on the X and Y axis xE r Pixels Pixels Cancel Me D Default grid for PV550 terminal is 8 x 8 Default grid for PV600 terminal is 10 x 29 Default grid for PV900 monochrome terminal is 13 x 25 Default grid for PV900 PV 1000 color and grayscale terminals is 13 x 30 e Default grid for PV1400 color terminal is 33 x 37 2 To increase or decrease the spacing of the grid lines on the X axis click th
184. RROW keys to select an item then press ENTER Menu conventions are listed below Menu convention What it means Dimmed command name The command is unavailable An ellipsis after the name Opens a dialog box that contains options you need to select before PanelBuilder can carry out the command A check mark s next to the name The command is a toggle thatis activated turned on A toggle command alternately turns on or off each time you selectit When turned off the check mark is removed A key combination after the name A shortcut for the command You can use the key combination to choose the command A triangle gt at the right side a Opens another menu of choices of a menu command To close a menu e Click the menu name or anywhere outside the menu e Or press ALT or F10 to cancel and move back to the workspace Or press ESC to cancel the menu but remain on the menu bar PanelBuilder Basics 5 5 Tool Bar The tool bar appears at the top of the PanelBuilder window and provides tools for frequently used menu commands You click a tool View ma to carry out an action Some tools complete the action immediately v Status Bar others place you in a mode to complete the action Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out To toggle the tool bar on or off Choose Tool Bar from the View menu A check mark appears ne
185. RS 232 printer port eenable external font support S ee Chapter 22 Power Up Define terminal power up defaults including estartup application screen e preset values initial or last state values to write to controller escreen to display on a restart last user screen displayed or the startup screen ewhether to load application from memory card e whether to use downloaded configuration settings Advanced Set other terminal options including eauto repeat settings for terminal keys or touch cells edisplay options elanguage in which to display terminal firmware messages etimeout setting etime to condition the display of a PV900 monochrome or degauss the display of a PV1400 color terminal Time Date Specify how the time and date will display in the terminal Control Tags Define tags for PLC SLC controlled screen changes and time date changes Status Tags Publication 2711 6 0 Define tags for PanelView terminal controlled screen changes and time date changes Defining DH 485 Communications Terminal and Communication Setup 20 3 This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a Panel View terminal and an SLC controller that will communicate on a DH 485 network DH 485 Network Using RS 485 Connection A PanelView terminal with a DH 485 port is connected to an SLC controller using a multidrop or point to point connection You will define DH 485 parameters for two devices e
186. Resources A screen contains too many controls and indicators Redesign the screen with fewer control or indicator objects Application type does not match terminal type Re configure in Terminal Setup The application is configured for Remote 1 0 or DH 485 communications but the selected terminal type does match From the Setup tab in Terminal Setup select a terminal type that matches the application Or convert the application to match the terminal type Then update the tags At least one alarm must be configured to use this object An alarm device exists which requires an alarm to be configured Remove the device or add alarms to the application Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Messages Validation Message Bit positions for this trigger should be contiguous Meaning For fastest operation all alarms within a trigger should use successive bits i e 1 2 3 4 as opposed to 1 3 5 6 What to do Change the bits used for triggering so they are contiguous for this trigger Bit position out of range for this trigger The bit position specified for the alarm trigger exceeds the number of positions supported by the trigger s data type length Move the alarm to another trigger or change the trigger s data type length Block Transfer Channel Number Num Length is Invalid The block transfer length is defined as 0 or exceeds the maximum of 64 In the Block transfer dialog
187. Select the graphic you want to delete from the list of Currently Imported Graphics ISA symbols can t be deleted 2 Click the Delete button The file is removed from the list 3 When finished click the Done button Publication 2711 6 0 16 16 Adding Graphics Using Background Graphics Objects Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Line Connected Line Graphics List Keys Rectangle Alarm List FEN g Ellipse Alarm Buttons b i Circle Global Object Freeform Text Graphic Image Imported bitmap graphics can appear inside a button object or as a background object on the screen This section shows how to use an imported graphic as a background object To place an imported graphic on the screen 1 Click the Graphic Image tool in the toolbox Or choose Graphic Image from the Objects Graphics submenu 2 Position the pointer where you want to place the graphic and click the left mouse button 3 The image border is selected and you re placed in inner graphic mode Graphics A 3 Select a graphic from the Graphics list box gt You can import graphics by clicking the icon on the format bar Publication 2711 6 0 The border is sized to the graphic and becomes invisible The image is automatically select
188. TSR not configured error reading file lt filename gt Troubleshooting F 7 The indicated command or parameter in CFG_KT INI is invalid Correct your CFG_KT INI file and restart the INTERCHANGE Software CFG_XXX 0007 TSR not configured invalid line lt command gt CFG_XXX 0008 TSR not configured invalid parameter lt parameter gt CFG_XXX 0009 TSR not configured invalid memory parameter lt parameter gt CFG_XXX 000a TSR not configured invalid interrupt parameter lt parameter gt Not enough memory was available to configure the DTL_KT TSR Obtain more free memory on your computer and restart the INTERCHANGE Software CFG_KT 000b TSR not configured unable to allocate memory An error occurred when configuring the DTL_XXX TSR The DTL_XXX TSR may already be running Shut down and restart the INTERCHANGE Software to correct the problem CFG_XXX 000c TSR not configured TSR parameter already in use CFG_XXX 000d TSR not configured no KT s could be initialized Commonly caused by one of the following 1 no communication cards are specified in CFG_KT INI 2 the software or hardware setting of the memory address for your communication card does not match that entered in the CFG_KT INI file 3 the environment variable ABIC_CONFIG points to a location which has an invalid or nonexistent CFG_KT INI file The executable CFG_XXX EXE has previously been run to configure the DTL_XXX TSR It is not ne
189. Text from the View menu This command turns the view of the text on or off im j i ae Japanese JEg Japanese TARR Tae Japanese MM Multilingual Support 22 9 Saving Font Files FontTool provides 3 commands for saving files Save Commands Description Saves a file that was previously opened to the same file name and location If you are saving a new file the Save Save i As dialog opens asking you to confirm the file name and location Saves the file with a new name and or location leaving Save As aae the original intact Saves the font file to a memory card located in the card Save to Memory Card drive on the computer To save a font file to the same location with the same file name Click the Save tool on the tool bar or choose Save from the File menu To save a font file under a new name and or location 1 Choose Save As from the File menu The File Save As dialog shows the current file name and location of the font file File Save As ixi File name Folders c ab pbwin font china_s otf 3 cA Cancel china_t otf S ab cineese otf pbwi courier otf S pbwin greek otf H font japanese otf roman otf times otf Save file as type Drives PanelView Fonts otf 7 amp c mcintyre_c gt 2 In the File Name box enter a descriptive file name up to 8 characters with the OTF extension PanelBuilder expects to find all font OTF files in the
190. The name can include spaces and symbols 4 Click OK to open a dialog to configure the print object Pagers Sia Oyra T ingie ma Farm T em ra i B Prii Tyka P Daia F inii Basil ag Print Only Messages do Limigi in fi Lo not support Internal tags Publication 2711 6 0 The Value field appears only if Value was selected under Read on the Properties tab 10 11 Creating Message Displays 13 11 Configure the properties for triggering print messages They are identical to the Message Display on page 13 6 Click the States tab Initially a Print Only Object is created with 2 messages and one error State nii moais barga H biH w dias er Choose Append State from the popup menu for each message you want to add to the print object Use the exact number required If the Value field appears for each message enter the value that will trigger the message to print In the Text field enter the text that will print when the message is triggered To insert a time date or numeric variable in a message choose an Embedded Variable option from the popup menu Click OK when done to exit dialog The Print Only Object Setup dialog reopens The print object just created now appears in the Existing Objects list Print Only Object Setup Ea Existing Objects Print_Messages Edit Copy Bename Delete OK Click OK to exit dialog Publication 2711 6 0
191. Write c 3 999 0 999 PRE ACC aa te EN EU Control Read Write R 3 999 0 999 LEN POS DN EM ER UL IN FD Integer Read Write N 3 999 0 999 NA 0 15 BCD Read Write D 3 999 0 999 NA 0 15 Float Read Write F 3 999 0 999 NA 0 31 ASCII Read Write A 3 999 0 999 NA NA String Read Write ST 3 999 0 999 LEN NA Octal format all other values are decimal A tag can be assigned to any file type the SLC controller supports except MO and M1 j A 3 Integer F File Type Read Write Identifier File Number Element Sub Element Bit Number Output Read 0 0 1 31 0 255 0 15 Input Read 1 1 31 0 255 0 15 Status Read Write S 2 NA 0 15 Bit Binary Read Write B 3 9 255 0 255 NA 0 4095 Timer Read Write T 4 9 255 0 255 ae ae ri M f PRE ACC 11 15 CU CD Counter Read Write C 5 9 255 0 255 12 DN OV UN 8 15 EN EU Control Read Write R 6 9 255 0 255 EN ha DN EM ER UL IN FD Integer Read Write N 7 9 255 0 255 NA 0 15 Float Read Write F 8 255 0 255 NA NA ASCII Read Write A 9 255 0 255 NA 0 15 String Read Write ST 9 255 0 255 LEN 0 41 0 15 Number of Status File elements depends on controller e g SLC 5 03 has 0 99 and SLC 5 04 has 0 163 Publication 2711 6 0 3 8 Data Types Publication 2711 6 0 Planning an Application MicroLogix 1000 File Types i ae j Integer i File Type Read Write Identifier File Number
192. Year tag address must be 2 digits 90 99 for 1990 1999 or 00 89 for 2000 2089 The ladder logic must perform the following conversions before sending the values to the controller If the year is lt 1999 add 1900 If the year is gt 1999 add 2000 Unsigned Integer Time Publication 2711 6 0 Names of tag addresses to which the PanelView writes the current hour minutes and seconds Unsigned Integer Chapter Objectives About Projects Chapter 2 1 Managing Projects This chapter contains these sections Sections Page About Projects 21 1 Managing Projects 21 2 Managing Devices in Projects 21 4 Copying a Project to Another Computer 21 6 Restoring a Project 21 7 Moving an Application to Another Computer 21 7 Verifying Tags and Devices in a Project 21 8 Adding Unknown Tags or Devices to a Project 21 9 Setting Preferences for Verifying Tags and Devices 21 10 Restoring a Project Created with a Restricted Release 21 11 of PanelBuilder Each PanelBuilder application PBA file is associated with a project located in the C AB PROJECTS folder The project contains e tag definitions e device information terminal type and controller required for the terminal to communicate with data table addresses in the controller Tags and devices are specific to the communication protocol used by the terminal for example DH 485 or Remote I O Different applications can share a proje
193. _ 9 r 8 10 lbs 4 1 20 Ibs C a 30 lbs 7 4 40 lbs 3 2 50 lbs Ly Vertical Bar Graph Vertical Bar Graph Fill from Top Scale Left Border On Fill from Bottom Scale Right Border Off 100 Full High Low Empty 50 el oe E 25 0 10 20 30 40 50 Horizontal Bar Graph 6 Horizontal Bar Graph Clustered Bar Graphs Fil from Let Scale Bottom cao eee Tee order On Use stacked bar graphs to create the effect of bidirectional graphs graphs with multiple fill patterns or graphs showing relative values to a total 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 LETT TTT tT i ttt ty N S D PAS a S E ttt Two Bar Graphs Creating Bidirectional Effect 100 100 100 w 3 LETT TI TIT Itd ttt w 3 ee e p e w 3S TEE EEA AN ER AEEA EAM RA EA AEN EBA E EEN R PAN Three Bar Graphs with Different Fill Patterns When bottom graphs fill upper graphs begin to fill Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 5 ce Creating a Bar Graph Push Buttons Sapen edecioe k This section shows how to create a bar graph You can create a bar a d graph with or without a scale The scale is a separate object Entry P Control List Selectors To create a bar graph Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph 1 Click the Bar Graph tool in the toolbox Scale Message Display Or choose Bar Graph from the Objects menu Graphi
194. ace in an Static object or on the screen Imported Graphics Imports exports bitmaps created with other programs Static PanelView 900 1000 and 1400 Touch Screen terminals require list keys to move the cursor through a control list screen list selector or alarm list The list keys are also supported on the keypad versions of these terminals Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives System Requirements Chapter 2 nstallation This chapter contains the following sections Section Page System Requirements 2 1 Installing PanelBuilder Software 2 2 RS Linx Lite Software 2 7 INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility 2 10 INTERCHANGE Notes 2 16 The minimum hardware and software requirements for installing and running PanelBuilder are personal computer using a 386 or higher processor MS DOS operating system version 5 0 or later Windows 3 1 or later Windows for Workgroups version 3 11 or later Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 The RAM requirements for each operating system are as follows Software 3 X 95 NT 4 0 NT 4 0 486 PanelBuilder 8 MB 16MB 32 MB 32 MB External Font Support 8 MB 8 MB 16 MB 32 MB RS Linx Lite N A 16 MB 16 MB 32 MB RSLinx Lite only runs in Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 Note To determine the RAM required to run PanelBuilder with other components use the maximum specified For example to run PanelBuilder and RSLin
195. ace or for valid access to network file Error executing application There is not enough memory to execute lt program name gt Please close an application There is not enough memory to start another session of PanelBuilder Configuration S oftware Close an application and restart P anelBuilder Error importing graphic file Verify file is in correct format The graphic is too large or in the wrong format BMP graphic must not exceed pixel size of display Error Invalid data missing state data Error while reading state data This indicates a corrupted edit session Close application without saving and retry If error reoccurs contact Allen Bradley support Error loading the font file Font file cannot be found or read Check location and name of font file Font file may need to be recreated Error reading application file File cannot be loaded A read error occurred File may be corrupted or a data timeout has occurred on network Check for valid access to the file Try to load application again Error writing application file Application not saved Disk is full disk doesn t exist or the file name is invalid Check available disk space verify validity of file path name try to save application again Error writing application file to disk PanelBuilder was unable to write the PVA application file Probable cause is full disk Check disk space and try again
196. ad file Not a PanelBuilder file or file is corrupted File did not pass the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC This may occur if the file is of the wrong type or contains corrupted data Check that the file is a PBA file not PVA If file is corrupted it must be recreated Unable to load file Application file created with incompatible version of P anelBuilder Application file was created using a newer release of the configuration software Recreate file with a released version of PanelBuilder Configuration Software Unable to load font file file name Display on the screen may not be correct You may need to re install P anelB uilder The font file could not be found in its normal location or is an invalid font file Check the name and location of the font file Unable to load help file Low memory error Close other Window applications and retry If unsuccessful the program will exit You can t recover from this error Unable to load PanelView terminal fonts Font file PB900 FON must be in same directory as PBWIN EXE Font file is not in its normal location Move the PB900 FON file into the same directory as PBWIN EXE AB PBWIN Unable to open exceptions window Microsoft Windows is out of resources or user memory Close other applications and retry If error reoccurs exit Windows reboot and retry UNABLE TO OPEN FILE This file was created by PanelBuilder 900 demonstration so
197. ad file and reselect it the type you selected ea file that has been manually edited with mistakes file error file does not select a source file that does not exist Click OK Select another source file or cancel exist file error file already select a destination file that does exist Click Yes to replace the file or No to cancel the operation exists project error enter a project that does not exist Click OK Select another project or cancel Import only Export only Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter 20 Terminal and Communication Setup Chapter Objectives This chapter describes how to set communication and operating parameters for the Panel View terminal It contains the following sections Section Page Terminal Setup Overview 20 2 Defining DH 485 Communications 20 3 Defining DH Communications 20 5 Defining DF 1 Communications 20 7 Defining Remote I O Communications 20 9 Defining Block Transfers 20 11 Configuring the Printer Port 20 13 Changing the Terminal Type 20 15 Setting Power up Options 20 17 Setting Time Date Format 20 19 Setting Advanced Terminal Options 20 21 Setting a Display Maintenance Schedule 20 23 Defining PLC SLC Control Tags 20 24 Defining Status Tags 20 26 Note For details on configuring DeviceNet and ControlNet communications see the following publications DeviceNet Communications for PanelView terminals Publication 2711 6 0 4 ControlNet Co
198. ader D Pump Controls Tank 1 Heater Controls gt Indicator Bar Shows A Active Screen List XQ Assigned Function Key F1 Assigned Function Key F2 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Screen Buttons Push Buttons Screen Selectors Goto Return Goto Config Screen Screen List Selector Creating Screen Selectors 11 3 This section shows how to create a Goto Goto Config Screen or Return screen button All appear the same when positioned on a screen On touch screen terminals screen buttons are aligned with the touch grid even if it s not visible To create a Goto Goto Config Screen or Return button 1 Click the appropriate tool on the toolbox Or choose Goto Goto Config Screen or Return from the Objects gt Screen Selectors submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default button size Or drag the pointer to size the button Gola Goto ketu Conf rn ig 3 To place another screen button of the same type move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit screen button mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 11 4 Creating Screen Selectors Setting Properties To set properties of a screen selector button of Screen Buttons 1 Double click the screen button object Screen Selector Object x Properties Options Type Goto Specific Screen M Screens F
199. al ra T A a a rs sz re 6 Les rz am a rae O a a E E a ria EE al F Paun Theroni Mack Tandai 0 pasenday 2 Enter the block transfer parameters starting with 1 Use To Enabled Enable or disable the block transfer The default is disabled Address Specify the starting address of the block transfer in a native SLC or PLC Remote 1 0 link Mode Specify Read or Write Length Specify the number of words 1 64 required by a block transfer The default is 64 A length of 63 is reserved for Pass Through Each block transfer must use a different starting address length and read write mode 3 Repeat step 2 for each additional block transfer required 4 If downloading applications from a computer on the DH network you must select the Pass Through check box Note If Pass Through is not supported by controller the check box is dimmed Publication 2711 6 0 20 12 Terminal and Communication Setup 5 Select a Block Transfer Timeout value 0 60 seconds A value of 0 disables the timeout which means the terminal will not generate Block Transfer timeout warnings 6 Click OK to return to the Communication Setup dialog The dialog below shows 2 block transfer assignments It also shows that Pass Through is enabled for application transfers from a DH network fireiewee FL ez OOOO O Fa to tt lt CSsts r T Eo o oo rs B E rE E F O F Pam Thanh Whack Tro
200. al Gateway device does not support bridging operations or remote network device is not an operator terminal The local gateway device cannot pass commands to another physical network or the device on the remote network is not an Operator Terminal In the File Transfer Setup dialog page verify that you have entered the correct Gateway Node Address Terminal Node Address and Link ID numbers Local network device is not an operator terminal The specified device on the local network is not an operator terminal Check the node address of the PanelView terminal in the File Transfer Setup dialog Problem In Windows 95 this error occurs during a download Unable to start AB KT 1 because duplicate nodes were found on the network Downloading with RSLinx Cause The computer running the RSLinx driver is assigned the same node address as another computer running RS Linx on the network Recommended Action Run RSLinx and change the node address for one of the computers Publication 2711 6 0 F 6 Troubleshooting INTERCHANGE Error Information Messages Publication 2711 6 0 This section lists and defines errors and messages that may occur when the INTERCHANGE Software is started or stopped These errors are printed to the standard output when CFG_KT EXE CFG_485 EXE CFG_DF1 EXE or RNA EXE are executed Errors and Informational Messages from CFG_KT EXE CFG 485 EXE and CFG_DF1 EXE
201. al on the DH link Remote 1 0 between a computer on the Remote 1 0 the DH lin k using a 1784 PCMK communications card and port of a PanelView terminal on a Remote 1 0 network RS 232 DH 485 1784 PCMK on DH between a computer on the DH lin the RS 232 port of a PanelView terminal k using a 1784 PCMK communications card and connected to Port 0 ofan SLC 5 04 DH between a computer on the DH port of a Pane the DH lin View termin k using a 1784 PCMK communications card and al on the DH link 1784 P CMK on DH 485 DH 485 between a computer on the DH 485 network using a 1784 PC card and the DH 485 port of a PanelView terminal 2 Click the Add Device button Unique number assigned to INTERCHANGE driver This is not the computer s COM port DF1 parameters for a PanelView terminal must be set to Baud 19200 Parity None Error Detect CRC COM Port Parameters should be set to COM Port 2 typically uses Interrupt IRQ 3 or COM Port 1 typically uses Interrupt IRQ 4 Publication 2711 6 0 Pot FR Staten Hoge LEI 1 Comerercalen Poerio Diki Page z zj fete 0 t 1170 Sea iF rubbed Cow tet e Defaul Paty MORE Ee at Digable list K communications A configuration dialog opens for the selected driver The following dialog opens for the DF1 RS 232 on COM Port driver t Driver
202. alled RNA EXE has already been run RNA ERROR RNATSR lt version gt is already running Your installation may have been unsuccessful Re install and restart the INTERCHANGE Software If this error still occurs contact your Rockwell Software Inc Global Technical Support Representative RNA ERROR wrong version of KT driver If either of these errors occur call your Rockwell Software Inc Global Technical Support Representative RNA Internal error KTTSR_ATTACH returns lt num1 gt instead of lt num2 gt RNA Internal error no driver has port lt num gt These errors can occur if there was difficulty creating the packet buffers or unsolicited table at startup If that is the case an error was displayed at startup as well RNA Error X freeing the packet buffers RNA Error X freeing the unsolicited table RNA WARNING no ports available on driver x Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Appendix G Internal Read Only Tags This appendix lists internal tags of PanelBuilder These tags can be used for objects that read tag addresses such as an indicator General Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description 0 to 114623 PV550 0 to 245695 PV600 0 to 245695 PV900M Series D or earlier 0 to 1032128 PV900M Read_AppByteF ree Unsigned Integer Series E later Bytes 0 to 1032128 PV900C 0 to 1032128 PV100
203. alue The initial value specified in the Tag Editor is written to the controller on powerup or reset This initial value is not scaled so it must be entered in units used by the logic controller For example the terminal uses C and the controller uses F To initialize the terminal to a value of 32 F the initial value in the Tag Editor needs to be 32 not 0 The terminal does not scale the initial value before sending it to the controller if the specified tag has an e initial value and e ascale and or e offset The value stored in the terminal may be different than the value sent to the controller because of rounding that occurs during pre scaling A warning message is displayed during validation if this occurs If the scaled initial value exceeds the range limits because of a rounding error an error message is displayed Publication 2711 6 0 10 6 Creating Data Entry Controls Equations for Scaling Example Entered Value Offset Controller Value cule PanelView Displayed Value Controller Value x Scale Offset Fixed Decimal 121036532 mar a 4964 44 4964 Displayed Value 4964 x 0 018 32 121 35 Stored Value Keypad Controlled Decimal 122 9 32 1 8 Displayed Value 51 x 1 8 32 123 8 Stored Value 50 5 51 Publication 2711 6 0 Precision and Rounding Except for floating point values the logic controller stores values as integers rounding off any digits to the right of th
204. ame Print Only Objects do not support printing of double byte characters Double byte font selected for print only object Select a single byte size font Project database has not been defined for the application The application is not linked to a tag database Open the Project Management dialog Application menu and either create a project or link an existing project to the application Read tag not defined A read tag has not been defined for the object Open the object s dialog and assign a read tag Rack number of the Terminal is not supported by the Logic Controller The rack number assigned to the Remote 1 0 PanelView terminal exceeds the rack number supported by the controller or is set at 0 which is not supported by the controller From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button and reconfigure the rack number Required Tag fields missing or incomplete Tag has no type node name or address specified Complete tag information in the Tag Editor Remote Ack tag range must be greater than or equal to trigger range A bit array size for the Remote Acknowledge tag was specified that is less than the Trigger s bit array Make sure the bit array size for the Remote Ack tag is greater than or equal to the bit array for the trigger Saved device data is missing or corrupted and cannot be used to update the device database The device
205. an t start with a number or contain spaces The Project Name list box contains the names of all existing projects Select one of these if the new application will use the same tag definitions and devices as another application The Project Name links the application with a database of tag definitions and device terminal and controller information Publication 2711 6 0 6 4 Working with Applications and Screens 4 In the Terminal Name box enter a 1 to 32 character name for the terminal This name identifies the terminal to the project If the selected project contains existing terminal devices you can select the name of a terminal from the Terminal Name box p To copy rename or delete devices from a project see page 21 4 5 Under Terminal Type Information define the Panel View terminal in which the application will run by selecting Terminal option from the PV Type box Keypad Touch or Keypad amp Touch PV550 PV600 only Catalog number and firmware version installed in the terminal from the Catalog and Version list The list is filtered based on the previous two selections The Ports area displays the physical ports and protocols of the selected terminal If you selected an existing terminal from the Terminal Name box the dialog displays the defined terminal information 6 Click the OK button The application file window opens showing the name of the application and the selected terminal Because
206. an one driver for the same communication port Publication 2711 6 0 2 14 Installation Publication 2711 6 0 4 Click OK to exit the dialog f ferant io eal ered ad ba AEBS 7 ia changa io iba disci Eri grogan T Co 5 Exit Windows and reboot the computer to load the driver and its configuration Important You must reboot your computer any time you add or remove a driver or change configuration parameters of a driver After rebooting the computer messages display indicating that the INTERCHANGE driver was successfully configured and loaded For example the following messages appear for the DF1 driver CFG_DF1 001A Reading device configuration from C RSI IC BIN CFG_KT INI CFG_DF1 0000 TSR configured no errors detected Important Errors that occur during a reboot indicate an incomplete or incorrect configuration of the INTERCHANGE drivers Reconfigure the drivers Editing INTERCHANGE Driver Parameters To edit the configuration parameters of an active driver 1 Select the driver from the Configured Devices list Click the Edit Device button 2 3 Edit configuration parameters in the driver s dialog 4 Click OK to close dialogs 5 Reboot your computer to load the new configuration Removing INTERCHANGE Driver To remove a current driver configuration 1 Select the driver from the Configured Devices list 2 Click the Remove Device button You are prompted to confirm the operation
207. anelBuilder Basics Working with Applications and Screens Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter 4 Chapter ODJeG VeS siaa isi uwina ai eA AOA 4 1 PanelView Terminal Ports aaa 4 1 DH 485 Communications sca ak coda aladdeid e wl aatiaan aad ais 4 2 DAC OMMUNICGUONG orres oneness enan ede Meee es Bar 4 3 DEL COMMUNICAUONS same aus riisi siati sag iiaa aaa an 4 4 DH 485 DH DF 1 Communication Considerations 4 5 Remote I O Communications cece eee eee eee 4 6 Discrete YO ss wen act of aitcd ws apie Bao cael nin Saf BR Sees aad ahi ae 4 9 Block Transfer itinira cGaddadedadtardseaeaneeaa neds 4 11 Chapter 5 Chapter Objectives aaa 5 1 Windows Environment 00 aaa 5 1 PanelBuilderWindoWS ccc cece eee eee ene ens 5 2 i a ee ee ee 5 4 TOOL BAP arcani Rte conta i eiea aaia wen a ee tae 5 5 SOUS Bafi ieii eieaa paei ahei iina iae AERA 5 5 Format BaN s iduivcyaduptueppuy eukedunecks A 5 6 TOOIDOKES yosi ta rimae a a E R EEN 5 7 Keypad Display i cuasan gah a aaa aa aka A 5 7 Color P GUS meurta Graad e a A eae eed aa Ges 5 8 Dialog BOXES sc 4a ose bauble dc tataaiil da ona alaaa ee enik ane 5 9 Spreadsheet Editors wnew sey tenedee pees eaue eww se EA Bes 5 10 Pane BuilderDeraultS san d aweos twa dares euwawme dawn ika 5 13 Getting Help icctscd cancer uhae eee tae she eaga doe yee 5 14 Chapter 6 Chapter ODJECUVES irasi scares deereend debates a a aA 6 1 Helpful AINIS xsnrctecen decane diede eenid E Gut ads a bes
208. anguage The values of the extended ASCII characters match those in Appendix H Creating an ASCII Entry Object 1 Choose Cursor Point or Keypad Enable from the Objects gt ASCH Entry menu 2 Click the left mouse button to place the default object size or drag the crosshair to size the object 3 To place another object of the same type move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit ASCII entry mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Creating Data Entry Controls 10 17 Setting the Properties of an ASCII Entry Object 1 Double click the object to access its dialog parameters Tip Faima Eii Dan T Perrot Ker L F Tih Get Diolm THe Witte Tar r a 2 On the Properties tab set the operating parameters of the ASCH Entry object as defined below 3 When the dialog is closed the object appears with characters to match the string width If you select Format gt Inner Text while the object is selected the inner text box contains an ASCII placeholder Z 10 where 10 is the specified string width for the object Like other objects you can add inner text around the placeholder or change the appearance of the object using formatting options See Chapter 17 for details Type Changes the ASCII entry object to Keypad Enable or Cursor Point Input Specifies whether the operator presses a function key or a touch cell to activate the ASCII entry object
209. annot support alarm an The specified termin alarms al does not support Change the terminal type or remove alarms alarm triggers alarm buttons and alarm banners from the application Target terminal cannot support ASCI callouts The specified termin ASCII callouts al type does not support Use the Application Text editor to remove all ASCII callouts from the messages Target terminal cannot support number of alarms contained in the application The specified termin the number of alarm application al type cannot support s contained in the Refer to the user manual to determine the maximum number of alarms allowed Remove any unnecessary alarms Target terminal cannot support print only objects The specified termin printing al type does not support Remove all Print Only Objects from the application fi Temporary file open failed file name PanelBuilder was unable to open a temporary file during an upload disk or write protect Probable cause is full condition Check available disk space or write protection Temporary file read failed file name PanelBuilder was unable to read the temporary file The file may be locked by another application or corrupt Check if file is locked by another application If not contact Allen Bradley technical suppo
210. ant to copy 2 Click the Copy button 3 In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the copied project The name cannot start with a number or contain spaces 4 Click the OK button Two versions of the project now exist one under the original name and one under the new name Delete a project 1 From the list of Existing Projects select the project you want to delete You cannot select the project currently used by the application 2 Click the Delete button You are asked to confirm the deletion 3 Click Yes to delete the project If more than one project is to be deleted click Yes for each project or Yes to All All tag definitions associated with the project are permanently removed Important Do not use DOS or Windows tools to delete projects Publication 2711 6 0 21 4 Managing Projects Managing Devices The Devices tab in the Project Management dialog lets you In Projects e view PanelView terminal devices and PLC SLC devices that are currently defined for a project Application Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management e rename a device e make a copy of an existing device Description e delete a device Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload You cannot create new devices from the Project Management dialog e PanelView terminal devices are added to a project when an application is first created using the New Applicati
211. appears in the Numeric Scratch Pad of the Panel View terminal so that it appears in the correct language To enable external font support 1 Choose Terminal Setup From the Application menu 2 Click the Font Setup button E Etena Forte Beobted Eaiermal Port Fie Birem Soratoh Pied Lunorson Check this box to translate and F Ihe Costes Tasi fet To nerea edit the text that appears in the limari Scratch Pad Print numeric scratch pad on the PanelView terminal Click this button to set the Numeric Scratch Pad Prompt to the default text in English If you clear the check box the Numeric Scratch Pad Customization Area is dimmed 3 Check the External Font Support box to enable external fonts 4 From the External Font File list select a font file The selected font file determines the character sizes available and the characters available for display in objects 5 Check the Use Custom Text box to translate the English text that appears in the Numeric Scratch Pad of the Panel View terminal to the selected language Checking this box allows you to change the wording of the prompt if desired If you do not translate the Numeric Scratch Pad prompt it will appear in English on the terminal 6 Click OK to exit and return to the Terminal Setup dialog 8x16 8x24 v 16x24 24432 32x40 1616 24x24 32x32 Internal Font sizes in PanelBuilder External Font sizes in PanelBuilder Multilingual Su
212. application The font file you want to use in PanelBuilder must be located in PBWIN FONT For details on how to create a font file see the first section of this document Using font files requires e PanelBuilder Software V2 3 or later Systems running earlier versions of PanelBuilder require an upgrade e PanelView terminals running firmware V3 0 or later Terminals with earlier firmware versions will require a firmware upgrade To check the firmware running on your terminal choose Terminal Info from the Configuration Mode menu on the terminal Step 1 Select a Terminal Supporting External Fonts From the New Application or Terminal Setup dialog Application menu select a Panel View terminal that supports external fonts Any terminal running firmware version 3 0 or later supports external fonts Emm remie Avec Teast Coes Tete Em ooo Teemal Typa eirama Pinte iene miee evear are bond tobe This button is only P oped i Toh enabled for PanelView terminals running Firmware Version 3 0 or later TE T 1 T iF PADD epee FAH HIHI PATERA PAL epee FHE I m ITERA MOAI Ceppi FHN E Pras ro asks Fuat DFI Teis Peai am C peaa 1 Pp Publication 2711 6 0 22 12 Multilingual Support Publication 2711 6 0 Step 2 Enable External Font Support The External Font Setup dialog allows you to e enable a font file for the PanelBuilder application e translate and edit the default text that
213. application select an object 3 Enter inner text mode 4 Use the Paste command or Paste tool to paste the characters from the clipboard into the text box Publication 2711 6 0 H 2 Using ASCII Characters r 0 ON O OH BR Q N Publication 2711 6 0 Control Code Dec ASCII Character Set Char Dec Char x nn m o O W gt BD N lt xXx lt CHM DO DVO 2 BFrRXie Dec Extended ASCII Character Set Using ASCII Characters H 3 Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Glossary Glossary active The window application file or screen or object that is currently selected Only one window can be active at a time If a window is active its title bar is highlighted to differentiate it from other windows If an object is active it has handles Windows or objects that are not selected are inactive application In the context of PanelBuilder an application is a logical arrangement of screens which replace the functions of a control panel of buttons switches and indicators The application runs in a Panel View terminal application file File containing configuration information for the Panel View terminal Files exist as either a PanelBuilder application PBA file type or a Panel View application PVA file type Files transferred to a terminal are in a PVA format Files with
214. application from a terminal using Pass Through Choose Upload from the Application menu Select the Upload parameters J p rm Agpbicuadicnn E L m Click OK to start Select Operator Terminal via Pass Through gt a upload Select RS Linx or seer INTERCHANGE Driver gt fiiia o DH is active driver i Click Setup to configure R emote 1 0 or DH 485 Pass Through Enter name of PVA file in which to EST PVA Bross parameters See pages 23 14 save uploaded application or click i aS and 23 15 Browse to search for a file Dpgral lt _ Under Presets select values to upload e Original to upload presets initial values defined for inputs e Current States to upload current input values in terminal Select type of terminal from which you rwmutias are uploading application PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of upload FILE TRANSFER STATUS 50x i e iik es ee hmn fee ee nae Likes a0 ace an Rise ae l Circe j was bee res aiiiar iyat Percent Complete In Progress When upload is complete the application opens in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 23 Using the Application Use the Application File Transfer Utility WINPFT EXE to transfer File Transfer Utility PVA files between a terminal and a computer running Windows Important Applications that you upload or download
215. application to run in a different Panel View terminal or different type of controller by assigning it to a different application See page 21 2 In this case some of the tags and objects may have to be edited An application is validated for correct operation before it can be downloaded to a terminal All incompatibilities are caught during validation Planning an Application 3 3 Steps for Creating an The general steps for creating an application are Application 1 Document the application carefully including e purpose of the application e information the operator needs to make good decisions choices the operator will have to make Review this document with the operator before the application is run 2 Create the application including e screens each screen may include controls indicators graphics text and screen controls e alarm controls e runtime communication parameters e operating parameters of terminal The application is associated with a project when the application is created The project database is a collection of tags and devices PanelView terminal and logic controller that are used by the application A project can support more than one application provided that they are all designed for the same type of terminal and the same type of logic controller 3 Values associated with alarms objects and variables are stored in controller memory addresses and are referenced by the application via named tags En
216. are converted to the closest shade of gray color bitmaps are converted to grayscale bitmaps Also text sizes are converted to the closest matching font in the new application You may want to resize the text Publication 2711 6 0 20 16 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2711 6 0 Converting Application from Color to Monochrome If converting a color application to a monochrome application all colors are removed from the screen screen background is converted to white brighter colors of objects are converted to white e darker colors of objects are converted to black e color bitmaps are converted to monochrome bitmaps Also the text sizes are converted to the closest matching size in the new application You may want to resize the text Converting Application to a Terminal without Printer Support If converting an application that supports printing terminal has RS 232 printer port to an application that does not support printing e the print attribute is removed from appropriate objects e an error message is generated for Print Only Objects that are used by the application the message indicates the specific object To change the terminal type of a Panel View device 1 Choose Terminal Setup from the Application menu 2 Select the Setup tab The dialog shows information associated with the terminal name when the application was first created 3 From the Terminal Name list box select another name
217. ariable Foreground Color Background Color Toggle Fore Background Blink Fill Pattern Shape Line Type Publication 2711 6 0 Inner Text Define inner text for each state of an object Inner Graphic Select and insert a graphic for each state of a multistate object Text Size gt Open a submenu to set the size of the selected text Align Text gt Open a submenu to align text to the left right or center Underline Toggle underlining on or off for the selected text Word Wrap Toggle word wrap on or off for the selected text Embedded Variable Open a submenu to insert a time date numeric or ASCII variable in a text string Also lets you edit a variable Foreground Color gt Open a submenu to select a foreground color for an object text or graphic Background Color gt Open a submenu to select a background color for an object text or graphic Toggle Reverse the foreground and background colors of an object Fore Background text or graphic Blink Toggle blinking on or off for the selected object or text Fill Pattern gt Open a submenu to select a fill pattern for the selected objects Shape gt Open a submenu to change the shape of selected objects Line Type gt Open a submenu to change the edge or border type of selected object s Application Menu Arican a Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Description
218. arms Tag 15 27 Clear All Handshake Tags 15 27 Clearing Banner 15 2 Creating 15 16 Defining Triggers 15 14 Examples 15 28 15 29 15 30 15 31 15 32 Fields 15 17 Global Acknowledge 15 3 Global Parameters 15 12 Handshake Tag 15 23 Message Display 15 7 Optional Tags 15 22 Overview 1 3 15 1 Print 1 7 15 3 Print Alarm List 1 7 15 3 Remote Acknowledge Tag 15 23 Remote Handshake Tag 15 23 Remote Tags 15 26 Trigger 15 15 Using Existing Text 15 20 Align Menu Commands A 4 Align Text Tools B 3 Aligning Objects Screen Grid Resizing Grid 7 6 Snapping Objects to Grid 7 6 Touch Grid 7 5 Application Application Name 6 3 Changing Application Name 6 8 Changing Protocols 7 22 Closing 6 21 Converting 20 15 Converting Between Color and Grayscale 6 18 20 15 Converting Between Color and Monochrome 6 18 Copying Color to Grayscale 7 22 Copying Color to Monochrome 7 21 Index Copying Monochrome to Grayscale 7 21 Copying Touch Screen to Keypad 7 22 Creating New 6 3 Description 1 1 6 9 File Icon 5 3 File Window 5 3 Moving to Another Computer 21 7 Multilingual 22 1 Opening Existing 6 5 Planning 3 1 3 14 4 1 4 14 ProjectName 6 3 Reducing Size of 23 28 Renaming 6 8 Reports 24 1 Saving 6 20 Screen Icon 5 3 Screen Window 5 3 Terminal Type 6 3 Text 18 2 Typical Screens 1 5 Validating 23 2 Version Information 6 8 Application File Transfer Utility Downloading App
219. ars only for the specified state Inner Graphic TRE Editing inner text for objects without states is somewhat different Align Test than for multistate or list objects The procedures that follow Underline describe both options Word Wrap ae To edit inner text for an object without states Foreground Color Background Color Toggle Fore Background 1 Select the object Blink 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Fill Pattern Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu Shape Line Type The Format bar shows the current text with the insertion point following the text Texts i sta oS For numeric data display or numeric entry objects you ll see a variable placeholder V with formatting details in the text box You can t delete this variable but you can add text before or after Text 2 V 6NOFILLFIX0 Text string number A number is automatically assigned to each text string in an application This number appears to the left of the Text box 3 Edit the text As you edit text it s also entered in the object If word wrap is on text wraps at the beginning of a word not the middle Word Wrap is set from the Format menu An asterisk appears if the text exceeds the object size To delete text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE To replace text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then type the new text To add text
220. ata table Maximum characters 32 edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable address within the For more information on valid characters processor forthe tag addresses refer to your processor s user manual Initial Value The starting value for Maximum characters 24 edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable the current tag in engineering units 00 9 ee E and period eif the Data Type is bit enter either 0 or 1 characters emaximum precision is 6 places to the right of the decimal point for non floating point values eif present a sign or for the number must be first is the default eif present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the e or E provides a preset value for numeric entry objects only eno entry default of 0 Update Frequency The rate at which you want the terminal to obtain data e1 9 where 1 is the fastest update rate does not apply to remote 1 0 Alternate Methods Type the update frequency 1 to 9 Use the TAB key to move to the Update Frequency field and press ALT J to display the list of available formats Scaling The values you want Maximum characters 12 edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable Scale to use to convertthe 0 9 characters im iny mx b current tag s ee E and period maximum precision for scale is 6 places to right of Offset processor integer decimal point biny mx b va
221. ate from the popup menu A new entry is added after the last entry 2 Repeat step 1 for each entry you want to add Each entry you add is created with the defaults from Entry 0 To delete entries select the row number and choose Delete State from the popup menu Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 23 Editing List Text The Text field contains the text that will appear for each entry in the List Indicator Double click on the field and edit the text Other text fields control how the text is formatted for each state e text size the default varies for each terminal type the selection applies to entire list e underline default is off text blink default is off left right or center alignment default is left e foreground color default is white for color and grayscale terminals black for monochrome terminals Entering State Values If Value was selected in the Read area of the Properties tab the Value field appears for each state This field defines the numeric value at the read tag address that triggers a specific entry to be highlighted The range of the value you enter must be within the range of the Data Format selected on the Properties tab The default value for each entry is the entry number 0 to 254 Data Format Range Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 IEEE Float 99 999 997 952 t
222. ation filename N es The following table describes each command parameter Parameter Description CMD DOS command that will download the application to the card Memory card DOS commands are drive specific See the instructions for your card drive s Wild card character which PanelBuilder replaces with the application file name entered in the File Name box in the Application Download dialog DriveLetter Memory card drive on your computer The drive letter is always followed by a colon After entering a command string for the first time it automatically appears in the command list box You can then select the command from the list box instead of entering it Publication 2711 6 0 23 18 Validating and Transferring Applications Downloading to a DOS File You can download applications to a file in the DOS environment which can be downloaded to a terminal later using the Windows version of the Application File Transfer Utility The PanelBuilder application file PBA is translated and downloaded to DOS with a PVA file type Note You can transfer the PVA file between the computer and a DH 485 terminal in the DOS environment using the Panel View File Transfer Utility See page 23 7 To download an application to a DOS file Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu Select Download parameters Let lt click ok to start Opao T imna f
223. before downloading itto a PanelView terminal Download an application to an operator terminal memory card Download or file You can also download to a terminal from a computer on the DH network using Pass Through Upload Upload an application to PanelBuilder from a PanelView terminal using a direct connection or Pass Through Terminal Setup Set runtime communication and operating parameters for the PanelView terminal including powerup options time date format terminal status control tags and advanced options such as auto repeat settings for keys or touch cells Alarm Setup To define alarm messages alarm triggers and global parameters that apply to the alarm system Print Only Object Setup Define a print only message object Messages are printed when triggered rather than displayed in a Message Display Choose To Open the Exceptions dialog which displays errors created Exceptions during application validation Use this window as a reference while correcting errors Arran n screens in the workspa that they overla ee ange open screens in the workspace so ey overlap each other with the title bar of each screen remaining visible Tile Horizontally Arrange open screens as horizontal tiles in the workspace Tile Vertically Arrange open screens as vertical tiles in the workspace Arrange Icons Arrange icons so that they are evenly spaced along the bottom of the w
224. ber of data bits is always 8 Your selection must match the settings of the target device PLC controllers allow a parity of Even or None For SLC controllers the parity is fixed at None Parity S top Bits Select the type of error detection performed on data The options are CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check and BCC Block Check Character The default is CRC Error Detect Specify whether handshaking is used by the DF1 port The default is Off or no handshaking If handshaking is On the CTS and RTS lines are enabled Handshake 5 Under Network Nodes edit the node parameters of the controller To insert a network node right click in the Node Name field and select Insert Node from the menu Click in a field to edit it Use To Enter a unique name for the logic controller that Node Name will communicate with the P anelView terminal on the DF 1 link Select the node address 0 to 254 decimal of the dete controller on the DF 1 link Node Type Select the type of controller that will communicate with the PanelView terminal To delete a node right click in a node field and select Delete Node from the shortcut menu From this menu you can also sort multiple nodes by name address type or only modified nodes p To copy rename or delete devices from a project use the Project Management command See page 21 4 6 Click OK to exit and return to the Terminal Setup dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Defining Rem
225. bject are discussed in the chapter describing the object ec Multistate List Use this Field To Objects Objects Object Selecta fill pattern from a list for the state The Fill field does not appear for Fill objects that are not rectangular Blink Toggle blinking on or off for the state Click the box to turn blinking on or off An X in the box indicates the blink option is active The default is off Object Foreground Select a foreground color from a list for the object state The default is white y Object Background Selecta background color from a list for the state The default is blue J Graphic Selecta graphic to appear for the state The list of graphics includes ISA l symbols and imported bitmaps Chapter 17 shows how to position a graphic Graphic Foreground Select a foreground color for the inserted graphic The default is white J Graphic Background Selecta background color for the inserted graphic The default is blue J Text ID Unique number assigned to text string The number is automatically generated when a new state is created Define the inner text string for the object state Default text appears for each Text state ST 0 ST 1 ST 2 You can insert a time date or numeric variable in the y J text string Text Size Select the size of the text string The default size depends on the terminal type For list objects the selectio
226. cale terminals the palette supports 4 colors Use the palette to apply colors to the foreground and background of objects text and graphics Color and grayscale applications support both monochrome and color bitmaps Foreground and background colors are accessed from the Format menu the color palette or the State tab of multistate list objects Alarms The Alarm System includes e Alarm Banner display that pops up over the current screen to notify the operator when an alarm occurs e Alarm Buttons to allow the operator to act on an alarm e Alarm List displays information on the last 100 alarms including whether they have been acknowledged e Alarm List buttons to print or clear alarms in an alarm list e Alarm Setup dialog that provides a set of tabs to configure alarms triggers and global alarm parameters Reports Create customized reports for an application including e application description e object attributes e application text terminal settings e tags e alarm definitions e screen images and alarm banner display Print reports to a file or a graphic printer supported by Microsoft Windows Publication 2711 6 0 1 4 Overview of PanelBuilder Terminal and Communication Setup PLC Controller PanelView Termina LT ST Operating and runtime communication parameters for the Panel View terminal and logic controller are accessed from the Terminal Setup J dialog in
227. can groups consists of words or address contained within a discrete I O rack or within a block transfer For example an application with a full rack block transfer read N7 0 length 64 and a block transfer write N7 128 length 62 has these scan groups e 0 010 0 017 e 1 010 1 017 e N7 0 N7 63 e N7 64 N7 127 e N7 128 N7 190 Controller Types The Panel View Remote I O terminals communicate with the controllers below For each controller the table lists supported rack numbers and support for Pass Through and block transfers Lowest Highest Controller Scanner Pass Through Support Block Transfer Support IBM PC 6008 5 VME 6008 SV o 7 No Yes DEC QBUS 6008 SQ PLC 5 11 3 3 All Series All Revisions Yes PLC 5 15 1 3 Series B Revision N or later Yes PLC 5 20 1 3 All Series All Revisions Yes PLC 5 25 1 7 Series A Revision or later Yes PLC 5 30 1 7 Series A Revision B or later Yes PLC 5 40 1 17octal Series A Revision E or later Yes Series B Revision B or later PLC 5 60 1 27 Series A Revision E or later Yes PLC 5 80 octal Series B Revision B or later SLC 1747 SN Series A o 3 No No SLC 1747 SN Series B 0 3 Yes Yes Other 1771 SN Subsystem 1 7 No No Publication 2711 6 0 4 8 Communications Overview Remote I O Communication Parameters Remote I O communication parameters are defined in the Communication Setup dialog which is accessed from
228. cation 2711 6 0 Remote Tags Ack All Alarms Tag Tag Direction Controller gt Terminal Description Name of address where the controller sets a bit 1 or value to acknowledge all active alarms regardless of the trigger The terminal monitors this address for a nonzero value When the terminal sees a nonzero value it writes the Acknowledge All Value defined for each trigger to the Ack tag address defined for each trigger The Alarm Banner is removed from the terminal display and all alarms not acknowledged in the Alarm List are flagged as acknowledged The value is held at the Ack tag address until the Acknowledge Hold Time expires and the controller has cleared the Ack All Alarms tag Itis the responsibility of the controller s program to clear the value Creating Alarms 15 27 Notes The Ack tag and Acknowledge All Value for alarm triggers are defined on the Alarm Triggers tab While the Ack All Alarms address contains a nonzero value the operator cannot acknowledge alarms locally at the terminal if the Ack tag is defined Ack All Handshake Tag Terminal gt Controller Name of address where the terminal toggles a bit to indicate that it received the Ack All Alarms value from the controller This tag is optional and used only in conjunc tion with the Ack All Alarms tag Clear All Alarms Tag Controller gt Terminal Name of address where the controller sets a bit or nonzero value
229. cation exceeds the allowable byte size Try to reduce byte size of application PanelView application warnings found Continue with download Warnings found during validation The application will download and run However it may not operate as intended Correct the warnings and try again PanelView internal tag No parameters to edit Edit Tag button was pressed for internal tag You can t edit internal tags Print manager failed Error received from print manager spooler Check print spooler for possible errors Printer Initialization string can be at most 20 characters The specified printer initialization string is too long Shorten the string to 20 or less characters Printer setup failed Error occurred during printer setup Check validity of print driver Reload driver if necessary Project already associated with current application Selected project is already associated with the current application None Project created for tags in application being opened Project Name A project doesn t exist for the uploaded application PanelBuilder creates a project for the application and fills in all the application tags Project does not exist Selected project that doesn t exist Select another project name Project does not exist Can t associate Associated application with a project name that doesn t exist Select an existing project
230. cdady tame ees meheeeewewederewana esas 19 5 Saving TaS s2ivaicveeaceadeaedergnes eoeestevnea ae bass 19 7 Viewing Tags sis tiiin cet wanted cane Eph owe ai whe 19 7 Inserting and Deleting TagS cece eect eee ees 19 7 COME TaS cvcuitutcutidununebdas een a a a 19 8 Dupe HUNG EOS vitae kee eip eden oa E E A ee 19 9 Finding FAQS a ssis taik a aae alea dda cod medrese RE R ATE A 19 10 Soring Tags aaa ieur Gonads ea E an E E Geese oe 19 11 Printing TaS ai secati aieiaa oe ce td ob aataid aaa was 4 19 12 Using Tools aaa a 19 15 Tag Import Export Utility oaa 19 15 Importing TAGS oaoa 19 16 Handling Data Collisions 0 cece cece eee eee eee 19 17 EXDOMINQ 4005 sicssebsidtacdie ebaduwied aiweaaaes acd 19 18 Examining the Results of anImporv Export 19 19 Interpreting Error Messages cece eect eee eens 19 20 Publication 2711 6 0 viii Table of Contents Terminal and Communication Setup Managing Projects Multilingual Support Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter 20 Chapter ODJeC VeS tccidcpiscriumteeridvesetinugee oes 20 1 Terminal Setup Overview cece cece eects 20 2 Defining DH 485 Communications 0 cece eee ees 20 3 Defining DH Communications cece ee eee es 20 5 Defining DF1 Communications ccc cece eee ees 20 7 Defining Remote I O Communications 000000 20 9 Defining Block Transfers oo cece cee eee ee eee eens 20 11 Configuring the Printer Port ccc cece eee 20
231. ce in applications that could result in physical injury product damage or significant process down time All critical alarm indications and any critical logic controller responses must employ redundant and hard wired or mechanical interlocks In PanelBuilder you define a series of alarms For each alarm you define a message and a trigger value You can also specify whether the alarm must be acknowledged displayed and or printed You must also define the trigger tag that links the alarm messages and the controller program The program monitors values for alarm conditions When the program detects an alarm condition it sets the bit or value at the address defined by the trigger tag The terminal reads this value and triggers the corresponding alarm For example to monitor the level of a tank define an alarm with a trigger value of 1 and the message text Tank too Full Then program the controller to set the bit 1 at the trigger address when the tank is full This triggers the message Tank too Full Publication 2711 6 0 15 2 Creating Alarms Publication 2711 6 0 Alarm Message __ Oven Temperature too High Required clear Aek Print Print Clear Ack Alarm Buttons gt Alarm Aleem Alec ae Optional List List Alarm Banner 06 19 96 16 55 Oven T 06 19 96 16 30 LS101 Optional P gt V 06 18 96 15 00 06 18 96 15 03 Oven T VY 06 18 96 15 10 06 18 96 15 13 Tank O Alarm List Optiona
232. ces from the Application menu User Preferences x ect Database Restor i Cancel I Always Add Missing Tags amp Devices Details Shows information about this dialog I Always Replace Duplicate Tags amp Devices Show Project Database Restore Dialog Select this check box to display the Project Database Restore dialog each time you an open an application This dialog prompts you to e replace duplicate tags and devices in the project database with those in the application e add application tags and devices to the project database if they are missing This is the default option To add missing tags and replace duplicate tags in the project database without showing the Project Database dialog disable this check box and select the other two boxes Always Add Missing Tags amp Devices Select this check box and disable the first check box to add missing tags and devices to the project data database without opening the Project Database dialog This option is equivalent to clicking the Add All button on the Project Database dialog Always Replace Duplicate Tags amp Devices Select this check box and disable the first check box to replace duplicate tags and devices in the project database without opening the Project Database dialog This option is equivalent to clicking the Replace All button on the Project Database dialog Important If you disable all check boxes the verification process will not occu
233. cessary to run CFG_XXX EXE again however it has caused no harm to do so CFG_XXX 000e TSR already configured no action taken Your installation may have been unsuccessful Re install the INTERCHANGE Software and restart the INTERCHANGE Software If this error still occurs contact your Rockwell Software Inc Global Technical Support Representative CFG_XXX 000f TSR version is incompatible with this executable CFG_XXX 0010 TSR not found must first be resident to be configured Caused by one of the following Publication 2711 6 0 F 8 Troubleshooting Publication 2711 6 0 1 DTL_XXX TSR could not be de installed Issue the uninstall command again CFG_XXX u 2 An attempt was made to uninstall the DTL_XXX driver CFG_XXX u when it was not installed The DTL_XXX TSR could not be de installed Issue the uninstall command again CFG_XXX u CFG_XXX 0011 TSR still running unable to deinstall The 1784 KT2 communication card must have its memory and interrupt software configured before INTERCHANGE Software is run Make sure you have configured your 1784 KT2 for a memory address and that this memory address matches that entered in the CFG_KT INI file CFG_XXX 0012 KT not found at specified memory KT2 only These errors occur during communication card diagnostics The execution of these diagnostics is controlled by the statement SELFTEST OFF in CFG_KT INI If this line is commented out the diagnostics are
234. ciLigh anal Somes Save tose tren on mn Jma Fn F w ta i aetuenie a _ 4 O Mirm Lee Srm a smiem oooi pa Hamper imams Far H ka Tese Fac an r an Ce ee e ee On monochrome terminals Reverse Video replaces Background Blink Gray scale terminals do have the Display Intensity setting 2 Under Touch amp Key Auto Repeat set auto repeat settings for the terminal keys and touch cells These settings are used only by the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor in control lists and screen lists Use To Rate Specify how fasta key or touch cell repeats when it s pressed and held Valid rates are 0 to 5 Hz where 0 no repeat repeats every second 2 repeats every 1 2 second 3 repeats every 1 3 second 4 repeats every 1 4 second 5 repeats every 1 5 second Delay Specify how long the terminal waits after a key or touch cell is pressed before it repeats Options are 2 4 6 8 1 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 seconds The default is 4 second Publication 2711 6 0 20 22 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2711 6 0 Use Reverse Video 3 Set Terminal Display parameters For PanelView 550 To Enable disable reverse video Default is disabled Indicator Bar Blink Enables disables blinking of the indicator bar on the terminal By default the indicator bar does not blink Backlight Use Background Blink Color Set the state of the terminal backlight at startup Select
235. cify 7 or 8 data bits The defaultis 8 Stop Bits Specify 1 or 2 stop bits The default is 1 Handshaking Specify how handshaking is handled The options are S oftware Hardware or None The default is None Refer to your printer s user manual for details on how to set communication parameters for the printer Publication 2711 6 0 20 14 Terminal and Communication Setup Publication 2711 6 0 4 Configure print parameters for the printer Use Left Margin To Specify the left page margin for printing The left margin must be lt than the page width Page Width Specify the number of characters to print per line Valid settings are 20 132 The default is 80 characters Perforation Skip Value Specify the number of blank lines at the top and bottom of each page The default is 6 The value must be lt the page length A value of 0 disables this parameter If the page length is 66 and the skip value is 5 the page is formatted as 2 blank lines 61 printed lines and 3 blank lines The extra line is always at the bottom EOL Char Specify the End of Line Character The options are CR Carriage Return and CR LF Carriage Return and Line Feed The default is CR Page Length Specify the number of lines to print per page Valid settings are 0 255 The default is 66 lines The value of 0 indicates continuous printing with no page breaks New Page Control Specify what controls a page
236. ck on the cell or press TAB or arrow keys Some cells require you to enter text and some have drop down lists to select options Sap Aam Tigers dase Pria ka miiia baft a Duhh oo dipiay Sarii C Jee ae rer 3 Click the Trigger Tag field Select or enter a name for the address where the controller will write a bit or value to trigger an alarm condition While in the Trigger Tag field choose Edit Tag from the popup menu to edit the tag definitions The Tag Form dialog opens When done click OK to close the dialog The controller address of trigger tag must be the lowest address of the corresponding alarms 15 15 Creating Alarms 4 In the Trigger Type field select the type of trigger associated with the Trigger Tag address Trigger Type Bit Description Trigger an alarm as it occurs Multiple alarms can be triggered at once The bit position can be within e a word bit 0 to bit 15 e a block of consecutive words Reserve up to 16 consecutive words bit 0 to bit 255 after the tag address Each bit that changes from 0 to 1 will trigger an alarm whose trigger value corresponds to that bit The controller program must reset each bit 0 after the corresponding alarm is displayed LSBit Least Significant Bit Trigger an alarm in a priority sequence least significant bit to most Significant bit based on its bit position within e a word bit 0 to bit 15 e a block of
237. ck the Tag Editor button in the tag form view e Or choose Summary from the View menu Or choose List Editor from the Tools menu Note If you enter data in the form view it will not appear in the table view when you switch views Choose Refresh from the Window menu to display the new data To exit the Tag Editor Double click the Control menu box at the top left of the window e Or in the table view choose Exit from the Project menu e Or in the form view click the OK or Cancel button Publication 2711 6 0 19 4 Working with Tags Validating Tag Addresses Table View only Publication 2711 6 0 Options Address Validation Activate address validation before entering or modifying tags Only those tags entered or modified after the option has been selected are validated Addresses for existing tags are not validated To activate address validation Choose Address Validation from the Options menu A check mark next to the menu item indicates that the option is activated Note Address validation is always active in the form view The Tag Editor validates each address against the type of device specified in the Node Name field If the address is invalid the Tag Editor displays the following warning ARE A i Warning The adi eess dar this tag is freveid D you aman edi the ial siirat Click To Return to the invalid address in the table view Save the tag in the database with the invalid
238. ckground Text aaa aa 16 8 Importing Exporting Bitmap GraphicS cece eee 16 10 Using Background Graphics cece eee eee eee eens 16 16 Chapter 17 Chapter Objectives ccrcauicntaclacnae Tt aiecie dau ahs 17 1 PONMGEOUUONS sairi ewes onenei tome nalts Mu ae eS Bae 17 2 Changing the Appearance of Objects 1 cece eee eee ee 17 3 Changing Object Shape cee eee eee eee 17 4 Changing Line Type ii0s eedeietwteeseesys Gadus eeee ues 17 5 Changing Fill Pattern 61 ccc eee eee eee ees 17 6 Using the Blink Option i2ccsceaceasdvarwetacaieveenvas 17 7 Setting Foreground Background Colors cee eee 17 8 Reversing Foreground Background Colors see eevee 17 9 Working with Inner Text i dena aed ch edd a 17 10 Editing nner TEN teas cena dade padent aan TIT sean ea 17 11 Inserti g TMG OF Date ii ecak teen ces dun tan ad akevews 17 13 Inserting a Numeric Variable 1 cee eee eee ee 17 14 Inserting an ASCII Variable cc cw aes oee cues wae area weea 17 16 Working with Inner Graphics 00 ccc cece eee eee 17 19 Adding Inner Graphic 2205 2 2ewicwiad dopa Wal cwan deed ahs 17 20 Setting Foreground Background Colors ccc e eee 17 21 Reversing Foreground Background Colors e seve 17 22 Removing an Inner Graphic cece eee eee eee 17 23 Editing GraphiCS cvsitctsenviveawevaad Saadaaddaancan 17 23 Changing the Appearance of Text cece cee ee eens 17 24 SIZINQIOX caier b stdees bead e
239. cking anywhere on the object Handles appear on the object lt Handle Position the pointer over one of the handles The pointer changes to show the direction you can size the object Size Diagonally Lt Size Horizontally Size Vertically Press the left mouse button and drag the handle The object stretches from the anchor point to the position of the pointer expanding and contracting as you move the mouse The anchor point is the handle opposite the handle you choose It does not move when objects are sized 4 Release the mouse button when the object is the right size Objects with inner graphics can t be sized smaller than the graphic You might have to move or delete the inner graphic to size the object appropriately To move an object 1 2 Move the pointer anywhere inside the object Hold down the left mouse button and drag the object to its new location The pointer changes to show that you are moving the object An outline appears as you drag the object Old Location New Location Release the mouse button Publication 2711 6 0 7 10 Working with Objects Grouping and Ungrouping Objects Publication 2711 6 0 You can group objects so they can be moved or edited as a single unit When moving objects in a group they maintain their positions relative to each other Grouped objects remain together until ungrouped A global object can consist of grouped objects For example you
240. clone separator Draws a left arrowhead Draws an up arrowhead Draws a right arrowhead Draws a down arrowhead Bitmaps Tool and Bitmap Summary B 9 This section provides a list of bitmaps that PanelBuilder provides in the C AB PBWIN PBLIB directory These bitmaps can be imported into your application from the Import Export Graphics dialog ra EANN m a cnv2 bmp cnv3 bmp cnvy1 bmp m_3dpb bmp m_s3dpb bmp 3dpb_b bmp 3dpb_g bmp 3dpb_gr bmp 3dpb_r bmp 3dpb_y bmp mtr1 bmp mtr2 bmp mtr3 bmp mtr6 bmp pausepb bmp pipe14 bmp pipe15 bmp pipe16 bmp pipe21 bmp pipe22 bmp pipe23 bmp pipe24 omp pipe25 bmp pipe26 bmp pipe27 bmp pipe28 bmp pipe29 bmp pipe3 bmp pipe34 bmp pipe35 bmp Publication 2711 6 0 B 10 Tool and Bitmap Summary pipe1 bmp J piped5 bmp pipe6 bmp f pipe7 bmp a Epi pe8 bmp pipe9 bmp startpb bmp stoppb bmp resetpb bmp s3dpb_b bmp s3dpb_g bmp s3dpb_gy bmp s3dpb_r bmp s3dpb_y bmp TENES sw1 bmp i sw2 bmp Publication 2711 6 0 p m gr je pipe4c bmp sw3 bmp tank1 bmp tanka bmp tanke bmp tankf bmp tankg bmp tankh bmp tankh2 bmp tankj bmp tankk omp tankl bmp viv1 omp vivib omp viv3 bmp viv4 omp Appendix C PanelBuilder Worksheets e 550 600 Touch Screen Worksheet e 550 600 Keypad Screen Worksheet
241. cluding e RS 232 printer port setup power up defaults e time date display format e font file selection for a specific language e PLC SLC controlled options screen and time date changes auto repeat settings for terminal keys touch cells display settings language setting for terminal messages and handshake timeout Application Validation Use the validation feature to check an application for correct operation An application is validated automatically when it is downloaded to a terminal You can also validate an application at any time using a menu command Warnings or errors detected during validation can be viewed or printed to a printer or file Application Upload Download Capabilities Transfer applications between the computer running PanelBuilder and a PanelView terminal using a e serial connection e Pass Through from a computer on the DH network e memory card e DOS file Computers with a DataBook TMB 240 or TMB 250 card drive can transfer applications to from Allen Bradley s flash memory cards Catalog No 2711 NM11 NM12 NM13 NM14 Computers with a PCMCIA ATA card drive can transfer applications to from Allen Bradley s ATA memory cards Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM24 NM26 Laptops are compatible with the ATA memory cards supporting Windows 95 Plug and Play devices
242. configured with a DH driver the dialog will display available Ports Select the appropriate port To configure DH 485 Pass Through parameters 1 Define the Pass Through parameters as defined below 2 Click OK to return to the Application Download dialog Use To Local Network Gateway Node Address Specify the node address 0 to 76 of the SLC 5 04 controller or DH DH485 Gateway to which your computer is connected Link ID Specify the unique ID number 1 65534 that identifies the computer to controller or DH DH485 link on the DH network Remote Network Terminal Address Specify the node address 0 to 31 of the PanelView terminal on the DH 485 network to which you are downloading an application Specify the unique ID number 1 65534 that identifies the link between the controller and PanelView terminal on the DH 485 network Link ID Publication 2711 6 0 23 16 Validating and Transferring Applications Downloading This section shows how to download an application to a DOS toa DOS Memory Card memory card ina PVA format After copying an application to a memory card you can download it to a Panel View terminal To download an application to a DOS memory card Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu ee Select Download parameters Upsets Tan lt Click OK to start Opa Tamana aa Pass Chess Cancel download Select DOS Memory Card
243. creen appears push buttons from the previous screen must be released before the terminal responds to push buttons on the new screen Figures 3 1 3 2 show the Keypad and Touch Screen Worksheets for the PanelView 900 terminals Worksheets for other terminals are in Appendix C Use these worksheets to draw your application screens At the top of each screen enter the application name screen name number and project name that you want to link to the application The project defines tag addresses and devices Panel View terminal and controller that will communicate The number and size of objects you can place on a screen is limited only by screen space On touch screen terminals each input control should occupy at least 1 touch cell The number of available touch cells depends on the terminal size The Panel View 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen terminal has 384 touch cells The Panel View 550 600 Keypad amp Touch Screen terminal has 128 touch cells Each screen must contain a screen selector allowing the operator to navigate between screens in an application You can assign a screen selector to a touch cell and or a function key Review Chapters 7 14 on screen objects before completing the worksheets Also review memory requirements at end of chapter for hints on reducing the byte size of an application Planning an Application 3 5 Figure 3 1 PanelView 900 Keypad Terminal Worksheet Project Name Application Name Scr
244. cs ieee 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place Alarm List the default size Or drag the pointer to size the bar graph Alarm Buttons Global Object 3 To place another bar graph move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit bar graph mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Setting Properties of a Bar Graph To set bar graph properties 1 Double click the bar graph object es Ls ete lt pens Tag Dialog Fang ia Ma Head Taa LS sam ma j o ooa e 2 Set the bar graph properties as defined on the next page 3 When done click OK Publication 2711 6 0 12 6 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays The following descriptions define properties of a bar graph Fill From Sets the direction for filling the bar graph Click the arrow at the right of the box to list and select an option Select To Fill Left Left to right Right Right to left Top Top to bottom Bottom Bottom to top The bar graph fills with black on monochrome displays and white on color displays You can select a fill pattern from the Format gt Fill Pattern submenu and turn the bar graph border off from the Format gt Line Type submenu Range Sets the minimum and maximum values the bar graph can display The range of values you can enter in the
245. ct an object and choose Inner Text from the Format menu or click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar the Format bar changes to this view O g KO s S S er c Ses g CUO CSCL E LS RS S SPM VE FS aw x Ss O S ie Or g CSP Most options toggle on and off others open a menu To toggle a setting from the Format bar click the tool once to turn it on click it again to turn it off The new setting remains active until changed A check mark indicates active settings for the selected text For multistate objects text formatting options can be set directly from the State tab of the object s dialog Formatting Objects and Text 17 25 Sizing Text When sizing text you can select from a variety of sizes If working with multistate objects you can size the text for each state In list objects changes to text size affect all entries in the list To size text 1 Select the object whose text you want to size 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu 3 If the object is multistate select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 4 Click the Text Size tool on the Format bar and choose a size from the popup menu Or choose a size from the Format gt Text Size menu If an external font is selected a second set of font sizes will appear in parenthesis below the regular PanelBuil
246. ct if they use the same communication protocol For example a project for a Remote I O application requires a Remote I O Panel View terminal a valid PLC controller and tags with PLC formatted addresses or SLC with SN Scanner and tags with SLC formatted addresses A project for a DH 485 application requires a DH 485 Panel View terminal an SLC controller and tags with SLC formatted addresses You can change the project associated with an application from the Project Management dialog From this dialog you can also copy rename or delete projects and devices Publication 2711 6 0 21 2 Managing Projects Managing Projects Aore a Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Description Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup Publication 2711 6 0 The Project tab in the Project Management dialog lets you view the current project for an open application change the current project for an application create a new project rename a project make a copy of an existing project delete a project An application must be open to change the project associated with the application For all other project operations however the application does not have to be open To manipulate projects 1 2 3 4 Choose Project Management from the Application menu The Project Management dialog opens
247. cursor one character to the left in the Display Area gt gt Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area ESC Closes the scratchpad without making any changes CLR Clears the string in the Display Area Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the remote device i After pressing to open the ASCII scratchpad the character string is highlighted If the operator selects a character immediately the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character If the operator presses a control key the terminal continues to display the existing string allowing the operator to edit it Publication 2711 6 0 10 16 Creating Data Entry Controls Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry r EENE oo Keypad Enable Publication 2711 6 0 ASCII Scratchpads in Other Languages The ASCII Scratchpad is available with Character Keyboards in e French e German e Italian e Spanish If the Panel View terminal is configured for operation in one of these languages the ASCII scratchpad will display the Character Keyboard appropriate to the language The SHF control toggles between SHF SHF2 In SHF mode the Character Keyboard displays the shifted state characters e g a to A and 3 to In the SHF2 mode the Character Keyboard displays additional characters available for the desired l
248. cursor to currently highlighted selection in a control or screen list Static Enter Displays screen selected from a screen list selector or confirms a control Static list selection and sends that selection to the controller Acknowledge Button Acknowledges the alarm displayed in the Alarm Banner and removes the Dynamic Alarm Banner from the terminal display Clear Button Clears the Alarm Banner from the terminal display without acknowledging Static the alarm Print Button Prints the current message displayed in the Alarm Banner Static Acknowledge All Button Acknowledges all alarms current and pending and removes the Alarm Dynamic Alaris Banner from the terminal display Alarm List Displays a list of triggered alarms The operator can acknowledge alarms Dynamic in the list clear the list or print the list Print Alarm List Button Prints all alarms in the Alarm List Static Clear Alarm List Button Clears the Alarm List Also clears the Alarm Banner even though the Static alarm condition may still exist Line Connected Line Creates a line or connected lines Static Rectangle Creates a rectangle or square Static Circle E llipse Creates a circle or ellipse Static Freeform Creates a freehand drawing Static Graphics Scale Creates scale with tick marks for bar graph or other purpose Static Background Text Creates screen titles or background text not linked to object Static ISA Symbols Select one of 32 predefined drawings such as a valve to pl
249. d List Key E Home oves the cursor to the first screen in the list Optional End oves the cursor to the last screen in the list Optional e Page Up oves the cursor up a page in a scrolling list Optional Pape Dewn oves the cursor down a page ina scrolling list Optional Baelepace Returns the cursor to the currently highlighted screen Optional Enter Confirms a selection and displays the selected screen To create a list key 1 Click a List Key tool in the toolbox Or choose a List Key from the Objects gt List Keys submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button 3 Click the right mouse button to exit List Key mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox To access the properties of a list key 1 Double click the list key object 2 Under Input specify how the operator will activate the list key e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list e For touch screen terminals touch cell is enabled 3 When you re done click OK The SLC or PLC can control screen changes and return the current screen value to the controller Chapter 20 shows how to use control and status tags to perform these controller functions Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Chapter 1 2 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Bar graphs indicators and numeric data displays show a numeric value or a graph
250. d the new tag s name is the same as the original tag s name in the Tag Editor table view An X appears in the Status column for the new tag s row until its name is changed To Do this select a field use the left mouse button and click in the field select a single row use the left mouse button and click in the Status column for that row select several contiguous use the left mouse button click in the Status column and rows drag the mouse down the column or hold the SHIFT key and press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP select several use the left mouse button and click in the Status column for discontiguous rows the first row Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP Press and hold the CTRL key and click in the Status column of the other rows that you want to select To copy and paste tag information 1 Select the field or row that you want to copy 2 Click the Copy tool on the tool bar or choose Copy from the Edit menu 3 Move the cursor to the new position 4 Click the Paste tool on the tool bar or choose Paste Row or Paste Field from the Edit menu If a row was copied or pasted it is inserted above the current row If a field was copied or pasted it replaces the contents of the field in the current row Be careful to paste it in a field in the same column To copy tags to another application 1 Copy the tag s and exit the Tag Editor 2 Open the target application in the same or another project 3 Open t
251. d Length settings must match the Data File and Length settings in the instructions BTR orBTW Rack Group Module Control Block Data File Length Continuous BLOCK TRANSFER READ WRITE 0 PanelView Rack Assignment Group No 0 7 oe e 0 High or Low Byte Always 0 for PanelView 0 File that controls the operation of the instruction N36 0 i i N37 1 Address in data file to write or read 4 Must match address in Block Transfer dialog N Length of the data being transferred Must match length in Block Transfer dialog Operating mode of the transfer The operator enters the data into the numeric Communications Overview 4 13 Helpful Hints for Block Transfers e Read and write blocks can use the same addresses e Read and Write Blocks may overlap partially or completely e Improve response times by compacting the data into the fewest possible blocks no unused bits or keep all data for a screen in a single block Remote I O scanners generally perform one block transfer in a single I O scan e Ladder logic can use the PanelView s current screen tag status tag to enable block transfers as necessary The screen data is automatically updated when an operator selects the screen See Chapter 20 for a description of the status tags e Minimize the number of block transfers Block Transfer Read Example The following example illustrates a block transfer read The Panel View terminal is assig
252. d displays the message or state corresponding to the first bit that is set 1 The controller clears sets this bit the terminal only reads the bit e The next time the word is read a different bit is the first one set 1 then its message or state displayed Planning an Application 3 9 Value Data Value data occupies a word 2 bytes or 16 bits that represents a numeric value No matter how large or small the value a whole word must be assigned unless it is a bit array 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Address N7 2 277 Floating point values occupy 4 bytes or 32 bits Data Formats PanelView Tag Formats The Panel View terminal recognizes and transfers 7 data formats Data Format Range Bit Oorl Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 IEEE Floating P oint 99 999 997 952 to 999 999 995 904 4BCD 0 to 9999 Bit Array 0 to 65535 Character Array Protocol Dependent Bit A bit data type occupies one bit of memory Its address is given not as a word N7 2 but as a bit N7 2 10 A bit is a location and depends on its position in the word It can be set or reset Signed and Unsigned Integers Signed and unsigned integer values occupy one word 2 bytes or 16 bits of memory no matter how small the value Every bit has a value that depends on its position in the
253. d for each state Entering State Values If Value was selected in the Read area of the Properties tab the Value field appears for each state This field defines the numeric value at the read tag address that triggers the state to display The range of the value you enter must be within the range of the Data Format selected on the Properties tab The default value for each state is the state number 0 to 1 999 Data Format Range Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 4 BCD 0 to 9999 Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Octal 0 to 177777 Formats provided for data entry The terminal does not display transfer these formats Publication 2711 6 0 12 18 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays List Indicators Publication 2711 6 0 A list indicator is a scrolling list containing up to 255 entries with the current list entry highlighted Types of List Indicators List indicators are controlled by a bit or value at a controller address List Indicator Using Value Data This example shows an indicator list using values from a tank level sensor to display the status of a tank TANK LEVEL Address N7 2 Ta 1800 1 4 Full Display Empty SSS See Value 1800 Z 1 4 Controller 1 2 Full TANK LEVEL Empty Address N7 2 a 1 4 Value 3600 3600 1 2 Full Display g HMH 1 2 Controller Full List
254. d not verify the application loaded in a DH 485 or RS 232 terminal before the download Download only if different from current application box is checked The terminal s firmware is earlier than V1 06 The download is successful Upgrade the terminal s firmware When downloading to an Operator Terminal this message appears Error Transfer Timeout Communication with terminal lost Interference from other programs in a multitasking operating system Stop other programs running on the computer especially if running Windows 95 Publication 2711 6 0 Problem When choosing the Download command from the Application menu you get this message Unable to load WPFTDLL DLL or one of its components Troubleshooting Downloading with INTERCHANGE Cause INTERCHANGE is not installed on computer INTERCHANGE must be installed however you are not required to load INTERCHANGE communication drivers Recommended Action Exit Windows and reinstall P ane Builder to install INTERCHANGE on your computer File s are missing or not found 1 Verify that the path statement in AUTOEXEC BAT includes CARSIIC BIN or C ABIC BIN 2 Verify that the environment variable in AUTOEXEC BAT is set to ABIC_CONFIG C RSIIC BIN or C ABIC BIN 3 Verify that WPFTDLL DLL is in C AB PBWIN 4 Verify that DTLKTW DLL is in C RSI IC BIN or C ABIC BIN When choosing the Download command from the Applicati
255. d select a different bit number for the object state Data value value is out of range The value entered for an object state is not within the valid range for the data type Open the object s dialog and enter a valid value for the state Decimal position must be less than field width by atleast 2 digits The decimal position for a numeric data display or variable is gt than the field width 2 Open the object s dialog and select a decimal position that is less than the field width Decimal position number out of range The decimal position for a numeric data display or variable is invalid for the field width Open the object s dialog and enter a decimal position that s valid for the field width Device name has node address outside valid range 1 31 The device has an incorrect DH 485 node address From the Setup tab in Terminal Setup press the Comms Setup button to correct the DH 485 node address Device too small for Text display An object is too small to display the inner text Change the size of the object or use a smaller text size Duplicate alarm values or bits exist within trigger More than one alarm uses the same trigger value bit Change the alarm trigger bits values so they are not identical Duplicate data bit number number in state number The same bit number is assigned to two states of an object Open the object s d
256. darker colors of objects are converted to black color bitmaps are converted to monochrome bitmaps Publication 2711 6 0 7 22 Working with Objects Deleting Objects Reversing an Operation Publication 2711 6 0 Color to Grayscale Application When copying or moving an object from a color to a grayscale application objects are pasted as follows colors of objects are converted to the closest shade of gray e color bitmaps are converted to grayscale bitmaps Touch Screen to Keypad Application When copying moving objects from a touch screen to a keypad application you must assign function keys to the pasted objects Different Communication Protocol When copying moving objects to an application that uses a different communication protocol you must update the tags appropriately for the pasted objects Use the Delete command to remove objects from an application screen without placing them on the clipboard To delete objects from a screen 1 Select the objects you want to delete 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu To delete all objects from a screen 1 Choose Select All from the Edit menu 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu To delete an object from a function key 1 Select the function key 2 Choose Delete from the Edit menu PanelBuilder deletes the object and graphic from the function key PanelBuilder lets you cancel the previous editing operation If an operation cannot be canceled PanelBuilder l
257. de address of the node associated with the tag has not been entered or is invalid From the Setup tab Terminal Setup press the Comms Setup button to check the node address Number of lines per alarm number is greater than number of lines in object number The number of lines specified for alarms in the alarm list device exceeds the number of lines available within the list device Make the alarm list device larger or reduce the number of lines to display per alarm Number is not unique Two screens have the same number Screen numbers must be unique Renumber one of the screens using the Rename command on the Screen menu Object foreground color is the same same as its background color Graphic foreground color is the same as text background color making the graphic a large solid rectangle Change colors so that they are not identical Object right left top bottom edge location Num One or more edges of an objectis off the screen Move or size the object as appropriate Object has invalid function key or view assignment The object doesn t have an assigned function key for operator input Open the object s dialog and assign an available function key Object has invalid function key touch cell or view assignment The object isn t assigned a function key or touch cell for operator input Open the object s dialog and select function key or touch ce
258. defines DH 485 parameters and defaults for a Panel View DH 485 or RS 232 Terminal and controller DH 485 Device DH 485 Parameter Options Default Node Address 0 31 2 Maximum Node 1 31 31 PanelView Terminal Address tt maia OX Node Name User supplied None Network Node Node Address 0 31 1 Node Type See above figure None Publication 2711 6 0 Communications Overview 4 3 DH Communications The DH PanelView terminals communicate with a PLC or SLC 5 04 controller on the Allen Bradley DH link Addressing for a DH application is similar to a DH 485 application except the DH link supports 64 nodes 0 77 octal and higher baud rates The DH 485 link supports 32 nodes The DH parameters for the terminal and controller are defined in the Communication Setup dialog accessed from Terminal Setup dialog Set Bemis awed Tews Crita Smelter treme r Cog See Terminal Name is stored in 54m z PeT Project with Catalog Number Poe eam information Eem fet DH Terminal with RS 232 Printer Port a THe Pirca MIIN Serial Pori aaga lt y PanelView 900 Network Node SLC 5 04 PLC 5 25 PLC 5 10 PLC 5 30 PLC 5 11 PLC 5 40 PLC 5 12 PLC 5 60 Must match Node gt i PLC 5 15 PLC 5 80 Name in Tag Editor ree IIO O Pre The following table defines DH parameters and defaults for a PanelView DH terminal and logic controller DH Device DH Param
259. der fonts v 8x20 v 8x16 v 6x8 8x16 16x24 8x24 12x8 8x24 24x32 16x24 18x8 v 16x24 32x40 24x32 6x16 24x32 32x64 32x40 12x16 32x40 1400 Text Sizes 1000 900 Ve Ext vices 6x24 16x16 Text Sizes R 600 Text Sizes 12x24 24x24 18x24 32x32 550 Text Sizes External Font The entire text string is resized 5 To set foreground background colors blinking underlining or text alignment click the appropriate tools on the Format bar 6 To exit inner text mode choose the Inner Text command or tool For multistate and list objects you can adjust the text size from the State tab of the object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 26 Formatting Objects and Text State Left Center Right Publication 2711 6 0 Aligning Text You can align screen text or inner text of an object in three ways left align right align or center align ie ce w to the Left Text to the Right For multistate and list objects you can align the text differently for each state To change text alignment 1 Select the object whose text you want to align 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu 3 If the object is multistate select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 4 Choose an alignment option from the Format gt Align Text submenu
260. dress not a value bup Alm Triggers Ales In the Tag Editor the trigger tag definition for alm_tag is Tag Name Data Type Tag Address Node Name alm_tag Bit N15 0 0 SLC_1 This tag handles up to 256 consecutive bits alarms 0 255 N 15 0 0 to N15 15 15 The controller address of the alarm trigger bit is the number in the Value Bit field plus the Trigger Tag address Trigger Tag Address Value Bit Trigger Bit Address e Alarm C triggers when N15 0 1 changes from 0 to 1 1 N15 0 0 N15 0 1 e Alarm B triggers when N15 0 2 changes from 0 to 1 2 N15 0 0 N15 0 2 e Alarm A triggers when N15 0 3 changes from 0 to 1 3 N15 0 0 N15 0 3 For the LSBit trigger an alarm triggers when the trigger bit changes from 0 to 1 and all other bits between the Trigger Tag address and the trigger bit address are cleared If the Trigger Tag address is N7 12 4 and the Value Bit is 6 an alarm is triggered when N7 12 10 changes from 0 to 1 It is the only bit set between N7 12 4 and N7 12 10 inclusive If N7 12 4 is 1 when N7 12 10 changes to 1 the alarm corresponding to N7 12 10 will not trigger until N7 12 4 is reset to 0 Publication 2711 6 0 15 20 Creating Alarms Alarm Operations Cut Cirle Operations you can perform on alarms are accessed from a menu To C Ctrl C Ban p open the menu hold down the right mouse button or type CTRL M Paste Chie Insert and Past
261. e Tag Name Data Type Tag Address Node Name alm_tag Bit N15 0 0 SLC_1 ack_tag Unsigned Integer N16 0 SLC_1 rem_ack Bit N15 16 0 SLC_1 When N15 0 2 changes from 0 to 1 Alarm B is triggered Based on the contents of the Value Bit field this is a 2 bit offset from the Trigger Tag address N15 0 0 When the controller writes a 1 to N15 16 2 rem_ack tag address Alarm B is acknowledged To acknowledge all alarms for the alm_tag trigger the controller must write 1 to the bit position that is one greater than the highest value in the Value Bit field For example setting N15 0 4 to 1 acknowledges all alarms If the highest value in the Value Bit field is 239 N15 14 15 setting N15 15 0 to 1 acknowledges all alarms If you use the Ack Tag the controller must acknowledge one alarm at a time and reset the bit 0 before acknowledging the next alarm If you do not use the Ack Tag the controller can acknowledge more than one alarm at a time The Ack Tag must be a value word address and returns the value of the alarm not the bit pattern The PanelView will input a value when you or the controller acknowledges an alarm Publication 2711 6 0 15 26 Creating Alarms Defining Remote Tags You can define optional tags that the controller will use to used by Controller e acknowledge all active alarms e clear all alarms in the terminal These tags affect the alarm displayed in the Alarm Banner and alarms in the Alarm List To define remot
262. e The default value is the state number The value you enter must be within the range of the Data Format selected on the Properties tab The default value is the state number Data Format Range Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 4 BCD 0 to 9999 Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Octal 0 to 177777 Formats allowed for data entry The terminal does not display transfer these formats The value is converted when a different data format is selected Restricting Access to States Piloted Control Lists only The Access field appears only for Piloted Control Lists This field allows you to specify who can access the control list state Select To User and Controller Allow the operator and controller to select the control list state User Only Allow only the operator to select the control list state Controller Only Allow only the controller to select the control list state None Create an inactive state Important Do not select Controller Only or None for the initial state defined on the States tab These settings will result in a validation error One state must allow user access or the application will fail to validate Publication 2711 6 0 9 12 Creating Control List Selectors Creating List Keys Push Buttons Screen Selectors Humeric Eritry r ASCII Entry r Control List Selectors
263. e Ctrl M Append Alarm CtrleA Select To t e oui Ins Cut Cut selected cells rows or columns to the clipboard Delete Alarm Del Copy Copy the selected cells rows or columns to the clipboard Embedded Variable ee asia Paste the previously cut or copied cells rows or columns to a se Existing Text New Text ID spreadsheet sia Insert and Paste Paste the copied or cut alarm above the current row Add a new alarm after the last alarm The alarm is created with the next available number Insert a new alarm above the current alarm The alarm is created with the next available number Delete Alarm Permanently remove the selected alarm Opens a submenu to insert a time date or numeric variable in the alarm Text To edit a numeric variable select Edit Variable Opens the Use Existing Text dialog allowing you to copy a message to the current row Changes the ID number of the text to the next available number Append Alarm Insert Alarm Embedded Variable Use Existing Text New Text ID Using Existing Text When creating alarm text you can create new text or reuse text that already exists in the application pP Reusing text saves time and memory Text is only stored once regardless of the number times it is used To use existing text 1 Select the row number of the alarm in which you want to copy existing text 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Use Existing Text from the popup menu
264. e GoTo Screen Return Screen Tool Push Button Push Button Push Button Push Button Button Button Global Object Connected Screen List Numeric Keypad Control List Multistate List Line Line Rectangle Selector Cusor Point Enable Button Selector Indicator Indicator Ellipse Numeric Bar Message Global Move Move P Freeform Text Data Display Graph Display Object Up Down Scale Import Graphic Home End Page Page Backspace Enter Graphics Image Up Down E ISA Symbols EIRIECDa Ca ed EES Fat ea 0 ES sl wd majalala EEG IKICS ka Selection Tool Horizontal Valve Horizontal Valve Horizontal Valve Vertical Valve Vertical Valve Vertical Valve Butterfly Check Relief ith Actuat Throttling Manual Actuator with Actuat Throttling Manual Actuat Val with Actuator Actuator anual Actuator with Actuator Actuator anual Actuator alve Valve Valve Liquid Vacuum Electrical Electrical Vessel R st Bi Distillation Pressure Filter Filter Motor Transformer a eactor oragasin Tower Storage Vessel Weigh Screw Inline i i Conveyor Hopper Pump Turbine Blower Compressor Agitator yi Conveyor Mixer Rotary m Cyclone Left Up Right Down Exchanger Feeder change Furnace Rotary Kiln Separator Arrowhead Arrowhead Arrowhead Arrowhead Publication 2711 6 0 Draw Pointer Draw Pointer Working with Objects 7 3 You can place objects in the display area of the application screen o
265. e Numeric Data Display from the Objects menu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to size the numeric display The object is automatically selected and contains characters representing a numeric variable gfe a 4 u E E E 3 To place another numeric data display move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit numeric data display mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 12 10 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Setting Properties of a Numeric Data Display To set the properties of a numeric data display 1 Double click the object tit faa lt Opens Fa E Tag Dialog I FA ith Zeen Macia Prisi F Tipi Pant e I Fhaghevg Paii e 2 Set the numeric display properties as defined on the next page 3 When done click OK Digits The Field Width box specifies the maximum number of characters including 0 9 that can appear in the display The default is 6 If the value from the logic controller exceeds the specified field width the field on the terminal display fills with asterisks Unfilled data positions are left blank To fill empty data positions with zeroes click the Fill with Zeroes check box vans Coad ON 00065932 65932 8 Digit Maximum 5 Digit Maximum Zero Fill No Zero Fil
266. e Panel View terminal and controller The first time you open this dialog default settings appear p The terminal name was defined when the application was created aee Terminal Name from Setup tab Ie bade Aider rri hole Le Node Types eo g cmi sic 504 PLC 5 25 PLC 5 10 PLC 5 30 Hamak Haiei PLC 5 11 PLC 5 40 PPTA IE e PLC 5 12 PLC 5 60 ust match Node go Laa lt PLC 5 15 PLC 5 80 Name in Tag Editor La pic s0 Publication 2711 6 0 20 6 Terminal and Communication Setup 4 Under Terminal edit the following parameters Use Node Address To Select the station number 0 to 77 octal of the PanelView terminal on the DH link Baud Rate Select the baud rate of the DH link The baud rates and maximum cable lengths for each rate are 57 6K 3 048 m 10 000 ft 115 2K 1 524 m 5 000 ft 230 4K 762 m 2 500 ft 5 Under Network Nodes edit the node parameters of the controller To insert a network node right click in the Node Name field and select Insert Node from the menu Click in a field to edit it Use Node Name To Enter a unique name for the logic controller that will communicate with the PanelView terminal on the DH link Node Address Select the station number 0 to 77 octal of the logic controller on the DH link Node Type Select the type of logic controller that will communicate with the PanelView terminal To delete a node ri
267. e Support and either INTERCHANGE or RSLinx communication software Note that on Windows 95 NT systems RSLinx is the default communication software installed e Compact Setup installs all communication protocols all terminal types and the PanelBuilder Software e Custom Setup installs only specific components that you select and the PanelBuilder Software Enable disable options by selecting deselecting check boxes The custom setup lists the disk space used by each component with available disk space Custom Components Description Installs all the files necessary to run PanelBuilder The Panelbulber Main target folder for installing files is C AB Load all or specific terminal types You must select at least one terminal type To select all terminal types click the Terminal Types check box To access the list of terminals click the Terminal Types check box and then the Change button Terminal Types Loads all or specific communication protocols You must select at least one protocol To select all communication protocols click the Communication Protocols check box To access the list of protocols click the Communication Protocols check box and then the Change button Communication Protocols Loads the FontTool utility which is used to create font External Font File Support files for PanelBuilder applications Font files are created in AB PBWIN FONT nstalls sample applications referenced in
268. e controller position the decimal point Read Tag Specify the tag name address from which to read the variable data 7 Click OK when done A placeholder V 12 NOFILL FIX 0 is inserted in the text with embedded formatting details A string of characters the length of the field width is inserted in the object as a placeholder for the variable 8 Resize the object if necessary to fit the variable 9 Click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode For multistate objects you can add a numeric variable to the text of a specific state from the State tab of the Object s dialog To edit a numeric variable 1 Select the object Fora multistate object select the state containing the variable Select the V 12 NOFILL FIX 0 placeholder Click the Embedded Variable tool and choose Edit Variable to open the Variable dialog 2 3 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar 4 5 6 Edit the formatting options then click OK to exit the dialog The V 6 NOFILL FIX 0 placeholder is updated with the new formatting details For multistate objects you can edit the numeric variable directly from the State tab Text field of the Object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 16 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State Inserting an ASCII Variable You can insert an ASCII variable in an object or text string The ASCII variable is used to display a character string sent from a c
269. e decimal point However the terminal can scale decimal values to or from integer values In this illustration the entered value of 7 5 is rounded up to 8 When this value is displayed or used in a mathematical formula the result may be incorrect Entered Value 7 5 Displayed Value 8 Controller Value 8 rounded If decimal precision is needed select appropriate values for scale and offset Example Use scaling to convert a decimal value from degrees Fahrenheit to degrees Celsius The precision is determined by the value the operator enters and the decimal position of the scale Fixed Decimal Decimal Position 2 Field Width 6 Entered Value aale 4964 44 121360 t Rounded __ lt Je ee es 2e2288 88 Offset 32 A 4964 Scale 018 Displayed Value 4964 12135 lt i Controller Keypad Controlled Decimal Decimal Position Operator Entered Field Width 6 Ent dhalu Scale TN Offset 32 ie tees A gt Doned Vee ag Scale 1 8 a Controller The decimal pointis positioned to provide a display appropriate to the scaled value The terminal stores the full precision value and the controller stores the rounded value if writing to an integer file Creating Data Entry Controls 10 7 Creating a Numeric Entry Object This section shows how to create a cursor point or keypad enable button On touch screen terminals both objects are aligned with the touch g
270. e e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa Republic of e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand e Trinidad e Tunisia e Turkey United Arab Emirates e United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela Rockwell Automation Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Rockwell Automation European Headquarters Avenue Hermann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 Rockwell Automation Asia Pacific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 2711 6 0 December 1998 Supersedes Publication 2711 6 0 April 1998 40061 359 01 E Supersedes Publication 2711 6 0 5 J uly 1998 Copyright 1999 Allen Bradley Company Inc Printed in USA
271. e leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word of the write tag address the next character in the low byte and so on Note DeviceNet ASCII Entry allows for byte swapping Controls Location Function lt 4 gt V A Terminal Keypad Moves the cursor up down left or right in the Character Keyboard Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area If the cursor is at the leftmost Terminal Keypad i position when you press lt the scratchpad closes Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the controller When opening the ASCII scratchpad the character string is highlighted If the operator selects a a Terminal Keypad character immediately the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character If the operator presses a control key the terminal continues to display the existing string allowing the operator to edit it SEL Fl Function Keys Selects the highlighted character and places it at the cursor position in the Display Area Toggles between Insert and Overstrike mode The overstrike mode appears in reverse video INS F2 Function Keys In Insert mode the character selected is inserted before the cursor in the Display Area ifthe maximum number of characters has been entered in the Display area new characters are ignored In Overwrite mode the selected character replaces the character at the cursor in the Display Area lt lt F3
272. e tags 1 Select the Setup tab from the Alarm Setup dialog 2 Select the Use Optional Fields check box X in box The Remote Tags area of the dialog is made available for editing This check box also enables the display of optional tag fields on the Alarm Triggers tab pe If the Use Optional Fields check box is cleared the Remote tags and the optional fields on the Alarm Triggers tab are disabled PanelBuilder ignores any data in these fields Alarm Setup Setup Alarm Triggers Alarms Banner Pop Up Alarm Lists O Edit Tag C Covered Objects Disabled F Clear Lists On Power Up All Objects Disabled Size E Remote Tags Lvs Ack All Tag Print Items zj X Alarm Date IX Alarm Time Ack All Handshake Tag r eA kaaned Date X X Acknowledge Time l Alarm Trigger Value Clear All Alarms Tag a E Time Values Clear All Alarms Handshake Tag Ack Hold Time 500 ms ha Snapshot Timeout 2 seconds Check this box to enable the Remote tags in this dialog and optional tags on the Alarm Triggers tab 3 Under Remote Tags enter the tag names that you want the controller to use to acknowledge or clear all alarms To edit the tag definition for each tag select the tag name and click the Edit Tag button The Tag Form dialog opens Edit the tag definition and close the dialog 4 When done select another tab or click OK to exit dialog Publi
273. e toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 7 8 Working with Objects Selecting Objects Publication 2711 6 0 Before you can move size or format an object you must first select the object A selected object has handles To select an object Position the mouse pointer anywhere on the object and press the left mouse button Handles appear on the object A line has one handle at each end Rectangles and squares have handles around their edges Other objects ellipses and circles have handles around an invisible bounding box To deselect an object Position pointer outside the object and press the left mouse button e Or select another object To select multiple objects 1 Position pointer above and to the left of the objects you want to group 2 Press the left mouse button and drag a selection rectangle around the objects pot tt te ee eee eee ee ee lt Selection Rectangle Sai 2 oe Shee a ees Soo eS SS Skat 3 Release the mouse button The other way to select multiple objects is to hold down the SHIFT key and click on each object To add or remove an object from the selection hold down the SHIFT key and click on the object To select all objects Choose Select All from the Edit menu Handles appear on all objects to show that they re all selected Sizing Objects Moving Objects Working with Objects 7 9 To size an object 1 Select the object by cli
274. e up or down arrow next to the X box Or type a number in the box A value of 13 creates horizontal grid lines every 13 pixels 3 To increase or decrease the spacing of the grid on the Y axis click the up or down arrow next to the Y box Or type a number in the box A value of 25 creates vertical grid lines every 25 pixels 4 Click the OK button Working with Objects 7 7 Creating Objects If screen space is limited you can place button objects on function on Function Keys keys You can relegend the function keys using the Function Key Legend Kit available for your terminal The following objects can be placed on a function key e Push button controls momentary maintained latched multistate e Screen selector buttons Go To and Return e Keypad enable button e Alarm buttons Alarm History and Print History buttons e List keys To create an object on a function key 1 Choose an object from the Objects menu Or click the appropriate tool in the toolbox 2 Position the pointer over a function key and click the left mouse button If the function key is already assigned to an object the pointer changes to Reposition pointer over another key Pointer over Function Key A graphic appears on the function key showing the object type An asterisk also appears next to the key number gt fF f Asterisk Graphic 3 Click the right mouse button to exit the object mode Or click the selection tool in th
275. e when released The button does not return to its initial 0 state until unlatched by a handshake bit or value in the controller The latched status is not maintained after a power up but is retained following a screen change Multistate Push Buttons have between 2 and 16 states Each state CJ sets a bit or value at a controller address Every time the push button is pressed and released it changes to the next state After the last state the push button returns to its selected initial state Multistate push buttons retain their current state following screen changes The state after a powerup is determined by the powerup option selected in the Terminal Setup dialog State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 d d d OFF Button Presse LOW Button Pressed MEDIUM Button Presse HIGH t Contact Types Momentary maintained and latched push buttons can have either normally open or normally closed contacts You also assign normally open or normally closed contacts to a multistate push button with two states e Normally Open Contacts have a logic value of 0 as the initial push button state Pressing the button changes the value to 1 e Normally Closed Contacts have a logic value of 1 as the initial push button state Pressing the button changes the value to 0 Publication 2711 6 0 Push Button Text and Graphics Creating Push Buttons 8 3 Push buttons can have inner text and or an inner graphic
276. ear once per screen Use a local device if needed Selected name in use Enter another name Selected graphic image name that s in use Select a different graphic image Source file not found or cannot be opened Incorrect file name or path Verify file name and path are correct Retry Tag in application being opened that does not exist in the Project The application contains one or more tags that don t exist in the associated project You are asked if you want to add the tag s Tag information saved with application is incomplete Please check tag information when application is opened information Tag information is incomplete Tag was created but doesn t contain all the necessary Supply missing tag data in the tag editor Tag must be scanned with scan group The tags associated with a particular alarm are not in the same scan group Change the tag addresses for the alarm and make sure they are in the same scan group Target terminal cannot support an alarm banner The specified termin alarms al does not support Change the terminal type or remove alarms alarm triggers alarm buttons and alarm banners from the application Target terminal cannot support alarm triggers The specified termin alarms al does not support Change the terminal type or remove alarms alarm triggers alarm buttons and alarm banners from the application Target terminal c
277. ear the check box 3 When done click OK to exit the object s dialog To define a group of objects available for global use 1 Group the objects 2 Double click the group or select the group and press ENTER to open the Options dialog 3 Check the Mark for Global Selection check box identifying the group as available for global selection To disable the global setting clear the check box 4 Click OK to exit the dialog Note The first few characters of the Description text will appear in the Global Objects list to help identify the grouped global selection However from screen to screen you can enter a unique description for each instance of a grouped global object Using a Global Object Push Buttons r Screen Selectors r Numeric Entry b ASCII Entry r Control List Selectors Indicators b Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Tag Name Object Type Using Global Objects 14 5 This section shows how to access a global object Remember you can access a global object from any screen in an application You cannot use the same global object more than once on a screen You can however use different global objects on a screen Global objects cannot be copied and pasted You must place a global object on a screen using the Global Object command To select and place a global object 1 Click the Globa
278. earch for a file The internal DF 1 driver is assigned to COM2 Application is validated and translated to a PVA file If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens You must correct errors before download can proceed Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of download FILE TRANSFER STATUS i a n ZEL 50x B Tarii V ld el ee erar m ri maag ass f ia gle Te nes Percent Complete In Progress i Ole a bee teed E Terminal resets verifies and starts application Publication 2711 6 0 23 11 Validating and Transferring Applications To download an application using a DH485 Driver Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu Select the Download parameters Destination Operator Terminal Select Operator Terminal gt DOS Memory Card Select R SLinx or p Communication Drivers INTERCHANGE Driver Psi t isC i A Active drivers DH485 Shows DH485 a ws lt _ Click OK to start download Cancel Setup as active driver L File Name Enter name of PVA file in which to s TEST Pva Browse save the translated P BA file or click Browse to search for a file Application is validated and translated to a PVA file If errors or warnings are detected the Excepti
279. ected text You can also create and edit alarm text directly from the Alarm Message Display Publication 2711 6 0 15 8 Creating Alarms v Tool Bar v Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Publication 2711 6 0 Showing Alarm Banner Position You can show the location of the Alarm Banner from any screen in the application By showing the banner you can see which objects are covered and which are not This is important if you want to disable only those objects that are covered by the banner or to place objects on the screen where they will not be covered To toggle the Alarm Banner on or off Choose Alarm Banner Position from the View menu A check mark next to the command indicates the banner is active The banner appears as a rectangle white on color grayscale terminals and black on monochrome terminals You cannot move or size the banner unless you are in the Alarm Banner screen Creating Alarms 15 9 Creating an Alarm List The Alarm List operates like a control list selector The Alarm List can appear in the Alarm Banner or on another application screen x Touch screen terminals require List keys to move the cursor up and down the Alarm List You can optionally use the Enter list key to enable the operator to acknowledge an alarm in the list The List keys are accessed from the Objects gt List Keys submenu To c
280. ection tool on the toolbox To access the properties of a list key 1 Double click the list key object 2 Under Input specify how the operator will activate the list key e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list For touch screen terminals touch cell is automatically enabled 3 When done click OK Chapter 1 0 Creating Data Entry Controls Chapter Objectives This chapter describes how to create objects that activate a scratchpad for numeric or ASCII data entry including the keypad enable button and the cursor point Section Page Helpful Hints 10 1 Numeric Entry Controls 10 2 Keypad Enable Button 10 2 Cursor Point 10 2 Scratchpad 10 2 Numeric Entry Examples 10 3 Data Entry Scaling 10 4 Creating a Numeric Entry Object 10 7 Setting Properties for a Numeric Entry Object 10 7 ASCII Entry Controls 10 12 Keypad Enable Button 10 12 Cursor Point 10 12 Scratchpad Keypad or Keypad Touch Screen Terminals 10 13 Scratchpad 550 Touch Screen Terminals 10 14 Scratchpad 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen Terminals 10 15 ASCII Scratchpad for other Languages 10 16 Creating an ASCII Entry Object 10 16 Setting Properties for an ASCII Entry Object 10 17 Helpful Hints When creating numeric entry objects consider e You can add inner text and or an inner graphic to keypad enable buttons and cursor point objects as well as other formatting options See Chapter 17 for
281. ed ee Imported Graphic While the image is selected Graphics list box is reverse video you can view other graphics using the UP and DOWN arrow keys Each time you press a key the current view is replaced with another 4 Exit graphic image mode by clicking the selection tool in the toolbox Or click the right mouse button 5 Click to exit inner graphic mode Or choose Inner Graphic from the Format menu Chapter 1 r4 Formatting Objects and Text Chapter Objectives This chapter shows how to change the appearance of objects and text It contains the following sections Section Page Format Options 17 2 Changing the Appearance of Objects 17 3 Changing Object Shape 17 4 Changing Line Type 17 5 Changing Fill Pattern 17 6 Using the Blink Option 17 7 Setting Foreground Background Colors 17 8 Reversing Foreground Background Colors 17 9 Working with Inner Text 17 10 Editing Inner Text 17 11 Inserting Time or Date 17 13 Inserting a Numeric Variable 17 14 Inserting an ASCII Variable 17 16 Working with Inner Graphics 17 19 Adding Inner Graphic 17 20 Setting Foreground Background Colors 17 21 Reversing Foreground Background Colors 17 22 Removing Inner Graphic 17 23 Editing Graphics 17 23 Changing the Appearance of Text 17 24 Sizing Text 17 25 Aligning Text 17 26 Underlining Text 17 27 Using the Blink Option 17 28 Setting Foreground Background Colors 17 2
282. ed This means all alarms are displayed regardless of their condition or state providing the terminal buffer has space Important Each Alarm List must display at least one alarm condition and one acknowledge status If you deselect all check boxes an error message appears For Alarm Conditions you can display e active alarms whose trigger conditions have been met This option is only appropriate for bit triggered alarms e inactive alarms that were triggered but no longer meet their trigger condition or were cleared For Acknowledge Status you can display the following statuses of alarms in the terminal e acknowledged alarms e unacknowledged alarms e no acknowledgement required The next page shows examples of Alarm List configurations Under Input e select the function key to activate the list on keypad terminals e disable or enable wrap around for the list cursor Wrap around specifies whether the selection cursor moves to the top or bottom of the list when the operator presses the up or down arrow key on the first or last item in the list Alarm List Examples Creating Alarms 15 11 You can create multiple alarm lists to display specific types of information for alarms e Active Alarms that have not been acknowledged When a bit triggered alarm is acknowledged in the terminal the alarm is automatically removed from the list If an active alarm is cleared or no longer meets its trigger cond
283. ed all alarms for the trigger by writing the Acknowledge All Value to the trigger s Ack address Optional Fields are enabled and defined for the alarm triggers Alarm Configuration 6 alarms are assigned to the E xtruder2 trigger each with a different trigger value All alarm messages are configured to display and must be acknowledged A Remote Ack tag Ack tag and Acknowledge All Value are defined for each trigger 4 alarms are assigned to the E xtruder1 trigger each with a different trigger value Seto Alam Tigges iss EriAck Es ck mimm Tag Ack Tar Pemra Ack Tug Ack ALL Yakum Ea i the trigger s Ack address Ex1Ack OA l alarms activated by the Extruderl trigger are acknowledged in the Alarm List Cx lRamor eck Fr Ex 2 Ramon ack 100 aana i futradart f jm fo fne 13 mirae E M a jmogc 20 Extcudcct P E ie imac 23 Extruder m s jmuga i Ixtredar M m Pe jig k as fxtcreders F E EA LTE mraisri A e myt z5 Exteaders P E e ifn E 10 Extrudar m E igmg r as Ixtcudac E Ff m s E The controller acknowledges all alarms activated by the Extruderl trigger by writing the trigger s Acknowledge All Value 99 to the Remote Ack address Ex1R emoteAck of the trigger Extruderl Extruder2 Extruder2 Extruderl Extruderl Ex
284. ee page 10 4 Decimal Point specifies whether the decimal is fixed formatted or keypad controlled floating for display and entry values e Select Fixed to fix the decimal point in the data display and the scratchpad As an operator enters values in the scratchpad the numbers are shifted to the left of the decimal point The Position box specifies the position of the decimal point for fixed decimal point values You can position the decimal 0 to 10 places to the left of the rightmost character Select For this position Select For this position 0 97 6 97 276767 1 97 2 7 97 2767676 2 97 27 8 97 27676767 3 97 276 9 97 276767676 4 97 2767 10 9 7276767676 5 97 27676 Note If Position is 40 then the field width must be 2 gt decimal position for positive numbers One position is used for the digit to the left of the decimal and one for the decimal point If the decimal position is 2 and the field width is 6 an entered value of 225 is displayed as 225 00 not 2 25 For negative numbers the field width must be 3 gt decimal position For example to display the number 0 1234 set the field width to 7 and the decimal position to 4 e Select Keypad Controlled to allow the operator to enter the decimal point using the terminal keypad Data is displayed as a floating point The terminal stores the full precision value and the controller stores the rounded value if writing to an integer file
285. een Name Number PUMP PRESSURE PSI PUMP 1 HHH PUMP 2 HHH PUMP 3 HHH PUMP 4 HHH F1 on Fo BS F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 orr F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 Figure 3 2 PanelView 900 Touch Screen Terminal Worksheet Project Name Application Name Screen Name Number HIH Touch screen push ON OFF LaF buttons must occupy at least one touch cell LI E Touch Cell Publication 2711 6 0 3 6 Planning an Application Linking Screen Objects to Controller Data Each dynamic screen object must be linked to a controller data table This is not always true for DeviceNet See publication DeviceNet Communications for PanelView Terminals The Panel View terminal either reads data for indicators such as bar graphs or writes data for controls like push buttons Values in the logic controller data table are updated on a regular basis This process is called scanning In each scan e the logic controller and the terminal write data to specific addresses updating values e the logic controller reads the entire data table and updates values at other addresses according to the PanelBuilder application PanelView 900 Application T
286. een to an icon Click the Minimize button on the window Minimiz ETTEMA PDDU pel ARM 00 Lae Buton The application file and screens reduce to icons as shown below E eo pie i aE a Ha i l ml ET zi To evenly space icons across the bottom of the workspace choose Arrange Icons from the Window menu Publication 2711 6 0 6 14 Working with Applications and Screens Closing Screens When you are finished with an application screen close it Screens are automatically saved when you save the application To close an application screen Screen e Choose Close from the Screen menu e Or double click the control menu box on the screen Attributes The screen closes leaving you in the PanelBuilder workspace Create Alarm Banner To close all open application screens Choose Close All from the Window menu Changing Use the Attributes command on the Screen menu to Screen Attributes sfenauie 4sereet renumber a screen e change the background color of the screen color terminals only To change the attributes of a screen 1 From the application file window select a screen to rename Or activate an open screen Screen 2 Choose Attributes from the Screen menu New Open Close Name Attributes Screen 1 Create Alarm Banner Number Background fi E Black Appears only for Grayscale and Color Terminal 3 In the Name box type a new screen name 32 characters max
287. efault separator is the colon Leading Zero Display the hours before ten as a two digit number with a leading zero For example 3 15 would display as 03 15 By default the leading zero is not displayed Display Seconds Display seconds The default is to display seconds 4 Click OK to save the settings and exit the dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Terminal and Communication Setup 20 21 Setting Advanced The Advanced tab in the Terminal Setup dialog sets advanced Terminal Options options on the Panel View terminal including how to e set auto repeat settings for the terminal keys and touch cells e set terminal display and options e set language for terminal messages e set timeout for objects with handshake tags set time to perform display maintenance of terminal To activate the Advanced terminal options in the Panel View terminal you must enable the Use downloaded configuration settings option in the Power Up tab on the Terminal Setup dialog To set advanced options for the PanelView terminal 1 Select the Advanced tab from the Terminal Setup dialog PanelView 550 Other PanelView Terminals Sigs Posli Adeiwed Tesibae ComiTags an Samp Pie Aiamas Tasjbaa Comiti mat Tamai i i daia Ragai Tinh i Cay Ai ipai pria Mari fete fect D 9 Oke tier aa r fists fet T T ermal lingo Tiimi Deepal T ham tin T hem Yeer Grapiey idee zz T drsedepal Bion ei amiga aati Mee She De
288. elBuilder software e PBUninstall uninstalls PanelBuilder from your system If INTERCHANGE was installed the INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility and release notes will also appear Publication 2711 6 0 RSLinx Lite Software Gay RSLins New Open a i Sentai E EE E gt Workstation Setup 2 C ABSPBWINSMSOK CBA SC MAB PEWINSGSS9CKV2RIO PBA 4 C ABSPEWINSGSSSMEV2RIO PBA PanelBuilder s File Menu Installation 2 7 In Windows 95 or Windows NT use the RSLinx Lite software to configure communication drivers that your computer requires to transfer PanelBuilder applications To transfer applications using a serial connection Internal DF1 driver memory card or DOS file using the Panel View File Transfer Utility for DH 485 terminals RSLinx is not required To access RSLinx Lite e In Windows 95 or Windows NT click the Start button click Programs click Rockwell Software click the RSLinx submenu and select RSLinx e Or choose the Workstation Setup command from the File menu of the PanelBuilder software Configuring RSLinx Communication Drivers The following procedures show how to configure a DF1 or 1747 PIC driver for transferring PanelBuilder applications For details on how to configure other RSLinx drivers refer to RSLinx documentation To configure a DF1 or 1747 PIC DH 485 driver 1 From the Communications menu click Configure Drivers For Direct Transfers Select For These T
289. elect a function key from the list box e Fora touch screen terminal touch cell is automatically enabled Panel View 550 600 Keypad amp Touch Screen terminals support function key and touch cell input The selected function key displays a graphic of the push button and an asterisk next to the key number indicating the key is used an Asterisk Push Button Graphic Publication 2711 6 0 8 8 Creating Push Buttons Configuring Use the States tab to Push Button States e edit text for each state e enter a value for each state if required insert a graphic for each state edit format options for each state e add or delete states for a multistate push button To configure the states of a push button 1 Click the States tab on the Push Buttons dialog A spreadsheet opens for state editing Each row represents a push button state row 0 represents state 0 row 1 represents state 1 For 2 state push buttons 2 rows appear states 0 and 1 Fora multistate push button 4 rows appear states 0 3 Each row has fields which define the visual characteristics of each state 2 Edit the fields as necessary 3 Click OK to exit the Push Buttons dialog The Value field appears only if Value was selected in the Write area of the Properties tab Press gal rage brain ot Ciiik on chap hae ave rii Be For a description of all the fields for a state see page 7 15 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Push
290. electing a State 17 11 17 12 Using Existing Text 18 2 Using Word Wrap 17 11 17 12 Installing PanelBuilder 2 4 Intended Audience P 1 INTERCHANGE Communication Software 2 2 Accessing Drivers 2 10 Advanced Parameters 2 15 Configuring Drivers 2 11 Conflicts with Drivers 2 16 Disabling 2 16 Editing Drivers 2 14 Installing 2 4 Other Software Using 2 17 Removing Drivers 2 14 Troubleshooting F 6 Internal Read Only Tags G 1 ISA Symbols Toolbox 7 2 16 7 B 7 Publication 2711 6 0 Index 6 K Keypad Enable ASCII Data Entry 1 6 10 12 Numeric Data Entry 1 6 10 2 Numeric Entry 10 7 L Language Terminal Messages 20 22 Latched Push Buttons Attributes 8 4 Creating 8 4 Description 1 6 8 2 Least Significant Bit Trigger List Indicator 12 19 Message Displays 13 4 Multistate Indicator 12 13 List Indicator Attributes 12 20 Configuring States 7 15 Creating 12 20 Data Ranges 12 23 Description 12 18 Dialog 12 20 Error State 12 3 Examples 12 18 Least Significant Bit Trigger 12 19 Setting Number of States 12 22 Triggering a State 12 19 List Keys Backspace Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Control List 9 2 9 12 Creating 9 12 11 9 Dialog 9 12 11 9 End Key 1 7 Enter Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Home Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Move Down Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Move Up Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Page Down Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Page Up Key 1 7 9 12 11 9 Screen List 11 9 Maintained Push Buttons Attribute
291. elow is a sample AUTOEXEC BAT file SET ABIC_CONFIG C RSIIC BIN PATH C DOS C WINDOWS SET PATH C AB BIN PATH C RSIIC BIN SHARE EXE Windows 3 x only CALL ABICRUN BAT WIN CALL statement ensures that the remaining lines of AUTOEXEC BAT execute used only with DOS version 5 0 or later The CALL statement CALL ABICRUN BAT must be the last driver TSR loaded before running Windows WIN In Windows 95 select the PanelBuilder folder for storing program icons In Windows 3 x program icons are stored in the PanelBuilder group under Program Manager The INTERCHANGE Device Configuration utility opens Optionally select and configure the communication driver that your computer will use to transfer Panel View applications Review the release note that appears at the end of the installation When the installation is complete you must exit Windows and reboot your computer When the setup utility finishes e In Windows 95 PanelBuilder programs and INTERCHANGE appear on the Start menu under Programs gt PanelBuilder e In Windows 3 x PanelBuilder programs and INTERCHANGE appear as icons in the PanelBuilder group Publication 2711 6 0 2 6 Installation PanelBuilder Setup with RSLinx 1 PanelBuilder setup utility e Enter and verify registration information The serial number is on your registration card e Select setup option Typical or Custom will install PanelBuilder with RSLinx e Select de
292. en to another Py Anything copied remains on the clipboard until you change it or exit Windows Place objects from the clipboard onto the screen Objects Paste f remain on the clipboard even after the paste operation Remove selected objects from screen without placing them Delete on the clipboard Select All Select all objects on the screen Bring To Front Move the selected object in front of other objects Send to Back Move the selected object to the back of other objects Bring Dynamic Objects to Front Move all dynamic objects in front of other objects Use this command when done with a screen to verify what the screen will look like on the terminal Group Group two or more objects into a single unit Ungroup Separate grouped objects Regroup Reassemble a former group of objects Use Existing Text Open a dialog that lets you access all text strings in the application Open a dialog for the selected object allowing you to edit Object Attributes its attributes You can also double click an object to edit its attributes Set Object Color Defaults Set default colors for objects of the same type View Menu Command Summary A 3 v Tool Bar v Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette v Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Objects Menu Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Nume
293. en you deselect the text block the border becomes invisible Resize the text blocks if necessary so that all text fits inside You can use formatting commands to change the appearance of text while entering text or at a later time For details on how to format text or insert a time date or variable in a text block see Chapter 17 To edit background text 1 2 Select the text block Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu The format bar shows this view Texts 4 0 Edit the text in the Text box 4 5 Resize the text block if necessary so that all text fits inside When done click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode To apply color to background text 1 2 Select the text block Choose a color from the Format Foreground Color submenu Or select a foreground color from the top row of the Color Palette Publication 2711 6 0 16 10 Adding Graphics Importing Exporting Bitmap Graphics Shift F12 Reports Workstation Setup 1 CMSBSPB WIN SG SSSMEV 2485 PBA 2 CMABYPBWINSGSSSCKYERIO PBA 3 C4BAPB WIN SMS0K CBA 4 CMB PBWINSGS OMEV2RIO PBA Publication 2711 6 0 The Import Export Graphics command lets you import bitmap graphics from other programs including e monochrome bitmaps e color bitmaps Imported graphics can be used as inner graphics for button objects or as background screen objects Bitmap graphics are handled
294. entifies e controller addresses called tags that PanelBuilder objects write to or read from Tags defined in the Tag Editor e runtime communication parameters for the Panel View terminal and controller Devices defined in Terminal Setup Different applications can use the same project tags if the applications use the same communication protocol Publication 2711 6 0 1 2 Overview of PanelBuilder PanelBuilder Features Botch Hire Opes Chae nribetti Create Any Benner vV Tool Bar V Status Bar YW Toolbox LA ISA Symbols LW Color Palette Vi Keypad P4 ST 0 O E o Publication 2711 6 0 This section gives an overview of PanelBuilder features Tool or Menu Operation PanelBuilder runs under Microsoft Windows Tools keystrokes or menu commands are used to perform most functions Use any or all whichever you find most convenient Spreadsheet Editors Spreadsheets are used to simplify many editing operations for example to e edit states of multistate or list objects e edit application text e edit alarms and alarm triggers Many formatting options for text and objects can be configured directly from cells in the spreadsheet Selectable Preferences Set features of the workspace window to those you prefer or like to use often Options like the tool bar and toolboxes can be toggled on or off depending on their usage PanelBuilder uses the last settings
295. enu 3 If the object is multistate select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 4 Click the Toggle Foreground Background tool on the Format bar Or choose Toggle Fore Background from the Format menu The color of the text string and the area containing the text string are reversed 5 To resize align underline or activate blinking for the text click the appropriate tools on the Format bar 6 To exit inner text mode choose the Inner Text command or tool Chapter 1 8 Using the Text Editor Chapter Objectives This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Opening the Text Editor 18 2 Entering New Text 18 3 Editing Text 18 4 Inserting Variables in Text 18 5 Sorting Text 18 6 Filtering Text 18 6 Printing Text 18 7 Deleting Text 18 8 Renumbering Text 18 9 Moving Text 18 9 Copying Text into Objects 18 10 Publication 2711 6 0 18 2 Using the Text Editor Opening the Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Description Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup Many text operations are performed clicking a row number and choosing a command from this menu Row The Text Editor contains a list of all text defined for the application including object t
296. eport to a file Errors 38 If you want to print the report you must save it to a file 6 Click OK to return to the table view Examining the Results of an Import Export To examine detailed results of an import or export select the View Report button on the Summary Report dialog For example after importing a file and selecting View Report this window appears with the results Full Report IMPORT REPORT File C ABA UTILATEST2 TXT Project proj Device SLC Tags Processed 104 Errors 77 New Tags HOMES HOME5_AC HOME5_AS HOME5_C Publication 2711 6 0 19 20 Working with Tags Interpreting Error Messages You get this error Work around device error device request a device that does not exist Click No to select or enter another device does not exist Click Yes to create the device This dialog box opens Select the type of device enter the device address and then click OK device error no device forget to specify a device Click OK then select or enter a device specified device error device not selecta device thatis notan SLC processor if Click OK and then select an SLC device an SLC processor you are importing an APS ASCII file parse error try to import one of the following Click OK to abort the Tag Import Export utility ea corrupted file Choose Import from the Tools menu again and select another file ean unsupported file type or a file type other than or fix the b
297. equired by the application Don t use multistate indicators list indicators or message displays if a numeric data display can provide the same function Likewise don t use a control list selector if a numeric entry object is sufficient If a multistate indicator uses the same text for all states use a solid indicator with outer text instead of inner text for each state Reuse text that exists in the application rather than creating the same string multiple times See Chapter 18 for details on how to copy existing text into objects or object states Limit the amount of text in screen names messages and objects When drawing rectangles use a shape instead of individual lines Each line requires the same amount of memory as a single shape Freeform drawings are memory intensive Rectangular objects or graphics of the same size use less memory because the terminal uses the same data to display the objects If 2 push buttons are the exact same size the terminal keypad or touch uses the same data to display the rectangle of both buttons Use a global object if the application requires the same object on several screens A global object can be accessed from any screen The Panel View stores only 1 copy of the object See Chapter 14 Limit the use of bitmap graphics Use multiple embedded variables within a single text string rather than using multiple numeric data displays Maximum number of screens is 255 Maximum number of tags and ob
298. equires that you enter a Memory address and an IRQ Interrupt 2 Edit parameters and click OK Publication 2711 6 0 2 16 Installation INTERCHANGE Notes Publication 2711 6 0 Conflicts with INTERCHANGE Drivers The INTERCHANGE drivers may cause conflicts with other drivers sharing common interrupts or memory areas of the system Here are some problems that may occur and what to do about them e If you are using a special Windows video driver try using the standard Windows VGA driver You may also have to edit the EMM386 line in the CONFIG SYS file to remove specific memory exclusions added by the special video driver e Ifyou experience lockups when using a serial mouse in a DOS application wait several seconds for the mouse to initialize If mouse operation is still a problem run ABICSTOP 1 Exit Windows 2 Type ABICSTOP at the DOS prompt C gt ABICSTOP If ABICSTOP is not successful comment out ABICRUN in AUTOEXEC BAT and reboot Then run ABICSTOP again e Error messages during a system reboot may indicate an incomplete or incorrect configuration of the INTERCHANGE driver Reconfigure the driver For more details on INTERCHANGE Software refer to the INTERCHANGE Software user manuals Allen Bradley publications are available through Allen Bradley local distributors Disabling INTERCHANGE INTERCHANGE Software uses 40 to 80K of base memory The AUTOEXEC BAT file is configured to automatically load INTERCHA
299. er and try again Low resource memory Unable to create new screen Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again Low resource memory Unable to create PB frame window Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again Low resource memory Unable to open screen Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again Low resource memory Unable to open additional windows Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again aximum number of tick marks for scale is number Tick marks will default to number Entered more tick marks than appropriate for the size of the scale Enter a value equal to or less than the specified value or cancel the operation emory allocation failed file name Upload wasn t able to allocate sufficient memory to continue Close other applications and try again emory overwritten Serious corruption of memory has occurred Exit application exit Windows and reboot your computer Text ID in use by other text An attempt to use a message number that is already in
300. er of States 8 8 8 9 N Numeric Data Display Attributes 12 10 Creating 12 9 Decimal Point 12 11 Description 1 6 Error State 12 3 Read Tag 12 11 Scaled 12 2 Types of 12 9 Without Scaling 12 2 Numeric Entry Cursor Point 10 2 10 7 Cursor Point Example 10 3 Dialog 10 7 Display 10 9 Format 10 10 Handshake and Notification Tags 10 11 Input 10 8 Keypad Enable 10 2 Keypad Enable Example 10 3 Scaling Data 10 4 Scratchpad 10 2 Write Tag 10 8 Numeric Variable 7 17 17 14 18 5 O Object Formatting Changing Fill Pattern 17 6 Changing Line Type 17 5 Changing Shape 17 4 Using Foreground Background 17 9 Objects Accessing 7 2 Aligning 7 5 Background 7 16 Bring to Front 7 11 Configuring States 7 15 Copying 7 20 Creating in Display Area 7 3 7 4 Creating on Function Keys 7 3 7 7 Cutting 7 21 Default Size 7 4 Deleting 7 22 Description 7 18 Index 7 Deselecting 7 8 Dragging 7 9 Dynamic or Static 1 6 Editing Attributes 7 14 Fill 7 16 Foreground 7 16 Formatting 7 13 17 3 Global 14 1 14 5 Grouped 7 10 Linking to Controller Data File 3 6 Move to Back 7 11 Moving 7 9 Pasting 7 21 Regrouping 7 10 Resizing 7 9 Selecting 7 8 Selecting Multiple 7 8 Setting Default Colors 7 13 Sizing 7 9 Stacking 7 11 Text 7 16 Turning View On or Off 7 19 Types 1 6 Ungrouping 7 10 Viewing Attributes 7 14 Zooming 7 11 Objects Menu Commands A 3 P
301. er uses the closest approximation to represent your input 4BCD Data in BCD format also called 4 BCD occupy one word of memory Every four bits encodes a single digit 0 9 Each value occupies one word even if it is less than 9999 4BCD 277 Planning an Application 3 11 Bit Array A bit array is an unsigned integer format that is assigned to part of a word You can assign the rest of the word to other bits or bit arrays The length of the array is from 1 to 16 bits The maximum value stored in a bit array varies from 1 1 bit array to 65 535 16 bit array This format allows you to specify the actual number of bits to be assigned to an object Unused bits can then be assigned to other object s Array Size Range Array Size Range 1 Oorl 9 0 to 511 2 0 to 3 10 0 to 1023 3 0to7 11 0 to 2047 4 0to15 12 0 to 4095 5 0 to 31 13 0 to 8191 6 0 to 63 14 0 to 16383 7 0 to 127 15 0 to 32767 8 0 to 255 16 0 to 65535 For example a value that will never be greater than 277 is assigned a bit array with length 9 Other bits or bit arrays could then be assigned to locations starting at N7 2 9 Address N7 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 217 256 l6 4 1 Important A bit array can occupy only one word The length of a bit array starting at N7 2 9 must be 7 or less
302. erences for Opening Applications You can control the behavior of PanelBuilder when opening an application Choose Preferences from the Application menu User Preferences x On application open do you want to I Always Hi I Always Replace Duplicate Tags amp Devices issing Tags amp Devices Details Shows information about this dialog Show Project Database Restore Dialog Select this check box to display the Project Database Restore dialog each time you an open an application This dialog prompts you to e replace duplicate tags and devices in the project database with those in the application e add application tags and devices to the project database if they are missing This is the default option To add missing tags and replace duplicate tags in the project database without showing the Project Database dialog disable this check box and select the other two boxes Always Add Missing Tags amp Devices Select this check box and disable the first check box to add missing tags and devices to the project data database without opening the Project Database dialog This option is equivalent to clicking the Add All button on the Project Database dialog Always Replace Duplicate Tags amp Devices Select this check box and disable the first check box to replace duplicate tags and devices in the project database without opening the Project Database dialog This option is equivalent to clicking the Replace Al
303. erfere with the cursor when you are editing text in PanelBuilder If your system is not running an international version of Windows you must run the IME to e select a font style when creating a font file in FontTool e enter edit text while when creating a PanelBuilder application If the IME is not running or the code page is not available for the particular language FontTool will generate high ASCII characters without the desired glyph characters essentially unreadable text Using FontTool Multilingual Support 22 5 This section shows how to use FontTool to create open save and print font OTF files To run FontTool e In Windows 95 click the Start button click Programs click PanelBuilder then click FontTool e In Windows 3 x double click the FontTool icon in the PanelBuilder group The FontTool workspace opens Most operations are accessed from the File menu Fhe File Menu Commands New Font Description Creates a new font file Open Opens an existing font file Save Saves the font file to disk with the same name Saves the font file to disk under a new file name and or Save As location Save to Memory Card Saves the font file to a memory card Print Prints a font file Print Setup Selects a printer and settings Exit View Menu Commands Tool Bar Exits FontTool and returns to Windows Description Turns the view of tool bar on or off Sta
304. eric Displays 12 13 Triggering an Indicator State One of 3 data types can trigger the display of an indicator state e Single Bit e Least Significant Bit e Value Single Bit Single Bit is only valid for 2 state multistate indicators The state is controlled by the status of a single bit Turning the tag address bit on or off toggles the indicator display between state 0 and state 1 Least Significant Bit The terminal displays the state corresponding to the Least Significant Bit LSB at the tag address data words 0 to 1 999 bits More than one bit may be set at the tag address allowing states to display in a priority sequence state 0 displays when bit 0 is ON state 1 displays when bit 1 is ON state 1 999 displays when bit 1 999 is ON An error state occurs when all bits are OFF low The message defined for the error state State E displays if defined The default message is Error The controller program must clear the last bit displayed The next time the terminal reads the tag address the state corresponding to the next least significant bit is displayed The following example shows what happens if bits 1 and 24 are set at tag address N7 2 24 1 D D oO o fo c D o o o o D D D D D D D D D D Tag Address N7 3 256 Tag Address N7 2 2 ojojojojoji
305. erminals To Transfer Applications RS 232 DF1 Devices DF1 Remote 1 0 DH between the RS 232 DF1 port of a Remote I O PanelView terminal and a computer DeviceNet ControlNet using DF1 RS232 communications RS 232 DH 485 between a computer and the RS 232 port of an RS 232 PanelView terminal 1747 PIC Device DH 485 between a computer on the DH 485 network and the DH 485 port of a DH 485 PanelView terminal using a 1747 PIC interface converter Driver is not required PanelBuilder has an Internal DF1 Publication 2711 6 0 Automatically detects the settings of the DF 1 driver on the serial COM port when connected to a PanelView terminal Publication 2711 6 0 Installation 2 From the Available Drivers List click the desired driver by double clicking it or by clicking it and then clicking Add New The configuration dialog for the selected driver opens DF1 Driver Default name given to driver Serial COM port on computer Device Type of DF1 parameters for a PanelView DF1 driver on computer terminal must be set to Baud Parity None Error Detect CRC Stop Bits 1 Protocol Full Duplex Default name assigned to driver Serial COM port on computer Station address of computer is typically 0 3 Edit the driver parameters and click OK The driver appears in the Configured Drivers list Click Close to exit the Configure Devices dialog Installation 2 9 To assign a communicatio
306. error Name is not valid The specified screen name is invalid A valid screen name has 1 to 32 characters Rename the specified screen Name not found in project database Tag not found in project database Enter tag name and attributes in project database Network name has no RIO master device found in project A remote 1 0 master device PLC SLC is not defined for the Remote 1 0 terminal From the Setup tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to define PLC or SLC controller Nonexistent trigger specified The trigger specified for this alarm does not exist Use a valid trigger name in the alarm definition No objects in application The application doesn t have any objects This is a warning Exit the application or create screens with objects No objects on screen The application contains an empty screen without objects This is a warning Delete the screen or add objects and tag information to screen before downloading No screens in application The application doesn t have any screens This is a warning Exit the application or create screens with objects No start up screen assigned default to screen name A startup screen wasn t assigned for the application so a default screen was selected Open the Terminal Setup dialog to select another startup screen if necessary Node address of value is not valid The no
307. es are referenced from upper left corner of display x 0 y 0 e Width and height of object in pixels Object type right element of status bar Object ID 734 x 64 y 16 width 32 height 32 Momentary Push Button Publication 2711 6 0 Working with Objects 7 5 Aligning Objects Two grids are available for sizing and aligning objects e Touch grid available only on touch screen terminals e Screen grid Touch Grid Touch screen terminals use a touch grid to align control objects push button controls screen buttons keypad enable button with the touch cells Push button objects are moved and sized in increments of touch cells The default push button occupies 4 2 x 2 touch cells but can be sized differently The touch grid is present in every screen but isn t visible unless turned on The touch grid does not control the placement of graphics or display objects they can be placed anywhere on the screen Use the screen grid to align graphics and displays To show the touch grid Choose Touch Grid from the Align menu Grid mihuten A check mark appears next to Touch Grid when it s active Louch drid Choosing Touch Grid again hides the grid On PanelView 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen terminals the touch grid has 384 24 x 16 touch cells On PanelView 550 600 Touch Screen amp Keypad terminals the touch grid has 128 16 x 8 touch cells Touch Cell Grid Point Hg Default Push Button Size
308. esddatdesikaneeas nea 17 25 OMIT TEX ic tvatid nied e a a OA 17 26 Wien VON ac vad heat oka ean eee Ren wae yee 17 27 Using the Blink Option sce suunnan 17 28 Setting Foreground Background Colors saaana 17 29 Reversing Foreground Background Colors aaa aaa 17 30 Using the Text Editor Working with Tags Table of Contents vii Chapter 18 Chapter Objectives cece eee eee eee ees 18 1 Opening the Text Editor cece cece cece eee eens 18 2 Entering New Text scsi isae bidda ad Paw tia wed dwe wd ean 18 3 EQUINO TOM sivcasdauvvaae sbendedsd an iiih AEREA 18 4 Inserting Variables in Texts lt icencceadasevepedvivnsenunds 18 5 Sorting Wel a3 ere daaa es bike eeene sous E oon eee ena 18 6 Filtering GME assis wath dp nnet Ache hems a edek wind ado 18 6 Panting WOKE a ramena ian Gene ehedlads td phases ees oe 18 7 Deleting Unused Text ics csc ene dee seals so ome alla oaras alas 18 8 Renumb riig TEM xvod dows cov anni ces deea seed eee enee de 18 9 Moving TON dy sanea daraa cashews eg aware lt daccmie eee 18 9 Copying Text into Objects 2 0 0 cee eee eee eee 18 10 Chapter 19 Chapter Objectives 2cluvencebedaseae eid deeoulle dome dats 19 1 Using the TagEditor s o4 dtws cov annin deen seraa maua 24 19 1 TADS VOW sasia nasrai aait araa Aa Aa Baws 19 1 Form VIEW ouuu 19 1 Opening the Tag Editor onua 19 2 Navigating through the Tag Editor n a aaae 19 3 Validating Tag Addresses oonan a 19 4 Defining TAGS s cs
309. eter Options Default Node Address 0 77 octal 2 Pane Mice tamna Te aud ate 57 6K 115 2K 230 4K 57 6K Node Name User supplied None Network Node Node Address 0 77 octal 1 Node Type See above figure None Publication 2711 6 0 4 4 Communications Overview DF1 Communications The DF1 Panel View terminals communicate with an SLC PLC or MicroLogix 1000 controller over a point to point DF1 link or using DF1 network communications The DF1 terminals support full duplex communications The DF1 parameters for the terminal and controller are defined in the Communication Setup dialog accessed from Terminal Setup dialog Saip Posmip Ackercad tre Oe Cosette ioa Tamai Haima Terminal Name is stored in gt Project with Catalog Number ni Sadho information ete eter ils PanelView 900 PE Kepil Fie AHIA aa Geass DC and Ua DF1 Terminal meee FHN 171 1 Pee Depp FAH 311 1 aa m S DA Liai m i with RS 232 Printer Port Select only when using DF1 network communications A Must match Node Name in Tag Editor MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 PLC 5 10 5 12 5 15 5 25 via bridge PLC 5 11 5 20 5 26 5 40 5 46 5 60 5 80 via Channel 0 Port PLC 5 20C 5 40C 5 60C 5 80C via Channel 0 Port PLC 5 20E 5 40E 5 80E via Channel 0 Port The following table defines DF1 parameters and defaults for a DF1 Panel View terminal and logic controller
310. ets you know You cannot cancel the previous screen operation if the screen is closed To cancel the previous editing operation e Click the Undo tool on the tool bar e Or choose Undo from the Edit menu The Edit menu shows the name of the operation that will be undone For example lets say you delete an object and then want to cancel the delete When you open the Edit menu choose Undo Cut Delete Chapter 8 Creating Push Buttons Chapter Objectives This chapter shows how to create push button controls It contains the following sections Section Page Helpful Hints 8 1 Push Button Types 8 2 Contact Types 8 2 Push Button Text and Graphics 8 3 Creating Push Buttons 8 4 Setting Properties of a Push Button 8 4 Configuring Push Button States 8 8 Helpful Hints When creating push button controls consider e On touch screen terminals each push button aligns with a default of 4 2h x 2w touch cells e Use a global object if the same button will appear on one or more screens The Panel View terminal only stores one copy of a global button regardless of the number of links to it e Multistate push buttons support 16 states numbered 0 to 15 Use only the number of states required e Push buttons can have unique inner text and or a graphic for each state as well as other formatting options e Configure push button states from the States tab on the Push Buttons dialog or using the procedures described in Chapter
311. etup dialog shows the current DF1 settings for the Panel View terminal and controller The first time you open this dialog default settings appear p The terminal name was defined when the application was created Se later Terminal Name gt rwan pi iain Fives heimi Cm from Setup tab Heels T Fent ee ee iaa tats FMT ke ce Ci EO ussi O Horang wie Select only when using DF1 i network communications Hean Heats Must match Node a Name in Tag Editor ret et ieska Lil MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 03 5 04 5 05 PLC 5 10 5 12 5 15 5 25 via bridge PLC 5 11 5 20 5 26 5 40 5 46 5 60 5 80 via Channel 0 Port PLC 5 20C 5 40C 5 60C 5 80C via Channel 0 Port PLC 5 20E 5 40E 5 80E via Channel 0 Port Publication 2711 6 0 20 8 Terminal and Communication Setup 4 Under Terminal edit the following parameters Use To Specify the node address 0 to 254 decimal of the terminal for DF 1 network communications For network communications click the Use Node Address Networking check box For point to point communications with an SLC PLC MicroLogix 1000 or 1761 NET DNI module the default node address of 64 is used Select the baud rate of the terminal on the DF1 link The baud rate must match the baud rate of Baud Rate the target device Valid baud rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 The default is 9600 Select the parity and number of stop bits used by the DF1 port on the terminal The num
312. ew terminal Use To Rack Specify the unique address 0 76 octal of the PanelView terminal on the remote 1 0 link The options are limited to the rack addresses supported by the controller scanner Module Group Specify the module groups used by the terminal in the rack Each box represents 2 module groups The module groups must be contiguous Last Chassis Specify whether the terminal occupies the last module group no higher module groups assigned within the rack Baud Rate Specify the baud rate used on the Remote 1 0 link The options and maximum cable lengths are 57 6K 10 000 feet default 115 2K 5 000 feet 230 4K 2 500 feet 6 Click OK to save the settings and return to Terminal Setup Publication 2711 6 0 Terminal and Communication Setup 20 11 Defining Block Transfers Use block transfers on a Remote I O link to transfer e data or e applications from a computer on the DH network to a terminal on the Remote I O network using Pass Through You can create up to 10 block transfer channels numbered 1 10 Each channel is associated with a block transfer read or write instruction BTR or BTW in the controller ladder logic To define block transfers 1 Click the Block Transfer button from the Communication Setup dialog If the controller scanner does not support block transfers the Block Transfer button is dimmed Enabled Abiane Hri Legt CE Lo re E Caeni ri so
313. ew name If you want to print an amp type amp amp amp P projectname If you enter a character sequence that is not amp B space use to print a blank line defined itis printed as is For example if amp A product name you enter amp Z then amp Z is printed Allen Bradley Tag Editor Character sequences are not case sensitive If the expanded text is larger than 255 characters the printed output may look distorted or cut off These values are based on Control Panel Settings See the Microsoft Windows manual for details Aligning Header Information To Type For example left justify text text or character sequence For example if you want to print this header information is left Project 1 2 2 3 95 justified by default type amp P amp ENE amp D center text amp before the text or t t character sequence text after this text after this character second right justify a second amp before text or sequence is character text character sequence sequence Is a centered right justified p gt If alignment is specified in part of a header line make sure the text does not overlap For example if left aligned text runs to the center of the page it overlaps centered text Publication 2711 6 0 Using Tools sini Table View only Lint Editar Form Ed or Tag Import Export Utility Working with Tags 19 15 If the Status column or Tag Name column for a
314. ew or edit the attributes by opening the object s dialog Undo Color Change Ctr T TK To view or edit the attributes of an object Copy Ctrl C Paste Cir e Double click the object m e Or select object and click the Object Attributes tool elect Al Bring To Front Gye Or select object and choose Object Attributes from the Edit menu Send To Back Bring Dynamic Objects To Front The dialog that opens has 2 or 3 tabs depending on whether the Group object is a multistate or list object Ungroup Regroup Use Existing Text Use this tab To Object Attributes Properties Configure the operating parameters of an object set Peres Col Petes Configure the states of a multistate object or list object Does not States i appear for other objects Options Enter a description for the object flag the object for global selection or hide the view of the object oz Iam Opens o O _ ipat riom for m gt tepien Tg L nt cancel red ie Each object dialog has the same command buttons Objects that do not interact with the controller will not have the Edit Tag button Press To OK Save changes and exit the dialog Cancel Exit the dialog without saving any changes Edit Tag Open dialog to view or enter attributes for a data tag Publication 2711 6 0 Configuring States of Multistate or List Objects b C ost state operations are performed y Clicking a row number and then hoosing a command from this menu C
315. ext background text and alarm messages Use the Text Editor to e enter new text with embedded variables edit text e delete unused text e copy text into objects e renumber text e filter and sort text e print application text To open the Text Editor Choose Text Editor from the Application menu Apphrabon ax libn ETOR WOT TARTEL ii TH HOFILL FIX 0OF ET T 1 ET ET 3 ROTOR SPEER TWI HISE ER INC SPOSP Rr fea ys lint tarr DEC POF SRE PS TE DEC ROTOR A STAT R pa AITOR SPEER TOO LON Error Clears Tp fa koka Fer FT M N E e g a i a 2 Oooo _ Prans night merse bution ar Cirle tn splay mem Cut Chess Copy Chee Paste Chey Insert and Paste Ctrl M Insert Text ltem Ins Punge Text Item Del Move Test Item Up Ctrl U Move Testltem Down Ctil O Move Testltem To Ctl T Embedded Variable r Publication 2711 6 0 The Text Editor uses a spreadsheet to simplify text editing operations Each row identifies the following fields for a text string Text Field Description Text ID Specifies a unique number for a text string count Specifies how many times the text string is used in the application A count of 0 means the string is not used This is a read only field Type Specifies whether the text is used in an object or as an alarm message This is a read only field Text Defines a text string with or without embedded variables time date or numer
316. ey or touch cell can have the view turned off These objects are e Push button controls e Screen selector buttons e Keypad enable button When the view is off the object isn t displayed However the object s function key or touch cell is still active ATTENTION When turning off the view of a touch cell object you must place a graphic on that area of the screen Otherwise an operator could inadvertently touch that screen area and activate the function To hide the view of an object 1 Click the Options tab from the dialog of the selected object Femti sees Options Tun hpc Yor Lin T Bak hm Gibal Setecton Hone Spel beg Combealieie aie delle on ihe CUNLMTES Bos a cae ine CTILC ia cope CTAL fom panim CTRL fom cul 2 Click the Turn Object View On box to show the object view When the view shows the box contains an X To hide the view clear the check box 3 When done click OK to exit the dialog Publication 2711 6 0 7 20 Working with Objects Copying Cutting and Pasting Objects Undo Color Change Chr Cut Cirle Copy Ctrl C Faste Chr Delete Del Select All Ering To Front Send To Back Bring Dynamic Objects To Front Group Ungroup Regroup Use Existing Test Object Attributes Set Object Color Defaults Publication 2711 6 0 Use the Copy Cut and Paste commands on the Edit menu to e copy an object on the screen e copy cut an object to another
317. f other objects Graphics Text Formatting Tools ca e i i lM CB Leal oe Le 7 jmi Blink Underline Toggle Fore Background Text Size Left Align Center Align Right Align Embedded Variable Existing Text Inner Graphic Tools List of available graphics EJ Import Export Graphics Tool and Bitmap Summary B 3 Toggles blinking on or off for the selected text Toggles underlining on or off for the selected text Toggles the foreground and background colors of the selected text Increases or decreases the size of the selected text Aligns the selected text to the left Centers the selected text Aligns the selected text to the right Inserts a time date numeric or ASCII variable in a text String Also lets you edit a variable Opens the Existing Text dialog Edits inner text for an object Selects an inner graphic from a list of imported bitmaps Opens the Import Export Graphics dialog Publication 2711 6 0 B 4 Tool and Bitmap Summary Toolbox Graphic Tools h Selection Arrow Cancels a tool selection Line Draws a Straight line Connected Lines Draws connected lines to form shapes Rectangle Draws a rectangle or square Ellipse Draws an ellipse Freeform Draws a continuous or freehand drawing Background Text Draws a text box in which you can enter text Creates a horizontal or vertical scale with tick eale marks on the top bottom rig
318. field blank e To display a non scaled value not the entered value use different tag names for the display and write tags Both tags should have the same tag address but the display tag shouldn t have scaling e To display an entered value based on the value stored at the controller use the same tag name for the display and write tags Because of rounding the displayed value may not be identical to the entered value Entered Value 5 Displayed Value 6 Scaled x 10 5 Scaled 2 8 10 scale 2 scale 2 offset 10 offset 10 Terminal Value 8 a rounded Except for floating point values the controller only stores integer values the scaled result of 7 5 is rounded to 8 The same scale used for data entry is used to convert the rounded value for display Fill with Zeroes specifies whether zeroes are entered in unused entry positions to the left and right of the decimal point For example if the value 32100 is entered fixed decimal point position 2 Zero Filled No Fill 000321 00 321 00 Publication 2711 6 0 10 10 Creating Data Entry Controls Format Field Width e B Decimal Point Fixed Position o E C Keypad Controlled Publication 2711 6 0 Format Field Width specifies the maximum number of digits that can be entered The default is 6 If the entered value is a decimal it may be scaled or rounded to an integer or both before it is sent to the controller S
319. firm the deletion Click Yes All tag definitions associated with the print object are permanently removed Chapter Objectives What is a Global Object Chapter 14 Using Global Objects This chapter contains the following sections Section Page What is a Global Object 14 1 Defining a Global Object 14 4 Using a Global Object 14 5 Moving and Resizing a Global Object 14 6 A global object is a single object that can be referenced on multiple screens in an application A global object is created and stored once regardless of the number of times it is used For example if you want to use the same control or display object on different screens define the object as a global object You can reference a global object from any screen without recreating it The benefits of using a global object are e reduced development time Reference a global object on multiple screens without having to recreate the object When properties of a global object are edited all instances of that object are automatically updated e reduced application size Global objects reduce memory because they are stored once regardless of the number of links to it Only one copy of a global object is downloaded to the terminal Publication 2711 6 0 14 2 Using Global Objects Each object placed on an application screen has a corresponding e device object defines the properties of the object e screen object defines the screen
320. formatting details e An application screen can have more than one cursor point object To activate a cursor point the operator presses a function key or touch cell Another way to activate a cursor point is to press the left right arrow keys on the terminal until the cursor point is selected e When the keypad enable button is pressed or the cursor point is activated the scratchpad opens in the center of the terminal screen Publication 2711 6 0 10 2 Creating Data Entry Controls Numeric Entry Controls Keypad Enable Button gee A keypad enable button is a momentary push button which can display a value at a controller address The initial value on power up is set from the Tag Editor When pressed this button opens the scratchpad and enables the terminal keypad for data entry ENTER PSI 120 You can create keypad enable buttons with inner text and or an inner graphic and other formatting options See Chapter 17 Cursor Point E A cursor point is a data box that can display a value at a controller address The initial value on power up is set from the Tag Editor When the cursor point is selected and the Enter key or a numeric key is pressed the scratchpad opens and the terminal keypad is enabled for data entry Each cursor point can be assigned a function key or touch cell to activate the object for operator input Multiple cursor point objects can appear on the screen Another way to select a cursor poi
321. from the Help menu Below is an example of what the dialog looks like tikes By sebep Pee iim E sn Fictewee Bue Nort pean Coppeph 19012 193 Aber Bediew oeanp jer Thi pe iji n Boisi i Jane Brown Berker Saral Rumbar 11 Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Chapter 6 Working with Applications and Screens This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Helpful Hints 6 1 Starting PanelBuilder 6 2 Creating a New Application 6 3 Opening an Existing Application 6 5 Renaming and Describing an Application 6 8 Opening a New Screen 6 10 Opening an Existing Screen 6 11 Opening Multiple Screens 6 12 Closing Screens 6 14 Changing Screen Attributes 6 14 Deleting Screens 6 15 Copying Screens within an Application 6 15 Copying Screens to Another Application 6 16 Moving Screens to Another Application 6 17 Saving an Application 6 20 Closing an Application 6 21 Exiting PanelBuilder 6 21 e PanelBuilder applications use these file types PBA PanelBuilder application BAK Backup of PanelBuilder application PVA Translated PBA file that is downloaded to terminal e To make a copy of a PanelBuilder application copy the PBA file to a new file name e To save the previous version of an application each time you close it place the following line in the Files section of the C WWINDOWS PB550 INI file BackupPBAF
322. ftware Application file was created using a Demo release of the PanelBuilder configuration software Recreate file with a released version of PanelBuilder Configuration Software Unable to open file for reading File not loaded Read error may occur if a file is corrupted or a data timeout has occurred on network Check for valid access to file Try to load application again Unable to open screen list window Microsoft Windows is out of resources or user memory Close other applications and retry If error reoccurs exit Windows reboot and retry Unexpected EOF or Error file name File error Operation will not continue Check for corrupted file Unknown fault Unable to continue Unknown fault occurred Close application exit Windows and reboot Upload data may be corrupted Save application again and retry download Internal error detected Cancel download resave application and retry download If error reoccurs call Allen Bradley technical support Validating translating and downloading application Message appears during downloads Press the Cancel button to cancel the download or continue with download Value out of range Entered value is notin acceptable range Enter a value within acceptable ranges Publication 2711 6 0 D 8 Message in Max Range Values must be between 0 and 65535 in Max Range Values must be between 0 and 9999 in
323. g the configuration of an application Messages are listed alphabetically Meaning Project couldn t be created Cause could be full disk or a write protected network partition What to do Check available disk space Or verify your computers write privileges on network AB Utilities failed to initialize PanelBuilder could not initialize the AB Utilities during startup because SHARE EXE iS not running The PanelBuilder installation should add SHARE EXE to your AUTOEXEC BAT file See README TXT in CAB for details Application has exhausted terminal ID space Reduce number of objects in application and retry The application contains more objects than the application can support Reduce the number of objects on a screen and try again Translation Failure Error occurred while translating a PBA application to a PVA file for the terminal Check for validation error and warning messages Try to download again Attempt to recover data from file name failed Error Code code number Attempt to load data from terminal has failed Check network connections and try again Cannot create cancel dialog Couldn t create print cancel dialog This warning doesn t affect the print request but you may be unable to cancel the request Cannot create device context Printer driver could not be accessed because of a corrupted print driver no printer selected or an unstable Windows environment
324. ght click in a node field and select Delete Node from the shortcut menu From this menu you can also sort multiple nodes by name address type or only modified nodes p To copy rename or delete devices from a project use the Project Management command See page 21 4 6 Click OK to exit and return to the Terminal Setup dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Terminal and Communication Setup 20 7 Defining DF1 This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a Communications Panel View terminal and a controller that will communicate using DF1 full duplex communications over a point to point link or DF1 network You define parameters for these two devices e DFI PanelView Terminal e SLC PLC or MicroLogix controller PLC 5 Controller R PanelView ET R SLC Sg 500 Eileen el eee 200 E 309 5 fa or ne 55585858280 LEN i DF1 Port ___PanelView AIC MicroLogix 1000 1761 NET AIC 200 i an 200 DF 1 Port of mew 25885858080 tls cae DF1 Port To configure DF1 communications 1 Choose the Setup tab from the Terminal Setup dialog 2 Verify the terminal name entered in the Terminal Name field 3 Click the Comms Setup button The Communication S
325. h Screens to move the cursor in a screen or control list Publication 2711 6 0 A 4 Command Summary Align Menu Grid Snap to Grid Grid Attributes Touch Grid Format Menu Next State Previous State Choose Grid To Toggle the screen grid on or off A check mark v next to the command means the grid is active To turn the grid off choose the command again Snap to Grid Snap objects to grid points on the screen grid Touch screen terminals have a Snap to Grid feature which automatically forces all controls to align with the touch grid Grid Attributes Set the spacing of grid lines on the X and Y axis in pixels for the screen grid Grid attributes are not adjustable on the touch grid Touch Grid Choose Next State Toggle the touch grid on or off for touch screen terminals A check mark v next to the command means the touch grid is active To turn the touch grid off choose command again Push buttons are moved and sized in increments of cells on the touch grid whether the grid is displayed or not To Change the state of a multistate or list object to the next state so that you can enter text or a graphic for that state Inner Text Inner Graphic Previous State Change the state of a multistate or list object to the previous State so that you can enter inner text or a graphic for that state Text Size Align Text Underline Word Wrap Embedded Y
326. h state e enter a value for each state if required e edit format options for each state e insert a graphic for a state e add or delete states as required To configure states for a multistate indicator 1 Click the States tab on the Multistate Indicator dialog A spreadsheet opens Each row indicates an indicator state The default is 4 states row 0 to row 3 and an error state row E The fields in each row define visual characteristics for each state 2 Edit the states as necessary 3 Click OK to exit the Multistate Indicator dialog Peres righi peng badinas g Ciplibd ba dt pgizay ere Editing Number of States A multistate indicator supports a maximum of 2 000 states 0 to 1 999 Use only the number of states required To add states to a multistate indicator 1 Choose Append State from the popup menu A new state is added after the last state but before the error state 2 Repeat step 1 for each state you want to add Each state you add is created with values from the last state New states are added without default text in the Text field To delete states select the row number and choose Delete State from the popup menu Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 17 Editing State Text The Text field contains the text that will appear for each state The default text is the state number ST 0 Double click in the cell to edit the text Other text fields control how the text is formatte
327. hat fills from the top bottom right or left Creates a message display for showing status information or operator instructions Opens a dialog to access control and display objects that you ve set up as global objects Publication 2711 6 0 B 6 Tool and Bitmap Summary Publication 2711 6 0 List Key Tools The following List Keys are required on Panel View 900 1400 Touch Screen terminals to move the cursor in a Control List or Screen List Selector and to select a list item a Move Up v Move Down Home End a Page Up Page Down Backspace Enter oves the cursor up one item in a list oves the cursor down one item in a list oves the cursor to the first item in a list oves the cursor to the last item in a list oves the cursor up one page in a Scrolling list oves the cursor down one page in a scrolling list oves the cursor to the currently highlighted selection in a list Confirms a list selection and for a control list sends the selection to the controller ISA Symbols Toolbox ISA Symbols reat eae 5a Es CO ke tS o EJoola gt e MAKIN Diy Ge OSOCORSSSGSeSeeR8R F Selection Arrow Horizontal Valve with Actuator Horizontal Valve Throttling Actuator Horizontal Valve Manual Actuator Vertical Valve with Actuator Vertical Valve Throttling Actuator Vertical Valve Manual Actuator Butterfly Valve Check Valve Relief Valve Liquid
328. he Display Area This area scrolls so the operator can enter a character string that is longer than the Display Area All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible After entering all the characters the operator sends the string to the controller by pressing ENTER on the touch screen keypad The leftmost character is placed in the high byte of the first word of the write tag address the next character in the low byte and so on Note DeviceNet ASCII Entry allows for byte swapping Controls Function SHF By default this function is off and keys appear in unshifted state When you press SHF the button appears in reverse video All Shift character keys including numbers and symbols appear in their shifted state For example a becomes A 2 becomes CAPS By default this function is off and keys appear in lowercase When you press CAPS the button appears in reverse video Letters appear and are entered in uppercase but numbers and symbols are not shifted The state is maintained across power cycles Toggles between Insert and Overwrite modes The overstrike mode appears in reverse video INS In Insert mode the character selected is inserted before the cursor in the Display Area If the maximum number of characters has been entered in the Display Area new characters are ignored In Overwrite mode the selected character replaces the character at the cursor in the Display Area lt lt Moves the
329. he Tag Editor table view and paste the tags in it Duplicating Tags FEE Table View only Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Row Ctrl V Insert Find Duplicate Once Duplicate Several Options Duplication Address Validation Working with Tags 19 9 Use this option when a number of tags have similar attributes but are assigned to different variables in the application Create one tag and duplicate it as many times as needed Then change the name and address on each new tag to suit the variable it will be assigned to To duplicate a tag once 1 Select the tag name to duplicate 2 Click the Duplicate Once tool on the tool bar or choose Duplicate Once from the Edit menu The Tag Editor duplicates the row and places it after the current row The tag name is incremented according to the options specified in the Duplication dialog under the Options menu To duplicate several tags 1 Select the tag name to duplicate 2 Click the Duplicate Several tool on the tool bar or choose Duplicate Several from the Edit menu The Tag Editor duplicates the current row and increments the tag names according to options specified in the Duplication dialog under the Options menu To set the number of duplicates 1 Choose Duplication on the Options menu Duplication Ea IV Increment Name Number of Duplicates B Cancel Separator Number of Digits B M Help 2 Select the Increment
330. he following example illustrates a block transfer write The Panel View terminal is assigned to rack 3 starting module group 0 One of the PanelView objects a bar graph display addressed as N7 0 reads a portion of the data block being transferred The PLC receives and stores data from an input device in this example a flow sensor XK eel Flow Rate Raa gt Transducer N75 T Tag Name Flow Rate The PanelView terminal receives the data and determines the starting address for the write operation by matching the block size with the address entered in the Block Transfer dialog 2 The PanelView updates the bar graph display using the data from the controller i ievtreaey PanelViow 00 NEXT SELECT fw Gps sheen 19 GPS PUP AE CHS 12 GPS CONTROL Hess 11 GPS 10 GPS Bar Graph Object with Tag Name Flow Rate Address N7 5 Publication 2711 6 0 The PLC ladder logic program initiates a block transfer of a data block 10 words containing the screen display data BTW ____ BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE L EN Rack 03 Group 0 Module 0 Control Block N16 1 Data File N70 foe Length 10 PLC Continuous N The PanelView now carries a co
331. he name under which you save the application becomes the default for the next save operation Save or Save As command A backup file is also created with the same file name and the BAK file type PanelBuilder tracks the date time and version of an application when itis saved This information is available by choosing Description from the Application menu Publication 2711 6 0 Closing an Application Altera I CAABSPBWINSGSSOMEY 2485 PBA 2 CABSPBWINSGSSSCEY2R ID PBA SCAB PBWINSMSOK CBA 4CABPB WINAGSSSMEV2RIO PBA Exiting PanelBuilder Working with Applications and Screens 6 21 The Close command on the File menu closes the application file but leaves you in the PanelBuilder workspace To close an application file e Choose Close from the File menu e Or double click the control menu box on the application file window If you ve made changes to the application since the last save PanelBuilder gives you the option of saving the file before closing it The Exit command on the File menu quits PanelBuilder and returns you to the Windows desktop All opened applications are closed To quit PanelBuilder e Choose Exit from the File menu e Or double click the control menu box on the application file window If any applications are open and unmodified they are closed automatically If you ve made changes to the application since the last save PanelBuilder gives you the option of saving the fi
332. he popup menu Ferret k Or choose ASCII from the Format gt Embedded Variable menu Hera Bete Peowioun Strie rma biirr reget by Test Bipe a Properties Ter k da om Characters gt Edit Tag yard Wap Field Width Fill with Zeroes aie Toggle Fomjleckproe nd Titra Wiper ae Decimal Pomt TEP C Fixed Point an Typa 3 Position a P W Hoating Pomt Fin Pagen Ddi Yerabin Read Taq Cancel Avnly Hep 6 Set the properties of the variable Use To Field Width Specify the maximum number of ASCII characters 1 to 128 allowed in the variable The maximum field width depends on the communication protocol used by the application For Maximum Field Width is DH 485 DH DF1 80 characters Remote 1 0 128 characters The maximum number of characters supported by a text string including the embedded ASCII variable is 255 If the number of characters is gt 255 the string is truncated and an asterisk appears To display fewer ASCII characters than the specified field width you must append the ASCII NULL character to the string in the controller Read Tag Specify the name of the tag address in the controller from which to read the ASCII characters The data type of the read tag must be Character Array The Array Size of the tag must match the field width or a validation error will occur Publication 2711 6 0 17 18 Publ
333. he toolbox 6 When done click to exit inner text mode 7 Resize the text blocks if necessary to fit all text When you deselect the text object the border becomes invisible Numeric Data Displays Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Global Object El Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 9 Numeric data displays provide a numeric readout of a value stored at a controller tag address Types of Numeric Data Displays Numeric data displays can display an actual value or a scaled value In addition numeric displays can have e fixed or floating decimal point e zero fill text time or date If a value exceeds the specified field width for the numeric data display the overflow value is replaced with asterisks Here are some typical examples Pressure is 90 PSI gt Value without zero fill Pressure is 090 PSI gt Value with zero fill Pressure is 90 25 PSI gt Value with decimal point To add a date time or text to a numeric data display see Chapter 17 Creating a Numeric Data Display This section shows how to create a numeric data display To create a numeric data display 1 Click the Numeric Data Display tool in the toolbox Or choos
334. heet 1 2 5 10 Tag 1 3 Embedded Variables 7 17 Inserting ASCII variable 17 17 Inserting Numeric 17 14 Inserting Time or Date 17 13 End List Key 9 12 11 9 Enter ListKey 9 12 11 9 Error Messages D 1 Error State for Bar Graphs 12 3 for List Indicators 12 3 for Message Displays 13 5 for Multistate Indicators 12 3 for Numeric Data Displays 12 3 Errors Correcting Validation 23 3 Specific to CFG_485 EXE F 9 Specific to CFG_DF1 EXE F 9 Specific to RNA EXE F 10 Tag 19 20 Examples Alarm List 15 5 Alarms 15 28 15 29 15 30 15 31 15 32 Application Screens 1 5 Bar Graph Scaling 12 2 Bar Graphs 12 4 Bit LS Bit Triggered Alarms 15 19 Block Transfer Read 4 13 Block Transfer Write 4 14 Control List 9 4 Control Tags 20 25 Data Entry Scaling 10 4 Discrete 1 0 4 10 Global Objects 14 2 List Indicator 12 18 Message Displays 13 2 13 3 Multistate Indicator 12 12 Numeric Entry Controls 10 3 Numeric Data Display Scaling 12 2 Numeric Entry Handshake Tags 10 11 Scaling Precision and Rounding 10 6 Using the Remote Ack Tag 15 24 Value Triggered Alarms 15 18 Exiting PanelBuilder 6 21 Exporting Graphics 16 11 to a Disk File 16 15 to the Clipboard 16 14 Extended ASCII Characters H 1 Publication 2711 6 0 F File Menu Commands A 1 Fill Options 17 3 17 6 Finding Tags 19 10 FontFiles 22 3 Code Page 22 2 Copying to Memory Card 22 14 Detecting Problems 22 16 Double Byte Cha
335. hlighted when bit 254 is ON An error state occurs when all bits are OFF low No entry in the list is highlighted when an error occurs The controller program must clear the last bit displayed The next time the terminal reads the tag address the list entry corresponding to the next least significant bit is highlighted The example below shows what happens if bits 1 and 24 are set at tag address N7 2 24 1 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 O0 O 0 O 1J O 0 0 O0j O0 0 0 0 Tag Address N7 2 2 0 0 0Jojojojo jojojo jojojo o 1 State 0 ll State 2 State 3 State 1 Displayed 24 Tag Address N7 3 256 O O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 O0 1 O O O O O O 0 0 TagAddress N7 2 0 0 jo ojojojojojojojojojojojojo A Controller Program Clears Bit pa 24 Tag Address N7 3 256 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0000 o 0 0 0 Tag Adaress N7 2 0 O 00 010 001010100010100 mee State 25 State 26 State 27 State 24 Displayed Value The controller triggers a list entry when the tag address contains a specific value The entry is highlighted until the value at the tag address changes Publication 2711 6 0 12 20 Creat
336. hows a different trigger value 1 2 3 for each alarm The value 0 is reserved Alarm Setup Setup Alarm Triggers Alarms Publication 2711 6 0 i os boes eee i g alm_tag Value ack_tag ton diate as a Alarm T 1 sm wj E Ei In the Tag Editor alarm tag definitions are Tag Name Data Type Tag Address Node Name alm_tag Unsigned Integer N15 0 SLC_1 ack_tag Unsigned Integer N16 0 SLC_1 rem_ack Unsigned Integer N15 1 SLC_1 When the value 2 is entered at N15 0 Alarm B is triggered When the controller returns this trigger value to N15 1 rem_ack tag address Alarm B is acknowledged When the value 3 is entered at N15 0 Alarm A is triggered When the controller returns this value to N15 1 Alarm A is acknowledged The Ack Tag must be a value word address and returns the value of the alarm The PanelView will input a value when you or the controller acknowledges an alarm Creating Alarms 15 25 Using the Remote Ack Tag with Bit Triggered Alarms This section shows how the controller acknowledges one or all bit triggered alarms using the Remote Ack tag The following setup shows 3 alarms A B C assigned to the alm_tag trigger The Trigger Type is Bit The contents of the Value Bit field is a bit offset from the Trigger Tag address One tag handles up to 256 consecutive bits alarms 0 255 for example N 15 0 0 to N15 15 15 Seip Alam Triggers Alene In the Tag Editor alarm tag definitions ar
337. ht or left Import Export TDI Graphics Opens the Import Graphics dialog Graphic Image Draws a border for inserting a graphic image SG eesoueas Publication 2711 6 0 Control and Display Tools a u e se e a f ee ae a a o uut Momentary Push Button Maintained Push Button Latched Push Button Multistate Push Button Go To Screen Button Return Screen Button Screen List Selector Control List Selector Numeric Entry Cursor Point Numeric Entry Keypad Enable Multistate Indicator List Indicator Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Message Display Global Object Tool and Bitmap Summary B 5 Creates a momentary push button Creates a maintained push button Creates a latched push button Creates a multistate push button Creates a screen selector button that when pressed allows the operator to go to a specific screen Creates a screen selector button that when pressed allows the operator to return to the previous screen Creates a vertical list of screen controls from which the operator can select a screen Creates a vertical list of operator controls Creates a cursor point object which activates a scratchpad and the keypad for numeric data entry Creates a keypad enable button which enables the keypad for numeric data entry Creates a multistate indicator Creates a list indicator Creates a numeric data display Creates a horizontal or vertical bar graph t
338. ialog and select a different bit number for one of the states Duplicate data value value in state number The same value is assigned to two states of an object Open object s dialog and enter a different value for one of the states Duplicate Tags Write tag name is already in use Two objects contain the same write tag Control objects cannot use the same write tag address Select another write tag for one of the objects Dynamic object obscured by another object appearance on terminal may differ A dynamic object is obscured by another object when redrawn on the terminal because of data updated in controller The object that is obscuring the dynamic object is erased Move the object Field length number out of range The field width for a numeric data display or variable is invalid Open the object s dialog and enter a valid field width Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Message Font file is not successfully loaded Meaning Font file cannot be read Validation Messages E 3 What to do Check the file name otf file to make sure it is the latest file created from F ontTool Font file must contain 16 high font to customize numeric scratch pad text Font file does not contain 16 high font Create font file with 16 high font refer to terminal font setup dialog Foreground and background colors must be different The foreground and background colors for thi
339. ic representation of data stored at a controller tag address This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Helpful Hints 12 1 Scaling Data 12 2 Error States 12 3 Bar Graphs 12 4 Numeric Data Displays 12 9 Multistate Indicators 12 12 List Indicators 12 18 When creating bar graphs indicators and displays consider e Indicators reading a value do not have a dead band in which a range of values are interpreted as a single state For most applications the controller ladder logic should allow a range of values above and or below the specified value for each state to be interpreted as the same state e Multistate indicators support up to 2 000 states or entries numbered 0 1 999 e List indicators support up to 255 states or entries numbered 0 254 e For multistate or list indicators use only the number of states or entries required by the application e Multistate indicators include an error state State E The error state notifies an operator that the data read isn t within the expected ranges Publication 2711 6 0 12 2 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Scaling Data Standard Data Displays Standard data and bar graph displays show a numeric value stored at a controller tag address GJ lo k fo
340. ic variable Entering New Text Using the Text Editor 18 3 The Text Editor lets you create new text strings which can then be used by objects in the application This also includes text from an external font file You can also insert variables within the text including a time date or numeric variable The last row in the Text Editor contains an asterisk This row is reserved for creating a new text string To add a new text string as the last row in the spreadsheet 1 2 Locate the last row which contains an asterisk Double click the Text field The default text New text is highlighted Type in the new text To enter a carriage return press ENTER The characters R are inserted to indicate a new line Click anywhere outside of the field The Text ID field is updated with the next available number The Count field remains 0 until the text string is used by the application To insert a new text string at a specific location 1 2 Select the row number where you want to insert a text string Choose Insert Text Item from the popup menu A row is inserted above the selected row with the next available Text ID number Double click the Text field The default text New text is highlighted Type in the new text To enter a carriage return press ENTER The characters R are inserted to indicate a new line Click anywhere outside of the field The Count field remains
341. ication PBA file back to the computer The updated project is transferred with the application 4 When you open the application PBA file on the computer a dialog opens allowing you to update the original project This dialog does not open if you are creating a new application that is not yet associated with a project A Tegin She Pied ribans ban fe oeme rere ma a Tegin fhe ppikrine Grieg aod Yea r See ede ren E wee irer mH Tag rodhkmiora os erotic Pejt Reme FACAS Replace Tag ie Frajeri Drabaar Herr hiie enh Tag trom dppiicaiaa hodie Dej i Amii Pistan Hene Corsi Dasa The dialog displays the name of the first application device or tag that is different than the project You have the following options Click Yes To Replace the project tag or device with the application tag or device Select Yes if you know that a specific tag or device has been modified and you want to update the project database No Ignore the application tag or device Do not replace the tag or device in the project database with the application tag or device Replace All Replace all project tags or devices with the application tags or devices Replace None Ignore all application tags or devices Do not replace any tags or devices in the project Cancel Open Cancel the open If you select No or Replace None a dialog opens reminding you that the application may not validate because of
342. ication 2711 6 0 Formatting Objects and Text 7 8 9 Click OK when done A placeholder A 5 ASCIl_Data is inserted in the text with the specified field width and the name of the read tag 1 TEXT a 6 ASCII_Datat TEXT Read Tag Text precedes and Field Width follows ASCII variabl nnn erate A refers to ASCII Variable A string of characters the length of the field width is inserted in the object as a placeholder for the variable TEXT 88 FRR TEXT Resize the object if necessary to fit the variable Click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode For multistate objects you can add an ASCII variable to the text of a specific state from the State tab of the Object s dialog Example ASCII Strings The following table provides examples of characters that are embedded in an ASCII variable of a text string on the Panel View terminal The ASCII variable is configured with a field width of 6 If the ASCII string stored in the controller does not have the same number of characters as the field width use the ASCII SP space character to pad a string that is less than the field width use the NULL 0 character to terminate a string that is less than the field width or the string will not display Data from Logic Controller ASCII Characters Displayed on PanelView 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 M D I U M OOo textMEDIUMtext SP H I G H SP
343. ication 2711 6 0 Items required to create applications in a specific language are e PanelBuilder V2 30 Software installed with External Font Support loads the FontTool Utility e PanelView terminals running firmware V3 0 or later e International Version of Windows for a specific language or Input Method Editor to enter characters for double byte languages e Personal Computer with ATA or TMB240 TMB250 card drive e PC Memory Card TMB 240 250 Card Drives support these cards 256K flash memory card Catalog No 2711 NM11 1M flash memory card Catalog No 2711 NM12 2M flash memory card Catalog No 2711 NM13 4M flash memory card Catalog No 2711 NM14 ATA Card Drives support these cards 2M flash ATA card Catalog No 2711 NM22 4M flash ATA card Catalog No 2711 NM24 6M flash ATA card Catalog No 2711 NM26 ATA memory cards are recommended for laptop computers ATTENTION Do not format an ATA card ina DataBook card drive or the card may be unusable e Memory Card Retainer Catalog No 2711 NMCC NMCD The following terms are used in this chapter Code Page An ordered set of characters that has a numerical index code point value associated with each character The term code page is generally used in the context of code pages defined by Windows and may also be called character set or char set Input Method Editor IME A program that performs the conversion usually by user gu
344. ications Verifying an Application Use the Verify command to compare an application with an application loaded in a specific terminal You might want to download an application only if it is different from the application in the terminal The verification process checks whether the applications match To verify an application Click the Verify tool or choose Verify from the File menu Select Verify parameters Select source terminal for the verify enecion Drivers Select appropriate driver gt intemal DF1 a Internal DF 1 driver or RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver Enter name of PVA file to verify or TEST PvA Browse click Browse to search for a P VA file Select the type of terminal for which you are verifying a loaded application Uphead Drenltid Exit Verify Application Ea Source perator Terminal Operator Terminal via Pass Through Cancel Active drivers DF1 COM2 File Name Terminal Protocol DH R9232 DH485 After clicking OK the Application Verification dialog opens The dialog shows whether the applications match or not Publication 2711 6 0 0K lt Click OK to start the verify Setup m Depending on the Source selected you may have to click Setup to edit verify terminal parameters Validating and Transferring Applications 23 25 Downloading to a PanelView Terminal This section
345. ice Taaa ia Teas download Select DOS File gt Cimu riser iter Lia Hama Enter name of PVA file in which to gt T sr pma bomn save the translated P BA file or click Browse to search for file If you enter a P VA file without a path the file is saved to the current default directory To save the file to a specific folder specify the location in the F ile Name box Application is validated and translated to a PVA file then downloaded to a DOS file If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens You must correct errors before download can proceed Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed Dialog opens with PVA File Size and RAM requirements Dialog compares the file size and RAM requirements of the PVA file with the PanelView s file size and RAM capacity Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 19 Uploading Directly This section shows how to upload an application directly from a from a Terminal Panel View terminal to your computer over a serial link Before uploading an application e check cable connections See Publication 2711 6 1 e use the Internal DF1 driver to upload applications from terminals with an RS 232 DF1 port e use the 1747 PIC INTERCHANGE or RSLinx driver to upload applications from DH 485 terminals or RS 232 DH 485 protocol terminals To upload an application using the Internal DF1 driver Cho
346. idation Message Terminal name is not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup Runtime Comm Port is wrong type Meaning The terminal is not configured properly Validation Messages What to do Open the Project Management dialog and delete the terminal device from the project Then open the Terminal Setup dialog and reconfigure the terminal Terminal name max node number value not valid The maximum node number is invalid The maximum node number must be in the range of the terminal node number to 31 From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to change the maximum node number Terminal name not assigned The terminal isn t assigned a terminal name From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog enter a name for the terminal Terminal name node number is not valid The node number of the terminal must be in the range of 1 to 31 From the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog press Comms Setup button to change the node number of the terminal Terminal selected in Terminal Setup does not match Application type The wrong catalog number was selected for the terminal name in Terminal Setup From the Terminal Setup dialog select the correct terminal type to match the application DH 485 or Remote 1 0 Terminal Status and Control cannot use the same tag for the same purpose The same tag is being used for a control tag and a
347. ided dictionary lookup between keystrokes and ideographic or other characters Single Byte Character Set A character encoding where each character is represented by one byte Single Byte Character Sets are mathematically limited to 256 characters English for example What is FontTool Multilingual Support 22 3 Double Byte Character Set Double byte character sets are a specific form of multi byte character sets where some characters consist of two bytes Chinese for example Glyph The actual shape bit pattern outline etc of a character image for example an italic a and a roman a are 2 different glyphs representing the a character The FontTool utility lets you create font files which are used by e PanelBuilder software to display text whose character glyphs reside in a font file The font file must reside in the PBWIN FONT folder The default installation creates an AB PBWIN FONT folder e PanelView terminal to display the characters on the screen when the application is running The font file must reside on a memory card inserted into a Panel View terminal We recommend that you use the ATA flash cards for double byte languages because these languages require more space Font Files FontTool can create font files for any of the installed set of languages or code pages supported by Windows The code page for many languages is 1252 Panel View font files have an OTF Operator Term
348. if the application is to run in a different terminal 4 Under Terminal Type Information define the terminal in which the application will run by choosing options in this order e select a terminal from PV Type box e select Keypad Touch or Keypad amp Touch e select a Catalog number and firmware Version only the options that fit the selected terminal type are displayed The Ports area shows the ports on the selected terminal If the terminal has an RS 232 port the Serial Port Usage area shows whether the port is used for printing or downloading 5 Click OK If the selected terminal does not use the same communication protocol as the application you are asked if you want to convert the application to match the terminal s protocol Terminal and Communication Setup 20 17 Setting Power up Options The Power Up tab in the Terminal Setup dialog defines default operating parameters for the Panel View terminal on power up e startup screen for application e whether to write object preset values initial presets or last terminal state values to controller e screen to display on power up e memory card load conditions e configuration settings to use on first power up after download To set or change power up defaults for the terminal 1 Select the Power Up tab in the Terminal Setup dialog Terminal Setup x Setup Power Up Advanced Time Date Control Tags Status Tags Startup Screen TEE Power Up Options
349. ific to CFG_DF1 EXE F 9 Messages Specific to RNA EXE F 10 Running Windows 95 F 1 Starting PanelBuilder F 2 U Underline 7 16 Ungrouping Objects 7 10 Uploading Application Directly from Terminal 23 19 on Local DH Link 23 21 using DH485 Driver 23 20 using Internal DF 1 Driver 23 9 23 19 using Pass Through 23 22 Index 11 V Validating Application Correcting Errors 23 3 Dialog 23 2 Sending Messages to File 23 5 Sending Messages to Printer 23 2 Validation Messages E 1 Printing 23 2 Sending to a File 23 5 Setting Up Printer 23 4 Values Initial 10 5 Variables Adding in Text Editor 18 5 Adding to Alarms 15 21 ASCII 1 6 17 16 Embedded 7 17 ina Message 13 9 Numeric 1 6 17 14 Scaling Data 10 4 Time or Date 17 13 View Menu Commands A 3 View Option 7 19 Viewing Tags 19 7 W Warning Messages D 1 Window Border 5 2 Window Menu Commands A 5 Windows Environment 5 1 WINPFT Application File Transfer Utility 23 23 Word Wrap 7 16 17 11 17 12 Worksheets 3 5 C 1 Z Zooming Enlarging View 7 11 Reducing View 7 11 Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Publication XXXX X X X Month Year PanelBuilder Tools meee SI reo es N DENIA RY amp Sats Gi oe Format Bar in Object View NA amp amp Ss Se e WO Coe RS L sg KOY a X S amp FO eS S PS So ENE SO A waaa EEES ES tee at rro Format Bar in Text View lt RA s
350. il after you enable the font file in PanelBuilder In PanelBuilder choose Terminal Setup from the Application menu Click the Font Setup button Select the External Fonts Enabled check box From the External Font File list select the font file Click OK until you exit the Terminal Setup dialog Publication 2711 6 0 22 18 Multilingual Support Using Windows Standard Fonts to enter Western European Characters Publication 2711 6 0 Microsoft Windows standard fonts support Western European characters You can add a language or keyboard on Windows 95 or Windows NT systems and then enter international characters directly from your keyboard To add a keyboard layout 1 On the Start menu click Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click the Keyboard icon 3 Click the Language tab Windows 95 or the Input Locales tab Windows NT 4 Change keyboard from US 101 Windows 95 or US Windows NT to US International For more details on adding keyboard layouts refer to Keyboard Layouts in the online Index of Windows Help To enter international characters To enter this character AEIOU Press Ctrl accent grave the letter a iouyAEIOUY Ctrl apostrophe the letter RRA A Aa6iOGAEIOU Ctrl Shift caret the letter anoANO Ctrl Shift tilde the letter y CtrlShift colon the letter
351. iles 1 The application is saved with the same file name and the BAK file type Publication 2711 6 0 6 2 Working with Applications and Screens Starting PanelBuilder PanelBuilder opens like any other Windows application To start PanelBuilder e For computer running Windows 3 x At the DOS prompt type win and press ENTER aan Double click the PanelBuilder group icon in the Program PanelBuilder Manager Or use the Run command in the File menu of the Program Manager or File Manager Bas Double click the PanelBuilder icon PanelBuilder e For computers running Windows 95 Click the Start button Click on Programs You will see the Programs submenu Click PanelBuilder to open the PanelBuilder submenu Click the PanelBuilder icon The startup screen opens showing copyright and release information AB Already Poroiadija Sahesi Ymmi XX XX XX F ltaia hil xxx xx xxxx lige Blesal biey Comjsary bar C ae vel XXXX XXXX The pie re icena bor Jabr rimiti jr Erajiey Company lac Taris Member STOOT Wanna Thin compi piogram m pre cieed brie Diaa lene aj aal aian Lamrhonr ed meerodachen m digiebuian mi Gis pija wi ary pompa pi iL may ai ii nmam Al ard cree ponies and wil ba iire a ine di ba Panelfuilier 7 The PanelBuilder window opens ready for you to open a new or existing application file Pes Publication 2711 6 0 Creating a Working with Applications and Screen
352. imum 4 Accept the number in the Number box or enter a new one 5 In the Background box select another color for the screen background The current color is shown 6 Click the OK button The new screen name and number will appear in the title bar of the screen and in the application file window Publication 2711 6 0 Deleting Screens Cut Screen Ctrl x Copy Screen Ctrl C Paste Screen Ctrl Delete Screen Del Copying Screens within an Application Working with Applications and Screens 6 15 Use the Delete Screen command to remove screens from an application file without placing them on the clipboard To delete screens 1 From the application file window select the screens to delete 2 Choose Delete Screen from the Edit menu The screens are removed from the Application File window Numbers of deleted screens are used when new screens are created This section shows how to copy screens within an application using the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu To copy a screen within an application 1 Select the screen you want to copy from the application file window 2 Click the Copy tool on the tool bar or Choose Copy Screen from the Edit menu PanelBuilder copies the screen to the clipboard 3 Click the Paste tool on the tool bar or choose Paste Screen from the Edit menu 4 PanelBuilder pastes the screen into the application file window at the lowest available screen number In the fol
353. in PanelBuilder are in a PBA format application file window The window containing a list of all application screens in a PanelBuilder application file application screen window The window that looks like a Panel View terminal on which control panel objects are placed An application contains a logical arrangement of screens ATA card Advanced Technology Attachment ATA Intelligent Drive Electronics IDE PC Cards formerly PCMCIA combine the drive controller and memory storage device ATA cards can be accessed with standard Copy or Delete commands on a personal computer The card looks like a hard drive to the user You can use the card on a variety of computers without any special setup attributes In the context of PanelBuilder information that describes how an object will interact with the controller and how it appears on the Panel View terminal auto repeat A function where a button press release is automatically repeated when the button is held down for more than 1 5 second background text Screen text that is unattached or not linked to an object baud A rate at which a transmission occurs One baud equals one bit per second Publication 2711 6 0 Glossary 2 Publication 2711 6 0 bit The smallest unit of information in the binary numbering system A bit is represented by the digits 0 and 1 bitmap An image stored as a pattern of dots or pixels byte A sequence of 8 c
354. inal Font extension and reside in the PBWIN FONT folder A font file contains a set of characters in one or more sizes of the same style The character set or code page of the language you want to use must reside on your computer Publication 2711 6 0 22 4 Multilingual Support Input Method Editor Publication 2711 6 0 Languages that use a double byte character set require you to run an Input Method Editor IME on your computer unless you are running an International version of Windows The Input Method Editor is a software utility that runs in Windows The IME lets you enter foreign character sets in PanelBuilder as well as other applications such a Microsoft Word or Power Point UnionWay is one example of an IME The tool bar and input dialog for the IME is shown below Space characte Select next group of words Send first word C Wordmode Character mode Intelligent mode M Auto sort Auto send Show code P Case sensitive Input CJK characters with clipboard The language you select in the IME must match the code page of the font file you create in FontTool For this Font File Select this IME Option Chinese Traditional Big5 Chinese Simplified GB Japanese S J IC or EUC Korean J ohab Korean Wansung KSC Korean Wansung F ull Note We recommend that you select a fixed width font instead of a proportional font A fixed width font will not int
355. ine Connected Line Graphics List Keys p Rectangle Alarm List Elipse Alam Buttons ze Circle Global Object Freeform Graphic Image To draw a square hold down the SHIFT key as you drag To draw a circle hold down the SHIFT key as you drag Adding Graphics 16 5 When drawing a shape you can drag it to any size width or height Note Circles process more efficiently than ellipses in the terminal Whenever possible use circles To create a shape 1 Click the appropriate tool from the toolbox mj Creates a rectangle or square E Creates an ellipse or circle Or choose Rectangle Ellipse or Circle from the Objects gt Graphics submenu Position the pointer where you want to start drawing one corner of the shape Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to size the shape Release the mouse button when the shape is the right size When drawing a circle or ellipse an imaginary rectangle surrounds the object To draw another shape move the pointer to a new location and repeat step 3 Click the right mouse button to exit shape mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 16 6 Adding Graphics Freeform Drawings Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry P Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Disp
356. ing Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Creating a List indicator Objects Push Buttons j R n Screen Selectors gt This section shows how to create a list indicator Numeric Eritry F F ASCII Entry To create a list indicator Control List Selectors 1 Click the List Indicator tool in the toolbox Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Multistate List Or choose List from the Objects gt Indicators submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to size the indicator Graphics List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons k Global Object 3 To place another list indicator move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit list indicator mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Setting Properties of a List Indicator To set properties of a list indicator 1 Double click the list indicator object Pospestion Sistas Optcre Rasi nyo tirih iater P Sinte Fi Least Sigeieand Oi rH F Wa Data Fuma Foner Tag C af sf Et tawsf lt lt Opens 2 On the Properties tab set the operating parameters of the indicator Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 21 Read Specifies the type of data that triggers the display of a list entry Select
357. ing Reports Creating and Printing a Report Alt F4 1 CMABSPBWINSGS OMEV2495 PBA 2 CABSPEWINSGSSICKRV RIO PBA 3 C MAB PBWINSM SOK CEA 4 CAB PBWIN GSSIMEY2RIO PBA Publication 2711 6 0 The Report command on the File menu lets you create a customized report documenting all or specific aspects of an application Reports are useful for tracking application updates and changes To set up a report 1 Choose Reports from the File menu Print Cancel Application ci I Object Attributes Tag Attributes I Terminal Setup I Text I Alarm Setup Report Setup Printer Setup _ Screens Save Settings All IV Alarm Banner Include IV Screen Images V Object Summary Under Application select topics to include in report by clicking the appropriate check boxes To disable a topic clear the box Under Screens select screens to include in the report Click All to include all screens or From to include a range of screens Enter the range of screen numbers in the From and To boxes The Alarm Banner check box specifies whether you want to include the Alarm Banner with each screen By default the Alarm Banner is included Under Include specify whether you want to include Screen Images and or an Object Summary for each screen by clicking the appropriate check box To disable an option clear the check box Do not select Screen Images when printing to a file P
358. ing Screen Selectors 11 7 Use the States tab to e select a screen to associate with each entry e edit text to display for each entry edit text formatting options text size underlining blinking alignment and foreground color e add or delete screen list entries To configure the entries in a Screen List Selector 1 Click the States tab on the Screen List Selector dialog A spreadsheet opens Each row represents an entry in the screen list The initial default is 16 entries row 0 to row 15 2 Edit the fields as necessary 3 Click OK to exit dialog Editing Number of Screen List Entries A Screen List Selector supports a maximum of 255 entries 0 to 254 rows Use only the number required To add states to a Screen List Selector 1 Hold down the right mouse button and choose Append State from the popup menu A new row is added after the last row 2 Repeat step 1 for each state you want to add Each state you add is created with the defaults from Row 0 and default text ST 0 ST 1 ST 254 Publication 2711 6 0 11 8 Creating Screen Selectors Publication 2711 6 0 To delete states from a Screen List Selector 1 Select the row number you want to delete 2 Hold down the right mouse button and choose Delete State from the popup menu 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each state you want to delete Selecting Screen Names The Screen field contains a list of screens in the application Select a
359. input The selected function key displays a graphic of a control list and an asterisk next to the key number indicating the key is used Asterisk Control List Wrap Around Specifies whether the selection cursor moves to the top or bottom of the list when the operator presses the down or up Lal arrow key on the last or first item in the control list Click the check box to activate wrap around To disable wrap around clear the check box Write on Enter Specifies whether the list selection is sent to the controller immediately or when the terminal s Enter key is pressed By default the operator is required to press the Enter key To disable Write on Enter clear the check box Publication 2711 6 0 9 10 Creating Control List Selectors Configuring States for a Control List Selector Value field appears only if Value Use the States tab on the Control List Selector dialog to e edit and format the text for each state e enter a value for each control list state e restrict access to states in a Piloted Control List e add or delete states as necessary To configure the states of a control list selector 1 Click the States tab on the Control List Selector dialog Each row in the spreadsheet represents a state in the control list selector The fields in each row define the text and visual characteristics for each state The initial default is 16 states row 0 to row 15 2
360. ion Specify a value between 0 and 255 nvalid Page Width Please select another number between 20 and 132 The specified value is nota valid option Specify a value between 20 and 132 nvalid Perforation Skip Please select another number between 0 and 255 The specified value is nota valid option Specify a value between 0 and 255 nvalid queue size Please select another number between 1 and 100 The specified value is nota valid option Specify a value between 1 and 100 nvalid screen number Please select another number Screen number entered is invalid Backspace over entry and enter a new screen number 1 to 29 999 Low memory condition Scrolling may not work Do you wish to continue icrosoft Windows is low on memory You can continue but the scroll function for the list window will not be active Low resource memory Unable to create application screen list window Low memory error Close other applications and retry If error reoccurs exit Windows reboot try again Low resource memory Unable to create dialog manager window Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your computer and try again Low resource memory Unable to create message edit window Low memory error Close other applications and try again If the error reoccurs exit Windows reboot your comput
361. ion the cursor where you want to insert the variable 4 From the popup menu choose Embedded Variable gt Time Date Variable for Numeric or ASCII For the Time and Date variable a placeholder is inserted in the message T for time D for date The format of the time and date is set in the Terminal Setup dialog A dialog opens when Variable p 17 14 or ASCII p 17 17 is selected The dialog defines the format of the variable in the text string When you exit this dialog a placeholder is inserted within the text with embedded formatting details To edit a numeric or ASCII variable 1 Double click the Text field containing the variable Click the numeric V 12 NOFILL FIX 0 or ASCII A 12 variable 2 3 From the popup menu choose Embedded Variable gt Edit Variable 4 Edit the settings in the Variable dialog 5 When done click OK to exit dialog The placeholder is updated with the new format To delete a variable Click on the placeholder and choose Cut from the popup menu or press BACKSPACE or DELETE Publication 2711 6 0 18 6 Using the Text Editor Sorting Text Sorting organizes data in columns alphabetically or numerically When you sort a column rows are rearranged according to the contents of the column For example if you sort the Text field all rows are rearranged alphabetically Identical text strings appear together The Sort By list box lets you sort the data in these col
362. ions The Internal DF1 driver uses the following settings which match the fixed DF1 settings on the PanelView terminal Parity None Baud Rate 19200 Error Detect CRC Using the Internal Drivers The Download Upload Application dialogs include a Communication Drivers list from which you select either e Internal DF1 driver or e RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver To use the DF1 driver you must unload INTERCHANGE from your system Exit Windows and type ABICSTOP at the DOS prompt If an RSLINX driver is configured for a COM port even if the driver is not mapped for a client application the internal DF1 driver is disabled to avoid conflicts Delete the RSLinx driver and the internal DF1 driver becomes available If you select Internal DF1 driver for a terminal that does not have an RS 232 DF1 port such as a DH 485 terminal this message appears Incompatible or no communication drivers active cannot perform file transfer operations with Operator Terminal and Operator Terminal is removed as an option under Destination The Setup button on the Download Upload dialogs is active if more than one COM port is available for the internal drivers If you select a COM port used by another Windows application the port is locked Systems running Windows 3 1 display this message The requested COM port is not available because a hardware interrupt conflict has been detected You must change your hardware configuration to be able t
363. ions selected in the Filter dialog You can print all text or a range of text stored in the Text Editor Create a subset of text to print using the filter option You can also sort a filtered list or range of text before printing The following information prints for each text string in a list format Text ID or number Text A header prints at the top of each page To print application text 1 Select the text you want to print To select a single item click the row number of the text string e To select a block of text click the row number of the first text item hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse until the last text item in the block is highlighted e To select all text click the Select All button Click the Print button The standard Windows Print dialog opens Under Print Range select the range of text items to print All or Selection Click the Print Setup button to set the default printer or to change the printer options 4 Click OK to close the dialog Publication 2711 6 0 18 8 Using the Text Editor Deleting Unused Text Publication 2711 6 0 You can delete text that is not used by the application An unused text string has a 0 in the Count field To display all unused text in a group e From the Sort By list box select Count to sort the Count field numerically All text strings with a count of 0 will appear in a block at the end of the spreadsheet e Create a s
364. ition Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Working with Objects 7 11 You can change the stacking order of objects that overlap You can stack objects on top of each other and then change the order in which they appear Bring to Front Send to Back Original Stack To bring an object to the front of the object stack 1 Select the object 2 Click the Bring to Front tool on the format bar Or choose Bring To Front from the Edit menu To send an object to the back of the object stack 1 Select the object 2 Click the Send to Back tool on the format bar Or choose Send To Back from the Edit menu Use the Bring Dynamic Objects To Front command to move all objects that interact with a controller address in front of other objects on the screen You can increase or decrease the view of the screen so that objects look larger or smaller than their actual size Changing the view affects only the appearance of objects not their actual size To zoom in or enlarge the view of the screen e Click the Zoom In tool on the tool bar e Or choose Zoom In from the View menu You can increase the view several times If starting from Full Size the view increases each time you click Zoom In To zoom out or reduce the view of the screen e Click the Zoom Out tool on the tool bar e Or choose Zoom Out from the View menu You can decrease the view several times If starting from Full Size the view decrease
365. ition it becomes inactive and is removed from the list If the alarm is triggered again the original alarm is not reactivated A new instance of the alarm is created Alei apap Opto Ailem Larrihar F activa T jns Achre Dis l icirpreiedged inima F jjssckmmiariga iam e Active Alarms that have been acknowledged When a bit triggered alarm in the terminal is acknowledged the alarm is automatically added to the list Alei Pegg Dyke Alem Laebbee E Active I jaie Achdedgmes ii H Pa brprmiedgrs iiu ma I Pssrkrosirkpn Maem I Ma Achrarysat eind e Inactive Alarms that have been acknowledged When an unacknowledged alarm in the terminal is acknowledged the alarm is automatically added to the list Abam Csspiap Opa iiiam rakira T Acia T jris Ar breskedgmr Sladen H A brmbahgai Ale ion T pnsan dgr n ipm T Ma Ackeasdeclmand Flagged For Alarm Lists with active alarms when an active alarm becomes inactive it is automatically removed from the list Publication 2711 6 0 15 12 Configuring Global Parameters for Alarms EL Creating Alarms Text Editor Tag Editor This section shows how to configure global parameters that apply to all alarms and alarm objects including which screen objects to disable when Alarm Banner is displayed e size of Alarm List and whether to clear the list on powerup Project Management Preferences Description Alarm
366. iuaiekri Tp 2 Set appropriate attributes for your printer 3 Click the Options button to enter options specific to your printer The Options dialog is different for each printer type 4 When done click the OK button Or click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving changes If your printer is not listed e Check for hardware compatibility between your printer and one of the printers listed Check if your printer has an emulation mode that is compatible with one of the printers listed e You may need to install a print driver for your printer Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Publication 2711 6 0 24 6 Creating Reports Sending the Report to a File Publication 2711 6 0 To send a report to a file the Generic Text Only printer must be installed and connected to the FILE printer port on your computer This printer driver allows you to print text but not graphics You can install this printer from the Printer icon of the Control Panel window in the Program Manager See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details To send a report to a file 1 Click the Print Setup button from the Report Setup dialog The standard Microsoft Windows Print Setup dialog opens Printer C Default Printer currently HP DeskJet 560C Printer on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Specific Printer Options Generic Text Only on FILE Network Orientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 81 21
367. jects 8 Creating Push Buttons Shows how to create and configure momentary maintained latched and multistate push button controls 9 Creating Control Shows how to create and configure standard and piloted control lists List Selectors 10 Creating Shows how to create objects that open a scratchpad for numeric or ASCII data Data Entry Controls entry 11 Creating Screen Selectors Shows how to create screen selectors for navigating between screens in an application Screen selectors include goto goto config screen return screen buttons and a screen list 12 Creating Bar Graphs Shows how to create and configure multistate indicators list indicators bar graphs Indicators and Numeric Displays and numeric data displays 13 Creating Message Displays Shows how to create message displays and print only message devices which present status information or instructions to the operator 14 Using Global Objects Tells how to flag an object for global use and access global objects 15 Creating Alarms Describes alarm components Alarm Banner display Alarm buttons Alarm List global alarm parameters alarm and trigger definitions and how to use those components to trigger alarm conditions 16 Adding Graphics Shows how to add lines shapes ISA symbols and background text to screens Also shows how to import bitmap graphics from other programs such as Paintbrush 17 Formatting Objects and Text Shows how to use formatting options to change the visual appea
368. jects is unlimited but must not exceed runtime memory Maximum number of bitmaps and text is unlimited but must not exceed application memory Chapter Objectives PanelView Terminal Ports Chapter l Communications Overview This chapter contains the following sections Section Page PanelView Terminal Ports 4 1 DH 485 Communications 4 2 DH Communications 4 3 DF 1 Communications 4 4 DH 485 DH DF 1 Communication Considerations 4 5 Remote 1 0 Communications 4 6 Discrete 1 0 4 9 Block Transfers 4 11 The Panel View terminals have ports that support a variety of communication options including Remote I O communications e DH 485 communications e DH communications e DFI communications DeviceNet communications e ControlNet communications For details on how to configure a Panel View terminal to communicate on a DeviceNet network see publication DeviceNet Communications for PanelView Terminals For details on how to configure a Panel View terminal to communicate on a ControlNet network see publication ControlNet Communications for PanelView Terminals The catalog number of the terminal determines the physical ports and communication protocol supported by that terminal Many of the terminals have an additional RS 232 port which is used for printing and or transferring applications The Panel View terminal type and communication parameters are selected and configured as a part of the a
369. k Saute Save a copy of the application file under a new name with all changes you made to it The original file remains intact Copy Font File Copies a font file stored in PBWIN FONT to an ATA flash card inserted in the ATA card drive on your computer Import a bitmap created with another program The bitmap Import Export Graphics can be imported from a file or the clipboard You can also export a bitmap graphic to a file or the clipboard Generate a customized report for an application using the Reports default or user defined format Reports can be printed or saved to a file Workstation Setup Access the INTERCHANGE Configuration Utility to configure serial communications required for transferring applications on your computer Exit Quit PanelBuilder returning you to the Windows desktop 1 File Name Open the most recently accessed file The bottom of the 2 File Name File menu displays the last 4 application files opened with 3 File Name the most recently accessed file displayed first in the list 4 File Name Choose To New Create and open a new screen in the application file Open Open existing screens in the application file Close Close the active screen Attributes Rename renumber or change the background color of the active or selected screen Create Alarm Banner Create a display in which alarm messages and alarm buttons appear The banner is gl
370. k the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu The format bar shows the current text ie as a Click where you want to insert the variable or use the arrow keys to position the insertion point If you want to display the variable without text delete the text first by dragging the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Format bar and choose Variable from the popup menu Or choose Variable from the Format Embedded Variable menu State Formatting Objects and Text 17 15 6 Set the properties of the variable Use To Field Width Specify the maximum number of digits 1 to 12 allowed in the variable If the Fixed Point Decimal Position is not 0 then the field width must be 2 gt Position value for positive numbers One position is for the decimal point and one position is for the digit to the left of the decimal For negative numbers the field width must be 3 gt Position For example to display 0 1234 the field width must be 7 and decimal position 4 Fill with Zeroes Fill empty data positions with zeroes Otherwise empty positions are left blank Zero Filled No Zero Fill 000321 __ 321 Fixed Point Decimal Specify the position of the decimal point 0 to 10 places to the left of the rightmost character Use 0 to display the value without a decimal point Floating Point Decimal Have th
371. keys Each time you press a key the current graphic is replaced with another view 6 Position the graphic in the object by selecting and moving it 7 Click the Inner Graphic tool to exit inner graphic mode Or click the left mouse button outside the push button 8 Resize the object not graphic if necessary The graphic retains its relative position in the object anchored by the top left corner For multistate objects you can assign a graphic to a specific state from the State tab of the Object s dialog To reposition a graphic 1 Select the object For a multistate object select the state containing the graphic 2 3 Click the Inner Graphic tool on the tool bar 4 Select the graphic and move it 5 Click the Inner Graphic tool to exit inner graphic mode State na Formatting Objects and Text 17 21 Setting Foreground Background Colors On color and grayscale terminals you can set the foreground and background colors of an inner graphic from the Format menu or the color palette The background is the area containing the graphic On color terminals the initial default is a blue background and a white foreground On grayscale terminals the initial default is a black background and a white foreground You can adjust the foreground background colors of monochrome bitmaps not color bitmaps To set the foreground background colors of a graphic 1 Select the object 2 If the object is a multistate
372. keys to position the insertion point To display only the time or date delete the text first by dragging the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE 5 Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Format bar and choose Time or Date from the popup menu Or choose Time or Date from the Format gt Embedded Variable menu The time T or date D placeholder is inserted in the text box and the time or date format is inserted in the object 6 Resize the object if necessary to fit all the text 7 Click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode For multistate objects you can add a time or date variable to the text of a specific state from the State tab of the Object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 14 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State Inserting a Numeric Variable You can insert a numeric variable associated with a tag address in an object or text string The variable can appear with a fixed or floating point decimal with or without zero fill When the application is running the Panel View terminal reads the value stored at the tag address and displays the value To insert a numeric variable in an object or text string 1 2 Select the object For a multistate object select the state in which you want to insert a variable e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu Clic
373. knowledged Pressing the Ack All button removes the Alarm Banner from the terminal display but does not clear the alarm conditions Each alarm is marked acknowledged in the Alarm List aleas Clears the Alarm List Also clears the Alarm Banner even Alarm though the alarm condition may still exist The Alarm List is List automatically cleared when an application is downloaded Na V A warning message is displayed asking the operator to confirm or abort the clear operation Prints all alarms in the Alarm List With each alarm Print Alarm message you can print List e alarm date and time e acknowledge date and time v y e trigger value Only terminals equipped with an RS 232 printer port support the Print Alarm List button Publication 2711 6 0 15 4 Creating Alarms 06 19 96 E 06 19 96 gt V 06 18 96 WI 06 17 96 16 55 Oven Temp High 16 30 LS101 Triggered 15 00 Oven Temp High 15 00 Tank Overflow optional gt vZ 06 17 96 15 00 Tank Overflow Publication 2711 6 0 Alarm List The Alarm List records information on triggered alarms The maximum number is 100 or as many alarms up to 100 the terminal can hold in nonvolatile RAM You can set the number of alarms stored in the Alarm List 1 100 The default is 25 The Alarm List can be used multiple times in an application It can appear in the Alarm Banner and on other application screens Each time an alarm is triggered it is added
374. kr 100 ojaga id futrudart ME i a nae 19 raen E E a jms 6 20 Extraer M E ia img b 23 Extraer S mg a i Exeredar F joe hag bas Ixecadecs FF a fT imag ct ao mw PF E n gt z5 Entrer P E ejm E 30 Extraia p E ILIS O kben E p m The PanelView notifies the controller by writing Acknowledge All Value 99 for the Extruder1 trigger to the trigger s Ack address Ex1Ack Acknowledge All Value 100 for the E xtruder2 trigger to the trigger s Ack address Ex2Ack SS _detcol The controller sets a bit at the Ack A tag address RemoteAckAll defined on the Alarm Setup tab to acknowledge all active alarms for all triggers Allalarms activated by the Extruderl and Extruder2 triggers are acknowledged in the Alarm List Alarm List Extruderl Msg B Acknowledged Extruder2 Msg B Acknowledged Extruder2 Msg E Acknowledged Extruderl Msg A Acknowledged Extruderl Msg D Acknowledged Extruderl Msg B Acknowledged Extruder2 Msg A Acknowledged The PanelView reads a nonzero value at the RemoteAckAll address Publication 2711 6 0 Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Adding Graphics Chapter 1 6 This chapter shows how to add graphics and background text to screens It contains the following sections
375. l Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays 12 11 Decimal Point A value may be stored as an integer then scaled by the terminal so it can be displayed as a decimal See page 12 2 on scaling The Decimal Point area specifies whether a scaled value displays with a fixed or floating point decimal SCALE Terminal Value 32767 gt Scale 0001 Offset 94 32767 x 0001 94 Displayed Value 97 2767 e Select Fixed Point to position the decimal point 0 to 10 places to the left of the rightmost character A value of 0 displays a value without a decimal point Select For this position Select For this position 0 97 6 97 276767 1 97 2 7 97 2767676 2 97 27 8 97 27676767 3 97 276 9 97 276767676 4 97 2767 10 9 7276767676 5 97 27676 Note If Position is 40 then the field width must be 2 gt decimal position for positive numbers One position is used for the digit to the left of the decimal and one for the decimal point For negative numbers the field width must be 3 gt decimal position For example to display the number 0 1234 set the field width to 7 and the decimal position to 4 e Select Floating Point to have the terminal position the decimal Read Tag Specifies the name of the tag address from which to read the display data If the tag doesn t exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor
376. l 1 Click the Import Export Graphics tool on the Format bar Or choose Import Export Graphics from the File menu 2 Export the graphic to a disk file or the clipboard Chapter 16 tells how to export a graphic from the Import Export Graphics dialog 3 Use Paintbrush or another program to edit the bitmap graphic 4 Import the revised image from the Import Export Graphics dialog It s recommended that you change the name to differentiate the new image from the old image Important Bitmaps cannot exceed the pixel size of the terminal 5 Re insert the graphic in object as described on page 17 20 Publication 2711 6 0 17 24 Formatting Objects and Text Changing the Appearance of Text Next State Previous State Inner Text Inner Graphic Tent Size Align Text Underline Word Wrap Embedded ariable Text Formatting amp Alignment Foreground Color Background Color Toggle ForeBackground Elink Fill Fatter Shape Line Type Publication 2711 6 0 You can change the way text looks on a screen using various combinations of size emphasis and alignment From the Format menu or Format bar you can e size text e align text left right or center e underline text toggle blinking on or off set text foreground background colors toggle foreground background colors Text format and alignment options are applied to entire text strings not individual letters or words When you sele
377. l Screen gt Background Alarm Banner The Alarm Banner is an optional display that pops up over the current screen when an alarm is triggered The banner contains a message describing the alarm condition and alarm buttons acknowledge alarm clear alarm which allow the operator to act on the alarm When alarms are triggered they are added to an Alarm List When the alarm in the banner is acknowledged or cleared the next alarm is displayed The banner displays messages in chronological order oldest triggered alarm to most recent triggered alarm The Alarm Banner is a global display that is created once in an application but appears in the same place on every screen Only alarms configured to display when triggered appear in this popup You can configure which objects are disabled when the Alarm Banner is displayed The options are e all screen objects are disabled default or e only covered objects are disabled Below is a sample Alarm Banner with all of the alarm objects Sample Alarm Banner Clearing the Alarm Banner The Alarm Banner remains on the terminal display until the operator presses the Acknowledge button the operator presses the Clear button e the operator presses the Ack All button e the controller acknowledges the alarm e the controller clears the alarm e the terminal enters Configuration Mode
378. l Object tool in the toolbox Or Choose Global Object from the Objects menu The Global Object dialog opens The Control box lists all objects marked for global use from the Options dialog Each global object is identified by its tag name object ID and object type Objects without tag names are listed by object type Global Object x Motor_Speed_Dec 1651 Mom PB motor_speed_inc 1642 Mom PB Object ID 2 Select a global object from the Control list box and click OK Or double click the global object 3 Position the pointer where you want to place the object Global objects can have different locations on different screens 4 Click the left mouse button 5 Click the right mouse button to exit global object mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Any changes to a global object except for screen location and function key assignment apply to all instances of that object A global object can have different function key and or touch cell assignments from screen to screen Publication 2711 6 0 14 6 Using Global Objects Moving and Resizing a Global Object Publication 2711 6 0 This section shows the effects of moving and sizing a global object You can change the location of a global object on one screen without affecting its location on another screen Location is not a global attribute When you resize a global object on one screen it is resized on all other screens because size is a gl
379. l button on the Project Database dialog Important If you disable all check boxes the verification process will not occur and you may lose tag or device data Publication 2711 6 0 6 8 Working with Applications and Screens Renaming and Describing an Application EEA Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Validate Changes Validate ll Download Upload Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup Appears in Title Bar of Application File Window Project Associated with Application Use the Description command on the Application menu to e Rename an application e Enter an application description which you can include in a report e View the version number and last save date of an application To open the Application Description dialog e Choose Description from the Application menu e Or click the Description button from the New Application dialog If entering a description from the New Application dialog the Application Name and Project Name do not appear Application Description x Application Name Project Name GSRIO Cancel Description I fea When the Application was Saved Last Saved Version Number Increments with Each Save Version 0 Publication 2711 6 0 Note Special key combinations are available in the description field CTRL ENTER for a new line CTRL C for copy CTRL for pa
380. l type tunm ermi fvadabile Dijes Cantgpsied Denitek and the communication card F Fa f MABE DEVICE Font STATS installed in your computer han appl determines the driver selection 17B ET on DHe 1THETI om DH ITELENDE on Controle PELETE on DHAES TAAL ITS ian DHe 174 ACME a Dhi m Adi Devoe For Direct Transfers Select To Transfer Applications DF1 on COM Port Remote 1 0 DF1 DH between the RS 232 DF1 port of a PanelView terminal and a computer using DF1 ControlNet DeviceNet RS232 communications RS 232 DH 485 between a computer and the RS 232 port of an RS 232 PanelView terminal DH 485 between a computer on the DH 485 network and the DH 485 port of a DH 485 PanelView terminal using a 1747 PIC interface converter 1747 PIC DH485 on COM Port Driver is not required PanelBuilder has an Internal DF 1 For Pass Through Select To Transfer Applications between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KL communications card and the Remote I O port of a PanelView terminal on a Remote 1 0 network between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KL communications card and the RS 232 port of a DH 485 PanelView connected to Port 0 of an SLC 5 04 between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KL communications card and the DH port of a PanelView terminal on the DH link between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KT B KT2 communications card and the Remote I O port of a PanelVie
381. lView terminal PanelView Terminal An Allen Bradley keypad touch screen or touch screen and keypad terminal which runs a PanelBuilder application The terminal provides the operator interface to the logic controller when the application is executing Pass Through Means of transferring data between a computer on the DH network and a Panel View terminal on the Remote I O network A PLC 5 controller acts as a bridge between the two networks paste To copy the contents of the Clipboard PC Personal Computer memory card PLC Acronym for Programmable Logic Controller an Allen Bradley trademark point To move the pointer on a screen until it rests on the item you want to select pointer The arrow shaped cursor on the screen that follows the movement of the mouse and indicates which area of the screen will be affected when you press the mouse button The pointer changes shape during certain tasks Also known as mouse pointer preset value A value loaded into a controller data table when an application is first started project A database of tag definitions and device information associated with an application Glossary 5 programmable controller A device used to replace relay logic used for sequencing timing and counting Instead of physical wiring devices such as relays push buttons and limit switches a programmable controller tests the state of inputs and sets outputs according to stored program
382. lView whenever operating parameters exceed predefined limits The Panel View is configured with the following screen and control tag information Screen Number Tag Tag Name Screen Tag Address N7 10 Screen 10 Configured as Information Screen Screen 11 Configured as Caution Screen The Controller monitors an automatic sorting process A bar code reader signals the presence of a package requiring an operator s attention The controller logic program writes a value of 10 to address N7 10 The PanelView reads the value 10 at the
383. lay List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Global Object Publication 2711 6 0 Line Connected Line Rectangle Ellipse Circle Text Graphic Image You can create your own freehand drawings To create a freeform drawing 1 Click the Freeform tool in the toolbox Or choose Freeform from the Objects Graphics submenu 2 Position the pointer where you want to start drawing 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse while drawing When done drawing release the left mouse button 4 Click the right mouse button to exit freeform mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Freehand drawings are memory intensive For complicated drawings create a bitmap graphic of the drawing with another source program and then import the graphic Adding ISA Symbols v Tool Bar v Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Adding Graphics 16 7 PanelBuilder provides a set of standard ISA symbols that you can add to a screen They are accessed from the ISA Symbols toolbox See Appendix B for a description of each symbol E ISA Symbols Em lelek Fe te RAPE OYE 00 cx eg EES Fat iS ie KEES E Iq ISA symbols can be moved but not sized To add an ISA symbol to a screen 1 Click the symbol you want from the ISA Symbols toolbox 2 Position the pointer
384. lboxes 5 7 Keypad Display 5 7 Color Palette 5 8 Dialog Boxes 5 9 Spreadsheet Editors 5 10 PanelBuilder Defaults 5 13 Getting Help 5 14 PanelBuilder runs in the Microsoft Windows environment You should be familiar with window operations That is you should know how to use the mouse choose menu commands and work with windows and dialogs If you use a mouse here are the basic terms used Term Means Click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field then press and release the left mouse button once Double click Position the mouse pointer on the object area or field and then click the left mouse button twice quickly Select item or command Click to highlight the item to be affected by the next command or click on a dialog box option Choose item or command Click on a tool menu command or an item in a dialog box or Help window Drag Click where to start a selection and hold down the left mouse button Move pointer to end of selection and release the mouse button Use drag to highlight a text string If you prefer to use the keyboard Term Choose menu command Means Press the ALT key and type the underlined letter in the menu name Then type the letter underlined in the command name Select item or command Use the arrow keys or in a dialog both the TAB and arrow keys to move to the item Choose item or command Highlight an item then press the ENTER key P
385. le Window Title Bar Application Screen When you open an application the application file window opens listing all screens in the application by number and name Close Button FTIIKACE PANIC Keypad FRH 7 701 Maximize Button Minimize Button Title Bar iriiri Biers Barret 1 TOA STA LB F OTOH SPEED Border Resizes Window Application Screen Window Each application screen looks like the Panel View terminal touch keypad or keypad and touch for which you are creating the application Objects are placed inside the display area On keypad terminals you can also place objects on function keys Screens are moved and sized like any other window Multiple screens can be open at one time Display Area Publication 2711 6 0 5 4 Menus Publication 2711 6 0 PanelBuilder Basics The menu bar dynamically updates when application files and application screens are opened Each name on the menu bar is a menu with its own set of commands To open a menu e Point to a name on the menu bar and click the left mouse button To move directly to a menu command drag the pointer down the menu until the command is highlighted then release the mouse e Or press ALT and then press the underlined letter in the menu name For example to open the File menu press ALT F To choose a menu command e Click the command name e Or type the underlined letter in the command name e Or use the UP and DOWN A
386. le before closing it Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter 7 Working with Objects Chapter Objectives This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Accessing Objects 7 2 Draw Pointer 7 3 Creating Objects in Display Area 7 4 Aligning Objects 7 5 Creating Objects on Function Keys 7 7 Selecting Objects 7 8 Sizing Objects 7 9 Moving Objects 7 9 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects 7 10 Stacking Objects 7 11 Zooming In and Out 7 11 Object Inner Text 7 12 Formatting Objects 7 13 Setting Default Colors for Objects 7 13 Editing Object Attributes 7 14 Configuring States of Multistate or List Objects 7 15 Entering a Description for an Object 7 18 Hiding the View of an Object 7 19 Copying Cutting and Pasting Objects 7 20 Deleting Objects 7 22 Reversing an Operation 7 22 Publication 2711 6 0 7 2 Working with Objects Accessing Objects All objects controls displays graphics ISA symbols are accessed Objects from the Objects menu or a toolbox Push Buttons Screen Selectors The toolboxes toggle on and off from the View menu Numeric Entry ASCII Entry E Toolbox Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics List Keys is s Graphics Controls Displays List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Selection Momentary Maintained Latched Multistat
387. le rack 128 I O You can assign 2 types of addresses to objects on a Remote I O network e Discrete a single input or output bit address e Block transfer a series of contiguous word addresses Data is transferred over a remote I O link as either a e Read or Input data to the PLC from the Panel View e Write or Output data from the PLC to the Panel View The processor continually scans the PanelView terminal for inputs and updates the outputs Read and write tags must have different discrete I O addresses and are not linked in the terminal Rack Sizes and Module Groups The Panel View I O can occupy a 4 1 2 3 4 or Full rack Each 1 4 rack contains two module groups 32 input and 32 output bits An entire rack contains 8 module groups that are numbered from 0 to 7 Rack PanelView I O L s y ON Rack Sizes 14 1 4 1 4 1 4 PA yy yh N Input 0 1 2 3 1415 6 7 16 Bits each Module Group Output m N Ww gt uw a If a PanelView terminal does not occupy a complete I O rack you can assign another PanelView or other devices to the same rack Parameter 1st PanelView Other Rack Device Rack Number 1 1 Starting Module Group 0 6 Rack Size 3 4 1 4 Last Chassis No Yes The PLC type determines the maximum rack number for the Panel View Communications Overview 4 7 Remote I O Scan Group A Remote I O s
388. lication 23 25 Uploading an Application 23 27 Verifying an Application 23 24 WINPFT 23 23 Application Menu Commands A 5 ASCII Chart Extended Characters H 1 ASCII Entry Creating Keypad Enable 10 16 Cursor Point 10 12 Dialog 10 17 Display Tag 10 18 Input 10 17 Mask Characters 10 18 Notification and Handshake Tags 10 18 Scratchpad for 550 Touch Terminals 10 14 Scratchpad for Keypad Terminals 10 13 Scratchpad for Touch Terminals 10 15 Scratchpad in other Languages 10 16 Show Current String 10 18 String Width 10 18 Write Tag 10 18 ASCII Variable 7 17 17 16 18 5 Attributes ASCII Entry 10 17 Bar Graphs 12 5 Control List 9 6 Editing 7 14 Latched Push Button 8 4 List Indicator 12 20 List Keys 9 12 11 9 Maintained Push Button 8 4 Publication 2711 6 0 Index 2 Attributes Message Display 13 6 Momentary Push Button 8 4 Multistate Indicator 12 14 Multistate Push Button 8 4 Numeric Data Display 12 10 Numeric Entry 10 7 Scale 12 7 Screen List Selector 11 6 Viewing 7 14 Audience Intended P 1 Auto Repeat Settings 20 21 Background Objects Graphics 16 16 ISA Symbols 16 7 Text 1 7 16 8 Backlight Terminal Setup 20 22 Backspace List Key 9 12 11 9 Banner Alarms 15 2 15 6 Bar Graphs Attributes 12 5 12 7 this is how level2 wraps around to the following line 7 5 Creating 12 5 Data Ranges 12 6 Description 1 6 Dialog 12 5 12 7 Error State 12 3 Examples 12 4
389. like global objects If an application uses the same bitmap several times the terminal only stores one copy of the graphic Any changes to a bitmap affect all other instances of that graphic Size of Bitmaps An imported bitmap cannot exceed the number of pixels supported by the terminal display Larger bitmaps are cropped when imported Editing Bitmaps You cannot edit an imported graphic in PanelBuilder To edit a graphic you must export the graphic to a file or the clipboard edit the graphic using another program and then re import the graphic When a bitmap is edited and re imported PanelBuilder updates all instances of that image in the application About Color Bitmaps Color terminals support the 16 standard EGA colors If you import a full color bitmap each color is mapped to one of the 16 EGA colors A color bitmap reduced to 16 colors on import is exported as a 16 color bitmap Grayscale terminals support 4 colors shades of gray If you import a full color bitmap each color is mapped to one of 4 colors A color bitmap reduced to 4 colors on import is exported as a 4 color bitmap E List of imported bitmaps ra and standard ISA symbols Adding Graphics From the Import Export Graphics dialog you can Import a bitmap graphic from a file BMP or the clipboard View a bitmap graphic Export a bitmap graphic to a file or the clipboard Delete a bitmap graphic To open the Import Export Graphics dialog
390. line Draws open connected lines or simple polygons using connected straight lines Draws a rectangle or square Draws an ellipse Draws a freehand drawing Adds background text Adds a bar graph scale Opens a dialog for importing or exporting bitmap graphics eoeee0e08e Places a background graphic image Drawing a Line Cte Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Lenes ine Connected Line List Keys Rectangl Alarm List oat i Ellipse Alarm Buttons Circle Global Object Freeform Text Graphic Image Adding Graphics 16 3 Use the Line command or Line tool to draw straight lines As you draw a line you can drag it to any size or angle To draw a line Ib Click the Line tool in the toolbox Or choose Line from the Objects Graphics submenu Position the pointer where you want to start the line Hold down the left mouse button and drag A line stretches from the starting point to the position of the pointer changing length and position as you move the mouse When the line is the right size release the mouse button To draw another line move the pointer to a new location and repeat steps 3 and 4 Click the right button to exit line mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox
391. ll for operator input Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Message Object not on touch cell boundary Meaning A touch object doesn t align with touch cells This can occur if the user assigns touch cell input after the object has been sized Validation Messages What to do Resize object or move object until it snaps to grid Object requires function key or touch assignment The specified object isn t assigned a function key or touch cell for operator input Open the object s dialog and assign a function key and or touch cell Object too small to display text The height of the object is too small to display the first line of text Increase the height of the object Overlapping control objects Two objects are overlapping on the screen Access the screen and reposition or resize the objects so they don t overlap PLC or Scanner not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup The PLC Scanner with which the terminal will communicate is not configured in Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog From the Setup tab in Terminal Setup press the Comms Setup button to configure the PLC Scanner type and name PLC or Scanner not found in Project Database The PLC Scanner with which the terminal will communicate is not defined in Terminal S etup Communication Setup dialog From the Setup tab in Terminal Setup press the Comms Setup button to define the PLC Scanner type and n
392. ller match value of 2 800 for a weigh scale transducer Weigh Scale Value 2 800 Matches Input Value 2 800 Package is Accepted Value from Weigh Scale 2 800 PanelView Terminal Scales Value to 2 800 for Match Code Operator Inputs tye Weight of 30 Pounds The value displayed in a numeric entry object may or may not be scaled The displayed value may be assigned a tag name independent of the value written to the controller write tag address Creating Data Entry Controls 10 5 Data Limits for a Scaled Value If a scaled value exceeds the range for the selected data type the terminal will display a Value Not In Range warning When using scaling we recommend that you limit the minimum and maximum values an operator can enter These values are set in the Tag Editor form view see page 19 5 Calculate the range for scaled values before entering values in the Tag Editor Use the following formulas to determine scaled minimum and maximum values Maximum Input Value Maximum Value for Data Type x Scale Offset Minimum Input Value Minimum Value for Data Type x Scale Offset For example e Scale 1 8 and Offset 32 Fahrenheit to Celsius conversion e Data type is Signed Integer 32 768 to 32 767 The minimum maximum values an operator can enter without truncating Maximum Input Value 32 767 x 1 8 32 59012 Minimum Input Value 32 768 x 1 8 32 58950 Initial Value of a Scaled V
393. llisions 19 17 Exporting Tags 19 18 Examining Results of an Import Export 19 19 Interpreting Error Messages 19 20 You can enter tag information in either of two ways Table View Enter several tags at the same time in a table which has its own tool bar and columns for tag attributes This is called the Summary View Form View Enter a single tag from a dialog in PanelBuilder or change from the table view to the form view Publication 2711 6 0 19 2 Working with Tags ET Opening the Tag Editor Text Editor To open the table view of the Tag Editor Project Management Choose Tag Editor from the Application menu Preferences Description Validate Changes Validate All Download i Upload Table Summary View Terminal Setup name of project the type Alam Setup this window name of view Print Only Object Setup A y Status Icons W Allen Bradley Tag Editor GSRIO Summary ei Project Edit View Options Tools Window Help l x E Baa al par axa Els Duplications i TagNeme DataType AnaySize Descipton NodeName motor_start_ind Bit PLC_RIO 0 010 10 motor_stop i Bit PLC_RIO 1 010 11 Error on row in motor_stop_ind Bit PLC_RIO 0 010 11 this case duplicate gt motor_stop This tag is stored in your project your pro tag name 7 Te f Currently editing this row
394. loaded to the terminal To select copy the text to translate 1 Open PanelBuilder 2 Open the Text Editor by choosing Text Editor from the Application menu 3 Purge all text not used by the application e Click the Select All button e Click the Purge button 4 Click Select All again to select all the text to translate 5 Copy the text to the clipboard e Click the right mouse button e Choose Copy from the popup menu To paste select the text in Excel 1 Without closing PanelBuilder open Excel 2 Paste the text into the Excel spreadsheet 3 Translate the text To copy the translated text into PanelBuilder 1 In Excel copy the translated text to the clipboard 2 Return to PanelBuilder 3 Paste the translated text into the Text Editor e Select all lines e Click the right mouse button Choose Paste from the popup menu 4 Click OK to exit the Text Editor Multilingual Support 22 17 To create and save the font file 1 6 Open FontTool From the File menu choose New Font 2 3 4 Select the appropriate language sizes and font style After the font file is generated choose Save As from the File menu to save the font file OTF in the PBWIN FONT folder From the File menu choose Save to Memory Card to save the font file OTF to a memory card Close FontTool To enable the font in PanelBuilder The characters will not appear correctly in the application unt
395. log and screen associated with highlighted error Send validation messages to printer or file Define printer settings Validating and Transferring Applications 23 3 Correcting Validation Errors To correct validation errors 1 Select an error in the Exceptions dialog by clicking on it 2 Click the Goto button PanelBuilder opens the dialog associated with the error or the screen containing the object with an error If PanelBuilder cannot navigate to the source of the selected error the GoTo button is dimmed The Exceptions dialog is minimized to an icon 3 Correct the error and close the dialog Note If the message indicates an undefined function key even though the object dialog shows a selected key clicking OK to close the dialog resolves the error 4 Double click the Exceptions icon to open the Exceptions dialog Or choose Exceptions from the Window menu 5 Repeat steps 1 4 to correct other errors The following example shows how to navigate from an error in the Exceptions dialog to the dialog or screen containing the error Click GoTo Button Pires Y aidais icrmn V sbdebras y bom Yabisbra en Ta vonking Opens Object Dialog Daph alr Banri aki oe Wein Contacte Tjep H T My pea T Yan T Hanay ram Dele Finia l r 3 Eda Tag Enter Missing Write Tag a Dai and Close Dialog pap ba T E a ie enau Y O g Hmalihaka Tar Double click icon to To
396. lor Screen Background Cancel Hi Black M L Cai Object Foreground Object Background E Black M Ie Le EN You are asked to supply the following colors background color of screen default is black e foreground color of objects default is white e background color of objects default is black Select the colors you want and click OK The screen is pasted into the color or grayscale application using the selected colors Working with Applications and Screens 6 19 Converting Color to Monochrome If copying or moving a screen from a color application to a monochrome application all colors are removed from the screen e screen background is converted to white e brighter colors are converted to white e darker colors are converted to black color bitmaps are converted to monochrome bitmaps Also text sizes are converted to the closest matching font in the new application You may want to resize the text Converting Color to Grayscale If copying or moving a screen from a color application to a grayscale application all colors are removed from the screen e colors are converted to the closest shade of gray e color bitmaps are converted to grayscale bitmaps Also text sizes are converted to the closest matching font in the new application You may want to resize the text Publication 2711 6 0 6 20 Working with Applications and Screens Saving an Application The File menu provides t
397. lowing example screen 2 Feed Pump is copied to screen 5 with the same screen name ZIHARA FEI Keypt FRR LEHI Sereemm Risin Mismi Feed Pump Tank Lesti Aaontbar Feed Ping CESE E Use the Attributes command on the Screen menu to change the name of the copied screen Publication 2711 6 0 6 16 Working with Applications and Screens Copying Screens to Another Application Cut Screen Ctrl X Copy Screen Ctrl C Paste Screen Ctrl V Delete Screen Del Publication 2711 6 0 This section shows how to copy screens from one application to another using the Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu Only one application can be open in the workspace but you can run multiple sessions of PanelBuilder See page 6 18 for details on what to do when copying or moving a screen to an application that was created for a different type of terminal To copy screens from one application to another 1 5 6 7 Select the screens you want to copy from the application file window Click the Copy tool on the tool bar or Choose Copy Screen from the Edit menu PanelBuilder copies the screens to the clipboard Save the application file if necessary Close the application file Or start another session of PanelBuilder Open the application file to receive the screen Click the Paste tool on the tool bar or choose Paste Screen from the Edit menu PanelBuilder pastes the screen into the a
398. lue to emaximum precision for offset is 6 places to right of a TON decimal point engineering units y eif present a sign or for the number must be first is default eif present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the e or E Data Entry Limits The minimum and Maximum characters 12 edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable Minimum maximum values that e0 9 characters Maximum can be assigned to ee E and period emaximum precision is 6 places to the right of the decimal the tag Required fields for the Table View Required fields for the Form View These fields appear only when the data type is 4BCD signed integer unsigned in Publication 2711 6 0 point eif present a sign or for the number must be first is the default eif present a sign for the exponent must immediately follow the e or E teger IEEE Float Saving Tags Viewing Tags FEE Table View only Inserting and Deleting Tags Eind Dupree Der Qupliceta Severe Form View Working with Tags 19 7 To save a tag definition in the form view e Click OK e Or press ENTER e Or press the Tag Editor button To close the form without saving anything click the Cancel button Table View To save a tag definition in the table view e Press ENTER at the end of the row e Or move the cursor to a different existing row e Or double click in the Status Column for
399. m carriage return lt cr gt to backslash quotation mark to double quotation marks backslash to tilde backslash If the tag name contains other special characters the Export function deletes them e When you export to an AI file Ifthe tag name is longer than 15 characters the Export function truncates the name Ifthe description is longer than 75 characters the Export function truncates the description e When you export to an CSV file Ifthe comment description field contains quotation marks commas or carriage returns the Export function puts quotation marks around the comment field Ifthe comment field contains embedded quotation marks the Export function changes them to double quotation marks Publication 2711 6 0 Working with Tags 19 19 3 Under Source select a project and the controller associated with the project 4 Under Destination type a destination file in the File box or click Browse to search for a destination file 5 Click OK The Exporting Tags From Project dialog opens followed by the Writing Destination File dialog as the tags are exported These dialogs display the percentage complete When the Export function is finished exporting the tags the Summary Report dialog opens Summary Report Result a iew Report lt Click to View the full report Tags Processed 312 Save Report Click to save the r
400. me entered in the Tag Editor i a ie eties Vag FEF AR E C vi i i tn i ae Es CLs sal oe SSB men atm Peel hed Ae LLE AD Fred a ieee ini AH ECT FLEE Linz i yrei besiege LEM Te HHEH LAE ALN GAE Bras bigg PETTE ALUM by ITATTA A oT D few BOTTLE ALLER BSL Cour Pe Po ki BOTTLE MERRET Le HIZ bi BOTTLE Rii R Poe rue Grita iegriba EET TLE ALLER PLAAH TPN a PLEN IT B BOTTLE ALLER ras PUISH PA PLI rms hi BOTTLE ALLER TOP PLEA BI PLIS Tol Dysia POTE FLL LATA Tee GPS i ii lerr CLE PiE wali F PLIS Giir SCC a ae rie Bi Lane Cher Paii bPa A Ea Eramiha TA CLES PE TAN HNI bi Lie CLES LT Oro ta Tehk CLEO DaT LTE Saibebee Lee Em GCE T Pri i fegredieieges BDI TLE MLLER fee aire Aus in J B EDTILE LLH ALEEA PLIN rari a Seyetisies BOTTLE FLUNG MEL ord Bi BOTTLE MLLPEI TAREN AY PUE TELLE i j ae i PI la PUER S10 PSH TTT mmm OOo o o o ooo r Table View Tig bead Waa S F Tag Akini Mhi Fpi y pa eA Form View Publication 2711 6 0 3 14 Planning an Application Memory Requirements Tips Publication 2711 6 0 The memory available for applications varies for the Panel View terminals Screen Tips on Reducing Memory Review the following list for hints on ways to reduce the size of an application For DH 485 DH or DF1 applications group tag addresses for each screen in the same 40 word block For multistate or list objects create the exact number of states or entries r
401. menu 3 Click the Toggle Foreground Background tool on the Format bar Or choose Toggle Fore Background from the Format menu The object colors including fill pattern inner text and or inner graphic are reversed You can reverse the foreground background colors separately for inner text e inner graphics monochrome bitmaps only Publication 2711 6 0 17 10 Formatting Objects and Text Working with Inner Text Publication 2711 6 0 Most objects are created with default inner text that can be edited and formatted The inner text appears inside the object and is linked to the object When you move or delete the object the inner text is also moved or deleted Keypad Enable Button Return Screen Button Enter Previous Pressure Screen Control List Screen List Selector Off Conveyor Controls gt i d Pump Controls Medium Heater Controls High Data Entry Push buttons and multistate objects can have different inner text for each state The text appears when the object is in the specified state On Off Type Multistate Push Button Push Button State 0 Text gt ON LOW lt State 0 Text HIGH State 2 Text Formatting Objects and Text 17 11 Editing Inner Text Nest State a g Previous State This section shows how to edit inner text for an object Remember if the object is multistate the text appe
402. mited to one line of text Changing the text size applies to the entire list On color and grayscale terminals each item can have a different color but the background color is the same for the entire list On keypad terminals the operator moves the cursor through a control list using the terminal s up a and down v arrow keys The selection is sent to the controller immediately or when the Enter key is pressed on the terminal Touch screen only terminals require list keys on the screen enabling the operator to move the cursor through the control list List keys are similar to the arrow keys on keypad terminals A screen can contain multiple control lists On standard control lists the operator selects a list by pressing a function key or touch cell touch screen terminals Another way to activate a list is to press the left or right arrow keys on the terminal until the list is selected Publication 2711 6 0 9 2 Creating Control List Selectors Standard Control Lists Piloted Control Lists Publication 2711 6 0 On Standard control lists the operator moves a cursor to select an item On keypad terminals the up a and down v arrow keys are used to move the selection cursor The currently selected item is highlighted The selection is sent to the controller immediately or when Enter key is pressed on the terminal 8 gonn pogo 3000 800 500 500 0000 888 3800 600 Be
403. mmunications for PanelView terminals Publication 2711 6 10 Publication 2711 6 0 20 2 Terminal and Communication Setup Terminal Setup Overview EED Text Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Description Validate Changes Validate All Download Upload Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup eee Setup Foils Adme Teele Corb Togr Barta Fij rini Pabi E FAH TEF Foppa E Wi ESA FYE Keppa FRR Eya Espai FAH 30 i Fii caa Pabbi Eeyped FAH Sd enan Ftecad Pipra A527 e A The Terminal Setup command on the Application menu opens the Terminal Setup dialog This dialog defines both operating parameters and communication parameters for runtime operation Terminal Name is defined when application is created ae O Paringi HF Appears only if the selected terminal is equipped with an RS 232 serial printer port The port can be used for downloading or printing Ppnting The Terminal Setup dialog uses tabs to organize operations by function Select this tab Setup To edefine run time communication parameters for terminal and controller accessed via Comms Setup button echange the terminal type of a PanelView device especify whether to use the RS 232 serial port of the terminal for printing or downloading applications configure communication and printing parameters for those terminals equipped with an
404. n applies to all states in the list Text Blink Toggle blinking on or off for the text string Click the box to turn blinking on or off The default is off An X in the box indicates the blink option is active Und rine Toggle underlining on or off for the text string Click the box to turn underlining on or off The default is off An X in the box indicates underlining is active Align Text Select whether the text will align left right or center in the object For list objects the selection applies to the entire list The default is left Toggle word wrap on or off for the text string Click the box to turn word wrap on or off The default is on An X in the box indicates word wrap is active Word Wrap y With word wrap on text wraps atthe end a word rather than breaking in the middle Select a foreground color from a list for the inner text For list objects th Ten Tpicgmund selection are to the ae list i default s white E Text Background Selecta background color from a list for the area containing the text string The default is blue Cells that are unique to an object do not appear in this list Foreground Color BEA Color La Color Foreaioihd Color off RESET Fill Fill Low Graphic Text um Background Color Background Color Background Color Align Text Left lt High Publication 2711 6 0 State Operations Working with Objects 7 17 Operations you can perform on states are accessed from a p
405. n driver to a port After configuring a driver you must map the driver to one of driver ports 1 From the Communications menu choose Configure Client Applications INTERCHANGE Peet Mapping Virtual Link vT ere fe Sfi Kei wT fira WID Hane g Maps the configured DF 1 driver to 1KT 0 ETD Hcr EDE re 2 On the Port Mapping tab assign the communication driver to one of the logical ports 1KT 0 2KT 0 8KT 0 You can assign the driver to any one of the port mappings and it will still operate on COM1 port configured in Device dialog If you map the same driver to more than one logical port 1KT 0 8KT 0 these ports are viewable in the PanelBuilder Download Upload dialog when clicking the Setup button Important If you do not configure the Client Application RSLinx drivers will not be accessible from the Download Upload dialogs in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 2 10 Installation INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility File New Open Copy Font File gt Workstation Setup Exit Alt F ICABSPEWINSGSSSMEV2485 PBA 2 C ABAPBWINSMSOK CBA SCAABYPBWINSGSSSCKY2RIO PBS 4C ABSPEWINSGSSOMEV2RIO PBA PanelBuilder s File Menu Publication 2711 6 0 In Windows 95 or Windows 3 x use the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility to configure communication drivers that your computer requires to transfer applications using Pass Through This utility let
406. n the computer and memory card 4 Click OK The Font dialog opens allowing you to select a style for the font You must select a style that is compatible with the font definition For example if you selected Chinese Simplified e a Chinese font must reside on the computer e the appropriate code page must reside on the system e run the IME program with the appropriate Chinese language selected If your system is running a Chinese version of Windows an IME is not required the correct code page is automatically available Publication 2711 6 0 Note For the following single byte languages select MS LineDraw under Font English French Italian German Spanish Multilingual Support 22 7 wi Fini GE ITI Sapi J fan EF a al i ap het PDE F i 5 3 ater BED EF E E Ue COEF Zi 2 Sane Jatt yp Le Soup vere Select a font style Click OK to generate the font file The time it takes to generate the file depends on the number of characters and sizes in the definition and your computer s speed Generating Glyphs Sample text is defined for each font definition The sample text is displayed for the font definition in the selected style Verify that the text looks okay Lhimhe oe Chinese Chinese HAH If fi ii At this point the font file is resident in memory but not on disk The status bar located at the bottom of the FontTool window
407. name to link with the application or create a new project Project exists Entered a project name that already exists Enter another project name or use existing project Publication 2711 6 0 D 6 Message Range minimum must be less than range maximum Software Error and Warning Messages Meaning Minimum value ente maximum value red is greater than the What to do Enter a minimum value that s less than the maximum value Required network node not found The PanelView term inal is attempting to read or write to a nonexistent location Check the SLC setup and program Saved device data is missing or corrupted and cannot be used to update the tag database A PVA file was uplo device data aded without project Recreate all application device data Saved tag data is missing or corrupted and cannot be used to update the tag database A PVA file was uplo aded without project tags Recreate all application tags Screen number already exists Please select another number Same screen number can t be used for more than one screen Assign a unique number 1 29 999 to screen Seek error file name Internal error detected Cause could be a faulty disk drive or floppy disk Try again Selected global object on screen Global object can only appear once on each screen Global device already appears on the screen A global device can only app
408. nd title page of a report 3 When done click the OK button Or click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving changes Publication 2711 6 0 24 4 Creating Reports Header The header appears on every page of a report except the title page 03 11 94 11 55 00 Getting startea Page 3 lt _ Page Number User Defined Header Text r AI T Application Name User Defined Text Date and Time of printout Title Page The title page is the first page printed in a report PanelBuilder 900 Application Report GS Getting Startea lt Ods Application version 6 Last Saved 03 11 94 11 41 01 lt j _ Version and Save Information 03 11 94 11 55 00 i el User Defined Title Page Text m Project Application Name Date and Time of printout User Defined Text Publication 2711 6 0 Setting up a Printer Creating Reports 24 5 To print a report a printer must be connected to your computer and your computer must recognize the printer as a valid printer See your Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on installing print drivers To set up the printer 1 Click the Printer Setup button from the Report Setup dialog The standard Microsoft Print Setup dialog opens Penton i alsa pa canari Appla iLaum efriar lt MTY Tech an Voi 100i m D bensie piini Diptera Appin Lanman AEM eck on i nachd ini rsistian Paper ene Pajak Sime Leisa a D Landeme gorse
409. ned to rack 3 starting module group 0 One of the Panel View objects a numeric entry display addressed as N7 2 writes to a part of the data block being transferred entry display T Allen Bradley PanelView LA La Lo OOG 223 oo OO 4 a Ce GN Ce Ce G G 4 rs ro Cr Go es re Coe Coe Oye Using information in the Block Transfer dialog the PanelView determines the position of the data and the block size Numeric Entry Cursor Point with Tag Name Motor_Speed Tag Address N7 2 The PanelView terminal places the data in the first word of a 4 word block Word 1 123 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 The value entered on the PanelView is now stored at N7 2 123 aj The PLC reads the 4 word block of data and stores it at the Data File address BTR BLOCK TRANSFER READ EN Rack 03 Group Module Control Block N36 Data File N7 Length Continuous lt Read From PanelView lt Data To PLC ZBanocoW Publication 2711 6 0 4 14 Communications Overview Block Transfer Write Example T
410. new trigger above the current trigger Delete Trigger Permanently remove the current trigger Edit Tag Open the Form View dialog while in the Trigger Tag field to enter or edit a tag definition for the selected tag Move Trigger Up Move the current trigger up one row Move Trigger Down Move the current trigger down one row ee ee Publication 2711 6 0 15 16 Creating Alarms Creating Alarms Most operations are performed by click ing a row number and then choosing a command from this menu This section shows how to create alarms for an application Each alarm has the following attributes alarm text including time date numeric or ASCII variable value or bit to trigger alarm trigger tag predefined on Alarm Triggers tab whether alarm requires acknowledgement whether alarm is printed and or displayed in the Alarm Banner when triggered background foreground colors of alarm text The trigger tag variables in text and other alarm tags if used must be in the same scan group To create or edit alarms 1 Cell or Field Cut Copy Paste Insert and Paste Crest Chee Ctrl Ctrl M Append Alarm Insert Alarm Delete Alarm Embedded Variable Chl Ins Del Use Existing Tert New TestO Publication 2711 6 0 Choose Alarm Setup from the Application menu Or double click the Alarm Message Display in the Alarm Banner Select the Alarms tab Each alarm is entered as a row in a
411. ni aT inssi i SLLLLLLLLLEE K LLLLLLLELI Publication 2711 6 0 Configuring the Printer Port Terminal and Communication Setup 20 13 This section shows how to configure e communication parameters e print parameters for those terminals equipped with an RS 232 serial port The Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog indicates whether the terminal has an RS 232 port If Printing is selected in the Serial Port Usage area the serial port is configured with the settings below The printer port settings are downloaded with the application if the Use downloaded configuration settings option is enabled on the Power Up tab of the Terminal Setup dialog To configure the printer port of the Panel View terminal 1 The selected Panel View terminal must have an RS 232 port 2 Click the Printer Setup button from the Setup tab of the Terminal Setup dialog Bere Pow Dehat Maal Fate a Daia Hele Tap Hate Ponte Conhape aon Lett Hang Paps Wahi Paimion Skip Walkie jo fn E Emi Cha Papa Longi en ioa rt eo e Piisi litiakoanien Misr e LC __ Dad _ Eae a Thelin 3 Specify the communication parameters for the serial printer port Use To Baud Rate Set the baud rate of the printer port The baud rate must match the printer s baud rate The options are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 The default is 9600 Parity Specify Even Odd or No parity The default is None Data Bits Spe
412. not have Windows installed PanelBuilder includes a copy of the PFT Utility Note The PFT utility only works with DH 485 terminals To download to a Remote I O terminal you must use a DF1 driver Before transferring files using the PFT utility disable all serial port drivers including the mouse and INTERCHANGE or RSLinx that are using the same COM port as PFT To use PFT on a computer that does not have PanelBuilder Software installed copy the following files from the C AB PBWIN directory to a floppy disk for transport to a DOS computer PFT EXE PanelView File Transfer DOS Utility DEFAULT STP PanelView File Transfer configuration file PIC485 EXE PanelView File Transfer PIC Module driver KR EXE PanelView File Transfer KR Card driver lt APP gt PVA User PanelView application file Refer to the User Guide Publication 2711 805 for instructions on using the Panel View File Transfer Utility to upload download applications between the Panel View terminal and a personal computer in the DOS environment Publication 2711 6 0 23 8 Validating and Transferring Applications Transfer Utilities a Publication 2711 6 0 PanelBuilder Application Menu Most application transfers are initiated from the Application menu of the PanelBuilder software Choose the Download or Upload command from the Application menu Use the Download command to download an application to a e Panel View terminal e memory card e DOS file
413. nt is to use the left or right arrow keys on the terminal 8961 a Assigned Function Key F1 Scratchpad Shows Active Cursor Point 7 Indicator Bar 543 Ka Assigned Function Key F2 The scratchpad opens in the center of the terminal screen when the operator presses the keypad enable button or activates a cursor point Current Value HHHHHHHHH HHH En j ter Walue HHHHHHHHHHHE to HHA 550 Touch Screen only Terminal Scratchpad entered in scratchpad en S PRE R EEE HE Erter Velm RARE La Sewer na Terminal Scratchpad Keypad and Keypad Touch Screen rs Petes Ped bree on dl ieee laee m e ____ _ 900 1000 1400 Touch Screen Terminal Scratchpad The top of the scratchpad shows the current value entered Below the current value is the range of values the operator can enter The range is set by supplying data entry limits in the Tag Editor The operator enters a value and presses the Enter key Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Data Entry Controls 10 3 Numeric Entry Examples The following examples show how numeric entry objects are used to adjust the temperature and inflow of a tank Cursor Point Example The operator selects one of the cursor point objects in the EDIT box using a function key touch cell or left right arrow keys on the terminal and then presses lt Cursor Point Objects cu PU SF 20 35 26
414. nt to insert text and then type the new text Press ENTER to start a new line except for list objects The characters R are inserted to indicate a new line Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit text for another state or entry Resize the object if necessary to fit all the text When done click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode For multistate or list objects you can edit the text for each state directly from the State tab of the object s dialog State Formatting Objects and Text 17 13 Inserting Time or Date You can insert time or date in an object or within the text of an object The format of the time or date is adjusted from the Terminal Setup dialog The time displays in 12 hour or 24 hour format The date can display in various forms of MM DD YY The time or date format is downloaded with the application to the Panel View terminal When the application is running the terminal displays the actual time or date To insert the time or date in an object or text string 1 Select the object 2 For a multistate object select the state in which you want to insert the time or date e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu The Format bar shows the current text Text i sto 4 Click where you want to insert the time or date or use the arrow
415. nt to use the project already on the computer or the tag information in the PBA file e To use the project on the computer select Replace None from the window below e To copy the tag information from the PBA file to the computer select Replace All A Tagin She Pei Detebose han iho osae ramme m a Teg in ibr epplkcedes bring gece Yeu ray eet ec ee E wee Smet mir Tag oredPiceiers os ered Pojedi Rame PSN Ao Replace Tag in Frajeri Drabaar Horr fh ftir Sith Tag iom dpp aiaa Hama hed ie Dae ie Aridi Finec nse Camel ines Publication 2711 6 0 21 8 Managing Projects Replacing Duplicate Tags and Devices in a Project Whenever you open an application PBA file the dialog below opens to verify a one to one correspondence between the tags in the application and the tags in the project The dialog then reopens to verify the devices in the application with the devices in the project It is possible that the application tags or devices are different than those in the project For example 1 You transfer an application PBA file from a computer to a laptop Tag information is stored in the PBA file When you open the application a project containing all the tags is created on the hard drive 2 You edit the definition of a tag on the laptop and then save the application PBA file The project on the laptop is now different than the original project copied from the computer 3 You transfer the appl
416. nter the file name in which to save the validation messages 6 Click OK to output messages to the file If the file name already exists you are given the option of overwriting it or entering another file name 7 Click Close to exit the Exceptions dialog Publication 2711 6 0 23 6 Validating and Transferring Applications Transfer Options Publication 2711 6 0 You can transfer applications between a computer running PanelBuilder and one of the following e PanelView terminal e Memory card e DOS file PanelView Terminal Direct Connection Downloads applications from the RS 232 connection on your computer or workstation For connection details see Publication 2711 6 1 Use the Internal DF1 Driver to transfer applications directly to a Panel View terminal using the terminal s RS 232 DF1 port To transfer an application directly to a DH 485 or RS 232 DH485 protocol terminal using the 1747 PIC converter you must configure the 1747 PIC driver using RSLinx or INTERCHANGE software DH Local Connection Downloads applications from a computer or workstation on the Allen Bradley Data Highway Plus DH link to a DH Panel View terminal on the link For connection details see Publication 2711 6 1 A DH RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver must be installed on the computer Pass Through Connection Pass Through lets you transfer applications between a computer or workstation on a DH link and a terminal on a Remote I
417. nvalid state s Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Messages Validation Message Tag does not have a valid address in the terminals assigned Discrete Rack or Block Transfers Meaning The tag address is not in the 1 0 rack or the block transfer s configured for the terminal What to do Enter the correct tag address in Tag Editor or reconfigure parameters in the Terminal Setup Communication Setup dialog Tag name Initial Value entry must be integer The initial value for the specified tag was entered with a decimal point 1 5 The initial value must be an integer Enter an integer for the initial value Tag name is not included in the Alarm Trigger s scan group Rem Ack tag or embedded tag in alarm message is notin the alarm trigger s scan group Verify the alarm trigger has a lower address than the remote tag or embedded tags Tag name must be of type Bit A value type tag was selected where a bit tag must be used Select an appropriate tag Tag name must be of type Value A bit tag was selected where a value tag must be used Select an appropriate tag Tag name No Device in Project Database to match Nodename name The Project database does not have a device matching the node name for the specified tag Use Communication Setup to add the device with the specified node name to the project or enter the correct node name for the tag in the Tag Editor
418. o 999 999 995 904 4 BCD 0 to 9999 Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Octal 0 to 177777 Formats provided for data entry The terminal does not display transfer these formats Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Creating Message Displays It contains the following sections Chapter 1 3 Section Page Helpful Hints 13 1 Types of Messages 13 2 Triggering Messages 13 4 Error State 13 5 Creating a Message Display 13 6 Setting Properties of a Message Display 13 6 Configuring Messages 13 8 Creating an Object to Print Messages 13 10 When creating message displays Messages should not cover control objects when displayed Message displays support up to 2 000 messages numbered 0 to 1999 Create message displays with the exact number of messages required by the application Don t create blank messages Message text is formatted and edited like other objects with inner text Message displays include an error state State E to notify the operator when an error occurs while triggering a message If screen space is limited create a Print Only object When messages are triggered they are printed rather than displayed on the screen Publication 2711 6 0 13 2 Creating Message Displays Types of Messages TANK 1 LEVEL HIGH TANK 1 LEVEL LOW Publication 2711 6 0 Message displays present status information or instr
419. o No To configure Remote I O communications 1 Select the Setup tab from the Terminal Setup dialog 2 Verify the terminal name entered in the Terminal Name field The terminal name was defined when the application was created Publication 2711 6 0 20 10 Terminal and Communication Setup 3 Click the Comms Setup button The Communication Setup dialog shows Remote I O parameters for the Panel View terminal and the PLC Scanner Remote I O Communications Dialog aes rerminal Name from Setup tab ime Hame E lt Must match Node Name in Tag Editor Terminal T i Mataki Law j j Hack Settings are automatically BIRI a5 E7 Chanie validated for the selected __s oor h PLC Scanner type gre ita If you get an error message m aj th djaima mon clear the Rack field 4 Under PLC Scanner edit Remote I O parameters for the PLC Use To Type Specify the type of PLC controller that will communicate with the terminal on the Remote I O network See Table 20 A Name Enter a unique name for the PLC Scanner elf you enter a new name address a device is added to the project elf you select the name of an existing PLC Scanner device the Rack address and PLC Scanner Type automatically appear for that device pe To copy rename or delete devices from a project use the Project Management command See page 21 4 5 Under Terminal edit Remote I O parameters for the Panel Vi
420. o a rack or module groups in the rack From the Setup tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to define the rack and module group for the terminal Terminal name is not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup Communication parameters have not been defined for the terminal name defined on the Setup tab in the Terminal Setup dialog From the Setup tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to define communication parameters for the terminal Terminal name is not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup Type Unknown The terminal is not configured properly Open the Project Management dialog and delete the terminal device from the project Then open the Terminal Setup dialog and reconfigure the terminal Terminal name is not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup No Runtime Comm Port The terminal is not configured properly Open the Project Management dialog and delete the terminal device from the project Then open the Terminal Setup dialog and reconfigure the terminal Terminal name is not configured in Terminal Setup Comms Setup Runtine Comm Port Not in Project database The terminal is not configured properly Open the Project Management dialog and delete the terminal device from the project Then open the Terminal Setup dialog and reconfigure the terminal Publication 2711 6 0 Val
421. o use this COM port from Windows applications Because the port is locked by another Windows application this message appears in the dialog showing the download upload status Error Selected communication port not configured in use by another Windows application or port hardware does not exist Publication 2711 6 0 23 10 Validating and Transferring Applications Downloading Directly to a Terminal This section shows how to download an application directly to a Panel View terminal over a serial link Before starting the download e check cable connections see Publication 2711 6 1 e use the Internal DF1 driver to download applications to terminals with an RS 232 DF1 port use the 1747 PIC INTERCHANGE or RSLinx driver to download applications to DH 485 terminals or RS 232 DH 485 protocol terminals To download an application using the Internal DF1 Driver Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu Select Download parameters SC ey Select Operator Terminal Lo lt Click 0K to start ma download Fi peed atc Tami rea Pea oT ecg GOS Fide DDE ewe Cari Setup button is active if more than one COM portis available Select Internal DF 1 Driver Fates beea OFT DIEZ Shows COM porton which DF1 driver is active in Heme Enter name of PVA file in whichto s gt t31 mas save the translated P BA file or click Browse to s
422. oad from the Application menu Select the Upload parameters Select Local Network Operator Terminal tT Select RS Linx or Diria Lieven INTERCHANGE Driver gt ea DH is active driver chon event DHe Click OK to start upload Click Setup to verify station address of the terminal The address shown must match the address in the Communication Enter name of PVA file in which to Bio ares i Setup dialog save the uploaded application or TEET Pua Bowe click Browse to search for a file Verena cisco DH All P22 Select DH RS232 Under Presets select e Original to upload presets initial values defined for inputs e Current States to upload current input values in terminal Pane Builder software and terminal display status of upload ee daam ibik afimbres Fie i pa ah un Eae ae Cj FILE TRANSFER STATUS 50x Percent Complete In Progress When the upload is complete the application opens in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 23 22 Validating and Transferring Applications Uploading from a Terminal This section shows how to upload an application from a Panel View Using Pass Th rough terminal on a Remote I O or DH 485 link to your computer on the DH link Before uploading an application e check cable connections e enable Pass Through in Block Transfer dialog page 20 11 e configure DH driver using RSLinx or INTERCHANGE To upload an
423. obal attribute Resizing a global object When the global object on Screen 1 is resized it is also resized on Screen 2 Screen 1 Screen 2 as Moving a global object When the global object on Screen 1 is moved the object on Screen 2 retains its original position Screen 1 Screen 2 oN Resizing and moving a global object When the global object on Screen 1 resized and moved the object on Screen 2 retains its original location as defined by the upper left corner but is resized Screen 1 Screen 2 Chapter Objectives Overview of Alarms Chapter 1 5 Creating Alarms This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Overview of Alarm System 15 1 Creating the Alarm Banner 15 6 Creating an Alarm List 15 9 Configuring Global Alarm Parameters 15 12 Defining Alarm Triggers 15 14 Creating Alarms 15 16 Defining Optional Tags for Triggers 15 22 Defining Remote Tags used by Controller 15 26 Alarm Examples 15 28 The alarm system in PanelView notifies an operator when specific trigger values appear at specific controller addresses Before the terminal can display alarms you must e define the alarms in your application e program the logic controller to generate the alarms ATTENTION Do not rely on your terminal as a primary warning devi
424. obal to all screens Publication 2711 6 0 A 2 Command Summary Edit Screen Menu Cut Screen Ctrl x Copy Screen Ctrl C Paste Screen Ctrl V Delete Screen Del Choose To Remove selected screens from the application and place Cut Screen them on the clipboard Anything you cut remains on the clipboard until you change it or exit Windows Copy selected screens to the clipboard leaving the Copy Screen originals intact Use this command to copy screens from one application to another or within the same application Paste Screen Place screens that are on the clipboard into the application Delete Screen Remove selected screens from the application without placing them on the clipboard Edit Objects Menu Undo Ctrl Z Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrle Delete Del Select All Bring To Front Send To Back Bring Dynamic Objects To Front Group Ungroup Regroup Use Existing Text Object Attributes Set Object Color Defaults Publication 2711 6 0 Choose To Reverse the most recent edit operation cut copy paste Undo delete select all bring to front send to back group ungroup regroup Remove selected objects from the screen and place them Cut on the clipboard Anything cut remains on the clipboard until you change it or exit Windows Copy selected objects to the clipboard leaving the originals Co intact Use to copy objects from one scre
425. object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Inner Graphic tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Graphic from the Format menu 4 To change the foreground color e Click a color on the top row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format gt Foreground Color menu 5 To change the background color e Click a color on the bottom row of the color palette e Or choose a color from the Format gt Background Color menu The background color changes to the selected color 6 Click the Inner Graphic tool to exit Inner Graphic mode If you want the background of the graphic to blend in with the background of the object set the background colors for the object and graphic to the same color For multistate objects you can select foreground background colors for a graphic from the State tab of the object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 22 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 Reversing Foreground Background Colors You can reverse the foreground background of an inner graphic Foreground and Background of Graphic are Reversed 4 J You can reverse the foreground background colors of monochrome bitmaps not color bitmaps To reverse the foreground and background of a graphic 1 Select the object 2 Click the Inner Graphic tool on the tool bar 3 4
426. ock hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse until all rows in the block are highlighted 2 Click the Renumber button All text strings in the block are renumbered starting with the number of the first text string For example a block of text numbered 80 84 85 88 89 would be renumbered 80 81 82 83 84 You can rearrange the order of text by moving a text string up down a row or to a specific location To move a text item up or down one row 1 Select the row number of the text you want to move 2 Choose Move Text Item Up or Move Text Item Down from the popup menu The text is moved up or down one row Publication 2711 6 0 18 10 Using the Text Editor To move a text string to a specific location 1 Select the row number of the text string you want to move 2 Choose Move Text Item To from the popup menu A dialog opens prompting you to enter the row number where you want to move the text The dialog shows the range of row numbers before and after the selected text 3 In the Row Number box type a number The selected text is moved to the specified location and the rest of the rows are renumbered Copying Text into Objects Text stored in the Text Editor can be copied to objects e print only message objects e alarm messages You can reuse the same text multiple times in an application Only one copy of the text is stored regardless of the number of links to it You can access the Text Edi
427. ode choose the Inner Text command or tool Underlining remains active until you turn it off For multistate and list objects you can underline text for a specific state from the State tab of the object s dialog Publication 2711 6 0 17 28 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State SAC Using the Blink Option You can toggle blinking on or off for screen text inner text or the inner graphic of an object Blinking applies to an entire text string not individual letters or words in the string The blink option isn t available for list objects The blink rate is approximately 5 seconds and is activated when the application is running in the PanelView terminal Blinking isn t activated for text during application design Only the text blinks not the object To activate blinking for the object select the object and then choose Blink from the Format menu or click the Blink tool To toggle blinking for text 1 Select the object with text you want to blink 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu 3 If the object is multistate select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 4 Click the Blink tool on the Format bar Or choose Blink from the Format menu The entire text string blinks 5 To resize align underline or set colors for the text click the appropriate
428. og No 1747 NP1 power supply The PanelView does not supply power to the PIC module Incorrect cabling Check the cable Publication 2711 6 0 Problem When downloading to an Operator Terminal you get this error Transfer Aborted unable to send commands to terminal Cause In the INTERCHANGE Device Config utility the incorrect Interrupt IRQ is set for the COM Port Troubleshooting F 5 Recommended Action Set the correct Interrupt for the COM port COM Port 1 typically uses Interrupt IRQ of 4 COM Port 2 typically uses Interrupt IRQ of 3 In the INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility the baud rate or another driver parameter is set incorrectly Set the correct baud rate or other driver parameter To check the PanelView terminal s communication parameters select Communication Setup from the terminal s Configuration Mode menu Incorrect cabling Check the cable When downloading to an Operator Terminal you get this error Command Failed PCCCSTS02 Remote station did not acknowledge command In the INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility parameters for the DF1 on COM Port driver are incorrectly set Parameters for the DF1 on COM Port drivers must be set to Error Detect CRC Parity None Baud Rate 19200 INTERCHANGE Command Failure PCCCEXT17 Timed out 1771 backplane module not responding During a Remote 1 0 transfer PanelBuilder was unable to get a
429. oggles between Insert and Overwrite modes The overstrike mode appears in reverse video In Insert mode the character selected is inserted before the cursor in the Display Area If the maximum number of characters has been entered in the Display Area new characters are ignored In Overwrite mode the selected character replaces the character at the cursor in the Display Area lt lt Moves the cursor one character to the left in the Display Area gt gt Moves the cursor one character to the right in the Display Area ESC Closes the scratchpad without making any changes CLR Clears the string in the Display Area Deletes the character to the left of the cursor in the Display Area Publication 2711 6 0 Sends the character string to the assigned write tag address in the remote device After pressing to open the ASCII scratchpad the character string is highlighted If the operator selects a character immediately the terminal clears the Display Area and displays the selected character If the operator presses a control key the terminal continues to display the existing string allowing the operator to edit it Creating Data Entry Controls 10 15 ASCII Scratchpad 900 1000 1400Touch Screen Terminals Display Area Character Keyboard Controls The operator selects characters by touching the Character Keyboard on the screen The character is entered in t
430. om Out Tool B 2 Toolbox Background Text Tool B 4 Backspace Key B 6 Bar Graph Tool B 5 Connect Lines Tool B 4 Control List Tool B 5 Controls Displays and Graphics 5 7 7 2 Ellipse Tool B 4 Enter Key B 6 Freeform Tool B 4 Global Object Tool B 5 Go To Screen Button Tool B 5 Graphic Image Tool B 4 Graphics 7 2 Home Key B 6 Illustrated B 4 Import Export Graphics Tool B 4 ISA Symbols 5 7 7 2 16 7 ISA symbols B 7 Latched Push Button Tool B 5 Line Tool B 4 List Indicator Tool B 5 Maintained Push Button Tool B 5 Message Display Tool B 5 Toolbox Momentary Push Button Tool B 5 Move Down Key B 6 Move Up Key B 6 Multistate Indicator Tool B 5 Multistate Push Button Tool B 5 Numeric Data Display Tool B 5 Numeric Input Cursor Tool B 5 Page Down Key B 6 Page Up Key B 6 Rectangle Tool B 4 Return Screen Button Tool B 5 Scale Tool B 4 Screen List Selector Tool B 5 Selection Arrow B 4 Turning On or Off 5 7 Touch Grid 7 5 Transfer Error Messages F 1 Transfer Utilities Application File Transfer Utility 23 8 Application Menu 23 8 PanelView File Transfer Utility 23 8 Troubleshooting Download Errors F 2 Downloading to a DOS File Errors F 3 Downloading with INTERCHANGE F 4 Downloading with PanelView File Transfer Utility F 3 Downloading with WINPFT Utility F 3 Error Messages D 1 INTERCHANGE Communications Software F 6 Messages Specific to CFG_485 EXE F 9 Messages Spec
431. om row To select a color just click on a cell A box around the cell indicates the selected color The view box on the left of the palette updates as you change the foreground and background colors Foreground colors are used for e all text text background text list text e lines e borders of shapes rectangle circle ellipse borders of control objects e list cursor e fill pattern Dialog Boxes Tab Drop down List Box PanelBuilder Basics 5 9 Background colors are used for e area containing text string e solid fill area of objects buttons and lists You can also set foreground background colors for monochrome bitmaps The default screen background is black but can be changed using the Attributes command on the Screen menu PanelBuilder uses dialog boxes to request information it needs to carry outa command After supplying the requested information click a command button to carry out the command Some dialog boxes provide sets of options each on a separate tab You click on a tab to work with a specific set of options Dialog boxes also display additional information and warnings or explain why a requested task could not be accomplished An ellipses after a menu command means a dialog box will open when you choose that command Below is a sample dialog tia Shae Eek Pommiip dreed Tees tote Comite feta TT Check Box Option Buttons Command
432. on menu Operator Terminal does not appear as a Destination option in the Application Download dialog The C WINDOWS SYSTEM INI file contains a driver conflict Check the C WINDOWS SYSTEM INI file Here is a correct example of the file Boot comm drv comm drv snot COM DRV or DH485 DRV orlICOMCOMM DRV mouse drv mouse drv 386E nh DEVICE V485 386 or DEVICE VDF 1 386 COM1V485 or COM2V485 or COM1VDF1 or COM2VDF1 DEVICE C ICOM WINLINX VDDELINX 386 DEVICE VCD commented out should not be commented out ABICRUN BAT was not run before starting WINDOWS Verify that the AUTOEXEC BAT file contains CALL ABICRUN BAT and not REM CALL ABICRUN BAT Exit Windows and run ABICRUN BAT When downloading to an Operator Terminal you get this error Destination device node is not active In the INTERCHANGE Device Config utility the station address of the PIC on COM driver is set to the same address as the PanelView terminal Using the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility set the Station Address to 0 for the PIC on COM Port driver In the INTERCHANGE Device Config utility the incorrect Interrupt IRQ is set for the COM Port Set the correct Interrupt for the COM port COM Port 1 requires an Interrupt IRQ of 4 COM Port 2 requires an Interrupt IRQ of 3 The Catalog No 1747 PIC module is not receiving power The 1747 PIC module requires 24V DC supplied by the SLC processor or Catal
433. on Page What You Will Learn 22 1 System Requirements 22 2 Terminology 22 2 What is FontTool 22 3 Input Method Editor 22 4 Using FontTool 22 5 Creating Font Files 22 6 Viewing Sample Text 22 8 Opening Font Files 22 8 Saving Font Files 22 9 Previewing and Printing Font Files 22 10 Creating an Application Using a Font File 22 11 Select Terminal Supporting External Fonts 22 11 Enable External Fonts 22 12 Create Application 22 13 Copy Font File to Memory Card 22 14 Download and Run Application 22 14 Troubleshooting 22 15 Translating Application Text in Excel 22 16 Using Windows Standard Fonts to Enter 22 18 Western European Characters The chapter describes the procedures required to create an application in a specific language You will learn how to e Create a font file containing the character set for a specific language Copy the font file toa memory card This card will be inserted into the card slot of the Panel View terminal and remain in the slot while the application is running e Create the application using the character set in the font file e Download the application to the Panel View terminal e Insert the memory card containing the font file into the card slot of the PanelView terminal and secure the card using the Memory Card Retainer Catalog No 2711 NMCC NMCD e Run the application on the Panel View terminal Publication 2711 6 0 22 2 Multilingual Support System Requirements Terminology Publ
434. on and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit screen list selector mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 11 6 Creating Screen Selectors Setting Properties of a Screen List Selector Publication 2711 6 0 To set properties of a Screen List Selector 1 Double click the screen list selector object Screen List Selector Properties States Options gt Touch Gell I Wrap Around 2 Under Input specify whether the operator presses a function key or a touch cell to activate the screen list e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list e For touch screen terminals touch cell is enabled Panel View 550 600 Touch Screen amp Keypad terminals support function key and touch cell input When exiting the dialog the selected function key displays a graphic of a screen list selector and an asterisk next to the key number i Screen List ASIENIEN Select the Wrap Around check box to enable or disable wrap around for the selection cursor The default is disabled Wrap around moves the selection cursor to the top or bottom of the list when the down or up La arrow keys are pressed on the last or first screen in the list Configuring Entries in a Screen List Selector The Screen field links an application screen to the entry in the list The Text field defines the text to appear for each entry in the list Creat
435. on before transferring files Use the internal DF1 driver to transfer applications over a serial link to a terminal with an RS 232 DF1 port If downloading applications directly to a DH 485 terminal using the 1747 PIC converter configure the appropriate RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver If downloading applications locally over a DH link or using Pass Through you must configure the appropriate RSLinx or INTERCHANGE driver on your computer Applications are automatically validated checked for errors during the download process You can also validate applications and correct any errors before a download You can t download a keypad application to a touch screen terminal or a touch screen application to a keypad terminal troubleshooting tips Unused text strings and tags are not downloaded with application If problems occur during a transfer refer to Appendix F for Publication 2711 6 0 23 2 Validating Applications EEE Test Editor Tag Editor Project Management Preferences Description Walidate Changes Validate All Download Upload Terminal Setup Alam Setup Print Only Object Setup Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications PanelBuilder validates and checks applications for errors when downloading You can also check the accuracy of an application before downloading using one of these commands e Validate Changes
436. on dialog e Controller devices are added to a project using the Comms Setup button on the Terminal Setup dialog Terminal Setup Alarm Setup Print Only Object Setup To manipulate devices 1 Choose Project Management from the Application menu The Project Management dialog opens 2 Select the Devices tab The Devices tab shows devices currently defined in a project 3 Perform an operation as defined in the table on the next page 4 Click Done Publication 2711 6 0 Device Operations View or edit devices for a project Managing Projects 21 5 Do this From the Current Project box select a project name The Existing Devices list shows all devices PanelView terminals and controllers defined for the selected project Rename a device 1 From the Existing Devices list select the device you want to rename 2 Click the Rename button 3 In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the device The name cannot start with a number or contain spaces 4 Click the OK button The device appears in the Existing Devices list under the new name not the old Copy of a device 1 From the Existing Devices list select the device you want to copy 2 Click the Copy button 3 In the dialog that opens enter a new 1 to 32 character name for the copied device The name cannot start with a number or contain spaces 4 Click the OK button Two versi
437. on error and your computer locks up The C WINDOWS SYSTEM directory contains the files VDF 1 386 and V485 386 Reboot the computer in Safe Mode and delete the VDF 1 386 and V485 386 files To enter Safe Mode press the F5 key when the boot message Starting Windows 95 appears Publication 2711 6 0 F 2 Troubleshooting Problem Unable to load CMSERV DLL or one of its components Starting PanelBuilder Cause PanelBuilder cannot load CMSERV DLL or one of its components because SHARE E XE iS not running Recommended Action Add SHARE EXE to your AUTOEXEC BAT file or execute SHARE manually See the README TXT file in C AB for more details PanelBuilder finds the wrong PXENGWIN DLL file when searching the DOS PATH variable before finding the correct file in C AB BIN Enter C AB BIN as the first item in the PATH statement Related files left in the C AB PROJ ECTS directory Do the following 1 Exit the PanelBuilder software 2 Delete these files from the C AB PROJ ECTS directory PARADOX LCK PDOXUSRS LCK These files are created when PanelBuilder is started and should be deleted when the software is exited The Paradox Engine section in the file C WINDOWS WIN INI is incorrect Check that C WINDOWS WIN INI contains these lines Paradox Engine UserName SP Core NetNameP ath C AB PROJ ECTS NetName 2 ShareLocal YES PX35Locking NO axTables 64 RecBufs 128 axLocks 32
438. on from Touch Screen to Keypad If converting an application from a Touch or Keypad amp Touch to a Keypad you must assign function key input to screen objects Converting Application to another Terminal Type If converting an application to a different terminal type for example 900 to 600 you may need to reduce the number of objects on the screen adjust the location size of objects or change the grid spacing Converting Application to another Communication Protocol If converting an application to a different communication protocol for example Remote I O to DH 485 you must update the terminal setup and tags appropriately e update the communication parameters for the PanelView terminal and controller in the Communication Setup dialog e update the tags address and node name in the Tag Editor Converting Application from Monochrome to Color or Grayscale If converting a monochrome application to a color or grayscale application the following dialog open Select the colors to use when converting the application e background color of screen default is black e foreground color of objects default is white e background color of objects default is black If the background foreground colors of objects were reversed the above colors would be the opposite Converting Application from Color to Grayscale If converting a color application to a grayscale application e screen background is converted to black e colors
439. on how to select contiguous or noncontiguous rows 3 Select the Print The Cover Page box to print the cover page The cover page includes product Allen Bradley Tag Editor project and view name date and time 4 Click OK Print Details e The column width of the printed output is based on the width of the column in the Tag Editor The Tag Editor prints as many columns that fit on the width of the page minus the margins columns that do not fit are printed on the next page The Tag Editor does not print a column if it is less than one character wide If the entire height of a row does not fit on the page then the row is printed on the next page each row is only one text line high Working with Tags 19 13 Setting Up the Printer To set up the printer 1 Click the Printer Setup button from the Print dialog The standard Microsoft Print Setup dialog opens Dialog entries are based on your system configuration and installation options Sone Ss C Delai printi ESA jemeni Techa an AA MONTECH APTI em Speciic printer Drini Uman FP iE Papiri P Dee E 1 E Ti A C parimas Bussa Loen Tia 2 Select printer and determine settings Important Check your Microsoft Windows user manual to make sure settings are correct for your printer 3 Click the Options button to open a dialog and select options specific to the selected printer 4 Click OK to the Print dialog Setting Up the Page
440. onds The display maintenance schedule is downloaded with the application if the Use downloaded configuration settings option is enabled on the Power Up tab of the Terminal Setup dialog To set a daily schedule for display maintenance 1 Click the Maintenance button from the Advanced tab of the Terminal Setup dialog This button is only available for PV900 monochrome and PV 1400 color terminals Display Maintenance Setup x 2 Select the Enable Display Maintenance check box to enable disable display maintenance The default is enabled 3 From the Hour list box select the hour 0 23 at which to start the display maintenance The hour is defined in 24 hour military time The default is 0 or 12 00 am 4 From the Minute list box select the minute 0 59 of the hour at which to start the display maintenance 5 Click OK to exit and return to the Advanced tab Publication 2711 6 0 20 24 Terminal and Communication Setup Defining PLC SLC The PLC SLC uses control tags to display specific screens and to Control Tags control the time date on the Panel View terminal The time and date are updated every minute The screen that the controller selects will override the current PanelView screen and take the operator to the current screen for that state of the operation To create or edit control tags 1 Select the Control Tags tab in the Terminal Setup dialog fap Pomii damed Tem Dee Conte Tage diene
441. ons dialog opens d You must correct errors before download can proceed Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of download kea TEST PVA madama fuori ey CE baoen Fide Taian ve ae oes Em E E cases E Sd a ew aa bame ETI IN brims mentored ET Terminal resets verifies and starts application For DH 485 or RS 232 DH485 protocol terminals click Setup to verify node address of terminal FILE TRANSFER STATUS 56 S maz Percent Complete In Progress Publication 2711 6 0 23 12 Downloading ona Local DH Link Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu Validating and Transferring Applications This section shows how to download an application from a computer on the DH link to a DH terminal on the link The computer and terminal are each a separate station on the DH link Before downloading application e check cable connections See Publication 2711 6 1 e configure the DH driver using RSLinx or INTERCHANGE Note The computer runs at 57 6K baud forcing the DH link and terminal to use the same rate Set the terminal s DH network to this baud rate before downloading an application To download an application on a local DH link i Destination OK Select Local Network Operator Terminal gt MEREM Semen mra DOS File Cancel lt
442. ons of the device now exist one under the original name and one under the new name Delete a device 1 From the list of Existing Devices select the device you want to delete 2 Click the Delete button You are asked to confirm the deletion 3 Click Yes If more than one device is to be deleted click Yes for each device or Yes to All The device is permanently removed from the project All occurrences of that device name are removed from the application Publication 2711 6 0 21 6 Managing Projects Copying a Project to Another Computer Publication 2711 6 0 Because applications can share the same project projects are portable They can be copied from one computer to another You may have an application on another computer that uses all or some of the tags in an existing project Each project and its files are stored as a separate folder in C AB PROJECTS For example the project files for a project named PV90OPRJ are stored as follows C ab projects PV900PRI appdata db appdata mb appdata px element db element mb element px To copy a project from one computer to another Copy the project folder and all of its files to a disk Insert the disk in the drive on the target computer Copy the project files on disk to the C AB Projects 1 2 3 4 Start PanelBuilder 5 Choose Project Management from the Application menu 6 From the Current Project list select the name of the project ju
443. onsecutive bits that are treated as a single value cascade A way of arranging opens windows application file and screens in the workspace so that they overlap each other with the title bar of each visible choose To use a mouse or keyboard to pick an item that begins an action in PanelBuilder You choose commands on the menus or tools to perform tasks click To press and release the mouse button quickly color palette A fixed set of the 16 standard EGA colors which are used to apply color to the foreground and background of objects text and graphics command A menu item that you choose to carry out an action You choose a command from a menu or click a tool on one of the tool bars command button A button that carries out an action in a dialog box A command button has a label that describes the action to carry out Close Cancel Choosing a command button followed by ellipsis Options opens another dialog control panel 1 A panel which may contain instruments or user operated switches 2 In the Panel View terminal objects that allow an operator to access and control plant operations through manipulation of the controller data table controller programmable Refer to programmable controller copy To put a copy of the selected object or screen onto the Clipboard so that you can transfer it to another location cut To move the selected object or screen onto the Clipboard DF1
444. ontents of Manual P 2 Control List Attributes 9 6 Configuring States 7 15 Creating 9 5 Data Types 9 7 Description 1 6 Dialog 9 6 Helpful Hints 9 1 Illustrating 9 4 Inactive State 9 3 Initial State 9 6 List Keys 9 12 Piloted Control List 9 2 Piloted Control Tag 9 8 Search Tag 9 8 Setting Number of Entries 9 10 Standard Control List 9 2 Using Enter Key to Confirm Selection 9 9 Using Multiple Lists 9 5 Using Wrap Around 9 9 Write Tag 9 7 Control Tags PLC SLC Screen Changes 20 24 20 28 PLC SLC Time or Date Changes 20 24 20 28 Control Menu Box 5 2 Controllers Data File Access 3 7 Conventions P 3 Copying Color to Monochrome 7 21 Monochrome to Color 7 21 Screens 6 15 6 16 Tags 19 8 to a different protocol 7 22 Touch Screen to Keypad 7 22 Cursor Point ASCII Data Entry 1 6 10 12 Numeric Data Entry 1 6 10 2 Cutting and Pasting Screens 6 17 D Data Formats PanelView Tag 3 9 Data Scaling Data Entry Variables 10 4 Data Types 3 8 Date Inserting in Object 17 13 Inserting in Text String 17 13 18 5 Decimal Point Numeric Data Displays 12 11 Deleting Objects 7 22 Objects from Function Keys 7 22 Screens 6 15 Description Entering for Application 6 9 Entering for Object 7 18 Deselecting Objects 7 8 Devices Replacing 21 8 Index 3 DF1 Communications 4 4 20 7 Baud Rate 4 4 20 8 Controller Node Address 4 4 20 8 Controller Node Name 4 4
445. ontroller directly on the Panel View terminal The variable is updated whenever the string changes The ASCII variable can display any character in the extended character set The characters displayed are controlled exactly as specified in the data string Characters are processed sequentially until a null character all bits 0 is received Any characters after a null character are ignored The ASCII string is stored in the data table as a series of consecutive characters The format of the string must be as shown below Bit 15 8 7 0 1st word 1st character 2nd character 2nd word 3rd character 4th character To insert an ASCII variable in an object or text string 1 Select the object 2 For a multistate object select the state in which you want to insert the ASCII variable e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar or choose Inner Text from the Format menu The format bar shows the current text Text i ST O 4 Click where you want to insert the ASCII variable or use the arrow keys to position the insertion point If you want to display the variable without text delete the text first by dragging the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE Formatting Objects and Text 17 17 5 Click the Embedded Variable tool on the Format bar and choose a ASCII from t
446. opup menu To open the menu hold down the right mouse button or type CTRL M Select To Cut Cut the selected state to the clipboard Copy Copy the selected state to the clipboard Paste Paste the previously cut or copied row from the clipboard nsert and Paste Paste the copied or cut state above the current row Append State Add a new state after the last state The new state is created with the defaults from state 0 nsert State Insert a state above the current row Delete State Permanently remove the selected state ove State Up Moves the selected state up one row ove State Down Move the selected state down one row Embedded Variable Open a submenu for inserting a time date numeric or ASCII variable in the Text field A placeholder is inserted in the text for the variable PTY Time placeholder D Date placeholder PA12 ASCII placeholder PV 12 NOFILL FIX 0 Numeric placeholder The time and date are formatted according to settings in the Terminal Setup dialog A dialog opens when Variable or ASCII is selected allowing you to format the variable The placeholder is updated with the specified format V 6 NOFILL FIX 0 or A8 To edit a numeric or ASCII variable select the placeholder and choose Edit Variable from the Embedded Variable menu Use Existing Text Open the Use Existing Text dialog in read only mode allowing you to use a message that alread
447. orkspace and don t overlap Close All Close all active screens but does not close the application file 1 Sample Activate an open screen The bottom of the Window menu 2 1 Main Menu displays a list of open screens A check mark v appears 32 Feed Pump next to the active screen Publication 2711 6 0 A 6 Command Summary Help Menu Index Command Reference Reference About PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 Choose To Index Display a list of all available Help topics Command Display a description of each menu command and tool in Reference PanelBuilder Reference Display a list of help topics that are available for P anelB uilder About PanelBuilder Display copyright release information about Pane Builder Appendix B Tool and Bitmap Summary This appendix contains a brief description of all PanelBuilder tools that are grouped on the tool bar format bar and toolboxes It also provides a list of all BMP files that PanelBuilder provides in the C AB PBWIN PBLIB directory Tool Bar File Tools New File Creates a new application file Opens a dialog that lets you open an existing Oper rile application file BuG Save File Saves changes to the application file Screen Tools New Screen Creates a new application screen Open Screen Opens an existing application screen Edit Tools Cut Cuts the selection and places it on the Clipboard Copy Copies the
448. ose Upload from the Application menu Select the Upload parameters O e Click OK to start Ema upload ss e Setup button is active if more than one COM portis Danma amana ia Pa E Select Operator Terminal gt Select Internal DF 1 Driver Jinterssi it a ee hin dimt FIFE COMA Enter name of PVA file in which to save the uploaded application or click Browse to search for a file Select type of terminal from which ope lt Under Presets select you are uploading application a e Original to upload presets initial values defined for inputs e Current States to upload current input values in terminal PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of upload O HOE tes a ae Dan oe mn fA kas ey rae Bre Eilt A mai e emeei FILE TRANSFER STATUS 50x Percent Complete In Progress When the upload is complete the application opens in PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 23 20 Validating and Transferring Applications To upload an application using a DH485 Driver Choose Upload from the Application menu i a ca Source let ry Select Operator Terminal gt MEENE ee tostat Cancel Setup Select RS Linx or Communication Drivers INTERCHANGE Driver Minsc s s lt st t i lt zr Active drivers DH485 Shows DH485 _ as active driver File Name Enter name of PVA file in which to
449. ote I O Communications Terminal and Communication Setup 20 9 This section shows how to define runtime parameters for a Panel View terminal and PLC or SLC that will communicate on a Remote I O link The Panel View terminal operates as a single rack on the network You will define parameters for these two devices Remote I O PanelView Terminal PLC or SLC with 1747 SN Scanner Controller SLC Controller PLC Con roller with 1747 SN Scanner F i or j Remote I O Network The following table defines the PLC Scanner types with options supported by the Remote I O Panel View terminal Controller Scanner Block Transfer Support IBM PC 6008 S VME 6008 SV 0 7 No Yes DEC QBUS 6008 SQ PLC 5 11 3 3 All Series All Revisions Yes PLC 5 15 1 3 Series B Revision N or later Yes PLC 5 20 1 3 All Series All Revisions Yes PLC 5 25 1 7 Series A Revision or later Yes PLC 5 30 1 7 Series A Revision B or later Yes PLC 5 40 1 17octal Series A Revision E or later Yes Series B Revision B or later PLC 5 60 1 7 Series A Revision E or later Yes PLC 5 80 octal Series B Revision B or later SLC 1747 SN Series A 0 3 No No SLC 1747 SN Series B 0 3 Yes Yes Other 1771 SN Subsystem 1 7 N
450. ownload the upgrade by selecting Rockwell Automation Technical Support and then file download Chapter Objectives What is PanelBuilder What is an Application What is a Project Chapter 1 Overview of PanelBuilder This chapter contains the following sections Section Page What is PanelBuilder 1 1 What is an Application 1 1 What is a Project 1 1 PanelBuilder Features 1 2 Typical Application Screens 1 5 Screen Objects 1 6 PanelBuilder is a Microsoft Windows based package that lets you design control panel applications for Panel View terminals To simplify application design the software uses menus dialog boxes and tools which are standard in Windows A PanelBuilder application is a logical arrangement of screens containing objects such as push buttons indicators control lists bar graphs and alarms When the application is downloaded to a terminal the operator interacts with these objects by pressing function keys or touching the terminal screen Applications are transferred between your computer and a Panel View terminal using a serial connection memory card or Pass Through PanelBuilder applications communicate with logic controllers on a variety of networks including DH 485 DH DF1 Remote I O DeviceNet and ControlNet The ports on the Panel View terminal determine the communication protocol used Each PanelBuilder application PBA file is associated with a project The project id
451. perator when data is out of range or when multiple states are triggered The error state State E is accessed from the States tab of the dialog or from the State box on the tool bar The inner text for State E is Error You can assign different inner text or display attributes to the error state State 0 State 1 State 2 22 State E Error lt Default Inner Text for Error E State Bar Graphs A bar graph is either empty or filled if a value is not within the allowable range of values Ss Ss 100 a w So nN a o Value Equals or Exceeds Value Below Maximum Range Minimum Range List Indicators No list entry is highlighted if the data is outside of the allowable range or if multiple states are triggered OFF TEMPERATURE LOW ee Error No state highlighted NORMAL TEMPERATURE HIGH Numeric Data Displays If a value exceeds the specified field width for the numeric data display the overflow value is replaced with asterisks Publication 2711 6 0 12 4 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Bar Graphs Bar graphs monitor changing conditions such as temperature or fluid levels You can create various types of bar graphs Types of Bar Graphs Create bar graphs as individual displays or in a cluster You can orient bar graphs either vertically or horizontally A variety of fill patterns and options allow for a variety of appearances Olbs 7
452. pexdes epeudeeuanrteas dents 23 9 Downloading Directly toa Terminal ccc cece ees 23 10 Downloading onaLocalDH Link ccc eee eee ees 23 12 Downloading to a Terminal Using Pass Through 23 13 Remote I O Pass Through Setup 002ee eee 23 14 DH 485 Pass Through Setup ceeeee eee 23 15 Downloading to a DOS Memory Card 0 00 eee 23 16 Downloading to a DOS File cece eee eee ees 23 18 Uploading Directly froma Terminal cece eee ee ees 23 19 Uploading ona LocalDH Link ccc cece eee ees 23 21 Uploading from a Terminal Using Pass Through 23 22 Using the Application File Transfer Utility 0 eevee 23 23 Verifying an Application ccc cece eee eee teens 23 24 Downloading to a PanelView Terminal ccc eevee 23 25 Uploading from a PanelView Terminal 0c eee uae 23 27 Decreasing Size of Application for Downloads 000 23 28 Exceeding RAM Memory in Terminal 000 ce eee e ees 23 28 Chapter 24 Chapter Objectives 0 0 cece eee eee eee ees 24 1 TYDES CRONOUS out tev eet tee iunt othe es 24 1 Connecting GP MME cpidvvdueceasdh a seaddawies dead aay ae 24 1 Creating and Printing a Report sasccccicaeevdcatvivacavuras 24 2 Changing the Report Setup 2c2 aivases eves aus aees caus 24 3 Seting up a PNM eesti oacee a ai nare tiesiai cae ewe aaa 24 5 Sending the ReporttoaFile cece eee eee ee ees 24
453. phic created with another program Appendix B defines the ISA symbols For details on how to import bitmap graphics see Chapter 16 Publication 2711 6 0 17 19 17 20 Formatting Objects and Text Working with Inner Graphics Next State Previous State Inner Text Text Size Align Text Underline word Wrap Embedded W ariable Foreground Color Background Color Toggle ForeBackground Blink Fill Pattern Shape Line Type Publication 2711 6 0 State ya Adding Inner Graphic To insert an imported bitmap or ISA symbol in an object 1 Select the object 2 For a multistate object select the state to insert the graphic e From the tool bar select a state from the State box Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 To display a graphic without text get into inner text mode and delete the text then exit inner text mode 4 Click the Inner Graphic tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Graphic from the Format menu Graphics List of available graphics El 5 Select a graphic or ISA symbol from the Graphics list box The graphic is inserted in the object ISA symbols are also available from the ISA Symbols toolbox Click a symbol while in inner graphic mode to insert in object O Y Bitmap graphic a ISA Symbol gear Button Border Toggle through views of graphics while the Graphics list box is highlighted using the UP and DOWN arrow
454. portant The Import function does not check for duplicate addresses only duplicate names Tag Name Conflict Q There are tags in the import file with names that are already in the project database Do you want to To Ignore conflicting tags The tags in the project remain and the conflicting tags in the input source file are discarded Rename the conflicting tags The Import function adds the following extension to the duplicate tags _ where is 1 2 or 3 The Import function renames duplicate tag names up to 3 times After that if you try to import a tag with the same name the imported tag is discarded Update the tags in the project with the data from the imported tags Abort Exit the Import Export utility and return to the Tag Editor Publication 2711 6 0 19 18 Working with Tags Exporting Tags To export tags 1 Choose Export from the Tools menu Output Format Source Project GSRIO x Device C csv SLC Ej r Destination Cancel Eile Help C Sa 2 Select an Output Format APS ASCII AI or CSV e When you export to an APS ASCII file Ifthe tag name is longer than 10 characters the Export function truncates the name Ifthe description is longer than 50 characters the Export function truncates the description Ifthe special characters in the description are equivalent to those used by APS the Export function translates the
455. position and input type touch cell or function key of the object Application Screen 1 Screen 2 focecnm gaua Object 1 Screen ne lige Object 2 Device Device Object Object The following illustration shows how an object is reused globally Application Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen 3 Screen oOpjecw jj ammm gua mm eo he Screen Screen Object 2 Object 3 Objet 3 a eee e Object on Screen 1 was initially created with a device object defining object properties and a screen object defining screen location and input type e Object on Screen 1 was defined as a global object by clicking the Mark for Global Selection in the object s Options dialog e Global object is reused on Screen 2 Global objects are accessed from Global Objects dialog A screen device was created linking the global object to the new screen e Global object is reused again on Screen 3 Another screen device was created linking the global object to the new screen Publication 2711 6 0 If the properties of a global object are changed all other links to that object are also updated Using Global Objects 14 3 Copying an Object When copying an object to another screen a new object is created with the same properties and also updated screen information The original object and the copied
456. pplication e PanelView terminal is defined when the application is created New Application dialog and is also accessed from the Terminal Setup dialog See Chapter 6 e Communication parameters for the logic controller and terminal are defined in the Communication Setup dialog Comms Setup button on Terminal Setup dialog See Chapter 20 Publication 2711 6 0 4 2 Communications Overview DH 485 Communications The following PanelView terminals communicate on a DH 485 link e DH 485 PanelView terminals communicate with an SLC controller using a point to point or network connection e RS 232 PanelView terminals communicate point to point with the Channel 0 port of an SLC 5 03 or 5 04 controller using DH 485 protocol The Panel View terminal operates as a unique DH 485 node 0 to 31 DH 485 parameters for the Panel View DH 485 RS 232 terminal and controller are defined in the Communication Setup dialog accessed from the Terminal Setup dialog Saup esip Adusi free Oue Cone Tag amataga Terminal Name is stored in Projet gt with Catalog Number information TIIE PANOH pepi FAR ER ee DPED AANE Rep PA 9 aa avez vO Coppel PAN 1 HE1 Citi Prin FRN bii su PanelView 900 DH 485 Terminal with RS 232 Printer Port Node Type 5 00 5 01 5 02 5 03 OS 300 5 03 OS 301 5 03 OS 302 5 04 OS 400 5 04 OS 401 MicroLogix 1000 Must match Node Name in Tag Editor The following table
457. pplication file window of the target application with the same name and number If the screen number exists in the target application the screen is assigned the next available number In the following example the Feed Pump screen is copied from the Sample application file to the Test application file ETHS PDH Dpp PAH 1 Ener iar 1 Wisiri ble m Feed Ping 1 Taek Lew 1 Monitor ZMIE PM Keypad FAN 30S scr Tomen E F Fand Pump Moving Screens to Another Application SPU KS PY Erypmi FN II i cree a Main Mican T Maiy kan 3 Tank Lawl F Fard Puan A oniki Working with Applications and Screens 6 17 This section shows how to move screens from one application to another using the Cut and Paste commands on the Edit menu Only one application can be open in the workspace but you can run multiple sessions of PanelBuilder See page 6 18 for details on what to do when copying or moving a screen to an application that was created for a different type of terminal To move screens from one application to another 1 Select the screens to move from the application file window 2 Click the Cut tool on the tool bar or choose Cut Screen from the Edit menu PanelBuilder removes the screen from the file and puts it on the clipboard 3 Save the application file if necessary 4 Close the application file Or start another session of PanelBuilder 5 Open the application file to receive the screen 6
458. pplication is first run and may also be displayed in the button When pressed this button opens the ASCII scratchpad allowing the operator to enter and send a new character string to the controller Cursor Point The cursor point is a data box that displays an ASCII character string at a controller address The object s initial value is sent to the controller when the application is first run The initial value may also be displayed in the box When the cursor point is selected and the Enter key is pressed the ASCII scratchpad opens allowing the operator to enter and send a new character string to the controller Display Area Character Keyboard Creating Data Entry Controls 10 13 ASCII Scratchpad Keypad or Keypad Touch ScreenTerminals CDE G J K M PQ RB T W X Z cde g Zk m Pqrst wW X Zz 2345 6 9 LLAI it oS fa apts rae sp e Controls eh i E A The operator selects characters from the Character Keyboard by moving the cursor with the keypad arrows over a character and pressing the SEL F1 function key The character appears in the Display Area This area scrolls so the operator can enter a character string that is longer than the Display Area All characters are sent to the controller even if not visible After entering all the characters the operator sends the string to the controller by pressing ENTER on the keypad Th
459. pport Rockwell International Technical Support 6680 Beta Drive Mayfield Village Ohio 44143 Or call 1 440 646 7800 or fax 1 440 646 7801 for technical support between 8 AM and 5 PM EST Monday to Friday Please have the serial number of your software ready when you call You can find this number in three places on the registration card you received with the software on the screen that appears when you start the PanelBuilder e inthe main Help menu when you choose About Documents answering frequently asked questions are available from the Allen Bradley e AutoFax service at 1 440 646 5436 This service provides an index of available documents and will automatically fax a document 24 hours a day 7 days a week website www ab com on the Technical Support FAQ menu As new features and enhancements become available you may want to upgrade your PanelBuilder software and Panel View firmware To automatically receive free software upgrades complete and send in your software registration card to Rockwell Software You can also receive software upgrades by contacting e local Allen Bradley sales office e Rockwell Software at 1 440 646 7700 or fax 1 440 646 7701 e access the website www software rockwell com Under Support select Software Updates and search for PanelBuilder or 2711ND3 To receive firmware upgrades e contact Rockwell Software at 1 440 646 7700 e access the Allen Bradley website www ab com and d
460. pport 22 13 Step 3 Create the Application Create your PanelBuilder application Text sizes for an external font file appear in parentheses on e Text Size menu accessed from the Format menu or the tool bar e Text Size list in Alarm History List dialog e Text Size field in spreadsheet editor for multistate objects If you select a text size in parentheses PanelBuilder uses the external font file to generate glyphs for a language on the application screen If you select a text size without parentheses PanelBuilder uses its default internal font to display text on application screens Important You cannot use external fonts and internal fonts in the same text string However you can use both in the same application PanelBuilder always uses the default internal font to display text entered in the Text Edit box on the toolbar Text Editor and spreadsheet editor for multistate devices The operating system is responsible for formatting and displaying the text To enter text in PanelBuilder using the character set of the external font file for example double byte Asian characters you must run either an e International Version of Windows or e IME with the correct language code page selected If you are not running an IME the operating system will display double byte glyph characters as 2 single byte characters Publication 2711 6 0 22 14 Multilingual Support Publication 2711 6 0 Step 4 Copy Font File to Memor
461. py of that segment of the logic controllers data table 10 WORDS Flow Rate Data 2a22 222222 SAYS NNNNNN Communications Overview 4 15 Transferring Multiple Blocks Multiple block transfers use a single channel single Module Control and Status Bytes defined Each block transfer read or write must be a unique length since the PanelView terminal uses the block size to determine the starting location of the read or write The following example illustrates a block transfer write of two blocks The PLC ladder logic program initiates multiple block transfers of 2 data blocks 7 words and 60 words BTW BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE I EN Rack 03 Group 0 ae Block N1 a The PanelView terminal receives the first data block and sl Pil os 7 0 Data From determines the starting address N7 0 for the write L ata th e 7 PLC operation by matching the block size with the address Cor nudu N entered in the Block Transfer dialog BTW The PanelView handles the second block in the same manner BLOCK TRANSFER WRITE EN Rack 03 Group 0 Hri Module 0 M as Control Block N16 6 ca a ie Data F ile E Bale From Ls Length 60 Continuous N The PanelView carries a copy of the logic controller data tables N7 0 to N7 6 A Block 1 Transfer y a JNN N NNNNN COUAMHKRWN E The
462. r on a function key depending on the terminal type When selecting an object and moving the mouse into either of these areas the mouse pointer changes to a crosshair The crosshair indicates where an object appears when you place it and also aids in positioning and aligning the object The pointer changes back to X after exiting the object mode If moved to an illegal area of the screen the crosshair changes to Display Area Publication 2711 6 0 7 4 Working with Objects Creating Objects Objects are created in the display area using the same technique in Display Area To create an object in the display area 1 Choose an object from the Objects menu Or click the appropriate tool in the toolbox 2 Position the pointer where you want to place the object 3 Click the left mouse button to place the default size Or hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer to size the object Release the mouse when the object is the right size The object is automatically selected Drag Pointer to Size Object 4 To place another object of the same type move the pointer to a new location and repeat step 3 5 Click the right mouse button to exit the object mode Or click the selection tool in the toolbox Or press the ESC key For each object placed on the screen the status bar shows e Object ID number assigned by PanelBuilder e X and Y coordinates of upper left corner of object in pixels Coordinat
463. r 1 1 2 Fill Level Full Tank C Assigned Function Key F2 Indicator Bar Shows Active List This section shows how to create a control list selector On touch screen terminals the control list aligns with the touch grid even if it s not visible Assigned Function Key F1 To create a control list selector 1 Choose Standard or Piloted from the Objects Control List Selectors submenu Or click the Control List Selector tool from the toolbox 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to size the control list default size dragged diagonally 3 To place another control list move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit control list selector mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Publication 2711 6 0 9 6 Creating Control List Selectors Setting Properties of a Control List Selector Publication 2711 6 0 To set properties of a control list selector 1 Double click the control list selector object Conve it ae Progetion ister Coton i bing EP yasa Cate Pepa Unasgred kri faeeynte FE ieee liper F Ajeraly eed Dais Taga EE D a oa Opens C Tag Dialog Gamh Ta Utsi isg jish wai Gist Ta 2 On the Properties tab set the operating parameters of the Control List Selector The following descriptions define properties of a control lis
464. r Setup 24 5 Sending to a File 24 6 Resizing Objects 7 9 Resizing Screen Grid 7 6 Restoring Projects 21 7 21 11 Return Screen Button Attributes 11 4 Creating 11 3 Description 11 2 Dialog 11 4 Reversing Edit Operation 7 22 Rounding of Scaled Values 10 6 RSLinx Communication Software 2 2 Accessing 2 7 Configuring Drivers 2 7 Installing 2 6 Mapping Drivers to Ports 2 9 S Screen List Selector Attributes 11 6 Configuring States 7 15 Creating 11 5 Description 1 6 11 2 Dialog 11 6 Selecting Screen Names 11 8 Setting Number of List Entries 11 7 Using Multiple Lists 11 2 Screen Menu Illustrated A 1 Screen Menu Commands A 1 Screen Number to PLC SLC 20 26 ScreenSaver 20 22 Display Intensity 20 22 Screen Selectors Goto Config Screen Button 1 6 11 2 Goto Screen Button 1 6 11 2 Helpful Hints 11 1 List 1 6 Return Screen 1 6 Return Screen Button 11 2 Screen List Selector 11 2 Screens Activating 6 13 Arranging 6 13 Closing 6 14 Converting Copied 6 18 Copying 6 15 6 16 Cutting and Pasting 6 17 Deleting 6 15 Opening Existing 6 11 Opening Multiple 6 12 Opening New 6 10 Opening Single 6 11 Reducing to Icons 6 13 Renaming 6 14 Search Tag Piloted Control Lists 9 8 Selecting Objects Multiple Objects 7 8 Index 9 Single Objects 7 8 Sizing Objects 7 9 Spreadsheet Editor 1 2 Add Insert Delete Row 5 13 Changing Column Order 5 12 Changing Column
465. r and you may lose tag or device data Restoring a Project Created with a Restricted Release of PanelBuilder Managing Projects 21 11 If you open an application that is linked to a project created with a Restricted or Beta release of PanelBuilder this dialog opens Thix Praject Uetebo ee wee creeied with Heehicied or Heis Heleeee iether Hress mr Prope Manage ren ie DELETE fae Praject fe re open the opplicatian Frajeri Homie cr Lag You must delete the project and then re open the application to ensure that the project is current All application data is retained in the process To restore the project Click OK to close the above dialog Choose Project Management from the Application menu Select the Projects tab Click the Delete button You are asked to confirm the deletion 1 2 3 4 Under Existing Projects select the project to delete 5 6 Click the Done button to exit the Project Management dialog 7 Re open the application The project is recreated with all device and tag data Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives What You Will Learn Chapter 2 2 Multilingual Support This chapter describes how to use the FontTool utility to create font files for PanelBuilder applications You can access these font files in PanelBuilder to create applications for specific languages Secti
466. r choose Fill Pattern from the Format menu The Fill submenu opens 4 Choose a fill option After selecting the fill pattern the pattern appears in the object If you select an object that can t be filled the fill commands appear dimmed to show the fill can t be changed The fill changes but the object maintains all other characteristics such as shape line type and so on For multistate objects you can set the fill pattern for a state directly from the State tab of the object s dialog State Formatting Objects and Text 17 7 Using the Blink Option You can toggle blinking on or off for an object including fill pattern and border For multistate objects you can toggle blinking on or off for each state The blink option is not valid for list objects The blink rate is approximately 5 seconds and is activated when the application is running in the Panel View terminal Blinking isn t activated for an object during application design Text within the object does not blink To activate blinking for text enter inner text mode and then select the blink option To toggle blinking for an object 1 Select the object 2 If the object is a multistate object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Blink tool on the Format bar Or choose Blink from the Format menu Blinking is set for the object but the object
467. r each message Double click in the cell and replace the default text Msg 0 with the new message text Other text fields control how the text is formatted text size default size varies for each terminal type e underline default is off text blink default is off e left right or center alignment default is left e foreground color To insert variables in a message 1 Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert the variable 2 From the popup menu choose Time Date Variable or ASCII from the Embedded Variable submenu A placeholder is inserted in the message for the time and date variable T for time or D for date The time and date are formatted using the settings in the Terminal Setup dialog A dialog opens when Variable or ASCII is selected allowing you to format how the numeric or ASCII variable will display see page 17 14 and 17 16 When you exit this dialog a placeholder is inserted in the message with embedded formatting details Entering State Values If Value was selected in the Read area of the Properties tab the Value field appears for each message This field defines the numeric value at the read tag address that will trigger the message to display The range of the value you can enter must be within the range of the Data Format selected on the Properties tab The default value for each message is the row number 0 to 1 999 Data Format Range Binary
468. r in Windows 95 or Windows NT 1 Insert PanelBuilder disk 1 in Drive A or Drive B 2 Click the Start button click Settings and then click the Control Panel 3 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon 4 On the Install Uninstall tab click the Install button 5 Follow the install instructions on the screen To install PanelBuilder in Windows 3 x 1 Insert PanelBuilder disk 1 in Drive A or Drive B 2 In Program Manager choose Run from the File menu ALT F R 3 Type the location you re installing from plus the word setup For example type a setup 4 Click OK and follow the install instructions on the screen PanelBuilder setup with INTERCHANGE To successfully transfer applications using INTERCHANGE drivers you must install PanelBuilder with INTERCHANGE You cannot install PanelBuilder and INTERCHANGE as separate components 1 Enter and verify registration information The serial number is on your registration card 2 Select setup option Typical or Custom will install PanelBuilder with INTERCHANGE 3 Select destination folder for files e Default for PanelBuilder and AB Utility files is C AB e Default for INTERCHANGE files is CARSI Installation 2 5 Installation files are copied to the appropriate folders Specify whether you want to update your AUTOEXEC BAT file The CALL ABICRUN BAT statement must be correctly placed The file may contain multiple configurations which require updating B
469. r select a screen from the application file window and click the Open Screen tool on the tool bar e Or select a screen from the application file window and choose Open from the Screen menu Screen Close The screen opens with its name and number in the title bar Attributes Create Alarm Banner Application File Name Project Name Pp aaah pele i a sie eaea ied S Screen Number Name Semm ELECTRONIC OPERATOR INTERFACE Di I i TEN 5 a1 Bottle Alarm Tank Tlbaniza Filling Mastery Clea Speracion Fi F il FE Fs j Publication 2711 6 0 6 12 Working with Applications and Screens Opening Multiple screens can be open in the workspace You might want to Multiple Screens copy or move objects from one screen to another or you might need to access information on another screen Each screen opened overlaps the previous screen and PanelBuilder adds the screen name to the Windows menu The last opened screen becomes the active screen A check mark W appears next to the active screen The title bar of the active screen is also highlighted To open multiple screens in an application 1 Click the first screen you want to select in the application file window then drag the pointer to the last screen To cancel the selection click any screen in the list Or click the first screen press and hold down the SHIFT key and click the last screen you want to
470. racter Set 22 3 Enabling in PanelBuilder 22 11 Glyph 22 3 Input Method Editor 22 2 Single Byte Character Set 22 2 Translating textin Excel 22 19 Using to Create Application 22 11 22 13 FontTool 2 6 22 1 Creating FontFiles 22 6 Detecting Problems 22 15 Font Files 22 3 Input Method Editor 22 4 Opening FontFiles 22 8 Printing Font Files 22 10 Saving FontFiles 22 9 Using 22 5 Viewing Sample Text 22 8 Foreground Background for Color Graphics 17 22 for Objects 17 9 for Text 17 30 Form View Tag Editor 19 3 Format Bar 5 2 5 6 17 2 Inner Graphic Mode 5 6 17 2 Graphics List Box B 3 Import Export Graphics Tool B 3 Inner TextMode 5 6 17 2 Object Formatting Blink Tool B 2 Fill Pattern Tool B 2 Line Tool B 2 Shape Tool B 2 Toggle F ore Background Tool B 2 Object Mode 5 6 17 2 Text Formatting Blink Tool B 3 Center Align Tool B 3 Embedded Variable Tool B 3 Existing Text Tool B 3 Left Align Tool B 3 Right Align Tool B 3 Text Box B 3 Text Size Tool B 3 Toggle F ore Background Tool B 3 Underline Tool B 3 Format Menu Commands A 4 Formatting Objects 7 13 Function Keys Deleting Objects 7 22 G Global Objects Accessing 14 5 Copying 14 3 Creating 14 1 Defining 14 4 Example 14 2 Grouped Objects 7 10 Moving and Resizing 14 6 Global Technical Support GTS Information Required 5 14 Goto Config Screen Button Attributes 11 4 Creating 11 3 Description 1 6 11 2
471. rance of objects and text including how to add inner text graphics to objects 18 Using the Text E ditor Describes how to use the application Text Editor to create edit sort filter and print application text as well as how to reuse text 19 Working with Tags Shows how to use the tag editor to enter edit tag information print tags and import export tags 20 Terminal and Communication Tells how to set operating and runtime communication parameters for the Setup PanelView terminal and how to convert applications from one terminal type to another 21 Managing Projects Tells how to link a project to an application and how to copy rename delete projects or devices in projects 22 Multi Lingual Support Shows how to use the FontTool utility to create and use font files in specific languages for PanelBuilder applications 23 Validating and Describes how to validate and transfer a PanelBuilder application between a Transferring Applications personal computer and a PanelView terminal PCMCIA memory card or disk file 24 Creating Reports Tells how to create and print application reports Publication 2711 6 0 Conventions Related Publications Preface P 3 The following conventions are used throughout this manual PanelBuilder refers to the PanelBuilder Configuration Software Panel View or terminal refers to any one of the Panel View terminals unless specifically stated Windows refers to Windows 95 Windows NT or Windows
472. reate an Alarm List 1 Choose Alarm List from the Objects menu Push Buttons tes J 2 Place and size the object Numeric Enty r ASCII Entry r MuM DD YY 1H MM SS MM DD YY Control List Selectors Indicators Numeric Data Display a The format of the entries in the Alarm List does not appear until Message Display you create alarm text Alarms tab Alarm Setup dialog Graphics r i List Keys 7 3 Double click the object to open its dialog Alarm List Alam Buttons Global Object Propestien Dpi Global Object G ores F Kiem Bil idee Cormhioe E alam Ten Ba E Ackrosiakg aia 7 sector P iskrenia Dee Actinvostedgmen Hiau T Alam Trig Yaka l feirede Akama Tan Sie rns zj F jrah rieh iiam jnas Par A ll F He dichroic Fepmmi F Trecth cit T ip A 4 Under Display Fields select e fields to display for each alarm The fields are displayed in the order shown with the alarm text appended to the fields e text size of the characters in the list the text sizes vary for the Panel View terminals number of lines 1 to 9 to display for each alarm entry The maximum number of lines varies depending on the text size and the size of the Alarm List object Publication 2711 6 0 15 10 Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Alarms 5 Under Alarm Display Options specify the alarm conditions and acknowledge statuses to appear in the list Initially all options are enabl
473. rectory as PBWIN EXE If the file is not there reload the file from the installation disk Cannot create the abort dialog box Abort dialog couldn t be initialized Windows may be low on resources Close applications and try again If error reoccurs exit Windows reboot and retry Cannot initialize print device Printer couldn t be initialized Check the Print Setup settings and try again Cannot load the Protocol Translate server PanelBuilder can t load required files Editing the PB550 INI file can cause this error Reboot computer and try again If error continues re install PanelBuilder Cannot load the Terminal Specification server PanelBuilder can t load required files Editing the PB550 INI file can cause this error Reboot computer and try again If error continues re install PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 D 2 Message Cannot load the Terminal Translate server Software Error and Warning Messages Meaning PanelBuilder can t load required files Editing the PB900 INI file can cause this error What to do Reboot computer and try again If error continues re install PanelBuilder Ca 5 not locate data for tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical support if error continues Cannot locate tag tag name Internal error Check tag information Contact A B technical support if error continues Cannot
474. ress To Send report to printer or file Click Cancel at any time to abort printing of report Exit dialog without printing report Change page headers and title page of report See page 24 3 for details Define printer settings for report See page 24 5 for details inter Setup Save current report settings as the default Otherwise the dialog reverts back to the original settings when closed Creating Reports 24 3 Changing the Report Setup You can specify what components will appear in the page headers and title page of a report To change the page headers and title page Report Setup 1 Click the Report Setup button from the Report Setup dialog The Report Setup dialog opens Header i a Cancel V Time V Date IV Page Number I User Defined Text et ooo r Title Page IV Application Name V Time V Date I User Defined Text 2 Select Header and Title Page options by clicking the appropriate check boxes in each area To disable an option clear the box Select To print Application Name Name of the application Time Time of printout in a 24 hour format Hour Minute Second Date Date of printout in the format Month Day Year Page Number Consecutive page numbers includes title page User Defined Text Up to 80 characters including spaces of user defined text The next page shows where each option appears in the page header a
475. ric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics List Keys Alarm List Alarm Buttons Global Object Choose To Tool Bar Toggle the tool bar on or off Status Bar Toggle the status bar on or off Toolbox Toggle a toolbox of control display and graphic objects on or off ISA Symbols Toggle a toolbox of ISA symbols on or off Color Palette Toggle the color palette on or off Color Terminals only Alarm Banner Position Reposition the Alarm Banner on application screens Keypad Toggle the numeric keypad on or off for all screens Full Size Return the screen to its full size This command is used with Zoom In and Zoom Out Zoom In Magnify the screen so objects look larger You can increase the magnification several times Each time you select Zoom In the magnification increases to the next higher setting Zoom Out Choose Push Button gt Reduce the magnification of the screen so objects look smaller You can reduce the magnification several times Each time you select Zoom Out the screen reduces to the next lower setting To Open a submenu to create a momentary maintained latched or multistate push button Screen Selectors gt Open a submenu to create a goto goto config screen or return screen button You can also create a screen list from which a screen is selected Numeric Entry gt Open a submenu that lets you
476. rid even if it s not visible Objects Push Buttons Screen Selectors Numeric Entry ASCII Entry b Cursor Point E a To create a Cursor Point or Keypad Enable button 1 Click the appropriate tool in the toolbox Or choose Cursor Point or Keypad Enable from the Objects gt Numeric Entry submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default object size Or drag the pointer to size the object Cursor Point Keypad Enable 3 To place another object of the same type move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit numeric entry mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox Setting Properties of a Numeric Entry Object This section shows how to set the properties for a Keypad Enable button or a Cursor Point Object To set properties of a Cursor Point or Keypad Enable button 1 Double click the numeric entry object Pommien Goto Ta rama tataa ll Opens Fid aih EH Tags Dialog Irpa AETS Faas Eep RN L a lets r r l Beppe Cont nied Taite Tg 2 On the Properties tab set operating parameters for the numeric entry objects as defined on following pages 3 When done click OK Publication 2711 6 0 10 8 Creating Data Entry Controls Publication 2711 6 0 Type Changes the type of numeric entry object Input Specifies whether the operator presses a function key or a touch cell to acti
477. rminal and Communication Setup 20 19 Setting Time Date Format The Time Date tab in the Terminal Setup dialog specifies how the time and date are displayed on the PanelView terminal With dates you can vary the order of the month day and year or change the punctuation used to separate parts of the date You can display times in 12 hour or 24 hour format with different suffix notations such as AM for morning or PST for Pacific Standard Time Date Formats Time Formats Month Day Year With Leading Zeroes 12 Hour Format With Time Zone amp Time 7 3 99 07 03 99 2 56 Standard Designations 56 PM CS Day Month Year With 4 digit Year 24 Hour Format F 3 7 99 7 3 1999 14 56 With artes Zeroes With User With Seconds With User 14 56 29 Year Month Day Defined Separator 99 7 3 7 3 99 A aon To activate the time date settings in the PanelView terminal you must enable the Use downloaded configuration settings option in the Power Up tab on the Terminal Setup dialog To change the time or date format used by the terminal 1 Select the Time Date tab from the Terminal Setup dialog Terminal Setup x Setup Power Up Advanced Time Date Control Tags Status Tags r Date Format Order MDY C DMY C YMD Separator Tanie I Leading Zero 03 vs 3 pasa Year 94 C1994 M Time Format 12 hour 00 00 11 59 jan ru C 24 hour 00 00 23 59 Separator I Leading Zero 07 30
478. rn off the keypad Publication 2711 6 0 5 8 PanelBuilder Basics Color Palette Tool Bar Status Bar Toolbox ISA Symbols Color Palette Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In Zoom Out Selected Foreground Color View Box updates as Foreground and Background colors are selected Publication 2711 6 0 Applications developed for color and grayscale terminals use a color palette to define the colors of objects and text For color terminals the palette supports 16 standard EGA colors For grayscale terminals the palette supports 4 colors shades of gray To toggle the color palette on or off Choose Color Palette from the View menu A check mark next to the command means the palette is active To turn the palette off choose the command again The palette moves like other windows Click the right mouse button in the palette to switch between a vertical or horizontal format Palette for Color Terminals al Color Palette Selected Background Color Palette for Grayscale Terminals Use the palette to set the foreground and background colors of objects text and graphics On color terminals the default background color is blue and the foreground color is white On grayscale terminals default background color is black and the foreground color is white Foreground colors are located on the top row of the palette background colors on the bott
479. roller regains control of the list it uses the value in the search tag to update the write tag value which changes the selected state This behavior is appropriate when the controller is operating as a master device To bypass this behavior add the following rung of ladder logic for each search tag address Control Tag Address MOV ra MOVE Source Write Tag Address Destination Search Tag Address Block Write Start Tag Piloted Control Lists only Specifies the starting point for the block write data The block write data contains all values for items currently displayed on the control list The maximum number of entries supported by the block write tag varies for each terminal e 15 values for Panel View 550 terminals e 25 values for Panel View 600 terminals e 24 values for Panel View 900 monochrome and 1000 grayscale terminals e 29 values for Panel View 900 1000 1400 color terminals When using block write data do not assign functions to the addresses following the Block Write Start Tag Reserve an address for each visible row on a control list Creating Control List Selectors 9 9 Input Specifies whether the operator presses a function key or a touch cell to activate a control list e Fora keypad terminal select a function key from the list e Fora touch screen terminal touch cell is automatically enabled Panel View 550 600 Keypad amp Touch Screen terminals support function key and touch cell
480. rom the Application menu and change tag attributes as necessary Minimum array length of tag required for object state data The bit array length of the tag is smaller than required Change values for the object s states or increase the bit array size in the Tag Editor Width value is out of range The width of the objectis invalid Resize the object Write tag not defined A write tag has not been defined for object Open object s dialog and assign a write tag Write and search tags must be different in Piloted Control Lists A Piloted Control List will not function if the search tag and write tag are the same Open the object s dialog and change either the write tag or search tag Publication 2711 6 0 Appendix F Troubleshooting This appendix contains tips to assist with troubleshooting if problems occur when e Starting PanelBuilder e Downloading to a DOS File e Downloading using INTERCHANGE Drivers Many computers contain power management options and utilities that affect computer COM ports e POWER EXE in AUTOEXEC BAT or CONFIG SYS e option in CMOS setup e Windows utility e Power icon in Control Panel of Windows 95 set to None For troubleshooting information on your PanelView terminal see the Operator Terminals manual Running Windows 95 Problem When rebooting your computer after installing PanelBuilder INTERCHANGE software you get a Windows protecti
481. rom the list Cursor Point Displays current value at controller address in a data box When Dynamic selected the scratchpad opens allowing you to change the value using Numeric Data Entry the keypad Keypad Enable Button When pressed opens the scratchpad and activates the terminal keypad Dynamic or touch screen keypad for numeric data entry Cursor Point Displays current string at controller address in a data box When Dynamic selected the scratchpad opens allowing you to change the character ASCII Data Entry string using the keypad Keypad Enable Button When pressed opens the scratchpad and activates the terminal keypad Dynamic or touch screen keypad for ASCII data entry Multistate Indicator Displays one of up to 2 000 unique states The value ata controller Dynamic address determines which state to display List Indicator Highlights a state in a scrolling list supporting up to 255 states The value Dynamic at a controller address determines which state to highlight Indicators and Bar Graph Monitors changing conditions such as temperature pressure or fluid Dynamic Data Displays levels Create bar graphs with or without scales Numeric Data Display Shows current value at a controller address binary BCD integer float Dynamic Use scaling y mx b to display value in appropriate units Message Display Presents status information or instructions to operator The controller Dynamic triggers messages from a predefined list of up to 2 000 messages
482. roperties of a Push Button Publication 2711 6 0 All push buttons look the same when placed on a screen On touch screen terminals push buttons align with the touch grid even when it s not visible To create a push button 1 Choose a push button from the Objects Push Buttons submenu Or click the appropriate tool in the toolbox 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default button size Or drag the pointer to size the button 3 To place another button of the same type move the pointer to a new location and click again 4 Click the right mouse button to exit push button mode Or click the selection tool on the toolbox To set properties of a push button 1 Double click the push button object Depending on the push button type some options are dimmed Siege Dit Mere Hyper I yahi P iirrit Cru Bole Ursy Int Dais Tap 3 tap a 0 ee H tas pens were Tage Tag Dialog prye C d jagat rakna lwp Peir Esp m 5 areriagar a Era F L oL Carsi Bead Jis 2 On the Properties tab set the operating parameters of the button The descriptions that follow define properties of momentary maintained and latched push buttons Creating Push Buttons 8 5 Type Changes the push button type without having to create a new object Write Specifies the type of data to send to controller Single Bit or Value e For Single Bit the terminal writes
483. rs listed e Check if your printer has an emulation mode that is compatible with one of the printers listed e You may need to install a print driver for your printer Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide Validating and Transferring Applications 23 5 Sending Validation Messages to File To send validation messages to a file you must e add the Generic Text Only printer to the Installed Printer list e assign the printer to a File port For details on how to add Generic Text Only on FILE to the Installed Printers list on your computer see the Microsoft Windows User s Guide This print option allows you to print text not graphics To send validation messages to a file 1 Click the Print Setup button from the Exceptions dialog The standard Microsoft Print Setup dialog opens Printer C Default Printer currently HP DeskJet 560C Printer on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Specific Printer Options Generic Text Only on FILE Orientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 81 211 in Landscape Source E 2 Verify that Generic Text Only on FILE is the selected printer under Specific Printer If your application uses large text sizes open the Options dialog and enable the Wide Carriage option 3 Click OK to exit the Printer Setup dialog 4 Click the Print button from the Exceptions dialog Print To File Output File Name 5 In the Output File Name box e
484. rt Terminal and computer nodes cannot have same value The terminal and pe rsonal computer can t have the same address for a DH485 transfer Make sure the terminal node address and computer node address are different The existing alarm banner will be overwritten Do you wish to continue Publication 2711 6 0 Pasting an alarm ba existing banner nner will overwrite any Specify whether you want to continue or cancel the operation Software Error and Warning Messages Message Meaning What to do The PanelView terminal can only use 255 The maximum number of screens is 255 screens no more screens can be created The specified path for the translated file is File could not be opened during a download Check path of specified file invalid The translated application file could not be opened Too many files currently open Translated application file cannot be opened File could not be opened because too many other files or programs are open Close other files or applications and try again Unable to create application file Check if disk write protected Disk may be write protected or network partition has read only access If writing to floppy check write protect If writing to a network file verify write privileges Unable to load configuration utility Could not load the InterC hange Config utility Check that INTERCHANGE Software is installed Unable to lo
485. run by default If this line is uncommented and says SELFTEST ON the diagnostics are run To stop the diagnostics from running ensure that this line is not commented out and says SELFTEST OFF The most common cause for these errors is that the software or hardware setting of the memory address for your communication card does not match that entered into CFG_KT INI for the type of card you are using CFG_KT 0013 KT memory diagnostic RAM 0 error CFG_KT 0014 KT memory diagnostic RAM 1 error CFG_KT 0015 KT counter diagnostic error CFG_KT 0016 KT timer diagnostic error CFG_KT 0017 KT serial diagnostic error CFG_KT 0018 KT protocol downloading error CFG_KT 0019 KT dualport memory error If these errors occur contact your Rockwell Software Inc Global Technical Support Representative CFG_KT 001d Undefined error CFG_KT 001e Undefined error CFG_KT 001f Undefined error Troubleshooting F 9 Errors and Informational Messages Specific to CFG_485 EXE This error indicates the Virtual Driver for DH485 isn t running CFG_485 0020 DH485 Fatal Error V485 Driver not installed These errors indicate problems setting up the COM port CFG_485 0021 DH485 Serial Communication P ort not found CFG_485 0022 DH485 Link Layer attach error CFG_485 0023 DH485 Link Layer initialization error CFG_485 0024 DH485 Link Layer configuration error This error indicates a conflict over which COM port is to be used CFG_485 0025
486. s remote I O link A serial link for carrying I O data between a PLC or SLC processor scanner and remote I O adapters Also supports transfer the block transfer of data that is moved using block transfer ladder instructions save The process of transferring data stored in memory to a disk file scratchpad Data entry window that opens when numeric entry objects are activated screen See application screen or touch screen select To mark an item so that a subsequent action can be carried out You usually select an item by clicking it with a mouse or pressing a key After selecting an item you choose the action that you want to affect the item See choose SLC Allen Bradley trademark for Small Logic Controllers static object An object that doesn t interact with a controller address status bar The horizontal bar at the bottom of the window that tells you what PanelBuilder is doing at the moment tag A group of parameters that define a controller address within a processor and how it interacts with a PanelBuilder object tile A way of arranging open windows application file window or application screens so that no windows overlap but all are visible Each window takes up a portion of a screen tool bar The horizontal bar that appears below the title bar The tool bar contains tools for frequently used commands You click on a tool to carry out an action Some tools complete the action
487. s 1 word address with up to 2 000 total states The LSB will only use up to the word of the last state For the Value option you must select the format of the data from the Data Format list box The data type of the read tag must be compatible with the selected format for the application to validate Use this Format With this Tag Data Type Signed Integer Signed Integer 4 BCD 4BCD Binary n Unsigned Integer Octa or Bit Array Unsigned Integer Trigger State 0 When If Single Bit was selected in the Read area you must specify whether State 0 triggers on Bit 0 or Bit 1 Select To Bito Trigger state 0 when bitis setto 0 and trigger state 1 when bitis setto 1 Bit1 Trigger state 0 when bitis setto 1 and trigger state 1 when bitis set to 0 Read Tag Specifies the name of the tag address that triggers the display of a state If the tag does not exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Print Select the Print check box to print states as they are triggered When a state is triggered the text associated with the state is printed on the connected printer Publication 2711 6 0 12 16 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Publication 2711 6 0 The Value field appears only if Value was selected under Read on the Properties tab Configuring States for a Multistate Indicator Use the States tab to edit text for eac
488. s 8 4 Creating 8 4 Description 1 6 8 2 Maintenance Schedule Display 20 23 Manual Contents P 2 Conventions P 3 Related Publications P 3 Publication 2711 6 0 Maximize Button 5 2 Memory Hints on Reducing 3 14 Memory Cards 23 7 ATA 22 2 DataBook 22 2 Downloading Application 23 16 using a retainer 22 14 Menu Bar 5 2 Menus Conventions 5 4 Message Displays Alarms 15 7 Attributes 13 6 Configuring States 7 15 Creating 13 6 Data Types 13 7 Description 1 6 Dialog 13 6 Error State 13 5 Examples 13 2 Helpful Hints 13 1 Inserting a Variable 13 9 Least Significant Bit Trigger 13 4 Read Tag 13 7 Setting Number of Messages 13 8 Triggering Messages 13 4 Message Editor 18 2 Messages Error and Warning D 1 Software D 1 Validation E 1 Minimize Button 5 2 Momentary Push Buttons Attributes 8 4 Creating 8 4 Description 1 6 8 2 Mouse Pointer 5 2 7 3 Move Down List Key 9 12 11 9 Move Up List Key 9 12 11 9 Moving Objects 7 9 Multilingual Support 22 1 Multistate Indicator Attributes 12 14 Configuring States 7 15 12 16 Creating 12 14 Data Ranges 12 17 Description 1 6 12 12 Dialog 12 14 Error State 12 3 Examples 12 12 Least Significant Bit Trigger 12 13 Read Tag 12 15 Setting Number of States 12 16 Triggering a State 12 13 Types 12 12 Multistate Push Buttons Attributes 8 4 Configuring States 7 15 Creating 8 4 Description 1 6 8 2 Setting Numb
489. s 6 3 A PanelBuilder application is a set of screens with associated tags New Application and devices terminal and controller When creating an application Exit Copy Font File you define e application name e project name containing tag and device information e terminal in which the application will run To create and open a new application file E 1 Click the New File tool on the tool bar Or choose New from the File menu Ard arai Hir 1 CMABSPBWINSGS SOMEN 2485 PBA 2 CAABSPBWINSMS0K CB A 3 C ABAPEWIN GSSSCKV2RIO PBA Propet Mamm 4 CABSPEWINSGSSOMEVORIO PBA a Opens a dialog to Terminal Typo Iinusisn enter a description Dimmed until you enter a valid formal Mama nee of the application project name Fines be Selected terminal type PY Tap Pm j Esrect D kagai t Touch Selected catalog j ami Yeyin number of terminal IH eS i RE c Ee r TFSI PS eal S71 1 E3C 10 PS Fapp i INN 111 1ax IIE PY Beppe FMA 111 2 W TASC PVII Lapill FAR J Pate A Phyo DMI Pesiocet W1 Communication ports and PRaacat HS ZIP DFI protocols of selected terminal 2 In the Application Name box enter a 1 to 32 character name for the application When saving the application PanelBuilder uses the first 8 characters of the application name as the default file name with the PBA file type 3 In the Project Name box enter a 1 to 32 character name for the project The name c
490. s appear gt The terminal name was defined when the application was created DH 485 Communications Dialog Terminal Name from Setup tab Node Types 5 00 01 02 5 03 OS 300 5 03 OS 301 5 03 OS 302 5 04 OS 400 Must match Node a 5 04 OS 401 Name in Tag Editor ikiii j MicroLogix 1000 4 Under Terminal edit parameters for the PanelView terminal Use To Node Address Specify the unique address 0 31 of the PanelView terminal on the DH 485 network The default is 2 aximum Specify the highest node address on the network The default is 31 Node Address A low Maximum Node Address improves network performance Baud Rate Specify the baud rate of the DH 485 network The options are 1200 2400 9600 19 2K default 5 Under Network Nodes edit the node parameters of the controller To insert a node right click in any field and select Insert Node from the shortcut menu Click in any field to edit it Use To Node Name Enter a unique name for the controller that will communicate with the PanelView terminal on the DH 485 network elf you enter a new name address a device is added to the project elf you select the name of an existing device the node address and node type automatically appear for that device Node Address Select the node address 0 to 31 of the controller on the DH 485 network The default is 1 Node Type Select the type of controller To delete a
491. s each time you click Zoom Out To return the screen to its normal size choose Full Size from the View menu Publication 2711 6 0 7 12 Working with Objects Object Inner Text Publication 2711 6 0 Object Push Buttons Multistate Indicator Most objects when created have default inner text The text varies depending on the object type Inner text can be edited and can include a time date or numeric variable In addition you can replace the text with an inner graphic or include a graphic with the text Inner Text Notes Inner text for 2 State push buttons is ST 0 State 0 and ST 1 State 1 For multistate push buttons the text can increment to ST 15 State 15 For multistate indicators the text can increment from ST 0 State 0 to ST 1999 State 1999 List Indicator Inner text for list indicators can increment from ST 0 State 0 to ST 254 State 254 Control List Selector Inner text for control list selectors can increment from ST 0 State 0 to Standard ST 254 State 254 The asterisk means the text exceeds the size of Piloted the object Resize object Numeric Entry Objects Inner text for numeric entry and display objects is a numeric variable Numeric Data Display placeholder 44 You can add text before or after the variable ASCII Entry Object nner text for an ASCII entry objects is a variable placeholder You can add text before or after the variable Me
492. s in the terminal lt gt To change a shape 1 Select the object 2 Click the Shape tool from the Format bar Or choose Shape from the Format menu The Shape submenu opens Cirie Eligac Choose the shape you want for the selected object The object changes shape but maintains all other characteristics such as border type foreground background colors and so on When changing an ellipse to a rectangle the rectangle fits inside the same rectangular area as the original shape When changing a rectangle or ellipse to a circle the circle is resized to fit inside the rectangular area The only fill patterns retained when changing the shape to a circle or ellipse are white black or none If you select an object that can t be shaped the Format commands appear dimmed to show the shape can t be changed Publication 2711 6 0 Formatting Objects and Text 17 5 Changing Line Type You can change the border or edge of an object using the Line Type command On monochrome terminals the line type options are black white none invisible e On color and grayscale terminals the line type options are solid none invisible RESET RESET Push Button Push Button with Border with No Border Push Button Push Button Bar Graph Bar Graph with Border and Fill with No Border and Fill with Border with No Border To change the line type 1 Select the objec
493. s object are the same Change colors so they are not identical Function key not assigned The object is configured for function key input but isn t assigned to a specific function key Open the object s dialog and select a function key Function key number not valid The specified objectis assigned an invalid function key Open the object s dialog and assign a valid function key Function key number used twice The same function key is assigned to two different objects on the same screen Open one of the object s dialog and assign a different function key Graphic foreground color is the same as its background color Graphic foreground color is the same as text background color Change colors so they are not identical Graphic name not found An object or object state is assigned an inner graphic that no longer exists Select another inner graphic for the object or import a bit map graphic with the same name Handshake tag not defined The handshake tag is undefined for a latched push button object Open the object s dialog and assign a handshake tag name Height value is out of range The height of the object is invalid Resize the object Hold time value is out of range The hold time entered for a momentary push button is invalid Open the object s dialog and select a hold time from the Hold Time list box Illegal font size for this type of
494. s or the data type Valid data types are BCD signed integer or unsigned integer Ack Tag range must be greater than or equal to trigger range The number of bits in the ack tag s data length must be greater than or equal to the number of data bits for the trigger Increase the number of bits in the Alarm Acknowledge tag Acknowledge all value must be greater than highest bit position for this trigger For bit and least significant bit alarm triggers the acknowledge all bit position must be at least one greater than the highest bit specified for the alarm Increase the bit position specified for the acknowledge all field Acknowledge all value used as alarm trigger value bit Acknowledge all value for the trigger is the same as one of the values that triggers an alarm Choose a unique value bit for the acknowledge all value Address overlaps Block Transfer Pass Thru Control Byte A tag is assigned the same address as the Block Transfer Control Byte the lowest accessible byte in the discrete I O rack Enter a different address for the tag in the Tag Editor or disable block transfers if not using BTs in the Block Transfer dialog Alarm List queue size too large for remaining NVRAM space The specified size of the alarm list queue is too large for the available memory Specify a smaller alarm list queue size Alarm requiring acknowledgement must be displayed An alarm acknowledge but
495. s the initial default Creating Alarms 15 13 4 Under Alarm Lists specify Clear Lists on Powerup Select this option to clear all entries in Alarm Lists when the terminal is reset or power cycled Size Specify the maximum number of alarms to store in the Alarm List Selecta value between 1 and 100 The default is 25 The maximum number of alarms actually stored depends on nonvolatile RAM available in terminal 5 Under Print Items select the data to print with alarm text when e Print Alarm button is pressed e Alarm is configured to automatically print when triggered e Print Alarm List button is pressed The print items are e alarm date alarm time alarm trigger value alarm acknowledge date alarm acknowledge time The items are printed in the order listed with the alarm text appended to the items To print alarms your terminal must be equipped with an RS 232 printer port 6 Under Time Values specify ACK Hold Time Length of time the terminal holds the trigger value at the address defined by the Acknowledge tag The hold time should exceed the scan time of the controller to ensure that it is read at least once Hold time values are 0 50 250 500 750 or 1 000 milliseconds The initial default is 500 Snapshot Timeout Length of time the terminal waits for the controller to complete I O scans when an alarm is triggered If the message contains embedded variables the
496. s version PanelBuilder detected incorrect version of the A B utilities software on startup Reinstall the AB Utilities disk or contact Allen Bradley for support nsufficient available Windows resources to run this application Try closing some other applications and try again There are too many applications running Close all running applications and try again nvalid application file nable to restore all objects Internal error occurred while restoring file This may result from a file that was incorrectly written Contact Allen Bradley customer support nvalid filename specified for download Invalid destination file entered for the download Enter a valid destination file name or use the Browse button to search for a file Publication 2711 6 0 D 4 Message nvalid Left Margin Please select another number between 0 and 132 Software Error and Warning Messages Meaning The specified value is nota valid option What to do Specify a value between 0 and 132 nvalid message text number Please select another number Number entered is invalid Backspace over entry and enter a new message number 1 to 256 nvalid number of lines Please select another number between 1 and 255 The specified value is nota valid option Specify a value between 1 and 255 nvalid Page Length Please select another number between 0 and 255 The specified value is nota valid opt
497. s you e View active communication drivers e Select and configure a communication driver e Edit a communication driver Remove a communication driver e Access advanced driver parameters The utility automatically updates the CFG_KT INI ABICRUN BAT ABICSTOP BAT and the SYSTEM INI files when drivers are added configured and removed To transfer applications using a Pass Through connection you must first configure the appropriate driver To transfer applications using a serial connection Internal DF1 driver memory card or DOS file using the Panel View File Transfer Utility for DH 485 terminals INTERCHANGE software is not required To access the INTERCHANGE Device Configuration Utility e In Windows 95 click the Start button click Programs click PanelBuilder then click INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility In Windows 3 x double click the INTERCHANGE Device Config Utility icon in the PanelBuilder Group e Or choose the Workstation Setup command from the File menu of the PanelBuilder software e The utility also opens at the end of the PanelBuilder installation The INTERCHANGE Device Configuration dialog shown on the next page opens Installation 2 11 Configuring an INTERCHANGE Driver To select and configure an INTERCHANGE driver 1 Select a driver from the Available Drivers list Use the table below as a guide in selecting a driver IRTERCHARGE Davu Cenbtpoaton a mma ie The PanelView termina
498. se button The Text ID and Text fields are updated with data from the copied text and the Use Existing Text dialog closes Click OK to exit the object s dialog To copy text from the Alarm tab Alarm Setup dialog 1 2 3 Choose Alarm Setup from the Application menu Select the Alarms tab Select the row number of the text you want to replace with text in the Text Editor Choose Use Existing Text from the popup menu The Use Existing Text dialog opens in Read Only mode From the dialog select the row number of the text you want to copy Click the Apply button and then the Close button The Text ID and Text fields are updated with data from the copied text and the Use Existing Text dialog closes Click OK to exit the Alarm Setup dialog Publication 2711 6 0 Publication XXXX X X X Month Year Chapter Objectives Using the Tag Editor Working with Tags Chapter 1 9 This chapter shows how to enter tag information for an application project using the Tag Editor It contains the following sections Section Page Using the Tag Editor 19 1 Validating Tag Addresses 19 4 Defining Tags 19 5 Saving Tags 19 7 Viewing Tags 19 7 Inserting and Deleting Tags 19 7 Copying Tags 19 8 Duplicating Tags 19 9 Finding Tags 19 10 Sorting Tags 19 11 Printing Tags 19 12 Using Tools 19 15 Tag Import Export Utility 19 15 Importing Tags 19 16 Handling Data Co
499. seconds The default is 500 Publication 2711 6 0 8 6 Creating Push Buttons Publication 2711 6 0 Write Tag Specifies the name of the tag address to write the single bit or value Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Indicator Tag Specifies the name of a tag address that controls when the push button changes appearance with each state Each state can have unique visual characteristics inner text inner graphic fill Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor This Option Means No Indicator Tag default Push button changes to next state when pressed Indicator Tag Push button changes state after bit or value is written same as Write Tag to the Write Tag address Indicator Tag Push button changes state after different from Write Tag eit or value is written to the Write Tag address and estate value is read from Indicator Tag address Same Write Tag Different Write Tag amp Indicator Tag amp Indicator Tag INITIAL INITIAL state STATE y y A 8 O a O No Indicator Tag g gle a alg y z z D INITIAL STATE E a y y y NY N N SS N Step Description Step Description Step Description Button pressed Button pressed Button pressed Button changes to Bit or value written
500. selection to the Clipboard Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard Undo Reverses the last edit operation Publication 2711 6 0 Tool Bar Format Bar Tool and Bitmap Summary Publication 2711 6 0 Edit Tools Object ones Attributes state eae Inner Text pE Inner Graphic Zoom In Zoom Out Object Formatting Tools Blink Toggle Fore Background Fill Pattern Line Type Shape Group Ungroup E Bring to Front Fal Send to Back Opens a dialog that lets you edit the attributes of the selected object Changes the state of a multistate or list object to the next state or the previous state The State boxdisplays the current state Adds or edits inner text for each state of an object Adds or changes an inner graphic to the selected state of a multistate object Increases the screen view to the next higher magnification Reduces the screen view to the next lower magnification Toggles blinking on or off for the selected object or selected state of an object Toggles the foreground and background colors for the selected object or selected state of an object Changes the fill pattern of an object or selected state of an object Changes the line type of the selected object Changes the shape of the selected object Groups selected objects into a single unit Ungroups the selected group of objects Moves the selected object in front of other objects Moves the selected object in back o
501. shows how to download a PVA file to a Panel View terminal using the Application File Transfer Utility ATTENTION When downloading using Pass Through with the processor in run mode verify the rack address of the target terminal Downloading to an incorrect rack address may result in unexpected operation or damage to equipment To download an application Click the Download tool or choose Download from the File menu 4 Upload Download Select Download parameters Destinati gt F eee via Pass Through Den Click OK to start Select target device for download gt MAEmIEnTE Cancel download DOS Memory Card l _ 4 Depending on the Destination selected you may have to click Communication Drivers Setup to edit verify Select appropriate driver intemal DF1 z terminal parameters Active drivers DF1 COM2 Enter name of PVA file you want to Eile Name download or click Browse to search gt TEST PvA _Browse _ fora file I Download only if different from current application Check this box to download the Terminal Protocol application only if it is different from CNET AS232 a the application loaded in the terminal bH RS232 Select the type of terminal you are After clicking OK the following dialog opens downloading application FU m A hs praia iij Terminal resets verifies and starts application Publication 2711 6 0 23 2
502. specific tag is selected the Tools menu gives a list of available tools From the list select the tool needed In some cases the Tools list may also depend on what software is installed on the computer system For example e List Editor is the same as the Summary command on the View menu It brings up a new Tag Editor table view e Form Editor is the same as the Form command on the View menu It brings up the Tag Form dialog for the selected tag e Import and Export access the Tag Import Export Utility The Tag Import Export utility copies SLC and PLC 5 tag information from a supported file format to a project and vice versa The supported ASCII file formats are This file format Advanced Programming Software APS the ASCII documentation file produced by the APSIE utility This file format is for the SLC processor only For more information see the APS Import E xport Utility User anual publication 1747 6 7 Advanced Interface Al series software the WINtelligent series version of the CSV format Comma Separated Value CSV the comma separated value format used by software packages such as Excel For more information see your user manual for the software package you are using Important The Import function does not import files created without keywords or files created with annotations Publication 2711 6 0 19 16 Working with Tags Publication 2711 6 0 Importing Tags To import tags 1
503. spreadsheet Each row contains cells or fields which define the attributes of the alarm to select a row click the row number e to select a cell click on the cell or press TAB or arrow keys Some cells require you to enter text some have drop down lists and others have check boxes to enable disable an option Filters alarms by Trigger field Opens the Use Existing Text dialog in Read Only mode Sorts the selected field are or numerically Edit the alarm fields as necessary Add alarms by choosing Append Alarm from the popup menu for each alarm you want to add When done click OK to exit dialog or select another tab Alarm Fields Creating Alarms 15 17 Alarm Fields Description Notes Text Enter the alarm text that will appear in the Alarm Maximum characters 255 Banner and Alarm List when the alarm is triggered The text can include time date or numeric variables Embedded variables must be in the same scan group as the alarm tags Value Bit Specify the value or bit offset the controller writes to ForBitorLSBit enter the bit offset from the trigger tag ad the Trigger Tag address when it detects an alarm dress that will trigger the alarm condition This causes the alarm text to appear in the e valid range is 0 to 255 for bit unsigned signed Alarm Banner or Alarm List integer or BCD data types For bit array the range is the array size e 0 is a valid alarm message For Value
504. ssage Display nner text for message displays can increment from MSG 0 Message 0 to MSG 1999 Message 1999 Goto Screen Button ner text is GoTo Goto Config Screen Button F nner text is Goto Config Screen The asterisk means the text exceeds ont the size of the object Resize object Return Button Betu nner text is Return EN Screen List Selector wn nner text for screen list selectors can increment from ST 0 State 0 to 254 State 254 The asterisk means the text exceeds the object e Resize object wn HoH Print Alarm Button SIN er text is P rint 5 Clear Alarm Button er textis Clear 5 5 Acknowledge Alarm Button ner textis Ack 5 Acknowledge All Button Ack All ner textis Ack All 5 Clear Alarm List Button Clear Alarm List er textis Clear Alarm List 5 5 Print Alarm List Button Print Alarm List ner textis Print Alarm List 5 Formatting Objects Setting Default Colors for Objects Working with Objects 7 13 In addition to adding inner text and graphics to objects you can apply different formatting options to objects and text including color For objects you can e change shape e change border e change fill pattern toggle blinking on off e change foreground background colors toggle foreground background colors For text you can e change text size
505. st copied to the computer 7 Click Done When you open the application the copied project will become the current project for the application Note Translated applications PVA files are downloaded to the terminal with only those project tags used by the application When copying PBA files to another computer only those tags used by the application are copied with the application Restoring a Project Moving an Application to Another Computer Managing Projects 21 7 If a project is deleted accidentally an application associated with it may be used to recreate the project 1 Open the application A dialog opens indicating that a project does not exist for the application You are asked if the project should be recreated 2 Select Yes The project is recreated with all the device and tag data required by the application Projects with the same name can reside on different computers However even though the name is the same the projects may contain different tags or share only some tags Before moving an application to another computer verify whether the project used by the application exists on the target computer e Search C AB Projects for a folder with the same project name Choose the Project Management command on the Application menu and search for the project name in the Existing Projects list If the project does not exist open the PBA file normally If the project does exist determine if you wa
506. state is the state number 0 to 15 The value you enter must be within the range of the Data Format selected on the Properties tab Data Format Range Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 4 BCD 0 to 9999 Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Octal 0 to 177777 Formats provided for data entry The terminal does not display or transfer these formats The value is converted when a different data format is selected Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Creating Control List Selectors This chapter describes how to create list type controls It contains the following sections Chapter 9 Section Page Helpful Hints 9 1 Standard Control Lists 9 2 Piloted Control Lists 9 2 Control List Options 9 4 Creating a Control List Selector 9 5 Setting Properties of a Control List Selector 9 6 Configuring States of a Control List Selector 9 10 Creating List Keys 9 12 Control list selectors can perform some of the same functions as push buttons including set value and on off controls When creating list type controls consider Configure entries for a control list from the States tab of the Control List Selector dialog or using the procedures described in Chapter 17 A control list selector supports a maximum of 255 states numbered 0 to 254 Use only the number of states required Each state in a control list is li
507. status tag in the Terminal Setup dialog Control and status tags must be different From the Control or Status tab in Terminal Setup correct the tag duplication Text foreground color is the same as its background color Text foreground and background colors are the same making the text invisible Change foreground and background colors so they are not identical Text string contains character s from external font file selected font size is invalid Double byte external font is in use and text contains double byte characters while an internal font size is selected Specify an external font size The address string data type does not match the tag data type The tag address doesn t match the data type of the tag For example the tag address is B3 0 2 but the tag data type is signed integer From the tag editor correct the mismatch between the tag address and the data type of the tag The initial state in this device refuses operator entry The initial power up state for the piloted control list does not allow operator access Open the object s dialog and set the initial state Access to User and LC or User Only The remote tags must be different from each other Each remote tag must be unique for an alarm setup Make the remote tags unique within the application Time Format does not support double byte characters Double byte font selected for Time Format
508. ste CTRL X for cut To change the application name 1 Click in the Application Name box to rename the application Drag pointer over text to highlight it then type a new name 2 Click OK to close dialog The new application name appears in the Application File Window and the title bar of the PanelBuilder workspace Working with Applications and Screens 6 9 Important The description is downloaded to the terminal with the application which means it uses terminal memory To enter or edit an application description 1 Enter a description in the Description box The text automatically wraps To change the location of the insertion point in the Description box move the I beam pointer or use the arrow keys When using the scroll bar the insertion point remains where it is until you move it To start a new line press CTRL ENTER To delete text drag pointer over text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE To replace text drag pointer over text to highlight it then type the new text To add text position cursor where you want to insert text and then type the new text Use any of the standard Window editing functions to edit text 2 When done click the OK button Publication 2711 6 0 6 10 Working with Applications and Screens Opening a New Screen To create a new screen in the application Screen 1 Click the New Screen tool on the tool bar or choose New from New the
509. stination folder for installing PanelBuilder files and the AB Utilities software The default is C AB e PanelBuilder files are copied to the appropriate folders Select the PanelBuilder folder Windows Start Menu Programs for storing program icons When the setup utility finishes PanelBuilder programs will appear on the Start menu under Programs gt PanelBuilder 2 RSLinx setup utility e Select destination folder for RSLinx files The default is C Program Files Rockwell Software RSLinx e Select the Rockwell Software folder Windows Start Menu Programs for storing program icons e RSLinx files are copied to appropriate folders When the setup utility finishes RSLinx programs will appear on the Start menu under Programs gt Rockwell Software PanelBuilder Programs In Windows 95 PanelBuilder programs are accessed using the Start button In Windows 3 1 program icons are accessed from the PanelBuilder group icon PanelBuilder includes the following components e Application File Transfer Utility transfers converted applications PVA files between a computer and Panel View terminal within Windows but outside of PanelBuilder e Font Tool optional creates font files for specific languages which can be accessed within PanelBuilder e PanelBuilder creates applications for Panel View terminals e PanelBuilder Release Notes displays the most updated information including problems and workarounds for the Pan
510. t 2 Click the Line Type tool on the Format bar Or choose Line Type from the Format menu The Line Type submenu opens 3 Choose the line type you want for the selected object The line type changes but the object maintains all other characteristics such as shape fill pattern and so on If you select an object that can t have an invisible border the line type commands are dimmed to show the line type can t be changed Publication 2711 6 0 17 6 Formatting Objects and Text Publication 2711 6 0 State zE Changing Fill Pattern The interior of rectangular objects can be filled with a solid color or a pattern You can apply a different fill pattern to each state of a multistate object so that the fill pattern changes with each state The default fill pattern is white Multistate Push Button with Different Fill Patterns N State 0 Fill i Bar Graphs State 1 Fill with Different Fill Patterns NS g y State 2 Fill Push Button with Inner Graphic and Fill On color or grayscale terminals you can not assign fill patterns to circles or ellipses On monochrome monitors valid fill patterns for circles and ellipses are black white or none To add a fill pattern 1 Select the object 2 If the object is a multistate object select a state e From the tool bar select a state from the State box e Or choose Next State or Previous State from the Format menu 3 Click the Fill tool on the Format bar O
511. t data type Use the TAB key to move to the Data Type field and press ALT J to display the list of available formats Array Size The size of the array Maximum characters 16 ethe array size must be an integer eBit Array is 1 16 edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable eCharacter Array is protocol characters dependent Description The description of the Maximum characters 255 edo not use tabs carriage returns non printable tag eany printable characters eyou can type the information in this field or use the description editor To access the description editor e Place the cursor in the description field e Click the right mouse button e Choose Editor from the menu e When finished typing editing your description click OK Publication 2711 6 0 19 6 Working with Tags Field Node Name Description The node with which you want this tag Valid Characters Maximum characters 32 eA Z a 2z 0 9 Notes f you type an invalid character the Tag Editor beeps and does not display it associated ehyphen underscore _ enode name cannot be identical to a tag name or terminal percent name ethe node name must match the controller name entered in the Communication Setup dialog Terminal Setup enode name cannot begin with 0 9 hyphen or percent enode names are not case sensitive edo not use blanks tabs carriage returns non printable characters Address The d
512. t object one alarm one trigger or one text string in the application Each cell represents one field of data in a row Some cells require you to e enter text e select an option from a drop down list e click a box to toggle an option on X or off Pai dome LJ Ta ssa a Ce oe ci Recrprmesd Coes E iT k Ba th ET F bii hii ia r xag khk oo E C T FH cb L Scroll UA Bars E H Freya pgi eee poiga m Coe ed ey er y mT m ct ee Selecting Rows Cells or Columns To select a cell Click on the cell or press TAB or the arrow keys A gray border around the cell indicates the cell is selected To select a block of cells 1 Select a cell in one corner of the block you want to select 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse until the desired selection is highlighted Or hold down the SHIFT key and use the arrow keys to highlight the block PanelBuilder Basics 5 11 To select a single row Click on the row number at the left edge of the worksheet The row is highlighted indicating it is selected To select more than one row 1 Click on the row number of the first row you want to select hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to the last row you want to include in the selection 2 Release the mouse button Selected rows are highlighted To select a single column Click on the column header at the top of the spreadsheet The column is highlighted
513. t selector Type Specifies the type of control list Standard or Piloted e Fora Standard list control list items are selected by an operator e Fora Piloted list control list items are selected by either the operator or the logic controller writing to the search tag address Initial State Specifies the control list selection on initial powerup of the terminal and the initial value sent to the write tag address The value of the initial state overrides the initial value in the Tag Editor Write Creating Control List Selectors 9 7 Specifies the type of data to send to controller Single Bit or Value e For Single Bit 2 state control list selector only the terminal writes to a bit address To enable Single Bit as an option you must reduce the number of states to 2 on the States tab e For Value the terminal writes to a word address Select the format of the data from the Data Format list box The data type of the write tag must be compatible with the selected format for the application to validate Use this Format With this Tag Data Type Signed Integer Signed Integer 4 BCD 4BCD Binary Hexadecimal Octal Unsigned Integer Unsigned Integer or Bit Array Contacts If Single Bit was selected in the Write area select Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts for the 2 state selector Select To Normally Open Send value of 0 when control list is in state 0 and value of
514. ta files e communication network on which application will run The PanelBuilder Configuration Software package includes e 3 inch installation disks to install PanelBuilder Software INTERCHANGE or RSLinx Lite Software AB Utilities Software e PanelBuilder Configuration Software user manual e PanelView Operator Terminal user manual e Getting Started manual e PanelView File Transfer Utility manual Publication 2711 6 0 P 2 Contents of Manual Preface This manual is organized as follows Chapter Title Description Preface Describes the purpose and contents of the manual the intended audience and conventions used 1 Overview of P anelBuilder Describes PanelBuilder and product features 2 Installation Tells how to install P anelBuilder on a personal computer 3 Planning an Application Gives guidelines for planning an application Also describes worksheets for application planning 4 Communications Overview Gives an overview of DH 485 DH and Remote I O communications 5 PanelBuilder Basics Covers some basics on using PanelBuilder 6 Working with Shows how to open close and save application files and screens Also tells how to Application Files and Screens exit Pane Builder 7 Working with Objects Describes how to access create and edit objects Also describes basic operations such as how to select size move group and zoom ob
515. tates tab to e edit and format text for each message e enter a value to trigger each message if required insert a graphic for each message e edit format options for the the message display e add or delete the number of messages for the display To configure messages 1 Click the States tab on the Message Display dialog A spreadsheet opens Each row represents a message The default is 2 messages row 0 and row 1 and an error state row E The fields in each row define the message text and the visual characteristics of each message 2 Edit message fields as necessary 3 Click OK when done to exit the Message Display dialog The Value field appears only if Value was selected under Read on the Properties tab Error State Prees right meirar burian an Drisht deglap meni Editing Number of Messages A message display supports a maximum of 2 000 messages 0 to 1 999 Use only the number of messages required To add messages to a message display Choose Append State from the popup menu for each message you want to add A new message is added after the last message but before the error state Each state you add is created with the defaults of message 0 To delete a message select the row number of the message you want to delete and choose Delete State from the popup menu Publication 2711 6 0 Creating Message Displays 13 9 Entering Message Text The Text field contains the text that will display fo
516. tearate duces sued 7 8 Sizing OBJEC rtean com edaecungsh e bo kee s oboe 7 9 Moving Objects icv cesoes eke pesggarseesoeseeseee beg 7 9 Grouping and Ungrouping Objects ccc eee eee 7 10 Stacking O Djeci i byaccud de bataiee betes r ao 7 11 ZOOMINGINGNG QU ic icbadeetecadetidacieawddendwes ad 7 11 Object Inner Text cs acceavisdesevcareeavevaws vanwawsdaws 7 12 Formatting Objects s ciciwiadbae eae bs daviw wet eee a baad 7 13 Setting Default Colors for Objects 0 cece eee 7 13 Editing ODSCUAINDUIS sc cusd critter edce wane eebean tuits 7 14 Configuring States of Multistate or List Objects 005 7 15 Entering a Description for an Object 200005 7 18 Hiddinga ODJECE cnwseracieattedenodied eee ees gue eed 2 7 19 Copying Cutting and Pasting Objects cee ese e eee 7 20 DelsIMGODIEGS covaseacew aes padeauet rawness seus cee 7 22 Reversing an Operation cece ete e ee ee ee eeeees 7 22 Chapter 8 Chapter OPJECUVES us iw tee ndri Ser wedeceestiedechhae ee 8 1 Helpful HINTS asa wots tots antant aieka obit Sete oot buat Wasa 8 1 Push Buton TYPES sx epa poea deaa seus cane ER A cee Pe 8 2 CONtECEIYDES coieyeoia ests wound hotbed a i ai 8 2 Push Button Text and Graphics iaaa 8 3 Creating Push Buttons aaa aana 8 4 Setting Properties of a Push Button aaan aaa 8 4 Configuring Push Button States aaa 8 8 Chapter 9 Chapter Objectives cc cece eee eee ees 9 1 Helpful Hints
517. ter completing an application screen The screen will then appear the same as it would on the Panel View terminal Publication 2711 6 0 16 2 Adding Graphics Graphic Objects Graphic Tools Fush Buttons Numeric Entry ASCII Entry Indicators Bar Graph Scale Message Display Graphics Screen Selectors Control List Selectors Numeric Data Display Line List Keys Connected Line Alarm List Alarm Buttons Rectangle Ellipse Circle Global Object Freeform Graphic Image Publication 2711 6 0 PanelBuilder provides tools for drawing a variety of shapes lines ellipses circles rectangles squares polygons connected lines and freeform drawings Zs Line Polygon Rectangle Circle Ellipse Freeform In addition you can import bitmap graphics created with other programs use standard ISA symbols and add text to screens The text tool lets you add text to a screen that s not linked to an object Graphics are created similar to control and display objects Unlike control and display objects however graphics can overlap Inside the display area of the screen the pointer appears as a to indicate where a line or shape appears when you start drawing Graphics are created by selecting commands from the Objects gt Graphics submenu or by selecting a tool from the toolbox Tool Function Draws a straight
518. ter tags in the Tag Editor using e Table View of the Tag Editor before the application is created e Tag Form dialog when creating objects 4 Validate and download the application to the PanelView terminal 5 Run the application While the application is running triggered alarms are added to the Alarm List Publication 2711 6 0 3 4 Planning an Application Safety Considerations Screen Worksheets Publication 2711 6 0 When placing push buttons on a screen ATTENTION Don t place emergency stop buttons or controls critical for safe operation on a screen Use separate hard wired operator interface devices The inside cover of this manual references appropriate standards e Don t place important buttons in the center of touch screens where they may be blocked temporarily by terminal messages the Alarm Banner or the scratchpad e Don t place push buttons in the same area on screens that follow one another An operator may press the same position mistaking a stop button on one screen for a start button on another ATTENTION Don t press multiple touch screen objects at the same time Pressing multiple objects simultaneously may result in unintended operation e Place touch screen objects far enough apart so the operator would naturally lift a finger to move to the next object Touch screens are intended for a single object press Push buttons are disabled for second after a screen change Also when a new s
519. tes switch Switch SWITCH Switch_5 Limit_switch LimitSwitch etc Click on the appropriate button to move among the occurrences of the tag name Click To Move to first occurrence in current view Move to previous occurrence Move to next occurrence Move to last occurrence in current view When done click the Cancel button or press ESC Sorting Tags EEE Table View only View v Tool bar Status bar Sort 1 BCDjfinteger Working with Tags 19 11 Tags may be sorted on any field or any number of fields in a user selected order Sorted tags are rearranged in the table so editing similar tags may be done more easily To sort tags 1 Choose Sort from the View menu Sort Column Sort Order Add gt lt Remove Help Cancel Her 2 Under Column select which field s to sort by e Double click on a field name in the Column box e Or highlight a field and then select Add The Tag Editor moves the field name to the Sort Order box You can specify any number of fields in your sort The default no fields in the Sort Order box is to sort by Tag Name 3 When all fields for the sort are entered click OK The Tag Editor sorts and displays the tags in the table view Fields are sorted in the order they are added to the Sort Order box To change the sort order 1 Highlight a field or fields in the Sort Order box 2 Select Remove to delete them 3
520. text HIGH text SP SP L O W SP text LOW text SP L O W SP 0 text LOW text L 0 W 0 text LOWtext E X D S textEXCEEDtext SP 1 g 2 5 SP text 1 25 text SP SP 3 4 5 SP text 345 text SP SP SP SP SP SP text text 0 texttext Working with Inner Graphics State Ey AA Formatting Objects and Text To edit an ASCII variable 1 Select the object For a multistate object select the state containing the variable 2 3 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar 4 Select the A 6 ASCII_Data placeholder 5 Click the Embedded Variable tool and choose Edit Variable to open the Variable dialog 6 Edit the formatting options then click OK to exit the dialog The A 7 ASCII_Data placeholder is updated For multistate objects you can edit the ASCII variable directly from the State tab Text field of the Object s dialog You can add an inner graphic to a button or multistate object not list objects For multistate objects you can enter a different graphic for each state The graphic appears only when the object is in the specified state The inner graphic appears inside the object and is linked to the object When you move or delete the object the inner graphic is also moved or deleted On Off Type Push Button State 0 Inner Graphic TO State 1 Inner Graphic Fe The inner graphic can be an ISA symbol or a bitmap gra
521. that tag e Or use the scroll bar or PageUp or PageDown keys to move to a different row e Or change to the form view To display all tags in the project Do this choose Summary from the View menu only data types of 4BCD unsigned or signed integer or word array choose BCD Integer from the View menu another copy of current view click or choose New from Window menu To select a row use the left mouse button to click in the Status Column for that row To insert a tag Do this click or choose Insert from Edit menu delete a tag click or choose Delete from Edit menu The tag is deleted from the current project and cannot be retrieved cuta tag click or choose Cut from Edit menu The tag is deleted from the current project but can be retrieved with the Paste command Publication 2711 6 0 19 8 Working with Tags Copying Tags FEE Table View only Cut Chine Dap Giht inscri Ela Depligate Dine Geplicais Several Publication 2711 6 0 hn Find Deplican Once Oupiceie fevers Many tags in the table view have the same data type node name or other attributes Tags may be selected copied and pasted with all their fields or individual fields may be copied Since tags or their fields are copied to the Microsoft Windows clipboard they can be pasted in another application even an application in another project When a tag is copie
522. the Getting eating stared Started manual Files are copied to AB PBWIN GS Installs BMP files used by the Import E xport Graphics Bitmap Library function in AB PBWIN PBLIB nstalls demo application files for the PanelView Demo Files terminals Demo files are copied to AB PBWIN DEMOS Loads INTERCHANGE software which allows you to configure communication drivers for transferring INTERCHANGE applications Files are copied to C RSI INTERCHANGE is the default selection in Windows 3 x You can load INTERCHANGE or RSLinx not both Loads RSLinx software which allows you to configure communication drivers for transferring applications Files are copied to Program Files R ockwell Software RSLinx is the default selection in Windows 95 NT You can load RSLinx or INTERCHANGE not both in Windows 95 RS Linx Publication 2711 6 0 2 4 Publication 2711 6 0 Installation Installation Procedure If the installation procedure detects the same version of PanelBuilder AB Utilities INTERCHANGE or RSLinx Lite software you are given the option of reinstalling these components If the installation detects a newer version of software than what you are installing you are given the option of downgrading If you try to install RSLinx in Windows 95 and INTERCHANGE is installed you are warned of the conflict The same is true if you try to install INTERCHANGE and RSLinx is already installed To install PanelBuilde
523. the SHIFT key and drag the column to a new location Columns are reordered The column order is maintained when you exit the spreadsheet Cutting or Copying and Pasting Selections To copy or cut and paste cells rows or columns 1 Select the area you want to copy 2 Hold down the right mouse button and choose Cut Ctrl X or Copy Ctrl C from the popup menu The data is placed on the clipboard replacing the clipboard s previous contents 3 Select the area in which you want to paste the contents of the clipboard or click on a single cell 4 Click the right mouse button and choose Paste Ctrl V from the popup menu The contents of the clipboard are pasted into the selected area Or if you selected a single cell the contents are pasted into the area starting with the cell Cells rows and columns can be copied cut pasted to and from Excel using commands or keys on the popup menu PanelBuilder Defaults PanelBuilder Basics 5 13 Adding Inserting and Deleting Rows Regardless of what operation you are performing rows are added inserted and deleted in the same way Select a row and choose the appropriate command from the spreadsheet popup menu To add a new row Click the right mouse button and choose Append from the menu A new row is added after the last row The row is created with defaults from the last row To insert a row 1 Click the row number below where you want to insert a new row 2 Click
524. the differences Publication 2711 6 0 Adding Unknown Tags or Devices to a Project Managing Projects 21 9 When you open an existing application it is possible that the application devices or tags are not in the project This section shows how to load unknown tags or devices in a project PanelBuilder displays the following dialog if the application you are opening contains devices terminal controller or tags that do not exist in the application s project g Device found in application being opened that does Project Name Device Name RIO_min Would you like to add this Device to the Project Add All Add None Cancel Open Project Database not exist in the Project rio_atp database The dialog displays the name of the first device or tag not found in the project You must tell PanelBuilder what to do with unknown tags The options are Click To Yes Add named device or tag to project database Ignore device or tag not adding it to the No d project database Add All Add all unknown devices or tags to the project database Add None Ignore all unknown devices or tags and open the application Cancel Open Cancel the open Publication 2711 6 0 21 10 Managing Projects Setting Preferences for Replacing or Adding Tags and Devices Publication 2711 6 0 You can control the behavior of PanelBuilder when opening an application Choose Preferen
525. the file does not contain any screens the Screens box is empty ST1 4S41 Pid Kopad FRH doce Aerie a ae Application Name You are ready to create a new application screen See page 6 10 Publication 2711 6 0 Working with Applications and Screens 6 5 Opening an To open an existing application file Existing Application p gt The bottom of the file menu lists the 4 most recently opened applications To reopen one of these files choose a file 1 Click the Open File tool on the tool bar Or choose Open from the File menu Workstation Setup 1 CAMABSPEWINSGSSIMKE Y 2485 PBA 2 CMABSPEWINSGSSICKY2RIO PBA 3 C MABAPBWINSMSOK CBA 4 CAB PEWINSGSSSMEV2RIO PBA The File Name list box shows all PanelBuilder application pba at the current location e To locate a file on another drive select the drive name in the Drives list box e To locate a file in another folder select a folder from the Folders list Scroll through the filenames until you find the one you re looking for 2 From the File Name list box select the file you want to open and click the OK button Or double click on the file name 3 A dialog opens to verify a one to one correspondence between tags devices in the application and tags devices in the project You can perform the verification without displaying this dialog For details on how to hide the dialog see the next page gpm Vou ey ee edi ee E A Tegin to Ped Detebose han fe
526. the text size applies to the entire screen list Publication 2711 6 0 11 2 Creating Screen Selectors Goto Screen Button Goto Config Screen Button Return Screen Button Screen List Selector The Goto screen button when pressed displays a specific screen MAIN MENU The Goto Config Screen button when pressed displays the Panel View Terminal Configuration Mode menu CONFIG SCREEN The Return screen button when pressed displays the previous screen This button doesn t provide a continuous link back to the first screen PREVIOUS SCREEN A Screen List Selector contains a menu or list of screens from which the operator can make a selection A cursor indicates the current selection The operator uses the up and down arrow keys on the terminal to move the cursor and the Enter key to enter the selection Touch screen only terminals require list keys on the screen enabling the operator to move the cursor through the list Conveyor Controls ml pP Conveyor Controls kd Pump Controls a G Heater Controls List Keys Heater Controls Each screen list selector is assigned a function key or touch cell to activate the list for operator input This allows multiple lists to appear on a screen Another way to activate a screen list selector on keypad terminals is to use the left or right arrow keys on the terminal s keypad Conveyor Controls Prelo
527. time you press a key the view changes to another 3 When finished click the Done button To copy an imported graphic to the clipboard 1 Select the name of the graphic you want to copy to the clipboard 2 Click the Copy button The graphic is copied to the clipboard 3 When finished click the Done button You can now exit PanelBuilder and paste the graphic from the clipboard into another program such as Paintbrush Publication 2711 6 0 Adding Graphics 16 15 To export an imported graphic to a file 1 Select the name of the graphic you want to export Color bitmaps are exported in the format they are stored in PanelBuilder If a full color bitmap was reduced to 16 colors when imported it is exported as a 16 color bitmap 2 Click the Export button The Save As dialog opens Save As BE File name Folders bmp c ab pbwin pblib eyes 3 ab Cancel 3dbutton bmp 3dpb_b bmp 3dpb_g bmp 3dpb_gr bmp 3dpb_r bmp 3dpb_y bmp cny2 bmp cny3 bmp ddi A bwi Network E pbwin amp pblib Save file as type Drives Bitmap Images BMP 7 amp c mcintyre_c 3 In the File Name box enter a file name for saving the graphic If you omit the file type PanelBuilder adds BMP You can change the drive and folder before entering the file name 4 Click OK You return to the Import Export Graphics dialog 5 When finished click the Done button To delete an imported graphic 1
528. tis setto 1 Bit1 Trigger entry 0 when bit is setto 1 and trigger entry 1 when bitis setto 0 Read Tag Specifies the name of the tag address the terminal reads to highlight a displayed entry If the tag does not exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Publication 2711 6 0 12 22 Creating Bar Graphs Indicators Numeric Displays Publication 2711 6 0 The Value field appears only if Value was selected under Read on the Properties tab Configuring Entries of a List Indicator Use the States tab to e edit and format text for each list entry e enter a value for each list entry if required e add or delete entries as required To configure entries of a list indicator 1 Click the States tab on the List Indicator dialog A spreadsheet opens Each row indicates an entry in the indicator list The default is 16 entries row 0 to row 15 The fields in each row define the text that will appear for each entry and how it will be formatted 2 Edit the entries as necessary 3 Click OK to exit the List Indicator dialog rea ii aT Lat 4 q ITOT iE fal Sali a2 ga a FEEEEEEELELELELE FARAPA TETES TENEAN Bt Bh ds OE is E ss is Bs ss ss Bhs is Bs hs L Paree Editing Number of Entries A list indicator supports a maximum of 255 entries 0 to 254 Use only the number of entries required To add entries to a list indicator 1 Choose Append St
529. tkok Exiberoteack The PanelView writes the trigger value 15 to the Ack address Ex1Ack defined for the Extruderl trigger Extruder1 pP E 15 Berur F E 30 Ixcrudesi A P E 13 trudl amp P E 19 Pxtcudes2 EF a 15 lxcrudest F E 20 Extruder p E 23 intruder E E 30 ENEA R r a 15 Extruder w P E The controller acknowledges Msg B activated by the Extruderl trigger by writing the alarm s trigger value 15 to the Remote Ack address Ex1R emoteAck of the Serer Both occurrences of Msg B activated by the Extruder 1 trigger trigger are acknowledged in the Alarm List Extruderl Extruder2 Extruder2 Extruderl Extruderl Extruderl Extruder2 Alarm List Msg B Acknowledged Msg B MsgE MsgA Msg D Msg B Acknowledged Msg A Publication 2711 6 0 The PanelView reads the value 15 from the Remote Ack address in the controller Txuccudarl EJ Exc codec I The PanelView writes the Acknowledge All Value 99 to Creating Alarms 15 31 Controller Acknowledges All Alarms for a Specific Trigger The controller acknowledges all alarms activated by the same trigger The controller writes the Acknowledge All Value defined for the trigger to the trigger s Remote Ack address The terminal notifies the controller that it acknowledg
530. to a bit address e For Value the terminal writes to a word address Select the format of the data from the Data Format list box The data type of the write tag must be compatible with the selected format for the application to validate Use this Format With this Tag Data Type Signed Integer Signed Integer 4 BCD 4BCD Binary peredecinal Unsigned Integer Octal or Bit Array Unsigned Integer Contacts If Single Bit was selected in the Write area select Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts for the 2 state push button Momentary and latched push buttons have a default initial state of 0 Select To Normally Open Send value of 0 when push button is in state 0 and value of 1 when push button is in state 1 Normally Closed Send value of 1 when push button is in state 0 and value of 0 when push button is state 1 The Contacts area is dimmed if Value was selected in the Write area Initial State Specifies the initial state of a maintained or multistate push button and the initial value sent to the write tag address The value of the initial state overrides the initial value in the Tag Editor Hold Time Specifies the length of time a momentary push button remains in the next state after being released The hold time should exceed the scan time of the controller to insure that each state change is read by the controller at least once Hold time values are 0 50 250 500 750 or 1000 milli
531. ton is defined but the alarm is not enabled for display Enable the alarm for display Alarm Trigger cannot be the same as the acknowledge or handshake tags The alarm trigger is assigned the same tag name as the Ack or Handshake tag Change the tag names so they are unique Alarms requiring acknowledgement cannot be acknowledged individually from the alarm list without the Enter list key An alarm that can be acknowledged in the alarm list does not have an Enter list key on the screen Add an Enter list key to the specified screen All states in this object refuse operator entry All states of the piloted control list have an access of Controller Only or None This is illegal Open the object s dialog and change the access for some of the states to User and Controller or User Only An alarm ack button must exist There is an alarm that requires and acknowledgement ack button Add an alarm acknowledge button to the alarm banner An alarm clear button must exist An alarm that does not require acknowledgement exists A clear button must be defined to clear the alarm Add alarm clear button to the alarm banner An alarm banner must exist An alarm banner is not defined and an alarm is enabled for display Turn off the display for the alarm or create an alarm banner for the application Application translation failed a Screen uses too many Terminal
532. tor from the e Format bar while in Inner Text mode e Alarm tab of the Alarm Editor e State tab of a multistate or list object s dialog To copy text into an object while in Inner Text mode 1 Select the object in which you want to copy the text 2 Click the Inner Text tool on the tool bar Or choose Inner Text from the Format menu State 3 For multistate objects select the state in which you want to copy the text ES 4 Click the Use Existing Text tool on the Format bar Or choose Use Existing Text from the Edit menu The Use Existing Text dialog opens in Read Only mode 5 From the dialog select the row number of the text you want to copy Use the Sort By or Filter options to help you locate text 6 Click the Apply button The object text is replaced with the selected text and the Use Existing Text dialog closes Publication 2711 6 0 Using the Text Editor 18 11 To copy text from the State tab of an object s dialog 1 8 Select the object in which you want to copy the text 2 Double click the object 3 4 Select the State tab Select the row number of the text you want replace with text in the Text Editor Choose Use Existing Text from the popup menu The Use Existing Text dialog opens in Read Only mode From the dialog select the row number of the text you want to copy Use the Sort By or Filter options to help you locate the text Click the Apply button and then the Clo
533. truderl Extruder2 Alarm List Msg B Acknowledged Msg B MsgE Msg A Acknowledged Msg D Acknowledged Msg B Acknowledged Msg A The PanelView reads the value 99 from the Remote Ack address in the controller Publication 2711 6 0 15 32 Creating Alarms Controller Acknowledges All Alarms for all Triggers The controller acknowledges all alarms in the terminal by setting a bit or value at the Ack All Alarms tag address The terminal sees a nonzero value at this address and then writes the Acknowledge All Value for each trigger to the Ack address for each trigger Optional Fields are enabled on the Alarm Setup tab and the Alarm Triggers tab Alarm Configuration 4 alarms are assigned to the Extruder1 trigger each with a different trigger value 6 alarms are assigned to the E xtruder2 trigger each with a different trigger value Allalarm messages are configured to display and must be acknowledged A Remote Ack tag Ack tag and Acknowledge All Value are defined for each trigger An Ack All tag is defined on the Alarm Setup dialog The controller uses this tag to acknowledge all alarms in the terminal Setup tise Tages Alea Bama Pop Up Ales Lr C Copet Digests Divabled F Dea Linta On Peer Lip as E AD Dijeri Dirabied Ti S ails vices hh het Aj Tap ae T kiam Date N Jreaeaer Tag Ack Teg Pemcte Ack Tea Txccucacl Erick Leo ocr Fr Pog Istroar3 Er Ack Ext Remocelic
534. tus Bar Turns the view of the status bar on or off View Sample Text Turns the view on or off for sample text Change Sample Text Opens a dialog allowing you to change the sample text for a font file Underline Adjustment Help Menu Commands About Turns the underline adjustment on or off to allow for underlining in double byte languages Description Displays copyright and release information for FontTool Publication 2711 6 0 22 6 Multilingual Support Creating Font Files To create a font file 1 Click the New Font tool on the tool bar or choose New Font from the File menu The Locale list box contains a list of font available definitions Available character sizes change with the font selection Each font definition has a name If the font has a subtype its name appears in parentheses for example Chinese Simplified Cheoee Font Charnirtrrislire Similar to the standard text sizes in ce PanelBuilder the width of the F Mih available sizes are multiples of 8 DEn The sizes you select will be available in PanelBuilder within parentheses in addition to the standard text sizes 2 From the Locale list select a font definition 3 Under Available Sizes select or deselect the character sizes you want to store in the font file and make available in your PanelBuilder application Deselecting character sizes will reduce the amount of storage required for the font file o
535. u must enter an even integer For Maximum String Width DH DH 485 DF1 80 Remote 1 0 128 DeviceNet 128 If the ASCII string is less than the string width the NULL character is appended before the string is sent to the controller The NULL character does not affect the display of the string Display Tag Specifies the source of the data displayed in the ASCII scratchpad If a display tag is not defined the scratchpad displays the last value entered The data type of the display tag must be Character Array The Array Size must be the same size as the String Width Show Current String on ASCII Scratchpad If selected the ASCII scratchpad displays the character string stored at the write tag address If not selected the string is not displayed Mask Characters A security feature that prevents the display of characters entered in the ASCII scratchpad The mask character replaces each ASCH character For example the characters PASSWORD would appear as HHHHHHHH in the scratchpad Chapter Objectives Helpful Hints Chapter 1 1 Creating Screen Selectors This chapter shows how to create screen selectors allowing an operator to navigate between screens in an application You can create screen buttons or a screen list The chapter sections are Section Page Helpful Hints 11 1 Goto Screen Button 11 2 Goto Config Screen Button 11 2 Return Screen Button 11 2 Screen List Selector 11 2
536. ublication 2711 6 0 Select a PanelView Font Appendix H Using ASCII Characters This appendix contains the ASCII Character Set and the Extended ASCII Character set You can access extended ASCII characters e directly within PanelBuilder e using the Windows Character Map Utility Fields not downloaded with an application such as tag name screen name and screen descriptions use the Windows character set not the extended character set in this appendix To access extended ASCII characters within PanelBuilder 1 Select an object 2 Enter inner text mode 3 Hold down the ALT key and enter the 4 digit decimal equivalent of the extended character using the numeric keypad You ll find the decimal equivalents of the extended ASCII characters on the next page Because Windows requires you to enter 4 digits add a 0 to the beginning of each number 4 When you release the ALT key the extended character appears in the text box For example to enter the character equivalent to decimal 235 hold down the ALT key and enter 0235 on the numeric keypad Extended character equivalent of decimal 0235 o C To access extended characters using the Character Map utility 1 Select and copy characters to the clipboard from the Windows Character Map dialog aw E chgractes sal SEH HEBA Ie TR Ae Z3A EE A el Re SHITE UI I ayn Tas EDR ACD SIE IPI A alee OU a ees i SASAR a i 2 From your PanelBuilder
537. ublication 2711 6 0 5 2 PanelBuilder Basics PanelBuilder Windows Each time you start PanelBuilder a PanelBuilder window opens This is where you create an application Window elements are described below Maximize Button Minimize Button Control Menu Title Bar F are akh Menu Bar y ipuin Format Bar Command Publication 2711 6 0 Border 4 Resizes Mouse Pointer eee Status Bar Feature How to use it Menu Bar Click a name on the menu bar to open a menu and display its commands Or press ALT X where X is the underlined letter in the menu name Command Click a command to choose it or carry outits action Or type the underlined letter in the command name Title Bar Drag to move a window Tool Bar Click a tool to carry outa frequently used command The tool bar toggles on and off from the View menu F ormat Bar Click a tool to format an object or text The format bar doesn t appear until you open an application Status Bar Shows what PanelBuilder is doing atthe moment The status bar toggles on and off from the View menu Control Menu Click to open the Control menu Double click to close a window Minimize button Click to reduce window to an icon Maximize button Click to enlarge a window Close button Closes the window Border Drag to change the size of a window Mouse pointer Use to select an item or object PanelBuilder Basics 5 3 S Application File Window Application Fi
538. ubset of all unused text by clearing all check boxes in the Filter dialog and then selecting the Unused check box To delete all unused text 1 Click the Select All button 2 Click the Purge button or choose Purge Text Item from the popup menu All unused text count of 0 is permanently removed from the application A popup shows the number of text items deleted To delete one or several unused text strings 1 Select the rows with a Count value of 0 to delete 2 Click the Purge button or choose Purge Text Item from the popup menu Renumbering Text Moving Text Using the Text Editor 18 9 To consolidate memory renumber text strings to eliminate gaps in the numbering sequence To check for numbering gaps select Text ID from the Sort By list box All Text ID numbers are sorted numerically To renumber a single text string 1 Double click the Text ID field of the text string you want to renumber 2 Type a unique number When you exit the Text Editor a warning message will display if duplicate numbers are detected The message indicates the row numbers containing the duplicate Text ID numbers You must renumber the text strings before exiting the Text Editor To renumber all text strings 1 Click the Select All button 2 Click the Renumber button All text strings are automatically renumbered starting at 1 To renumber a block of text strings 1 Select the row number of the first text string in the bl
539. uch Cell Enabled C E open Exceptions Dialog Exceptions Publication 2711 6 0 23 4 Validating and Transferring Applications Publication 2711 6 0 Printing Validation Messages To send validation messages to a printer e a printer must be connected to your computer e the computer must recognize the printer as a valid printer See the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for details on installing printers To set up the printer 1 Click the Print Setup button from the Exceptions dialog The standard Microsoft Print Setup dialog opens Print Setup currently HP LaserJet IIISi on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Specific Printer Options HP LaserJet IlISi on oi_100 tech3 LPT1 Network Orientation Paper Portrait Size Letter 8 172x11 in e mMm C Landscape Source Upper Tray j 2 If the default printer is not the one in use select a printer from the Specific Printer list box If it is not listed see below 3 Set appropriate attributes for your printer 4 Click the Options button to enter options specific to the printer you are using The Options dialog is different for each printer 5 When done click the OK button 6 Click the Print button from the Exceptions dialog to print the validation messages 7 Click Close to exit the Exceptions dialog If your printer is not listed e Check for hardware compatibility between your printer and one of the printe
540. uctions to an operator Message displays can show different types of information including the status of a process operator prompts time date numeric or ASCII variable The following examples show status information for Tank 1 Allen Bradley PanelView 900 2 TANK 1 LEVEL HIGH Lz Ls Loe TANK AA Pe IN oO 505 af LJ A L3 INFLOW OUTFLOW g LJ 9 Cc OPEN ICLOSED or pr OUT OJ LE J La Lez Les es Le Lre Le Lre la lt 2 Lro F0 Cen Fe Leo Cen Ces Lee ale j T Allen Bradley PanelView 900 TANK 1 LEVEL LOW L Ls Lo TANK 1 LA ES La OCG INFLOW OUTFLOW KF oJ CI OPEN CLOSED La Ce Cs J Gs Gs C Le KE lt J ro Leo en Lee Les eu Les Lee a Creating Message Displays 13 3 Message displays can contain variable data For details on how to insert a variable in a message display see Chapter 17
541. ues 20 2 20 17 20 18 Terminal Setup Advanced Options 20 21 Auto Repeat Settings 20 21 Backlight 20 22 Control Tags 20 24 20 28 Display Intensity 20 22 Handshake Timeout 20 22 Language Selection 20 22 Overview 20 2 Power Up Options 20 17 Preset Values 20 2 20 17 20 18 Reverse Video 20 22 Screen Saver 20 22 Status Tags 20 26 20 30 Time Date Formats 20 19 Text Adding New 18 3 Aligning 17 26 Background 1 7 7 16 16 8 16 9 Blink 7 16 Color 16 9 Copy Paste 18 4 Copying 18 10 Deleting Unused 18 8 Editing 18 4 Filtering 18 6 Foreground 7 16 Foreground Background Colors 17 29 Formatting 17 24 Inner 17 12 Moving 18 9 Printing 18 7 Renumbering 18 9 Sizing 7 16 17 25 Publication 2711 6 0 Sorting 18 6 Underline 7 16 Text Formatting 17 24 T T T T Aligning Text 17 26 Sizing Text 17 25 Underlining Text 17 27 Using the Blink Option 17 28 Using the Color Foreground Background Option 17 30 ick Mark Labels 12 8 ime Inserting in Object 17 13 Inserting in Text String 17 13 18 5 ime Date Setup 20 19 itle Bar 5 2 Tool Bar 5 2 5 5 Copy Tool B 1 Cut Tool B 1 Edit Attributes Tool B 2 Inner Graphic Tool B 2 Inner Text Tool B 2 New File Tool B 1 New Screen Tool B 1 Next State or Previous State Tool B 2 Open File Tool B 1 Open Screen Tool B 1 Paste Tool B 1 Save File Tool B 1 Turning On or Off 5 5 Undo Tool B 1 Zoom In Tool B 2 Zo
542. umns e None no sort column e Text ID numeric sort e Count numeric sort e Type object or alarm message e Text alphabetical sort To sort a column or field of data Sari bry From the Sort By list box select a column you want to sort ED The column is sorted numerically or alphabetically depending on the contents of the column Filtering Text You can filter text to display or work with only a subset of text strings in the application You can sort or print a filtered list To filter or select a subset of text strings 1 Click the Filter button in the Text Editor Tiridid Dasi E Push fiution E M Soe0n Selects E E B Enip E F Cmimi Lot beleim Selects all check boxes E Huiman inza EE Te apar E E i e thee a gt Aba B E Print Onde Object O teu Clears all check boxes The dialog displays a list of all instances where text is used in an application Initially all options are selected Publication 2711 6 0 Printing Text Using the Text Editor 18 7 2 Click the Clear All button to clear all check boxes 3 Click the check boxes of the options you want in the subset For example to create a subset that includes all text used by Alarms and Print Only Devices check those boxes only To create a subset of all unused text strings select the Unused check box All other boxes are cleared Click OK to exit the Filter dialog The Text Editor has filtered out all text except for the opt
543. un mode verify the rack address of the target terminal Downloading to an incorrect rack address may result in unexpected operation or damage to equipment To download an application to a terminal using Pass Through Open the application you want to download Choose Download from the Application menu Select the Download parameters Download Application Ea Destination KI E i Select Operator Terminal via Pass Through PI Ee AA Seah Start DOS Fil ancel VEE D sep le Click Setup to configure Remote I O or DH 485 Pass Through parameters Select RSLinx or p Communication Drivers pages 23 14 23 15 INTERCHANGE Driver gt G DH is active driver Active drivers DH Enter name of PVA file in which to save the translated P BA file or click Elle Name Browse to search for a file _ TEST PVA Browse Application is validated and translated to a PVA file If errors or warnings are detected the Exceptions dialog opens You must correct errors before download can proceed Warnings should be corrected but the download will proceed PanelBuilder software and terminal display status of download nee aul FILE TRANSFER STATUS tees aT TTL NET E J 50 Tiesa epa r a le Bia L a S BA mahr eet vas i Percent Complete In Progress Terminal resets verifies and starts application Publication 2711 6 0 23 14 Validating and
544. unction Key gt Touch Cell 2 From the Screen List box select the screen that you want to display when the screen button is pressed 3 Under Input e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list For touch screen terminals touch cell is automatically enabled Panel View 550 600 Touch Screen amp Keypad terminals support function key and touch cell input 4 When done click OK The selected function key displays a graphic of the screen button and an asterisk next to the key number indicating the key is used ts fr a Goto Button Asterisk Return Button Asterisk Publication 2711 6 0 Creating a Screen List Selector Push Buttons Screen Selectors Goto Return Goto Config Screen Screen List Selector Creating Screen Selectors 11 5 This section shows how to create and edit properties of a screen list selector On touch screen terminals the screen list aligns with the touch grid even if it s not visible To create a Screen List Selector 1 Click the Screen List Selector tool from the toolbox Or choose Screen List Selector from Objects gt Screen Selectors submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default size Or drag the pointer to size the screen list default size dragged horizontally 3 To place another Screen List Selector move the pointer to a new locati
545. up tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to configure terminal Could not retrieve terminal network data P anelBuilder couldn t find the network ormation necessary for download From the Setup tab Terminal Setup dialog press the Comms Setup button to configure terminal Could not retrieve RIO network master data PanelBuilder couldn t find the RIO controller information necessary for download Check the RIO controller settings and retry Data format unknown for tag tag name Publication 2711 6 0 Internal error Check tag information Contact A B support if error continues Message Delete Project From Database Are you sure Software Error and Warning Messages D 3 Meaning The selected project tag database will be permanently removed What to do Select Yes to delete the project or No to cancel operation Disk is full Translated file cannot be saved Not enough disk space to save translated file during a download Check available disk space Enter tag name before pressing Edit Tag button Pressed Edit Tag button before entering a tag name Before pressing Edit Tag button there must be a tag to edit enter a tag name Error closing file File may not be valid The file failed to close Cause could be a full disk or restricted access to network Check the amount of available disk sp
546. ur computer is connected for Single DH Network Specify address of Gateway device on local network for DH Multiple Networks Link ID Specify the unique ID number that identifies the local DH network to which your computer is connected This field is dimmed for a Single DH network Remote Bridge PLC SLC Node Address Specify address 0 77 ctai of the PLC on the remote DH network through which an application is transferred Dimmed if Single DH network selected Link ID Specify the unique ID number of the remote DH network through which an application is transferred Dimmed unless Multiple DH Networks is selected Operator Terminal SLC Scanner Slot Specify the number of the slot where the SLC scanner resides The default is the slot closest to the processor Starting Module Specify the starting module group of the PanelView terminal in the Remote 1 0 rack Rack Address Specify the address of the PanelView terminal on the Remote I O network Publication 2711 6 0 Validating and Transferring Applications 23 15 DH 485 Pass Through Setup When you click the Setup button from the Download or Upload Application dialog and the terminal is defined as a DH 485 terminal with an RS 232 port this dialog opens DH485 Pass Through Setup x Local Network Gateway Node Address 4 z Cancel Link ID 2 m Remote Network Terminal Node Address E Link ID fi Note If more than one COM port is
547. use Select a different number Text ID must start at 1 0 was entered as a message number Message numbers must start at 1 Enter message number starting with 1 Minimum number of tick marks for scale is 2 Tick marks will default to 2 Publication 2711 6 0 Entered value of 2 for scale tick marks Enter a new value Message No application open to associate project with Software Error and Warning Messages Meaning Tried to associate a project without opening an application first D 5 What to do Open an application and try again No data on clipboard Nothing on clipboard to paste Cut or copy object before pasting No default printer Use Control Panel to install and select a default printer A default printer hasn t been configured See your Windows User s Manual for details on how to install and select printers No file ID record found file name Internal error detected Cause could be a faulty disk drive or floppy disk Try again If error reoccurs contact Allen Bradley technical support No memory card command specified for download Tried to download to a memory card without specifying a memory card command Select a memory card command and try to download again No source file specified for upload Upload requires a source file destination Enter source file name before trying again Not enough memory to create tool bar Not enough
548. ut Chiles Copy Ctrl C Faste Chl Insert and Paste Ctrl Append State Ctr Insert State Ins Delete State Del Move State Up Ctrl U Move State Down Ctrl D Working with Objects 7 15 States are configured for multistate and list objects from the States tab of the object s dialog When you click the States tab in an object s dialog a spreadsheet opens Each object state is entered as a separate row in the spreadsheet The fields or cells in each row configure text for each state and other visual attributes e to select a row click the row number e to select a column click the column header e to select a cell click on the cell or press TAB or arrow keys Hira Press fight menat bunan ar Cirih in display menu Embedded Wariable Use Existing Text Hew Text ID The fields that appear in each row depend on whether the object is a multistate object or a list object The multistate objects are e 2 state and multistate push buttons e multistate indicator e message display The list objects are control list selector e screen list selector e list indicator Publication 2711 6 0 7 16 Working with Objects The table below shows the fields that appear for multistate and list objects When you open the States tab the fields are arranged in order of importance Fields that require editing will appear first Optional fields appear later Fields that are unique to a specific o
549. ut an object from one application to another 1 Select the object you want to copy or cut 2 Click the Copy or Cut tool from the tool bar Or choose Copy or Cut from the Edit menu PanelBuilder copies cuts the object to the clipboard 3 Close the application screen 4 Save the application file if necessary 5 Close the application file Or start another session of PanelBuilder 6 Open the application file to receive the object 7 Open the screen on which you want to paste the object 8 Click the Paste tool or choose Paste from the Edit menu An outline of the object appears 9 Move the outline to a new location and click the left mouse button to paste the object To change the attributes of the pasted object double click the object When Copying Cutting Objects to a Different Application Type When copying or moving objects to an application that was created for a different terminal type you will need to update the pasted objects appropriately Monochrome to Color or Grayscale Application When copying moving objects from a monochrome to a color or grayscale application a dialog opens asking you to select e foreground color for the pasted objects default is white e background color for the pasted objects default is black Color to Monochrome Application When copying or moving an object from a color to a monochrome application objects are pasted as follows e brighter colors of objects are converted to white e
550. vate the numeric entry object e For keypad terminals select a function key from the list e For touch screen terminals touch cell is automatically enabled The Panel View 550 600 Keypad amp Touch screen terminal supports function key and touch cell input The selected function key displays a graphic of the numeric entry object and an asterisk next to the key number aiala A oog ooo F1 f F1 i Asterisk f Asterisk Keypad Enable Cursor Point Write Tag Specifies the name of the tag address where the terminal writes the entered value If the tag doesn t exist enter a tag name Edit the tag definition including data entry limits scale values initial value using the Edit Tag button or the Tag Editor Valid data types for the write tag are unsigned signed integer 4BCD or floating point Creating Data Entry Controls 10 9 Display The Display area defines properties of the data that displays in the numeric entry object Display Tag specifies the name of the tag address from which to read the display data Usually the write tag and display tag are the same One directional protocols such as DeviceNet however require different addresses for the Display tag and Write tag The Write tag is an input and the Display tag is an output Data displayed in a numeric entry object may or may not be scaled e To display the entered value regardless of the value stored at the controller don t enter a display tag leave
551. w Open Close application The alarm banner is created as a separate screen that is global to all screens in the application Control objects covered by the banner are disabled when the banner displays on the terminal To create the Alarm Banner 1 Choose Create Alarm Banner from the Screen menu The Alarm Banner screen opens The default banner appears at the top of the screen and is created with Attributes Create Alarm Banner one line alarm message display cannot be deleted e Clear button gt On color terminals the default background color of the Alarm Banner and alarm objects is red and the foreground color is white On grayscale terminals the background is black and the foreground is white You can change these colors using the Color Palette Alarm Message Display gt F ee i ete ET Cannot be deleted ee Ss pz Alarm Button lt Screen Background The Alarm Banner can be moved and sized but cannot be sized smaller than the objects on the banner itself ots Bush Buttons Screen Selectors 2 Create other alarm buttons you want to appear in the Alarm Banner by choosing the appropriate objects from the Objects gt Mumenc Entry ASCII Entry Alarm Buttons submenu Control List Selectors If the Alarm Banner is selected you must deselect it before Indicators Numeric Data Display Bar Graph Scale Message Display ele le ele selecting
552. w terminal on a Remote I O network between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KT B KT2 communications card and the RS 232 port of a PanelView terminal connected to Port 0 of an SLC 5 04 For These Terminals Remote 1 0 1784 KL on DH Bese DHE DH Remote 1 0 1784 KT 1784 KT2 on DH Kanaat DE es DH between a computer on the DH link using a 1784 KT B KT2 communications card and the DH port of a PanelView terminal on the DH link 1784 KTC on ControlNet ControlNet between a computer on the ControlNet network using a 1784 KTC communications card and the ControlNet port of a PanelView terminal 1784 KTX on DH485 DH 485 between a computer on the DH 485 network using a 1784 KTX communications card and the DH 485 port of a PanelView terminal Publication 2711 6 0 2 12 Installation For Pass Through Select For These Terminals To Transfer Applications k using a 1784 KTX communications card and Remote 1 0 between the Remote 1 0 a computer on the DH lin port of a PanelView terminal on a Remote 1 0 network 1784 KTX on DH RS 232 DH 485 between a computer on the DH lin the RS 232 port of a PanelV iew terminal k using a 1784 KTX communications card and connected to Port 0 of an SLC 5 04 DH between the DH port of a Pane a computer on the DH lin View termin k using a 1784 KTX communications card and
553. ware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product PanelBuilder FontTool Panel View 550 Panel View 600 PanelView 900 Panel View 1400 SLC SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 MicroLogix Data Highway Plus are trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc PLC and PLC 5 are registered trademarks of Allen Bradley Company Inc RSLinx and INTERCHANGE are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Overview of PanelBuilder Installation Planning an Application Table of Contents Preface Intended Audience eee c cect eeeeeeee eens P 1 Software Package 0 cece eee et eee P 1 Contents Of Manual sssaaa eave iaeedadvatdeaedateenee va P 2 CONVENUONS a iuvsdwas erata urie sbeebs ka AAE EE YUA P 3 Related Publications suerte seb ie kee doek een ewee ae P 3 Technical Support SEryiCES sia owt id ew iee ieee heen es P 4 Software Firmware Upgrades 2 cc cee eeee ees P 4 Chapter 1 Chapter Objectives 2sstsaeeeicsnaesderrnevrava avenues 1 1 Whatis PanelBuilder
554. was expected or an SLC address where a PLC address was expected In the Block Transfer dialog enter the correct address for the specified block transfer number Publication 2711 6 0 Validation Messages Validation Message Unable to load file or one of its components Meaning PanelBuilder cannot open specified file What to do Verify that path contains AB BIN Reboot computer and try again Unknown graphic image An object or object state is assigned an inner graphic that no longer exists Select another inner graphic for the object or import a bit map graphic with the same name Unused Block Transfer Channel will be removed A block transfer defined in the Block Transfer dialog is not used by the application Remove it from the application or reference it Unused Trigger This alarm trigger is not being used by any alarms and will not be downloaded to the terminal Remove the trigger or use it in an alarm Used as indicator will display data written by a control device using the same tag Warning that PanelView is using data from write tag of control object to display data for indicator Nothing Using the same write tag data for the indicator eliminates ladder logic required to move data from the write tag to read tag Scale Offset Max Min or Initial value of tag name not valid or not in range A tag attribute isn t configured properly Open the Tag Editor f
555. when a new application is created or when you start a new session Help and Status Bar Information Status bar and help options provide immediate online assistance Predefined Objects and Drawings To simplify application development PanelBuilder provides a set of predefined objects such as push buttons bar graphs ISA symbols Additional graphics are available to create your own drawings or to enhance screens You can also import bitmap graphics monochrome or color created with other programs A variety of format options are available to change the appearance of objects and text Global Objects A global object references an object that appears multiple times in an application Any non graphic object can be designated as a global object You can access a global object from any screen When modifying a global object PanelBuilder automatically updates all links to it The PanelView terminal stores one copy of a global object regardless of the number of links to it Overview of PanelBuilder 1 3 Tag Editor The Tag Editor is used to enter update print import export application tags Each tag has attributes defining how an object interacts with a controller address Enter all tags at once using the table view or one tag at a time using the tag form dialog Color Palette A fixed color palette is available for creating color or grayscale applications For color terminals the palette supports 16 standard EGA colors For grays
556. whether to display the Last user screen on restart or the startup screen The default is to display the last user screen To display the startup screen clear the check box Under Memory Card specify what action the terminal should automatically take on a restart if a memory card is loaded in the terminal The memory card stores only one application Select To Always Load from Card Always load the application on the memory card Never Load from Card Require the operator to load a specific application from the memory card using the Memory Card Transfers option in the Configuration Mode menu Load from Card if Invalid Load the application on the memory card only if Application Detected the current application in the terminal is invalid If a memory card isn t loaded or if the card contains more than one file the terminal restarts with the application that was running before the restart From the terminal you can also manually download a memory card application to the terminal by selecting Memory Card from the Configuration Screen and then the Restore From Card option Specify whether or not to Use downloaded configuration settings on the first restart after a download The default is to use the configuration settings downloaded with the application To use the current settings in the terminal on a restart click the check box until the X disappears 8 Click OK to save the settings and exit the dialog Te
557. with this utility must be in a PVA format To create a PVA file for downloading you must download the PBA application to a DOS file from the Application menu of PanelBuilder Applications uploaded from the terminal are already in a PVA format To start the Application File Transfer Utility e In Windows 95 select Application File Transfer Utility from the PanelBuilder submenu under Programs on the Start menu oe e In Windows 3 x double click the Application File Transfer Utility icon in the PanelBuilder program group WINPFT EXE Application File PnP te Fie Tirai lh ap wet Transfer Utility fie In the Application File Transfer Utility applications are transferred from either the File menu or tool bar The dialogs are very similar to the PanelBuilder Download Upload dialogs Choose Or Click To Download Download a PVA file to a PanelView terminal To create a PVA file you must download the application to a DOS file from the Application menu in P anelBuilder Upload Upload an application from a PanelView terminal to a DOS PVA file To load the application in PanelBuilder open the PVA file from the PanelBuilder File menu The file is translated to a P BA file for PanelBuilder Verify 25 Compare application in terminal with the download application to verify that differences exist Exit Exit the Application File Transfer Utility Publication 2711 6 0 23 24 Validating and Transferring Appl
558. wo commands for saving an application e Use the Save command to save the application to the default drive and folder overwriting the previous version Sa PRE E mT eR er ere e Use the Save AS command to savea revised application with a ift new name so the previous version 1s not overwritten The first time an application is saved the Save As dialog opens so Reports the file can be named workstation Setup ihi 5 seni To save an existing application file e Click the Save File tool on the tool bar e Or choose Save from the File menu 1 CAABSPBIWINSGS SOME 2485 PBA 2 CNABSPBWINSGSSSCKY2RIO PBA 3 CABSPBWINSMS0K CBA 4 CABPBWINSGSSSMEY2RIOPBA PanelBuilder replaces the previous version of the application on disk with the new version A backup file is also created To save a new or existing application with a new name 1 Choose Save As from the File menu p gt The first time you save the application the default file name is the the first 8 characters of the application name 2 In the File Name box accept the default or enter another 1 to 8 character name PanelBuilder automatically adds the PBA file type to the name Note You can save the file with another file type Do not use PVA which is the translated file that runs in the terminal To save the file to another location select a folder To select another drive click a drive name in the Drives box 3 Click the OK button T
559. x in NT 4 0 32 MB is required 500K free conventional memory at least 40 MB available hard disk space VGA or other high resolution display supported by Windows Mouse or other Windows pointing device One of the following for downloading or uploading applications Personal Computer Interface Converter Catalog No 1747 PIC and cable Catalog No 1747 C10 C11 C20 for transferring applications between a computer and a DH 485 Panel View terminal Cable Catalog No 2711 NC13 NC14 2706 NC13 for transferring applications directly between a computer and the RS 232 DF1 port of a Panel View terminal ATA card drive or DataBook TMB240 TMB250 Windows 3 x or 95 only card drive for transferring applications to from a memory card Appropriate communications card and cables if transferring applications using Pass Through over a DH network Publication 2711 6 0 2 2 Installation Installing PanelBuilder Publication 2711 6 0 Optional Equipment e Graphic printer that s supported by Windows e Power Supply Catalog No 1747 NP1 for desktop transfers between a personal computer and a DH 485 Panel View terminal Provides power to Personal Computer Interface Converter when terminal isn t connected to controller The PanelBuilder installation installs e PanelBuilder Software e AB Utilities Software e INTERCHANGE or RSLinx Lite Software INTERCHANGE or RSLinx Lite Software To download applications to a
560. xt to the Tool Bar command when it s active To turn the tool bar off choose the command again Status Bar The status bar appears at the bottom of the PanelBuilder window and indicates what PanelBuilder is doing at the moment When placing mse Bat and selecting objects the right element of the status bar shows the Toolbox object type 15A Symbols Color Palette Obiect ID 734 x 64 y 16 width 32 height 32 Momentan Push Buton Alarm Banner Position Keypad Full Size Zoom In To toggle the status bar on or off Zoom Out Choose Status Bar from the View menu A check mark appears next to the Status Bar command when it s active To turn the status bar off choose the command again Publication 2711 6 0 5 6 PanelBuilder Basics Format Bar Publication 2711 6 0 The format bar appears near the top of the PanelBuilder window and provides easy access to commonly used formatting commands Format tools change the appearance of objects and text Most format tools toggle on and off Click the tool once to turn it on click it again to turn it off The same settings are accessed from the Format menu The format bar has different views depending on what mode you re in Each view is shown below s om x X o S Sd S o o we X A F K as lt Sak KR SO XS SONA cata wg HA cel Format Bar in Object Mode g KO EO S we X S sa x S ROS LS Roe S SL aA KOS Ry VN S co QUO ow Sr XS CEP VEY HY SLO
561. y exists in the application See Chapter 18 for details New Text ID Change the message number associated with the text for the current row to the next available number Publication 2711 6 0 7 18 Working with Objects Entering a Description You can enter a description for an object from the Options tab of the for an Object Object s dialog Descriptions can be entered for all objects except graphics The description appears in the application report To enter a description for an object 1 Click the Options tab from the dialog of the selected object Pret Beato Pertes sais Opens Insertion Point I Beam Pointer I Tun bbp Yor fin T Bak hm Gibal Jaiton Hass Spenial bey cambiaia ane adaba on ihe CNL MIDS Bos anra ine CIML C ia zepa CTAL hom panim CUAL fom cul The insertion point appears at the beginning of the Description box You can move the insertion point by moving the I beam pointer or using the arrow keys When using the scroll bar the insertion point remains where it is until you move it 2 Enter text in the Description box The text automatically wraps To start a new line press CTRL ENTER Use standard Window editing and cursor functions to edit text 3 When done click the OK button Publication 2711 6 0 Hiding an Object Working with Objects 7 19 You can hide the view of an object to reduce the number of objects on a screen Only input objects assigned to a function k
562. y Card To run the application on the PanelView terminal the font file must reside on a memory card loaded in the terminal To copy a font file to an ATA flash card Catalog No 2711 NM22 NM24 NM26 e In FontTool choose Save to Memory Card from File menu e In PanelBuilder choose Copy Font File from File menu e Inthe Application File Transfer Utility download an OTF file to a DOS memory card Click the Setup button to enter a COPY command for example copy ab pbwin font china_s otf m where the file china_s otf is copied to memory card drive m e In DOS use the COPY command as shown above To save a font file to a flash memory card Catalog No 2711 NM11 NM12 NM13 NM14 e Inthe Application File Transfer Utility you can download a specific OTF file to a DOS memory card Click the Setup button to enter the appropriate command string to download the file See page 23 17 for details on the command string e In DOS use the appropriate command string to copy the file to a memory card See page 23 17 for details on the command string Step 5 Download and Run the Application To run a PanelBuilder application using a font file e download the PanelBuilder application to a Panel View terminal e insert the memory card containing the font file in the card slot on the Panel View terminal e use the memory card retainer Catalog No 2711 NMCC NMCD to prevent accidental removal of the card from card slot
563. y intensity 900C range is 50 100 Read_ScrnCond_Hour Unsigned Integer 0 to 23 Not used Read_ScrnCond_Min Unsigned Integer 0 to 59 Not used Read_ScrnCond_Mode Unsigned Integer 0 tol Not used Read_ScrnSave_Intensity Unsigned Integer 0 to 100 Percent of display intensity Read_ScrnSave Mode Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 0ff 1 On 2 Timed Read_ScrnSave Time Unsigned Integer 1 to 1800 Screen save timeout in seconds Read_TermOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal CPU has been running PV1400 Tags Tag Name Data Type Value Range Description Read_DisplayOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal display has been running Read_LCDintensity Unsigned Integer 25 to 100 Percent of display intensity Read_Degauss Hour Unsigned Integer 0 to 23 Combined with Read_Degauss Min to de termine time of day to start conditioner Read_Degauss Min Unsigned Integer 0 to 59 Combined with Read_Degauss_Hour to de termine the time of day to start conditioner Read_Degauss Mode Unsigned Integer Otol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read_ScrnSave_Intensity Unsigned Integer 0 to 100 Percent of display intensity Read_ScrnSave Mode Unsigned Integer 0 to2 0 0ff 1 On 2 Timed Read_ScrnSave_ Time Unsigned Integer 1 to 1800 Screen save timeout in seconds Read_TermOnTime Unsigned Integer 0 to 65535 Minutes the terminal CPU has been running Publication 2711 6 0 Internal Read Only Tags G 3
564. ze text and use different types of emphasis such as underlining blinking or toggling the foreground background colors Text is entered using the same technique that s used for objects that contain inner text To create background text A 1 Click the Text tool in the toolbox Or choose Text from the Objects Graphics submenu 2 Position the pointer and click the left mouse button to place the default text block size Or drag the pointer to size the text block The text object is selected and you are placed in inner text mode 3 Enter text in the Text box As you enter text it s also entered in the block If word wrap is on text wraps at the beginning of a word not in the middle Word Wrap is set from the Format menu An asterisk appears if the text exceeds the object size Publication 2711 6 0 7 Adding Graphics 16 9 To delete text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then press BACKSPACE or DELETE To replace text drag the pointer over the text to highlight it then type the new text To add text position the cursor where you want to insert text and then type the new text Press ENTER to start a new line This character is inserted to indicate a new line To create another text block repeat steps 2 and 3 Click the right mouse button to exit text mode Or click the selection tool in the toolbox When done click the Inner Text tool to exit inner text mode Wh

2711-6.0, PanelBuilder Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents